5.3
Copyright © 2007-2010 Nuxeo SA
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2; with
Invariant Section “Commercial Support”, no Front-Cover Texts, and no
Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is available at the URL:
http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/fdl.html
Table of Contents
indexableDocType extension pointresource extension pointNuxeo EP is a comprehensive open source Enterprise Content Management (ECM) platform. It has been designed to be robust, scalable and highly extensible, by using modern open source Java EE technologies, such as JSF, EJB3, JBoss Seam, OSGi, and a Service Oriented Approach. It can be used to develop both web-based server applications and Rich Client applications.
Nuxeo EP provides services that currently cover the following functions of the ECM spectrum:
Document management
Collaborative Work
Business process management (workflow)
Compliance
Records management
Digital asset management (DAM)
Thanks to the modular and service oriented nature of Nuxeo EP, it is easy to create specialized applications, vertical or horizontal. Examples of applications that have been successfully created and used include applications for:
Document management
Digital assets management (DAM)
Case management
Correspondence management
News management systems for press agencies
Museum collections management
Etc.
The primary focus of this book it the presentation of Nuxeo EP, from the perspective of its configuration and its architecture.
This book is not an end-user manual for Nuxeo DM or other applications based on the Nuxeo
EP platform. If you are interested
in such a document, we recommend that you get it from http://www.nuxeo.org/.
This book is not a tutorial either. There is also a tutorial on
http://www.nuxeo.org/.
As a reference book for the Nuxeo platform, this book has several intended audiences:
System integrators, who need to understand how to configure and adapt the Nuxeo platform to their customers needs.
Third-party application developers, who will typically need both to customize the behavior of some components and to write new components to extend the functionalities of the platform.
System administrators, who need to understand how to configure the platform for the specific needs of their hosting environment.
Core developers, who work on the platform and need a reference documentation.
We fully understand that these different people with different concerns, and we plan to create, thanks to the modular structure of this document, more targeted books for these different people.
Readers of this book are presumed familiar with the Java 5 language and with the Java EE and XML technologies.
Founded in 2000, Nuxeo SA is part of the "second wave" of open source companies, and focuses on developing and supporting applications, instead of system software or development tools.
By entering the ECM field early in 2002, Nuxeo has established itself as the leader of open source ECM, with customers for critical projects in the Government, Energy and Finance sectors. Nuxeo currently has 50 employees, about half of them developers.
Nuxeo has customers and partners in Europe, in Northern and Southern America, in the Middle East and in Africa.
This chapter will give you an overview of ECM and the motivation for using the Nuxeo platform in your next ECM project.
According to the AIIM, the Association for Information and Image Management, ECM is defined as "the technologies used to capture, manage, store, preserve, and deliver content and documents related to organizational processes".
A March 2005 white paper on “The Hidden Costs of Information Work” by the IDC in the United States found that the average office employee spent approximately one day per week organizing and filing documents that they used. This can equate to a considerable amount of cost and inefficiency. A further twelve hours was spent on managing document approval, managing document routing and publishing to other channels. Nine hours was spent searching for documents.
Nuxeo EP 5 is the 5th version of the open source platforms developed by Nuxeo (the four previous ones where known as "CPS").
Nuxeo EP or "Enterprise Platform" is the server part of Nuxeo EP 5. It is a Java EE application intended to run in a standard Java EE 5 application server like JBoss. It can be accessed by end users from a web browser, from office productivity suites like MS-Office or OpenOffice.org, or from rich client developed using the Nuxeo RCP technology (see below).
Nuxeo RCP or "Rich Client Platform" is a platform for building rich client applications, that usually connect to a Nuxeo EP server.
Nuxeo EP and Nuxeo RCP run on top of a common runtime, "Nuxeo Runtime", and share a common set of core components, called "Nuxeo Core".
In this chapter we will show you how to develop with Nuxeo EP. It is recommended that you first read the 'Learning Nuxeo EP5 Guide' before reading this chapter. It will also provide you with a good introduction to developing with Nuxeo EP and give you a better understanding of the additional examples provided by the sample project which are discussed here.
You can think of your development task as using an IDE (such as Eclipse) to create a jar file from your source code, that can then be deployed (ie. copied) to the nuxeo server's 'plugin' directory. This new plugin (jar file) which you will create, adds functionality to the basic 'out of the box' Nuxeo EP Server that you will also download and setup. Here is a diagram that tries to show in simple terms what we would like to do:

It also explains simply what Nuxeo is. The nuxeo server is essentially an application (nuxeo.ear) that runs inside a JBOSS container. It contains an embedded H2 database that acts as the default document repository. The user interface to nuxeo is provided by a web browser or a rich client.
If you encounter any problems don't forget you can share your experience on the ecm mailing list .
We assume from now on that you have the following ready-to-use environment set up on your computer:
Java Development Kit (JDK) 1.5.x or JDK 1.6.x (Sun's JDK, OpenJDK is not yet supported)
Eclipse 3.5 (aka galileo) (J2EE edition)
A Nuxeo EP installation from the last release (download the
installation wizard). You can also download a nightly build
installer from http://www.nuxeo.org/static/snapshots/
, but keep in mind that this one may be broken, so
don't erase your working setup with a nightly build: the result is
not guaranteed.
Maven (for setting up eclipse and builds)
Mercurial (for checking out the source controlled version(s) of sample project used throughout this chapter)
A "unix-type" shell: if you are running windows, you can install cygwin
Note: The Nuxeo EP installer also installs and sets up the right version of JBoss on your computer, so you don't need to install it on your own.
For detailed instructions on how to set up all of this software, there is a good guide in Chapter 2 of the 'Learning Nuxeo EP5 Guide'.
We will check out our sample project's source code from a remote repository using Mercurial and then import this source into Eclipse. We will use Eclipse as a development tool only here. The resulting artifact (Nuxeo projects are well described as maven artifacts - which can be thought of as just the output of a given project, for eg. a jar, a war, and ear file etc), will be built from the source we create in Eclipse, via the command line using Maven.
It is possible to configure Eclipse to use plugins that will let you run both Maven and Mercurial from within eclipse. You can set up your Eclipse to do so if you prefer, however in this chapter we will describe how to use these tools from the command line. If you prefer to use the plugins you can download them from:
Nuxeo provides you a sample project that teaches you the main components used by Nuxeo EP by introducing the 'Book' document type, which equates to a book you'd buy in a bookstore or borrow from a library (complete with ISBN number). By following this chapter, you will learn how to:
declare the book document type;
display book documents;
regulate book document states;
make book documents indexable and searchable;
enable drag and drop book creation mode;
handle book document creation events.
Before we start you may want to set the following in your .bashrc file in your home directory:
export MAVEN_OPTS="-Xmx512M -XX:MaxPermSize=512M"
It sets the amount of memory available to Maven when it is doing its stuff and will help you avoid "out of memory" errors.
Create a directory called 'workspace' in your home home directory. Change into this directory and check the sample project out of the remote repository ( http://hg.nuxeo.org/addons/nuxeo-sample-project/) by running mercurial from the command line:
$ mkdir ~/workspace
$ cd ~/workspace
$ hg clone http://hg.nuxeo.org/addons/nuxeo-sample-project/
This will create a directory in your home directory called ~/workspace/nuxeo-sample-project which contains the source code used for this lesson. There are 2 branches in the mercurial repository: 5.1 and 5.2. The 5.1 branch source has been tested against the Nuxeo 5.1.6 server, whilst the 5.2 branch has been tested against the Nuxeo 5.2.0 server.
To see what branch you are using, type "hg branches". To switch between branches you can type "hg update branchName". Eg:
$ hg update 5.1
The accompanying version of JBOSS used with the 5.1 Nuxeo server is jboss 4.0.5 and with the 5.2 Nuxeo server is 4.2.3.
From the workspace directory, run the command:
$ mvn -Declipse.workspace=. eclipse:configure-workspace
This command will initialise your Eclipse workspace for you, which basically means it tells Eclipse where to find your local Maven repository by setting a variable called M2_REPO in the file: ~/workspace/.metadata/.plugins/org.eclipse.core.runtime/.settings/org.eclipse.jdt.core.prefs .Your local Maven repository (which is usually in ~/.m2/repository) will hold all the jar files that our sample project depends on. You will only need to run the Maven 'configure-workspace' command (listed above) once. If you create projects in addition to the sample project later on, they can all use this same workspace (and hence the same local maven repository).
Next, Maven will help us set up the sample project so that it can be readily imported into eclipse. Change into your sample project directory and run the Maven commands:
$ cd ~/workspace/nuxeo-sample-project
$ mvn eclipse:clean
$ mvn eclipse:eclipse
The 'eclipse:clean' command will clean any previous eclipse setup of your sample project (ie. cleans up all the eclipse related files so that you can start again).
The 'eclipse:eclipse' command will set up eclipse related files for your project and also download any dependencies that your project needs to compile, based on the sample project's (Maven) pom.xml file. It will store these dependencies in your local Maven repository (defined by the M2_REPO variable we described above). So the first time you run this command, it may take a while. Now when you import your project into eclipse, it should have everything it needs to compile the source.
Now that your workspace, Eclipse project files, and all the dependencies have been prepared, you can import the sample project into eclipse. Start Eclipse and select File>Import-General-Existing Projects into Workspace, click next and set the root of the workspace as: ~/workspace/nuxeo-sample-project. Hopefully it will be imported with no errors.
Our sample project has some JUnit test classes defined that enables you to run tests from within Eclipse. Expand the src/test/java branch to reveal the classes under the org.nuxeo.ecm.sample tree:
TestBookLifeCycle
TestBookTitleService
TestBookType
TestRepository
You can right click on these classes and select: Run As>JUnit Test.
The sample project code contains all the source in a working format that is ready to be built into a jar. Normally, you'd be creating these changes yourself. However, this has already been done for you in the sample project (we will explain what it all means in the sections that follow).
So now we are ready to create a jar file from our source code. To do this run the following Maven command from your ~/workspace/nuxeo-sample-project directory:
$ mvn clean install
If all goes well you should see the "BUILD SUCCESSFUL" message and a new jar file created in the ~/workspace/nuxeo-sample-project/target subdirectory called something like: nuxeo-project-sample-5.1.6-SNAPSHOT.jar
Now that we have created the jar file, deploying it to the nuxeo server is simply a matter of copying it to the 'plugins' directory. Assuming that the nuxeo server is located in the ~/nuxeo directory, then copy the jar as follows:
$ cp ~/workspace/nuxeo-sample-project/nuxeo-project-sample-5.1.6-SNAPSHOT.jar /nuxeo/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/plugins
We can now start the nuxeo server. After it has started, we will open up a web browser to see what our sample project has produced ((Section 3.5.10, “Viewing your changes via the UI” ).
There are 2 ways to run the nuxeo server:
To start the nuxeo server from the command line (assuming it is installed in ~/nuxeo):
$ cd ~/nuxeo
$ bin/run.sh
Note: you can shutdown the server from the command line by entering ^C (control-C) or by running the script "~/nuxeo/bin/shutdown.sh -S" from another shell session.
You can also set up an instance of the nuxeo server to run within Eclipse. You do this by pointing your eclipse server to the installation of the nuxeo server on your filesystem. Defining a server configuration for the Nuxeo runtime within eclipse enables you to start and stop Nuxeo directly from within eclipse.
This can be achieved by launching the new server wizard from the servers tab (make sure you are in the J2EE view in Eclipse): Right click inside the server pane, and select New>Server. You should select a Jboss v4.0 server type, click 'Next' and provide the Nuxeo EP home directory as server home (eg. ~/nuxeo) on the next screen. Select the defaults for the remainder and then click 'Finish'.
Now double click your server so you can see the server configuration we just created. We need to change the default timeout value on the server startup, because it is likely that starting the nuxeo server will exceed the default value. You should configure a starting timeout value suitable for your computer.
Expand the 'Timeouts' section and change the default to 300 seconds for example. Don't forget to save your changes.
You may also want to click the 'open launch configuration' link in the server settings view. On the arguments tab you can change the amount of memory available to the VM to avoid PermGen out of memory errors:
-XX:MaxPermSize=512M
Now right click on the server and select 'Start' to start the server from within eclipse.
You can look at your server logs to look for any errors which may occur on server startup in the following directory:
~/nuxeo/server/default/log/server.log
For example: One common error is when an instance of the server has failed to stop correctly and you try to start the server again, you will get an error like:
Port 8083 already in use
In this case you will have to kill the java process from the command line before re-starting the server:
[nuxeo ~/nuxeo] ps aux | grep java nuxeo 9919 2.4 10.5 777428 297292 ? Sl 15:44 3:37 /usr/lib/jvm/java-6-sun-1.6.0.16/bin/java -Dprogram.name=run.bat -Djava.endorsed.dirs=/home/nuxeo/nuxeo/bin/../lib/endorsed -Xms128m -Xmx512m -Dfile.encoding=UTF-8 -classpath /home/nuxeo/nuxeo/bin/run.jar org.jboss.Main -c default [nuxeo ~/nuxeo] kill -9 9919
Now that your server is running, open up your web browser and go to the url:
http://localhost:8080/nuxeo/
Log in nuxeo with Administrator/Administrator.
In order to see what results our new jar plugin for the 'Book' document type has produced, we first need to create a Workspace (Note: A Nuxeo workspace is different from an Eclipse workspace. To understand more about the basic Nuxeo EP user concepts, see the Nuxeo User Guide). Once you have logged in, click on 'Workspaces' and select 'Create New Workspace'. Give it a title and click 'Create'.
Now click on the workspace you have created, and select 'New Document'. The list of available document types should now contain 'Book' as one of its types. Select 'Book', and Enter a title, description and ISBN, and upload a file if you want. Click 'create'.
Congratulations, you have successfully created a new Book type ! You should now see this in your Nuxeo workspace.
Although we said above that we would use Eclipse purely for development, the sample project does come with a build.xml file that can be conveniently used within the default installation of eclipse to perform the functions of building and deploying the jar file. We have already accomplished these two tasks using Maven for the build, and a unix cp for the deploy, however we will show you how this can also be automated from within eclipse using Ant.
In order to take advantage of our Ant build.xml file, we first need to tell Ant where to find our server. We will do this by creating a build.properties file which will be used by Ant to find it. The sample project comes with a file called 'build.properties.sample' in the ~/workspace/nuxeo-sample-project root directory. We will copy this file an rename it to 'build.properties' in the same directory:
$ cp build.properties.sample
build.properties
Now edit the file and change the line which contains the
property: jboss.dir
to point to your jboss path. Note that
when using the Nuxeo EP installer, the JBOSS home directory is the
same as the Nuxeo EP home directory. You should use
an absolute path for safety. For example if your home is
/home/nuxeo
and your server is installed in ~/nuxeo:
jboss.dir=/home/nuxeo/nuxeo
Now within eclipse, select 'build.xml' in the left hand pane, then right click it and choose:
Run>External Tools>External Tools Configuration.
In the pop up window, right click on 'Ant Build' in the left hand pane, then select 'New'. This should result in the nuxeo-project-sample build.xml task appearing in the configuration. If you click on the 'Targets' tab you'll see all the tasks defined ('deploy' should be the default, which includes a 'build and copy to jboss' description). We are going to copy this configuration to make a new configuration that lets us just run the copy task which will copy our built jar file (which we've already built using Maven) into the nuxeo server plugins directory (ie. this will automate our 'deploy' which we carried out manually above by using the unix cp command).
Right click on nuxeo-project-sample build.xml in the left hand pane and choose 'Duplicate'. In the "Name" field type "nuxeo-project-sample build.xml copy jar file to plugins directory" and in the "Arguments" field, type "copy". Click 'Apply':

Now when you right click on build.xml and choose Run As> External tools configuration and select your new 'copy' configuration to Run (click the 'Run' Button), you should see the following output in your eclipse console:
Buildfile: ~/workspace/nuxeo-sample-project/build.xml
copy:
[copy] Copying 1 file to ~/nuxeo/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/plugins
BUILD SUCCESSFUL
Total time: 204 milliseconds
When developing, you will also find it useful not to have
to restart jboss when performing changes in xhtml
pages. Since releases 5.1.5 and 5.2-M2, you can add the line
facelets.REFRESH_PERIOD=2 to the
nuxeo.properties file in the
nuxeo.ear/config folder in your server
installation (eg. ~/nuxeo/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/config):
pages will be
refreshed within 2 seconds.
For hot deploying web sample resources in this same manner
from within Eclipse, you should
create a new Ant configuration like we did above for
the 'copy' configuration, but use the
ant
target 'web' as the argument to your
ant task.
We can distinguish between 2 types of changes in the section that follow:
Configuration-only changes
Configuration plus Java Code changes
Sometimes enhancing Nuxeo simply requires some configuration file changes or additions. In other words, you can do a lot with Nuxeo by simply changing or adding some configuration. This is one of the nice things about it. However there are other times we will also need to do a bit more work and add some Java Code to make some enhancements.
It's just nice to know this from the outset.
Here is the project source layout:
nuxeo-project-sample `-- src |-- main | |-- java| | `-- org | | `-- nuxeo | | `-- project | | `-- sample | `-- resources | |-- META-INF -- MANIFEST.MF
| |-- OSGI-INF
| | `-- l10n | |-- directories | |-- nuxeo.war
| | |-- icons | | |-- img | | `-- incl | | `-- tabs | |-- schemas | |-- themes | '-- workflows | `-- test
|-- java | `-- org | `-- nuxeo | `-- ecm | `-- sample `-- resources `-- META-INF `-- OSGI-INF
|
The main entry point is the |
|
Component definition (xml config) files are by
convention located in
the NoteThe sample project makes an architectural choice to keep multiple xml configuration files rather than having all our configuration in a single xml file. We have chosen to group together like functions (for eg. "UI configuration, "Document type configuration") into separate xml config files. We could have chosen to put these all together in a single file. It's an architectural choice for the user in the end.
|
|
The extension points (configured in our xml files)
may reference one or more of the sample project's
specific classes.
They are all defined in the
|
|
Any dedicated web templates or resources (such as
icons etc) that our sample project needs to use,
are defined in the
|
|
Starting and stopping the Nuxeo EP server
for testing the
features our sample project implements is
time consuming. JUnit test classes can be found in the
|
In much of what follows we will be talking about extension points. A good discussion of extension points is to be found in the Learning Nuxeo EP5 Guide. But it might help to just briefly qualify what we mean here when we talk about 'extension points'.
An 'extension point' can be thought of as a point in a class where it asks for information (we also say that the class 'exposes' extension point) which will allow it then to perform some function. In a sense, the class that is exposing the extension point is a helper class that allows us to add new functionality just by giving it some extra information.
A 'contribution' to an extension point is the information that is provided to that class' extension point, that then enables the class to do its work. Contributions are usually provided by us in an xml configuration file when we want to get a Nuxeo class that exposes an extension point to do something for us with the information we give it. Below is a diagram that may help you visualize extension points:

A Bundle is equivalent to a java package like "org.nuxeo.sample" and a Component which exposes an extension point is like a Java Class (eg. "BookTitleService") or one which contributes to an extension point is like an xml file "booktitle-contrib.xml" which defines the contribution. The best way to understand this is to actually see an extension point in action. If you cant wait you can skip ahead to Section 3.6.8, “Enabling drag&drop creation (plus creating our own extension points)” in which we show how to create a class with its own extension point exposed, and then how to use it (provide a contribution to it). In any case, in every example that follows, we will be providing contributions to existing nuxeo class' exposed extension points to get them to do things for us.
So away we go. To start with, we would like to declare a new Document type which represents a book (a book you can buy in a bookshop, a library book etc), that you can select and manage via our 'New Document' button on our UI:

When you click the 'New Document' button you should see our new 'Book' document type:

This new document type wasn't there before (ie. it doesn't appear in the default out-of-the-box Nuxeo installation). Our sample project created it. We can split the task of creating our new 'Book' type into 2 parts:
Declaring the 'Book' type and creating the schema for this type
Displaying it on the UI
In this section we will describe how to declare it and define the schema for it. In the next, we will show how to display it on the UI. A good reference document for this section, is chapter 5 of the Nuxeo Book: Schemas and Documents.
Declaring the book type and creating its schema, requires only configuration changes (ie. no Java code). The changes we will need to make are:
Create our book schema (book.xsd file)
Declare our new 'Book' type in core-types-contrib.xml
Tell the container/Nuxeo runtime how to find it (MANIFEST.MF)
We want our 'Book' to be composed of four
fields isbn,
rating, publicationDate and
literals. This is the schema which defines our
'Book' type. We will declare this schema in a file called
src/main/resources/books.xsd.
Here is a snippet from it:
... <xs:element name="isbn" type="xs:string"/> <xs:element name="rating" type="xs:int"/> <xs:element name="publicationDate" type="xs:date"/> <xs:element name="keywords" type="bk:stringArray"/> ...
We should note however, that a Document in Nuxeo is generally a composite of many schemas. If you look at the full source of the 'doctype' extension point contribution in the core-types-contrib.xml file of the next section, you'll see that the book.xsd schema we defined above, is simply one of many schemas that contribute to making up our new 'Book' document type. But we don't need to define fields like 'Title' or 'Author' in our schema, because these fields are considered standard fields that have been already well defined in already existing schemas that are available to us like the dublincore schema.
Next we will create a file called src/main/resources/OSGI-INF/core-types-contrib.xml which will declare our new 'Book' type and then link it to the schema which we have just created for it. But more importantly, this core-types-contrib.xml file provides an 'extension point contribution' to the Nuxeo org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.TypeService. This core Nuxeo class (TypeService) exposes a number of extension points which is like the Nuxeo class saying "You can add new customized functionality at this point, by providing this Nuxeo class with the information it needs to add this functionality in for you". For example the TypeService class exposes the following extension points, for which we can provide contributions:
org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.TypeService |-- doctype (declare a new Document Type) |-- schema (declare your new Document Type's schema) |-- type (show your new Document Type on the UI) |-- ... |-- etc |-- ...
Contributions to the doctype and schema extension points, only require the addition of the configuration files we are defining here (core-types-contrib.xml and book.xsd). Once defined, the TypeService class knows how to use them to create our new 'Book' type in Nuxeo. All we have to worry about is giving the TypeService the information it needs.
Here is the corresponding XML snipset extracted from the core-types-contrib.xml file
...
<!-- Declare our schema and give it a name -->
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.TypeService"
point="schema">
<schema name="book" src="schemas/book.xsd" prefix="bk">
</extension>
...
<!-- Declare our new Book type and tell it to use
our new book schema -->
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.TypeService"
point="doctype">
<doctype name="Book" extends="Document">
...
<schema name="book" >
...
</doctype>
</extension>
...
How do we know what information the TypeService needs ? Fortunately all this is documented here: Extension Points Documentation (5.1) and here: Extension Points Documentation (5.2) . For example if you click on the org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.TypeService link, you will see all the extension points that it exposes, and how to configure these in your xml.
Adding a reference to our core-types-contrib.xml to our manifest tells the container and nuxeo where to find our changes to add a new 'Book' document type. Here is the relevant snippet:
....
Nuxeo-Component: OSGI-INF/core-types-contrib.xml,
....
So far we have declared the 'Book' type and schema, but all that means is that Nuxeo knows about it. As it stands, the user wont be able to see our new 'Book' type unless we explicitly add it to the UI (That's where the next section comes in). However we can still test what we have done, and in fact it is important to do so. We do this by writing some junit tests.
There are differences in the way Nuxeo version 5.1 and 5.2 handles new Document types, based on the fact that changes were made in the repository between the 2 versions.
The TestBookType.java test inherits from RepositoryOSGITestCase in 5.1 and SQLRepositoryTestCase in 5.2, which both inherit from NXRuntimeTestCase which in turn eventually inherits from JUnitTestCase.
junit.framework.TestCase
|-- ....
|--NXRuntimeTestCase
|--RepositoryOSGITestCase (5.1)
|--SQLRepositoryTestCase (5.2)
The NXRuntimeTestCase is the "raw" testcase which does a lot of OSGI related test setup, and is primarily concerned with the startup and shutdown of the nuxeo runtime in our tests. The RepositoryOSGITestCase is used for 5.1, as it handles the JCR implementation of the repository, whereas the SQLRepositoryTestCase is used for 5.2 as it handles the VCS implementation of the repository (See Nuxeo Book chapter xxxx)
The test for our declaration of the new 'Book' type and its associated schema, is inside the testBookCreation() method within TestBookType.java, which has inline documentation to explain what each step does.
A useful thing to know is that the RepositoryOSGITestCase methods:
coreSession.saveDocument(DocumentModel): saves our Book document to the session in memory
coreSession.save(): saves all the session changes to the repository on disk
The session can be thought of as a series of changes that are written to it. Each change written to a session (like the coreSession.saveDocument() one) is very cheap because it is done in memory. At the end, calling the coreSession.save() writes all these changes to disk in one hit, which again helps with performance.
In this section we want to get our new Book document type to appear on the UI. Again, this involves only configuration changes (ie. no java coding is necessary). We will end up adding or changing the following files:
ui-contrib.xml
book.png
layout-contrib.xml
deployment_fragment.xml
MANIFEST.MF
Books are displayed on the screen using a specific
icon and label. You can see in second figure in the
Section 3.6.4.1, “Objective”
above, the little
16x16 image of a book, followed by the label "Book".
This is achieved by providing an extension point contribution
to the TypeService's exposed extension point called "type"
which is responsible for displaying both of these on the UI
(see section
Section 3.6.4.4, “core-types-contrib.xml” above for the
listing of exposed extension points of TypeService). Note
however, that instead of adding our contribution to the
core-types-contrib.xml file as we did when we were declaring
our Book document type, we will instead add this contribution
to the ui-types-contrib.xml file. This is so that all the
contributions to do with UI changes can be grouped together
separately. Here is the corresponding XML snipset extracted
from the ui-types-contrib.xml file
... <extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.TypeService" point="type"> ... <type id="Book" coretype="Book"> ... <label>Book</label> <icon>/icons/book.png</icon> ... </type> ... </extension> ...
The attribute id="Book" must match the "doctype name" declared in the core-types-contrib.xml declared above. The coretype="Book" attribute is now optional in 5.2, but if it is present, its value must match the id attribute's value.
Test it: if you want to see the effect of the <label> value on the UI, change it from 'Book' to something else and redeploy and restart your server (ie. run a $ mvn clean install to rebuild your jar file and then copy it into the plugins directory and restart your server).
Also, we need to put our little 16x16 icon "book.png" in the src/main/resources/nuxeo/icons directory for it to be deployed correctly to the server (where it will ultimately end up in the ~/nuxeo/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/nuxeo.war/icons directory).
In order to ensure that it does indeed end up there, we need to make sure we have the following line in the OSGI_INF/deployment_fragment.xml file:
<!-- Unzip the war template -->
<unzip from="${bundle.fileName}" to="/">
<include>nuxeo.war/**</include>
</unzip>
Adding a reference to our ui-contrib.xml to our manifest tells the container and nuxeo where to find our new additions. Here is the relevant snippet:
....
Nuxeo-Component: OSGI-INF/core-types-contrib.xml,
....
OSGI-INF/ui-contrib.xml,
....
Note that the order of these components matters, because our ui-contrib.xml depends on the core-types-contrib.xml.
Remember above ( Section 3.5.10.2, “Viewing your changes”)
we had to create a new Nuxeo Workspace in which to
create our new Book document. The rules that determine
where we can display
our new Book document on the UI are actually defined in our
ui-types-contrib.xml file as well.
We will make a rule that Book documents can be displayed under
Nuxeo folders or workspaces.
These containment rules are declared to the exposed extension
point called "types" in the
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.types.TypeService
class. Note that this is a different "TypeService" class than
the one above (check the fully qualified path name !).
Documentation for the extension points exposed by this class
can be found here:
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.types.TypeService
We will define this extension point contribution in the
ui-types-contrib.xml file as well
because our contribution relates to UI changes.
Here is the XML snipset extracted from the
ui-types-contrib.xml that defines
them.
...
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.types.TypeService"
point="types">
...
<type id="Folder" coretype="Folder">
<subtypes>
<type>Book</type>
</subtypes>
</type>
<type id="Workspace" coretype="Workspace">
<subtypes>
<type>Book</type>
</subtypes>
</type>
...
</extension>
...Again, the "coretype" attribute must contain a value that relates to one of the Nuxeo Core Types or a Type that we have created ourselves like 'Book'.
Aside from displaying the little book icon and "Book" label on the screen where our Book types are accessible, we can now proceed to the more magnanimous task of defining how the UI for creating/editing or viewing a Book document looks like. For eg: Creating a new Book:

Viewing an existing Book:

We do this by defining the <layout> template(s) to use
in our
ui-contrib.xml file. This is an additional contribution to the
same "types" exposed extension point in the same
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.types.TypeService
class as above:
...
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.types.TypeService"
point="types">
...
<type id="Book" coretype="Book">
...
<layouts mode="any">
<layout>heading</layout>
<layout>book</layout>
<layout>file</layout>
</layouts>
...
</type>
...
</extension>
...
The "layouts" section defines what <layout> templates Nuxeo will use to display your Book document type on the UI. The individual <layout>s (which we will see in the next section) define what fields are shown and how they are shown. The snippet above shows that we are using 3 layouts which Nuxeo will combine in order from top to bottom on the screen. For example in the first picture in Section 3.6.5.5, “The Layout of our Book document UI” above, the "header" <layout> is responsible for displaying the fields in the top part of the UI. You will note that these include "Title" and "Description" fields which are part of the dublincore schema of our book. The "book" <layout>, displays our "ISBN" field from our book schema. Lastly the "file" <layout> displays the "Content" section where the user can choose to upload a file.
Test it: remove the two lines:
<layout>heading</layout> <layout>file</layout>
then rebuild your jar, redeploy to the plugins directory and restart your server.
We will define the "book" <layout> in the next section, but the "header" and "file" <layout>s come standard with Nuxeo.
In the section above we told Nuxeo that we
would define a <layout> called "book" which would describe
what Book fields we wanted to see on the UI. In this section
we will show you what that <layout> definition looks like.
We want the ISBN book field to be displayed onto
our UI when the user is creating a new book or editing or
viewing it content.
This is achieved by defining a layout in a new file we will
create called layouts-contrib.xml which
will group together all our layouts. Indeed, all we are doing
is contributing to the "layouts" extension point of the
WebLayoutManager
class. Each particular layout is defined inside this
extension point.
Here is the XML extracted from the
layouts-contrib.xml
file that registers our layout with the WebLayoutManager:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.project.sample.layouts">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.forms.layout.WebLayoutManager"
point="layouts">
<layout name="book">
<templates>
<template mode="any">/layouts/layout_default_template.xhtml</template>
</templates>
<rows>
<row>
<widget>isbn</widget>
</row>
</rows>
<widget name="isbn" type="text">
<labels>
<label mode="any">ISBN</label>
</labels>
<translated>false</translated>
<fields>
<field>bk:isbn</field>
</fields>
<widgetModes>
<mode value="create">edit</mode>
<mode value="any">view</mode>
</widgetModes>
</widget>
</layout>
</extension>
...
In a layout we define rows of widgets (elements that are seen on the UI). We have one row with the "isbn" widget.
Each widget definition (in our case we only have one widget - the isbn widget) is then provided in the <widget> section of our xml file. A widget definition contains:
A "type": (eg. "text") which defines how the widget is displayed on the UI (eg. a text entry box in edit mode or a text string in view mode).
The <labels> section defines what labels you would like to appear next to the widget. You can define a different label for each "mode". For eg. in 'edit' mode you could have 'Please enter an isbn number:' and in 'view' mode you could have 'ISBN number entered:'. In our case we have a "mode" of 'any' which means display the same label in all modes.
The "fields" section describes which fields in our schema to map the widget to. In our case we are mapping to our "book" schema's isbn field.
Lastly the "widgetMode" node tells us which modes our widget will appear in on our UI (in our case the 'edit' and 'view' modes).
Don't forget to add entries into your MANIFEST.MF file to reference the new files you have created:
....
Nuxeo-Component: OSGI-INF/core-types-contrib.xml,
OSGI-INF/ui-contrib.xml,
OSGI-INF/layouts-contrib.xml,
....
It is possible to install Selenium to test our new UI changes as it is difficult to write JUnit tests to do so. For now, we suggest just starting up the Nuxeo server and going in and verifying that your changes work by creating a new Book document and seeing if you can view it.
We can add tabs to the different views a user has in the Nuxeo UI and associate different behaviors with each tab.
In this section we will describe how to add 2 tabs:
A "Books" tab to the workspace view: When you click on a workspace, you will see a number of tabs. We will insert a "Books" tab that lets you do certain book associated tasks, like viewing all the books in the folder and searching for all books with a particular keyword (see: Section 3.6.7, “Making book documents indexable and searchable” ).
Searching on a keyword assumes these keywords have been setup somewhere and somehow. We will just assume this in this section. We show you how to set up the keywords in Section 3.6.11.5, “Directories and Vocabularies”

A "Book" tab to the book view: When you click on a book item that you have already created, you will also see another tab called 'Book' which allows you to edit some of the Book's properties and attach Keywords to the book (these are the keywords we can search on in the "Books" tab above).

It is the first time also that we will be using some Java code in addition to configuration changes/additions. The java code will help us implement some of the custom behavior we want. However we will not focus on this, as it is important to understand that you can do a lot with just the configuration changes that we will explain.
A good reference for this section is Section 7.1, “Introduction”
Our configuration happens in a file called
actions-contrib.xml.
In this file we provide a contribution to the extension points
called "actions" and "filters" on the
ActionService
class.
Here is the actions-contrib.xml file:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.project.sample.actions">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.actions.ActionService" point="actions">
<action id="tab_book_view"
link="/incl/tabs/book_view.xhtml" enabled="true"
label="Book" icon="/icons/file.gif" order="9">
<category>VIEW_ACTION_LIST</category>
<filter id="book_filter">
</filter>
</action>
<action id="tab_folder_books_list"
link="/incl/tabs/folder_books_view.xhtml" enabled="true"
label="Books" icon="/icons/file.gif" order="15">
<category>VIEW_ACTION_LIST</category>
<filter id="workspace_books_filter">
<rule grant="true">
<type>Folder</type>
<type>Workspace</type>
</rule>
</filter>
</action>
</extension>
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.actions.ActionService" point="filters">
<filter id="book_filter" append="true">
<rule grant="true">
<type>Book</type>
</rule>
</filter>
</extension>
</component>
The first thing to note are the 2 extension point contributions "actions" and "filters".
The "filters" extension point: is where you can add a "filter". Filters are generally are used to change the access rights to a tab. We name and create filters in this section when our filter is particularly complex (and we then want to separate it, define it, and call it by name from the "actions" extension point), or when we just want to re-use a particular filter, and therefore we can again reference it by its name.
Our example filter in actions-contrib.xml
called "book_filter", is saying that if a Document is a child
of the "Book" type, then grant access (visibility) to this tab.
This
example shows how filters can be used to manage access rights
to tabs. It is convenient, as the user does not have to
write Java code to deal with permissions.
The "actions" extension point: is used to configure what action to take when it is selected. The action id names the action. If you hover your mouse over the "Book" tab in the Book view (select a book that you have already created and then hover your mouse over the "Book" tab on the next screen), you'll see that the url contains the action id.
The "link" attribute identifies which action to call when your
tab is selected. The link here specifies a JSF page called
book_view.xhtml. We will describe this
JSF page in brief in a following section. For now, all we need
to know is that clicking the "Book" tab will request this
action. The "enabled" attribute is also important, because it
defines whether or not a tab will be visible to the user or not.
So we can turn the visibility of tabs on and off with this
attribute which is quite useful. The "label" is the text
that will appear on the tab, and the "icon" is the icon
associated with the tab.
The "category" node defines a pre-defined place on the page on which to display your tab. Common values are:
VIEW_ACTION_LIST: used for tabs
USER_SERVICES: used to display actions in the top right corner of every page
SUBVIEW_UPPER_LIST: used to display actions just below a document tabs listing
See Section 7.2.2.2, “Manage category to display an action at the right place” for more information.
The "filter" node is also important. You can define either an inline filter (as has been done with the "tab_folder_books_list" action), or you can just call a named filter (which is what the "tab_book_view" action does). The "filter" nodes define what filters to associated with this action. For the "tab_book_view" action, our filter allows the user access to the tab only if the document is a child of the Book type.
The actions-contrib.xml file above,
calls the book_view.xhtml and folder_books_view.xhtml jsf pages
as its actions.
(Note that tab's templates are
defined into the folder nuxeo.war/inc/tabs.)
Without going into detail, you can see from the
snippet below that the jsf looks a lot like html, but with the
use of jsf tags like <h:outputLabel value="keywords">
instead of html.
Note
also that these templates get their model using the
BookManagerBean which implements book behaviours.
You'll see that anything with the
"#{}" around it is a call to the
BookManager.java class.
In this section we saw how to add tabs with access permissions
and behaviors using contributions to the "actions" and "filters"
extension points on the
ActionService
class. Don't forget to add a line to your MANIFEST.MF to
include the actions-contrib.xml file.
The next section includes details of how the "Books" tab
page is used.
We want to allow our book to be searchable via the Nuxeo UI. There is a little 'search box' in the top left corner of our Nuxeo UI. You don't need to do anything specific to have this search, search any of your book documents.
However, in the section below, we will show how to do a customized search that you can set up 'programatically'. To do this we need to do 4 things:
Tell Nuxeo which fields from our Book schema to index. Indexing means that these fields can be searched when a user does a search. Note however, that this first step is only necessary in Nuxeo 5.1. In Nuxeo 5.2 you no longer have to tell Nuxeo which fields to index in your Document schema, because it will index all fields by default.
We also need to tell Nuxeo how to search. For example, should we search with 'Starts With' or 'Contains' and which fields should we search.
Then we need to tell Nuxeo what Java class will be doing the searching for us.
Finally we will need a page on the UI to show our search options and display our search results.
A good reference for this section is Section 11.1, “Introduction”.
Our first step is to tell Nuxeo which fields in our Book schema we want indexed. These indexed fields will be the ones that can be searched. This step is only necessary in Nuxeo 5.1. In 5.2, all fields from our Book schema will be searchable by default.
To tell Nuxeo which fields to index, we register an extension point contribution to the extension point called "indexableDocType" on the SearchServiceImpl class. We do this in a file called the search-contrib.xml file. Don't forget that we need a reference to this in our MANIFEST.MF as it is a new file. Here is the contents of the search-contrib.xml:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.project.sample.search">
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.search.service.SearchServiceImpl"
point="indexableDocType">
<indexableDocType indexAllSchemas="true" name="Book" />
</extension>
</component>
As you can see we are telling the SearchServiceImpl class to index all fields on all schemas that make up our Book document. So all fields of our book will be searchable.
Next we need to tell Nuxeo how we want to search. This is called our 'Query Model'. The query model lets us define our search in an 'SQL-like' way so that we can specify our search parameters. An example in pseudo-code might be:
"select all Book documents where the user's input string matches one of the book's keywords.".
To do this, we
register a 'Query Model' with the "model" extension
point of the
QueryModelService.
We can do this by creating a new file called
querymodel-contrib.xml
and specifying the search "pattern":
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.project.sample.querymodels">
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.search.api.client.querymodel.QueryModelService"
point="model">
<queryModel name="BOOK">
<pattern>
SELECT * FROM Document WHERE ecm:primaryType = 'Book' AND ecm:path STARTSWITH ? AND
bk:keywords = ?
</pattern>
<sortable value="true" defaultSortColumn="dc:title"
defaultSortAscending="true" />
</queryModel>
</extension>
</component>
The query language that we use in the "pattern" attribute is called NXQL and more documentation about it can be found here: Section 11.3.1, “Fields and literals” .
After we have setup our query model, we need to register the
Java Class that will be invoking this query model (and dealing
with the results of the query), with
the "model" extension point of the
ResultsProviderService.
Again we do this in a new file called:
resultsprovider-contrib.xml.
Here are the contents of that file:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.project.sample.resultsproviders">
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.webapp.pagination.ResultsProviderService"
point="model">
<resultsProvider name="BOOK" farm="bookResultsProviderFarm" />
</extension>
</component>
Notice that the "farm" attribute points to the src/main/java/BookResultsProvider.java class that we have written. This class will be the class that retrieves the query model we setup above and uses it to perform our customized search.
Finally having set up our search, we need a page to display the search options and show the results of our search on the UI. We do both these things on the same page: Books are both searched for, and listed, in the book's tab using the resultsProviderCache which we can access in the folder_books_view.xhtml JSF page we setup above: Section 3.6.6.2, “Configuration”
...
<nxu:methodResult name="provider"
value="#{resultsProvidersCache.get('BOOK')}">
<h:form>
<ui:decorate template="/pagination/pageNavigationControls.xhtml">
<ui:param name="provider" value="#{provider}" />
</ui:decorate>
</h:form>
<h:dataTable var="bookinfo" value="#{provider.currentPage}"
...
</h:dataTable>
...
The following screen shot shows the results of our handiwork:

Note: you can setup your books to appear in this screen like this by selecting a book that you have already created, going to the "Book" tab and entering in Keyword and Note for your book. Then clicking on a Keyword searches for all the books that contain that keyword if it was entered against them on the "Book" tab.
Nuxeo makes it easy to enable drag and drop so that dragging a file onto a workspace will automatically create a Book document. In this section we will show you how to enable drag and drop in Nuxeo.
You will need to install the nuxeo drag and drop plugins for Firefox or Internet Explorer for drag and drop to work. You can download these at:
As by-product of explaining how to enable drag and drop in Nuxeo in this section, we will see how to create our own Service and create an extension point on that service. So far we have been only providing contributions to existing extension points in services within Nuxeo. But this section gives us the opportunity to
Create our own service with its own exposed extension point
Provide a contribution to our own exposed extension point
But first, before we create our own service with its own
extension point, let us again begin by providing an
extension point contribution to an existing Nuxeo service.
By providing
an extension point contribution to the "plugins" extension
point on the
FileManagerService
class, we can have this class notify us when a drag and drop
event occurs.
We will put this contribution in the
filemanager-contrib.xml file:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.project.sample.filemanager">
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.filemanager.service.FileManagerService"
point="plugins">
<plugin name="book_plugin"
class="org.nuxeo.project.sample.BookFileManagerPlugin">
<filter>image/gif</filter>
<filter>image/jpeg</filter>
</plugin>
</extension>
</component>
The BookFileManagerPlugin has requested
that the FileManagerService call the
BookFileManagerPlugin class whenever
a gif or jpeg upload (drag and drop) occurs.
The notification takes the form of calling the
BookFileManagerPlugin's create() method.
Now we get to register our own service with its
very own extension point exposed.
This service is called by our
BookFileManagerPlugin
when it has been notified by the Nuxeo
FileManagerService
that a ".gif" or ".jpeg" has been dragged and dropped onto the UI.
The BookFileManagerPlugin
will use this Service to help it create a new Book document from
the uploaded file.
We will register the service
in the booktitle-service-contrib.xml file
as follows:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.project.sample.BookTitleService">
<implementation class="org.nuxeo.project.sample.BookTitleServiceImpl" />
<service>
<provide interface="org.nuxeo.project.sample.BookTitleService" />
</service>
<extension-point name="title">
<object class="org.nuxeo.project.sample.BookTitleDescriptor" />
</extension-point>
</component>
In creating this xml configuration, we are defining a new nuxeo
<component> called
org.nuxeo.project.sample.BookTitleService
which defines a new service called
BookTitleService whose
<implementation> class is the
org.nuxeo.project.sample.BookTitleServiceImpl
class.
Furthermore, we define an <extension> point on our component
called "title", which we will map to a java class called
BookTitleDescriptor.
Ok. Now when we define our extension point contribution,
which we will do in the booktitle-contrib.xml
file, the fields in this xml file should map to the annotations
in our BookTitleDescriptor. This is
essentially how you find out what information your
extension point requires:
| booktitle-contrib.xml | BookTitleDescriptor.java |
|---|---|
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.project.sample.booktitle">
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.project.sample.BookTitleService"
point="title">
<configuration>
<addInitialCapital>true</addInitialCapital>
<removeExtension>true</removeExtension>
<addComment>(automatic)</addComment>
</configuration>
</extension>
</component>
|
package org.nuxeo.project.sample;
import org.nuxeo.common.xmap.annotation.XNode;
import org.nuxeo.common.xmap.annotation.XObject;
@XObject("configuration")
public class BookTitleDescriptor {
@XNode("addInitialCapital")
protected boolean addInitialCap;
@XNode("addComment")
private String addComment;
public String getAddComment() {
return addComment;
}
private boolean remove;
@XNode("removeExtension")
protected void setRemoveExtension(boolean remove) {
this.remove = remove;
}
public boolean getRemoveExtension() {
return remove;
}
}
|
Table 3.1. Extension Point
So the flow of events when a ".gif" or ".jpeg" document is
dragged onto the Nuxeo UI is as follows:
The FileManagerService notifies the
BookFileManagerPlugin by calling its
create() method. To do its work of creating a new Book
document, the BookFileManagerPlugin
class calls the BookTitleService's
correctTitle(title) method, passing it the name of the
file that was uploaded. The BookTitleService
then retrieves the values provided by the "title" extension
point which are set in the booktitle-contrib.xml
file, and uses these to correct the title (ie. Change the first
letter to a capital, removes the file extension - eg. ".gif"),
and adds a comment, before creating a new Book document with
this title and saving it to the repository.
FileManagerService
|-- BookFileManagerPlugin.create()
|--BookTitleServiceImpl.correctTitle(title)
|-- BookTitleDescriptor (get values from booktitle-contrib.xml config)
|-- create the title base on the values
|-- create the new Book with this title in the repository
The Sample Project contains a class called
TestBookTitleService which tests whether
our new configuration and java changes for creating our new
BookTitleService service works.
If you look at the source code of the
BookFileManagerPlugin
in the 5.1 vs 5.2 branch, you will notice that in 5.1 it
extends AbstractPlugin whereas in 5.2
it extends AbstractFileImporter.
The AbstractPlugin is deprecated in
5.2.
The BookManager and BookMangerBean classes have import(s) changed from 5.1 to 5.2:
import org.jboss.seam.annotations.WebRemote; (5.1) import org.jboss.seam.annotations.remoting.WebRemote; (5.2)
and
import org.jboss.seam.core.FacesMessages; (5.1) import org.jboss.seam.faces.FacesMessages; (5.2)
As these have changed packages between the jboss versions used between 5.1 (4.0.5) and 5.2 (4.2.3).
The BookManager interface has been
changed to return a DocumentModelList instead of a ResultSet
public ResultSet getSearchResults() throws Exception; // (5.1) public DocumentModelList getSearchResults() throws Exception; //(5.2)
and the BookManagerBean which implements the
BookManager interface, has had its
code updated accordingly, and also been made Serializable.
The reason is that SearchService is not used anymore. Now queries
are executed with the method
query() from the CoreSession, and this new method returns
a DocumentModelList instead of a ResultSet.
The BookResultsProviderFarm has also been made Serializable in 5.2, and had its call to getResultsProvider() updated.
We want to make Books be regulated by the
standard life cycle
( project, approved,
obsolete, deleted states).
As defined in the
Chapter 4 of the Nuxeo User's Guide
"The evolution of a document, each time contributors edit it,
constitutes its life cycle ... To change the life cycle state
of a document, you need to submit it to a workflow.".
You can
find out more about life cycles and workflows from the user's
perspective by reading
Chapter 4 of the Nuxeo User's Guide
.
In this section we will show you just how to register a document to the default life cycle states. To get it to actually transition between these states will be discussed in a separate section on Section 3.6.10, “Workflow” .
We can get a Book to follow the Nuxeo standard lifecycle
by declaring to the "types" extension point of the
LifeCycle Service
that Books follow the "default" life cycle.
Here is the
lifecycle-contrib.xml file
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.project.sample.lifecycles">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.lifecycle.LifeCycleService"
point="types">
<types>
<type name="Book">default</type>
</types>
</extension>
</component>
Getting your new Book document type to follow the standard
Nuxeo lifecycle is as simple as that. Don't forget that a
reference to the lifecycle-contrib.xml file
also needs to go in the MANIFEST.MF file.
Event Listeners are java classes that get notified by nuxeo when a particular type of event (that they are "listening" for) occurs. In this section we will show you how to create your own Event Listener java classes to listen for particular events and then to do something useful when the event occurs.
Event Listeners are registered as contributions to
the extension point "listener" on the
EventServiceComponent
class (in 5.2) or on the
CoreEventListenerService
class (in 5.1). In the sample project we have registered these
event listeners in the
event-listener-contrib.xml file.
These contributions are basically registering a
java class that you will write (our "EventListener" classes),
that will get notified when
a particular event occurs. The event or events
that your customized class listens for can be specified by the
<event> tag in the xml. Here is the listing of
event-listener-contrib.xml:
<?xml version="1.0"?> <component name="org.nuxeo.project.sample.event-listeners"> <extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.event.EventServiceComponent" point="listener"> <listener name="book_create" async="false" postCommit="false" class="org.nuxeo.project.sample.BookEventListener"> <event>emptyDocumentModelCreated</event> </listener> <listener name="book_update_isbn" async="false" postCommit="false" class="org.nuxeo.project.sample.BookISBNEventListener" order="157"> <event>documentCreated</event> <event>documentModified</event> </listener> </extension> </component>
As we can see above are 2 event listeners in the sample project:
BookEventListener: which listens for an 'emptyDocumentModelCreated' event
BookISBNEventListener: which listens for both documentCreated and documentModified events
Our BookEventListener class will get notified whenever a
emptyDocumentModelCreated event occurs.
In other words, when the user clicks the 'New Document'
button, it will get notified. The class itself is very simple.
It implements the EventListener
interface, which means that we must implement a
handleEvent(Event event) method
in our event listener, which is passed
the event that has occurred:
public void handleEvent(Event event) throws ClientException {
EventContext ctx = event.getContext();
if (ctx instanceof DocumentEventContext) {
DocumentEventContext docCtx = (DocumentEventContext) ctx;
DocumentModel doc = docCtx.getSourceDocument();
if (doc != null) {
String type = doc.getType();
if ("Book".equals(type)) {
process(doc);
}
}
}
This method checks to see if our Document type is a 'Book' and if it is, it calls the process(doc) method (not shown), passing it the Book document, which does all the work of creating some default values for the Book's 'Title' and 'Description' fields. The user sees these as 'Sample Book' and the '(Created on 2009-01-01)' in the editable Title and Description fields respectively on the screen where a new Book is being created. The user can overwrite these values if they wish.
The BookISBNEventListener class
listens for
documentCreated and
documentModified events. When it is notified
that one of these events has occurred, once again its
handleEvent() method is called. After checking that the event
applies only to Book document types, it calls its process()
method do deal with these events.
It is at this point that we can see that it that we need to
digress a little, to explain what is happening next. That is
because it starts doing things with a
DirectoryService and a
Vocabulary.
The sample project defines an extension contribution to the
SQLDirectoryFactory
class called "directories" in the file
directories-contrib.xml
whose contents are listed below:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.project.sample.directories">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.directory.sql.SQLDirectoryFactory"
point="directories">
<directory name="book_keywords">
<schema>vocabulary</schema>
<idField>id</idField>
<dataSource>java:/nxsqldirectory</dataSource>
<table>book_keywords</table>
<!-- one of "never", "on_missing_columns" or "always" -->
<createTablePolicy>on_missing_columns</createTablePolicy>
<dataFile>directories/book_keywords.csv</dataFile>
</directory>
</extension>
</component>
In Nuxeo, a Directory is a programmatic abstraction that let's
us deal with any relational database,
regardless of the actual underlying implementation (some examples
might be certain implementations of ldap,
databases, csv files etc).
The chapter on
Directories and Vocabularies
in the nuxeo book, contains a convenient diagram in the
Introduction section which diagrams this abstraction.
A
The "directories" extension contribution contained in the
directories-contrib.xml file shown above,
defines a new directory called
"book_keywords".
This directory
is based on the <vocabulary> schema, which is a core
nuxeo schema and can be found in the
vocabulary.xsd file in the
~/nuxeo/server/default/data/NXRuntime/schemas/
directory under your server installation. If you look
at this schema you'll see it contains 4 fields: id, label,
obsolete and ordering. The <id> xml node in the
directories-contrib.xml defines which of
these 4 fields is the key field.
The other xml nodes define the other aspects of the book_keywords
directory that we are defining. The <dataFile> node defines
that we will keep the initial data that will populate this
directory in the
book_keywords.csv file.
If you browse to that file in the sample
project you'll see its contents:
id, label, obsolete "1","Novel",0 "2","Bestseller",0 "3","Academic",0
The <dataSource> node points to the actual implementation of our directory and where our data will be really stored. In our case we are using the default nuxeo sql data source and naming the table that holds our data in this dataSource <table>book_keywords</table>. Finally the <createTablePolicy> node, takes a value of on_missing_columns, which means that nuxeo will load the contents of your book_keywords if your book_keywords schema is updated. Thus when the server is first started, and no data exists in the table, the book keywords will be loaded in. Then if the server is restarted, no changes will be made to the database unless the schema has been changed.
So we have defined a Directory that will hold our book keywords
that we get from our book_keywords.csv file.
What do we then do with this Directory ? We can see what happens
when we look at the process() method of
BookISBNEventListener. Whenever
a document is created or modified, our process() method
gets a DirectoryService to our "book_keywords" directory.
It then matches the value of the ISBN field of our book
against
the value of the id column of our book_keywords data (the call
to dir.getEntry() will use the value of the key field 'id' defined
in our book_keywords directory to match against).
dir = dirService.open("book_keywords");
DocumentModel entry = dir.getEntry(isbn);
If there is no match (the entry returned is null), it will create a new entry in our directory with the isbn as the "id" and the title as the "label". The mapping between our Book and our book_keywords fields is shown in the table below:
| Book (Document) field | book_keywords (Directory) field |
|---|---|
| isbn | id |
| title | label |
Table 3.2. Book v Book Keywords mapping
If you look at the rest of the code in the process() method of
BookISBNEventListener, you'll see that
if there is a match between the isbn of the book and the id
of the book_keywords, it will update the label of the matching
book_keyword entry with the title of the matching book.
So that explains what BookISBNEventListener does, and what all the Directory/Vocabulary code in the sample project is about. The page that actually uses this code is the search facility of the 'Books' tab described in the Section 3.6.6, “Actions, tabs and behavior ” section above.
The goal of the nuxeo-archetype-start template is to setup a Nuxeo EP plugin development environment. The template provides: a maven layout for sources, tests and dependencies, an Ant target for deployment. It also customizes the web application a litte bit.
Start the “new maven project” wizard from the menu File > New > Maven project. Enable your eclipse for using Nuxeo EP's by addind a remote archetypes catalog using the configure dialog. The URL to be used is as follow http://maven.nuxeo.org/nuxeo-release/. Select the archetype type nuxeo-archetype-start and the nuxeo's version you want your project based. Set the artifact parameters according to your organisation rules.
The Nuxeo Book is getting to be the most complete source of information around Nuxeo EP, both for beginners and advanced developer. It is a good start.
The extension point documentation is also very useful: although you may find it rough, it is the best way to evaluate the Nuxeo extensibility potential, and one should always start with a quick look around all the extension points, to "think Nuxeo" before starting a new project, and not reinventing the wheel.
The wiki: we try to reference all the documentation from the wiki welcome page, and you will find tricks, howtos, etc. If you want to have a writer account to help update the content, ask on the Nuxeo's mailing list.
IntelliJ IDEA from Jetbrains is a very lovable IDE for Java that has many fans in the Java developers community. It is unfortunately not open source.
To start using IDEA for coding on the Nuxeo project, you just need
to type mvn idea:idea from your top-level source
directory: Maven will download all the dependencies, then generate the
configuration files needed by IDEA and you will be able open
nuxeo-ecm.ipr from IDEA.
At the time of this writing, IDEA will report some (spurious) compilation failures and you won't be able to compile the whole application from IDEA. You can still use IDEA with the current configuration to write Java code ("with pleasure"), and use Ant and/or Maven to build/deploy the application.
When we started building Nuxeo EP, we defined several goals to achieve. Because these goals have a structural impact on Nuxeo EP platform it is important to understand them: it helps understanding the logic behind the platform.
An ECM platform like Nuxeo EP can be used in a lot of different cases.
The deployment of Nuxeo EP must be adapted to all these different cases:
Standard ECM web application
This is the most standard use case. The web browser is used to navigate in content repositories.
All services are deployed on an Application server
In order to be easily hostable, the platform needs to be compatible with several application servers
Complex edition or rich media manipulation
In this case having a rich client that seamlessly communicates with other desktop applications and offers a rich GUI is more comfortable than a simple web browser.
Interface is deployed on a rich client on the user desktop
Services and storage are handled on the server
Offline usage
In some cases, it is useful to be able to manipulate and contribute content without needing a network connection.
GUI and some services (like a local repository) need to be deployed on the client side
Server hosts the collaborative services (like the workflow) and the central repository
Distributed architecture
In order to be able to address the needs of large decentralized organizations, Nuxeo EP must provide a way to be deployed on several servers on several locations
Scale out on several servers
Dedicate servers to some specific services
Have one unique Web application accessing several decentralized repositories
Use Nuxeo EP components from another application
When building a business application, it can be useful to integrate services from Nuxeo EP in order to address all content oriented needs of the application.
Provide web service API to access generic ECM services (including repository)
Provide EJB3 remoting API to access generic ECM services (including repository)
Provide POJO API to generic ECM services
There are certainly a lot of other use cases, but mainly the constraints are:
Be able to choose the deployment platform: POJO vs Java EE
As first deployment targets we choose
Eclipse RCP: a rich client solution that uses a POJO (OSGi) component model
JBoss Application Server: a Java EE 5 compliant application server
Be able to choose the deployment location of each component: client side vs server side
The idea is to be able to deploy a component on the server side or on the client side without having to change its code or its packaging
Before building Nuxeo EP we worked during several years on the Zope platform with the CPS solution. CPS was deployed for a lot different use cases and we learned a lot of good practices and design patterns. Although Nuxeo EP is a full rewrite of our ECM platform, we wanted to keep as many of the good CPS concepts as possible.
Concept of schemas and documents
Inside CPS most of the data manipulated was represented by a document object with a structure based on schemas.
This concept is very interesting:
Schemas enforce structure constraints and data integrity but also permit some flexibility.
When defining a schema you can specify what fields are compulsory, their data types etc, but you can also define some flexible parts of the schema.
Share API and UI components for Documents, Users, Records ...
Because the Document/Schema model is very flexible it can be used to manipulate different types of data: like Users, Records and standards documents.
From the developer's perspective this permits using the same API and be able to reuse some UI components
From the users' perspective it gives the application some consistency: because the same features and GUI can be used for all the data they manipulate.
Actions and Views
Because CPS was very pluggable, it was possible to easily define different views for each document type and also to let additional components contribute new actions or views on existing documents.
Nuxeo EP has a similar concept of views and actions, even if technically speaking the technologies are different.
Lazy fetching and caching
Because ECM applications make a very intensive use of the repository and often need to fetch a lot of different documents to construct each page, the way the document retrieval is handled if very important to have a scalable application.
With CPS we worked a lot on caching and lazy fetching.
With Nuxeo EP we incorporated this requirement from the beginning:
Distributed caching
Lazy fetching on schemas and fields
CPS was constructed as a set of pluggable components relying on a common platform. This modularity has been maintained in the new platform. Deploying a new feature or component on the new platform is as simple as it was on the old one.
This requirement has a huge impact on the platform because the Java packaging model and the Java EE constraints are not directly compatible with it.
Adding a new component should be as simple as dropping a file or an archive in some directory without having to rebuild nor repackage the application.
This is important from the administrator point of view: be able to easily deploy new features.
This is also very important from the support point of view: to be able to deploy customized components without taking the risk of forking the platform, and maintaining the possibility to upgrade the standard components.
The CPS framework was powerful but we know it was very complex to use. Not only because of the unusual CMF/Zope/Python programming model, but also because there was a lot of different concepts and you had to understand them all to be able to leverage the platform when building a new application on top of it.
Nuxeo EP aims at simplifying the task of the developer
Clearly separate each layer
The idea is to clearly separate presentation, processing and storage so that developers can concentrate on their task.
Offer plugin API and SPI
Nuxeo EP is constructed as a set of plugins so you can modify the behavior of the application by just contributing a new plugin. This is simpler because for common tasks we will offer a simple plugin API and the developer just has to implement the given interface without having to understand each part of the platform.
Rely on JAVA standards
We try to follow as much as possible all the Java standards when they are applicable. This will allow experienced Java developers to quickly contribute to the Nuxeo EP platform.
We know what it's like to have to build and maintain an entire framework starting from the application server. With the switch to the Java technology, we will use as many existing open source components as possible and focus on integrating them seamlessly into the ECM platform. Nuxeo EP is a complete integrated solution for building an ECM application, but Nuxeo won't write all infrastructure components. This approach will also make the platform more standards compliant.
Thus developers can optimize their Java/JEE and open source experience to use Nuxeo EP.
Because ECM applications often need to be deeply integrated into the existing SI, Nuxeo EP will be easily integrable
API for each reusable service or component
Depending on the components, this API could be POJO, EJB3, or WebService, and in most cases it will be available in the three formats.
Pluggable hooks into Nuxeo EP
This mainly means synchronous or asynchronous events listener that are a great place to handle communication and synchronization between applications.
The Nuxeo EP platform was rewritten from the ground up with the switch to Java. But we don't plan to do this kind of work every couple of years, it won't be efficient neither for us, nor for the users of the platform. For that reason, we choose innovative Java technologies like OSGi, EJB3, JSF, Seam ....
All the design goals explained just before have a huge impact on the Nuxeo EP architecture. Before going into more details, here are the main concepts of Nuxeo EP architecture.
Nuxeo EP is built of several layers, following at least the 3 tiers standard architecture
Presentation layer
Handles GUI interactions (in HTML, SWT ...)
Service layer
Service stack that offers all generic ECM services like workflow, relations, annotations, record management...
Storage layer
Handles all storage-oriented services like document storage, versioning, life cycle ....
Depending on the components, their complexity and the needed pluggability, there can be more than 3 layers.
This layering of all the components brings Nuxeo EP the following advantages
The ability to choose the deployment target for each part of a component
By separating clearly the different parts of a feature, you can choose what part to deploy on the client and what part to deploy on a server.
Clear API separation
Each layer will provide its own API stack
Components are easier to reuse
Because the service and storage layers are not bound to a GUI, they are more generic and then more reusable
Thanks to this separation in component families you can easily extract from Nuxeo EP the components you need for your application.
If you need to include Document storage facilities into your application you can just use Nuxeo EP Core: It will offer you all the needed features to store, version and retrieve documents (or any structured but flexible dataset). If you also need process management and workflow you can also use Nuxeo EP Workflow service. And finally, if you want to have a Web application to browse and manage your data, you can reuse the Nuxeo EP Web layer.
The targeted platform does not provide the same mechanism to handle all the deployment tasks:
Packaging (Java EE vs OSGi)
Dependency management
Extension management
Because of these differences, Nuxeo EP provides a unified deployment service that hides the specificity of the target platform. This is also a way to add a pluggable component deployment system to some platforms that don't handle this (like Java EE).
This is one of the motivating factors for the Nuxeo Runtime that will be briefly introduced later in this document.
In Nuxeo EP, an ECM application is seen as an assembly of components.
This assembly will include:
Existing generic Nuxeo EP Components
Extensions or configurations contributing to generic Nuxeo EP components
Specific components and configuration
Inside Nuxeo EP each feature is implemented by one or several reusable components and services. A feature may be implemented completely at storage level, or may require a dedicated service and a dedicated GUI.
Nuxeo EP Web application is a default distribution of a set of ECM components. This can be used "as is" or can be the base for making a business ECM application.
If you need to remove a feature
Just remove the component or deploy a configuration for disabling it.
If you need to change the default behavior of one component
You can deploy a new configuration for the component .
Declare a new Schema or define a document type
Configure the versioning policy
Deploy new workflow
...
This configuration may use an extension point to contribute to the new behavior (see Section 4.3.2, “Extensible component model”, Section 4.3.2.2, “Extension points” and the chapter on extension points in the Learning Nuxeo EP5 Guide. ) .
Contribute a new security policy
Contribute a new event handler
Deploy a new View on a document
...
If you need to add a completely new feature you can make your own component.
First check that there is no generic Nuxeo EP component available that could help you in your task (all components are not deployed in the default webapp).
Here is a quick list of the Java technology we use inside Nuxeo EP platform:
Java 5
Java EE 5: JSF and EJB3
OSGi component model
A lot a innovative open source projects
JBoss Seam, Trinidad and Ajax4JSF on the web layer
jBPM for the default workflow engine implementation
Lucene for the default search engine implementation
Jackrabbit JSR-170 repository for the default storage back end implementation
JenaRDF for the relation framework
...
The figure below shows a high level overview of the Nuxeo 5 Architecture that will be discussed in the sections below. The sections that follow will discuss:
The Nuxeo Runtime (Section 4.3, “Nuxeo Runtime: the Nuxeo EP component model”)
The Nuxeo Core Layer (Section 4.5, “Core Layer overview”)
The Nuxeo Service/Platform Layer (Section 4.6, “Service Layer overview”)
The Web Presentation Layer ( Section 4.7, “Web presentation layer overview”) - shown in the figure as either a web interface or rich client interface implementation
Building the Nuxeo Runtime was one of the first tasks we started. This is one of the main infrastructure components of the Nuxeo EP architecture.
This section will give you a quick overview of the Nuxeo Runtime. A more detailed technical presentation can be found in Section 29.1, “Overview” of this book.
Because most Nuxeo EP components are shared by Nuxeo RCP (OSGI/RCP) and Nuxeo EP (Java EE), an abstraction layer is required so the components can transparently use the components services independently from the underlying infrastructure.
Nuxeo Runtime provides an abstraction layer on top of the target host platform. Depending on the target host platform, this Runtime layer may be very thin.
Nuxeo Runtime already supports Equinox (Eclipse RCP OSGi layer) and JBoss 4.x (JMX). The port of Nuxeo Runtime to other Java EE application servers is in progress, we already have a part of Nuxeo EP components that can be deployed on top of SUN Glassfish application server. Technically speaking, the port of Nuxeo Runtime could be done on any JEE5 compliant platform and will be almost straightforward for any platform that supports natively the OSGi component model.
Java EE is a great standard, but it was not designed for a component based framework: it is not modular at all.
Java EE deployment model limitations
Most Java EE deployment descriptors are monolithic
For example, the web.xml descriptor is a unique XML file. If you want to deploy an additional component that needs to declare a new Java module you are stuck. You have to make one version of the web.xml for your custom configuration. For the Nuxeo EP platform, this constraint is not possible:
Components don't know each other
Because there are a lot of optional components, we can't have a fixed configuration that fits all.
We can make a version of the web.xml for each possible distribution
There are too many optional components to build one static web.xml for each possible combination.
This problem with the web.xml is of course also true for a lot of standard descriptors (application.xml, faces-config.xml, persistence.xml, ejb-jar.xml ....)
One archive for one web application
We have here the exact same problem as with the web.xml. additional components can contribute new web pages, new web components ... We can have a monolithic web archive.
No dependency declaration
Inside Java EE there is no standard way to declare the dependency between components.
Because Nuxeo EP is extensible and has a plugin model, we need that feature. A contribution is dependent on the component it contributes to:
Contribution is only activated if/when the target component is activated
The contribution must be deployed after the target component as it may override some configuration
Java EE component model limitations
Unable to deploy a new component without rebuilding the whole package
If you take a .ear archive and want to add a new component, you have to rebuild a new ear.
No support for versioned components
Nuxeo Runtime provides an extensible component model that supports all these features. It also handles the deployment of these components on the target host platform.
Nuxeo Runtime provides the component model for the platform.
This component model is heavily based on OSGi and provides the following features:
Platform diagnostic component model
Can be deployed on POJO and Java EE platforms
Supports dependencies management
Components explicitly declare their requirements and are deployed and activated by respecting the inferred dependency chain.
Includes a plugin model
To let you easily configure and contribute to deployed components
A POJO test environment
Nuxeo Runtime components can be unit tested using JUnit without the need of a specific container.
OSGi (Open Services Gateway initiative) is a great standard for components based Java architecture.
OSGi provides out of the box the following features:
Dependencies declaration and management
A component gets activated only when the needed requirements are fulfilled
Modular deployment system
Manage bundles
Manage fragments (sub parts of a master bundle)
an OSGi bundle can define one or several services
A system to identify and lookup a component
For Nuxeo EP, the OSGi standard provides a lot of the needed features. This is the reason why Nuxeo Runtime is based on OSGi. In fact Nuxeo Runtime component model is a subset of the OSGi specification.
To ensure platform transparency, Nuxeo Runtime provides adapters for each target platform to help it support OSGi components.
This adapter layer is very thin on Equinox (Eclipse RCP) since the underlying platform is already OSGi compliant.
This adapter may be more complex for platforms that are not aware of OSGi (JBoss 4.x or Glassfish)
In this case, the runtime adapter will handle all OSGi logic and deploy the components as native platform components. For example, on JBoss 4.x, Runtime components are deployed as JMX MBeans.
OSGi does not define a plugin model, but the Eclipse implementation (Equinox) does provide an extension point system.
Because we found many benefits in the Eclipse Extension Point system, Nuxeo Runtime also includes an Extension Point system. In other words, the underlying mechanism which allows extension points to be implemented in Nuxeo EP, has been built into the Nuxeo EP runtime and core.
An extension point is a way to declare that your component can be customized from the outside:
Contribute configuration
Activate or deactivate a component. Define resources for a given service.
Contribute code and behavior
Extension points also give you the possibility to register plugins
Basically every Nuxeo Component can:
declare its dependencies
The component will also be activated after all needed components have been activated
declare exposed extension points
Each component can define extension points that other components can use to contribute configuration or code.
declare contribution to other components
Extension points and contributions to extension points are
defined using a XML descriptor that has to be referenced in the
MANIFEST.MF.
For a more detailed understanding of extension points in Nuxeo EP, we
recommend reading the Learning Nuxeo EP5 guide.
Inside Nuxeo 5, extension points are used each time a behavior or a component needs to be configurable or pluggable.
Here are some examples of extension points used inside the Nuxeo 5 platform.
Schemas and document types
Inside Nuxeo 5 a document structure is defined by a set of XSD schemas. Schemas and Document Types are defined using an extension point.
Storage repository
Nuxeo core stores documents according to their type but independently of the low level storage back-end. The default back-end is Jackrabbit JCR implementation. Nuxeo Core exposes an extension point to define the storage back-end. We are working on another repository implementation that will be purely SQL based.
Security Management
Nuxeo include a security manager that checks access rights on each single operation. The extension point system allow to have different implementation of the security manager depending on the project requirements:
Enforce data integrity: store security descriptors directly inside the document
Performance: store security descriptors in an externalized index
Corporate security policy: implement a specific security manager that will enforce business rules
Event handlers
Nuxeo platform lets you define custom Event handler for a very large variety of events related to content or processes. The event handler extension mechanism gives a powerful way to add new behavior to an existing application
You can modify the behavior of the application without changing its code
The development model is easy because you have a very simple Interface to implement and you can use Nuxeo Core API to manipulate the data
Event handlers can be synchronous or asynchronous
Nuxeo 5 itself uses the Event Handler system for a lot of generic and configurable services
Automatic versioning: create a new version when a document is modified according to business rules
Meta-data automatic update: update contributor lists, last modification date ...
Meta-data extraction / synchronization: extract Meta-Data from MS-Office file, Picture ....
Nuxeo 5 development model is heavily based on the usage of extension points. When a project requires specific features we try as much of possible to include it as an extension of the existing framework rather than writing separated specific component. This means make existing services more generic and more configurable and implement the project specific needs as a configuration or a plugin of a generic component using Extension Points.
Nuxeo Runtime also provides deployment services to manage how components are deployed and contribute to each other
Dependencies management
The dependencies are declared in the
MANIFEST.MF and can also be defined in XML
descriptors that hold contributions.
The Nuxeo Runtime orders the component deployment in order to be sure the dependencies are respected. Components that have unresolved dependencies are simply not deployed
Extension point contributions
XML descriptors are referenced in the
MANIFEST.MF. These descriptors make
contributions to existing extension points or declare new extension
points.
Each component has its own deployment-fragment
The deployment fragment defines
Contribution to configuration files
For example contribute a navigation rule to
faces-config.xml or a module declaration to
web.xml.
Nuxeo Runtime lets you declare template files (like
web.xml,
persistence.xml) and lets other components
contribute to these files.
Installation instructions
Some resources contributions (like i18n files or web pages) need more complex installation instructions because they need archives and file manipulations. Nuxeo Runtime provide basic commands to define how your components should be deployed
Here is a simple example of a deployment-fragment.
<fragment>
<extension target="application#MODULE">
<module> <ejb>${bundle.fileName}</ejb> </module>
</extension>
<extension target="faces-config#VALIDATOR">
<validator>
<validator-id>dueDateValidator</validator-id>
<validator-class>org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.workflow.web.ui.jsf.DueDateValidator</validator-class>
</validator>
</extension>
<install>
<!-- unzip the war template -->
<unzip from="${bundle.fileName}" to="/">
<include>nuxeo.war/**</include>
</unzip>
<!-- create a temp dir -->
<!-- be sure no directory with that name exists -->
<delete path="nxworkflow-client.tmp" />
<mkdir path="nxworkflow-client.tmp" />
<unzip from="${bundle.fileName}" to="nxworkflow-client.tmp">
<include>OSGI-INF/l10n/**</include>
</unzip>
<append from="nxworkflow-client.tmp/OSGI-INF/l10n/messages.properties"
to="nuxeo.war/WEB-INF/classes/messages.properties" addNewLine="true" />
<append from="nxworkflow-client.tmp/OSGI-INF/l10n/messages_en.properties"
to="nuxeo.war/WEB-INF/classes/messages_en.properties" addNewLine="true" />
<append from="nxworkflow-client.tmp/OSGI-INF/l10n/messages_fr.properties"
to="nuxeo.war/WEB-INF/classes/messages_fr.properties" addNewLine="true" />
<append from="nxworkflow-client.tmp/OSGI-INF/l10n/messages_de.properties"
to="nuxeo.war/WEB-INF/classes/messages_de.properties" addNewLine="true" />
<append from="nxworkflow-client.tmp/OSGI-INF/l10n/messages_it.properties"
to="nuxeo.war/WEB-INF/classes/messages_it.properties" addNewLine="true" />
<delete path="nxworkflow-client.tmp" />
</install>
</fragment>
Nuxeo EP components are separated in 3 main layers: Core / Service / UI
From the logical point of view each layer is a group of components that provide the same nature of service:
Storage oriented services: Nuxeo Core
Nuxeo core provides all the storage services for managing documents
Repository service
Versioning service
Security service
Lifecycle service
Records storage (directories)
...
Content and process oriented services: Nuxeo Platform
Nuxeo provides a stack of generic services that handle documents and provide content and process management features. Depending on the project requirement only a part of the existing services can be deployed.
Typical Nuxeo EP platform services are:
Workflow management service
Relation management service
Archive management service
Notification service
...
Presentation service: UI Layer
The UI layer is responsible for providing presentation services like
Displaying a view of a document
Displaying available actions according to context
Managing page flow on a process driven operation
These services can be very generic (like the action manager) but can also be directly tied to a type of client (like the View generation can be bound to JSF/facelets for the web implementation)
The layer organization can also be seen as a deployment strategy
Thanks to the Nuxeo Runtime remoting features it is very easy to split the components on several JVMs. But splitting some services can have a very bad effect on the global system performance.
Because of this, all the storage oriented services are inside the core. All components that have extensive usage of the repository and need multiple synchronous interaction with it are located in the core. This is especially true for all synchronous event handlers.
The services layer can itself be split in multiple deployment units on multiple JVMs.
On the UI side all the services are logically deployed inside the same JVM. At least each JVM must have the minimum set of services to handle user interaction for the given application.
The components are also grouped by layers according to their dependencies.
Core Modules can depend on Core Internal API.
Generic ECM services can depend on Core external API and can depend on external optional library (like jBPM, Jena, OpenOffice.org ...).
UI services can rely on a client side API (like Servlet API) and share a common state associated to the user session.
Layers are also organized according to deployment target.
The Core layer is a POJO Layer with an optional EJB facade. The core can be embedded in a client application.
The services are mostly implemented as POJO services so that they can be used as an embedded library. But some of them can depend on typical Application Server infrastructure (like JMS or EJB).
Inside the UI Layer most services are dedicated to a target platform: web (JSF/Seam), Eclipse RCP or other.
Because the layer organization has several constraints, the implementation of a unique feature is spread across several layers.
Typically a lot of these "transverse services" are split into several sub-components in each layer in order to comply with deployment constraints and also to provide better reusability. For example, the Audit service is made of 3 main parts which are split across 3 layers:
Core Event <=> JMS bridge (Core Layer)
Forwards core events to JMS Bridge according to configuration.
JMS Listener and JPA Logger (Service Layer)
Message driven bean that writes logs in DB via JPA.
Audit View (UI Layer)
Generates HTML fragment that displays all events that occurred on a document.
The layer organization can also be seen in the API.
Most of the components forming the core are exposed via the
DocumentManager /
CoreSession interface. The interfaces
and dependencies needed to access the Core services are packaged in an
API package: even if there are several Core components, you have only
one dependency and API package.
The idea is that for accessing the core, you will only need to
use the DocumentManager to manipulate
DocumentModels (the document object
artifact). Some core services can be directly accessed via the
DocumentModel (like the life cycle or
security data).
Each service exposes its own API and then has its own API package. Service related data (like process data, relation data) are not directly hosted by the DocumentModel object but can be associated to it via adapters and facets.
The web layer can be very specific to the target application. Nuxeo EP provides a default web application and a set of base classes, utility classes and pluggable services to handle web navigation inside the content repository.
Most features are made of several Java projects and generate several Maven 2 artifacts.
Nuxeo packaging and deployment system (Nuxeo Runtime, Platform API, Maven ...) leverage this separation to help you distributing the needed deployment unit according to your target physical platform.

Nuxeo core provides all the storage services for managing documents.
Schema service
Lets you register XSD schemas and document types based on schemas.
Repository service
Lets you define one or more repository for storing your documents.
Versioning service
Lets you configure how to store versions.
Security service
Manages data level security checks
Lifecycle service
Manages life cycle state of each document
The repository service lets you define new document repositories. Defining separate repositories for your documents is pretty much like defining separate Databases for your records.
Because Nuxeo Core defines an SPI on repository, you can configure how you want the repository to be implemented. For now, the default implementation uses JSR-170 (Java Content Repository) reference implementation: Apache Jack Rabbit. In the future, we may provide other implementations of the Repository SPI (like native SQL DB or Object Oriented DB).
Even if for now there is only one Repository implementation available, using JCR implementation, you can configure how your data will be persisted: filesystem, xml or SQL Database. Please see "How to"s about repository configuration (Chapter 44, RDBMS Storage and Database Configuration).
When defining a new repository, you can configure:
The name.
The configuration file
For JCR, it lets you define persistence manager.
The security manager
Defines how security descriptors are stored in the repository (for now: org.nuxeo.ecm.core.repository.jcr.JCRSecurityManager)
The repository factory
Defines how the repository is created (for now: org.nuxeo.ecm.core.repository.jcr.JCRRepositoryFactory)
The repository enforces data integrity and consistency based on Document types definition.
Each document type is defined by:
A name.
An optional super document type (inheritance)
A list of XSD schemas
Defines storage structure
A list of facets
Simple markers used to define document behavior.
Here is a simple DocumentType declaration:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.TypeService"
point="doctype">
<documentation>The core document types</documentation>
<doctype name="Folder" extends="Document">
<schema name="common" />
<schema name="dublincore" />
<facet name="Folderish" />
</doctype>
</extension>For further explanation on Schemas and Document types, please see Chapter 5, Schemas and Documents.
Inside the Nuxeo repository each document may be associated with a life-cycle. The life-cycle defines the states a document may have and the possible transitions between these states. Here we are not talking about workflow or process, rather we are just defining the possible states of a document inside the system.
The Nuxeo Core contains a LifeCycleManager service that exposes several extension points:
one for contribution to the Life-Cycle management engine
(the default one is called JCRLifeCycleManager and stores life-cycle related information directly inside the JSR 170 repository)
one for contributing life-cycle definition
This includes states and transitions. On 5.2, since 5.2.0, it is possible to define additional initial states to the default state, by adding a keyword to the state definition, for instance: <state name="approved" description="Content has been validated" initial="true">. The desired initial state can be passed in the document model context data used for creation: document.putContextData("initialLifecycleState", "approved").
one for binding life-cycle to document-types
Here is an example
<lifecycle name="default" lifecyclemanager="jcrlifecyclemanager"
initial="project">
<transitions>
<transition name="approve" destinationState="approved">
<description>Approve the content</description>
</transition>
<transition name="obsolete" destinationState="obsolete">
<description>Content becomes obsolete</description>
</transition>
<transition name="delete" destinationState="deleted">
<description>Move document to trash (temporary delete)</description>
</transition>
<transition name="undelete" destinationState="project">
<description>Recover the document from trash</description>
</transition>
<transition name="backToProject" destinationState="project">
<description>Recover the document from trash</description>
</transition>
</transitions>
<states>
<state name="project" description="Default state">
<transitions>
<transition>approve</transition>
<transition>obsolete</transition>
<transition>delete</transition>
</transitions>
</state>
<state name="approved" description="Content has been validated">
<transitions>
<transition>delete</transition>
<transition>backToProject</transition>
</transitions>
</state>
<state name="obsolete" description="Content is obsolete">
<transitions>
<transition>delete</transition>
<transition>backToProject</transition>
</transitions>
</state>
<state name="deleted" description="Document is deleted">
<transitions>
<transition>undelete</transition>
</transitions>
</state>
</states>
</lifecycle>
Life-Cycle service is detailed later in this document (Section 30.4.5, “Life Cycle” and Section 30.5.2, “LifeCycle Managers”).
Note: You may also want to read the chapter on "Access Control and Security" in the Learning Nuxeo EP5 Guide.
Inside the Nuxeo Repository security is always checked when accessing a document.
The Nuxeo security model includes :
Permissions
(Read, Write, AddChildren, ...).
Permissions management is hierarchical (there are groups of permissions)
ACE: Access Control Entry
An ACE grants or denies a permission to a user or a group of users.
ACL: Access Control List
An ACL is a list of ACEs.
ACP: Access Control Policy
An ACP is a stack of ACLs. We use ACP because security can be bound to multiples rules: there can be a static ACL, an ACL that is driven by the workflow, and another one that is driven by business rules.
Separating ACLs allows us to easily reset the ACP when a process or a rules does not apply any more.
Inside the repository each single document can have an ACP. By default security descriptors are inherited from their parent, but inheritance can be blocked when needed.
The security engine also lets you contribute custom policy services so that security management can include business rules.
The security model and policy service are described in detail later in this document.
When an event occurs inside the repository (document creation, document modification, etc...), an event is sent to the event service that dispatches the notification to its listeners. Listeners can perform any number of actions when receiving an event, which may include modifying the document on the fly.
As an example, part of the dublincore management logic is implemented as a CoreEvent listener: whenever a document is created or modified, the "creation date", "modification date", "author" and "contributors" fields are automatically updated by a CoreEvent Listener.
The Core Events system is explained in more detail later in this document (see Chapter 32, Nuxeo Event Service and Chapter 9, Event Listeners and Scheduling) and in the Learning Nuxeo EP5 guide.
The Repository supports a Query API to extract Documents using SQL like queries.
NXQL (the associated Query Language) is presented later in this document (see Example 11.2, “Sample NXQL queries”).
The documents in the repository can be versioned.
Nuxeo Core provides:
A pluggable version storage manager
This lets you define how versions are stored and what operations can be done on versions
A pluggable versioning policy
This lets you define rules and logic that drive when new versions must be created and how version numbers are incremented.
The versioning system is explained in details later in this document (see Chapter 16, Document Versioning).
Nuxeo Core exposes a repository API on top of Jackrabbit JSR170 repository.
Nuxeo repository is implemented using an SPI and extension point model: this basically means that a non JCR based repository plugin can be contributed. In fact, we have already started a native SQL repository implementation (that is not yet finished because we have no direct requirement for such a repository).
Nuxeo core can server several repository: it provides a extension point to declare an additional repository: this means a single web application can use several document repositories.
Inside Nuxeo EP and especially inside the Core API the main data object is a Document.
Inside Nuxeo Core API, the object artifact used to represent a Document is called a DocumentModel.
The DocumentModel artifact encapsulates several useful features:
Data Access over the network
the DocumentModel encapsulates all access to a Document's internal fields, and the DocumentModel can be sent over the network
DocumentModel supports lazy loading
When fetched from the Core, a DocumentModel does not carry all document related information. Some data (called prefetch data) are always present, other data will be loaded (locally or remotely) from the core when needed.
This feature is very important to reduce network and disk I/O when manipulating a Document that contains a lot of big blob files (like video, music, images ...) .
DocumentModel uses Core Streaming Service
For files above 1 MB the DocumentModel uses the Core Streaming service.
DocumentModel carries the security descriptors
ACE/ACL/ACP are embedded inside the DocumentModel
DocumentModels support an adapter service
In addition to the data oriented interface, a DocumentModel can be associated with one or more Adapters that will expose a business oriented interface.
DocumentModels embed lifecycle service access
DocumentModels can have facets
Facets are used to declare a behavior (Versionnable, HiddenInNavigation, Commentable...)
A DocumentModel can be located inside the repository using a DocumentRef. DocumentRef can be an IdRef (UUID in the case of the JCR Repository Implementation) or PathRef (absolute path).
DocumentModels also hold information about the Type of the Document and a set of flags to define some useful characteristics of the Document:
isFolder
Defines if the targeted document is a container
isVersion
Defines if the targeted document is an historic version
isProxy
Defines if the targeted document is a Proxy (see below)
A Proxy is a DocumentModel that points to a another one: very much like a symbolic link between 2 files.
Proxies are used when the same document must be accessible from several locations (paths) in the repository. This is typically the case when doing publishing: the same document can be visible in several sections (note: 'section' here has a special meaning as defined in the Nuxeo User Guide). In order to avoid duplicating the data, we use proxies that point to same document.
A proxy can point to a checked out document (not yet associated to a version label) or to a versioned version (typical use-case of publishing).
The proxy does not store document data: all data access are forwarded to the source document. But the Proxy does holds:
its own security descriptors
its own DocumentRef
The service layer is an ECM services stack on top of the Nuxeo Repository. In a sense, the Repository itself is very much like any service of this layer, it just plays a central role.
This service layer is used for :
adding new generic ECM services (Workflow, Relations, Audit ...)
adding connectors to existing external services
adding dedicated project-specific components when the requirements can not be integrated into a generic component
This service layer provides the API used by client applications (Webapp or RCP based applications) to do their work.
This means that in this layer, services don't care about UI, navigation or pageflows: they simply explore an API to achieve document oriented tasks.
Nuxeo platform provides a lot of different services, but they all fellow the same implementation pattern. This basically means that once you understand how works one service, you almost know how they all work.
As with everything in the Nuxeo Platform the services use the Nuxeo Runtime component model.
A generic service will be composed of the following packages :
An API package (usually called nuxeo-platform-XXX-api)
Contains all interfaces and remotable objects.
This package is required to be able to call the service from the same JVM or from a remote JVM.
You can view these in your Nuxeo server installation directory if you are curious (/nuxeo/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/system/ - assuming you have your server installed in /nuxeo).
A POJO Runtime component (usually called nuxeo-platform-XXX-core)
The Runtime component will implement the service business logic (ie: implement the API) and also expose Extensions Points.
All the extensibility and pluggability is handled at runtime component level. This for example means that the API can be partially implemented via plugins.
A EJB3 Facade (usually called nuxeo-platform-XXX-facade)
The facade exposes the same API as the POJO component.
The target of this facade is to:
provide EJB3 remoting access to the API
integrate the service into JEE managed environment (JTA and JAAS)
leverage some additional features of the application server like JMS and Message Driven Bean
provide state management via Stateful Session Beans when needed
Typically, the POJO module will be a Nuxeo Runtime Component that inherits from DefaultComponent, provides extension points and implements a Service Interface.
public class RelationService extends DefaultComponent
implements RelationManager { ...}
The deployment descriptor associated with the component will register the component, declare it as service provider and it may also declare extension points
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.relations.services.RelationService">
<implementation class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.relations.services.RelationService" />
<service>
<provide interface="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.relations.api.RelationManager" />
</service>
<!-- declare here extension points -->
</component>
The facade will declare an EJB that implements the same service interface. In simple cases, the implementation simply delegates calls to the POJO component.
The facade package will also contain a contribution to the Runtime Service management to declare the service implementation.
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.relation.service.binding.contrib">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.runtime.api.ServiceManagement" point="services">
<documentation> Define the Relation bean as a platform service. </documentation>
<service class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.relations.api.RelationManager" group="platform/relations">
<locator>%RelationManagerBean</locator>
</service>
</extension>
</component>
Thanks to this declaration the POJO and the EJB Facade can now be used for providing the same interface based on a configuration of the framework and not on the client code.
This configuration is used when deploying Nuxeo components on several servers: platform configuration provides a way to define service groups and to bind them together on physical servers.
Each service provides its own API composed of a main interface and of the other interfaces and types that can be accessed.
The API package is unique for a given service, and access to a remote EJB3 based service is the same as accessing the POJO service.
From the client point of view, accessing a service is very simple and independent from service location and implementation: this means a manual JNDI call is not required. Everything that is needed is encapsulated in the Framework.getService runtime API.
RelationManager rm = Framework.getService(RelationManager.class);
The framework.getService will return the
interface of the required service:
This can be the POJO service (ie: Runtime Component based Service)
This can be the local interface of the EJB3 service (using call by ref in JBoss)
This can be the remote interface of the EJB3 service (using full network marshalling)
The choice of the implementation to return is left to the Nuxeo Runtime that will take the decision based on the platform configuration.
The client can explicitly ask for the POJO service via the Framework.getLocalService() API: this is typically used in the EJB Facade to delegate calls to the POJO implementation.
DocumentModel adapters are a way to adapt the DocumentModel interface (that is purely data oriented) to a more business logic oriented interface.
In the pure Service logic, adding a comment to a document would look like this:
CommentManager cm = Framework.getService(CommentManager.class); cm.createComment(doc,"my comment"); List<DocumentModel> comments = cm.getComments(doc);
DocumentModel adapters give the possibility to have a more object oriented API:
CommentableDoc cDoc = doc.getAdapter(CommentableDoc);
cDoc.addComment("my comment");
List<DocumentModel> comments = cDoc.getComments();
The difference may seem small, but DocumentModel adapter can be very handy
to have cleaner and clearer code
to handle caching at the DocumentModel level
to implement behavior and logic associating a Document with a Service
DocumenModelAdapters are declared using an extension point that defines the interface provided by the adapter and the factory class. DocumentModelAdapters can be associated to a Facet of the DocumentModel.
The requirements for the Nuxeo Web Framework are :
A Powerful templating system that supports composition
A modern MVC model that provides Widgets, Validators and Controllers
A standard framework
A set of Widget libraries that allow reusing existing components
Support for AJAX integration
Nuxeo Web Layer uses JSF (SUN RI 1.2) and Facelets as presentation layer: JSF is standard and very pluggable, Facelets is much more flexible and adapted to JSF than JSP.
NXThemes provides a flexible Theme and composition engine based on JSF and Facelets.
In the 5.1 version of the platform, Nuxeo Web Layer uses Apache Tomahawk and trinidad as a components library and AJAX4JSF for Ajax integration. In the 5.2 version we will move to Rich Faces.
Nuxeo Web Layer also uses Seam Web Framework to handle all the ActionListeners.
Using Seam provides :
Simplification and help with JSF usage
A context management framework
Dependency injection
Remoting to access ActionsListeners from JavaScript
A built-in event system
Nuxeo Web Layer comes on top of a set of pluggable services.
Because this stack of services is very modular, the web layer must also be modular.
This basically means that depending on the set of deployed services and on the configuration, the web framework must provide a way
to add, remove or customize views
for example, if you don't need relations, you may want to remove the relations tab that is available on document by default
to add or remove an action button or link
the typical use case is removing actions that are bound to non-deployed services or to add new actions that are specific to your project
to override an action listener
you may want to change how some actions are handled by just overriding Nuxeo defaults
to add or customize forms
Adding fields or customizing forms used to display documents is very useful
In order to fullfill these requirements, the key points of Nuxeo Web Frame fulfill:
Context management to let components share some state
Event system and dependency injection to let loosely coupled components collaborate
A deployment system to let several components make one unique WebApp
A set of pluggable services to configure the web application
Inside the web framework, each component will need to know at least
the current navigation context
This includes current document, current container, current Workspace, current Domain.
This information is necessary because most of the services will display a view on the current document, and can fetch some configuration from the content hierarchy.
the current user
This includes not only identity and roles, but also its preferences and the set of documents they choose to work on
In some cases, this context information may be huge, and it's time consuming to recompute all this information for each request.
Inside Nuxeo Web Framework, Seam context management is used to store this data. Depending on the lifecycle of the data, Session, Conversation or Event context are used.
At some point the components of the web framework need to interact with each other. But because components can be present or not depending on the deployment scenario, they can't call each other directly.
For that matter, the Nuxeo Web Framework uses a lot of Seam features:
Seam's context is used to share some state between the components
Seam's event system is used to let components notify each other
Seam's dependency injection and Factory system is used to let components pull some data from each other without having to know each other
In order to facilitate Nuxeo Services integration into the web framework, we use the Seam Unwrap pattern to wrap a Nuxeo Service into Seam Components that can be injected and manipulated as a standard Seam component.
The Web Layer is composed of several components.
The main components are webapp-core (default webapp base) and ui-web (web framework). On top of these base components, dedicated web components are deployed for each specific service.
For example, the workflow-service has its own web components package, so do relation-service, audit-service, comment-service and so on.
Each package contains a set of views, actions, and ActionsListeners that are dedicated to one service and integrate this service into the base webapp.
Because JEE standards require the webapp to be monolithic (ie. it cannot be split up), we use the Nuxeo Runtime deployment service to assemble the target webapp at deployment time.
This deployment framework let you: override resources,
contribute XML descriptors like web.xml from
several components and manage deployment order.
This chapter presents the concepts of schemas and document types, which are used to define new documents in Nuxeo EP 5.
In Nuxeo EP 5, a fundamental entity is the document. A file, a note, a vacation request, an expense report, but also a folder, a forum, can all be thought of as documents. Objects that contain documents, like a folder or a workspace, are also themselves documents.
Any given document has a document type. The document type is specified at creation time, and does not change during the lifetime of the document. When referring to the document type, a short string is often used, for instance “Note” or “Folder”.
A document type is the grouping of several schemas. A schema represents the names and structure (types) of a set of fields in a document. For instance, a commonly-used schema is the Dublin Core schema, which specifies a standard set of fields used for document metadata like the title, description, modification date, etc.
To create a new document type, we start by creating one ore more schemas that the document type will use.
The schema is defined in a .xsd file (which
obeys the standard XML
Schema syntax) and is registered by a contribution to a
schema extension point.
The document type is registered through a contribution to another
doctype extension point, and will specify which
schemas it uses. We also register the document type as a high-level type
used by the EJB and rendering layers.
“Core” document types and “ECM” component types should not be confused. The former live in the core Nuxeo EP packages, the latter belong to the high level components. Apart from their definition, most of the uses of "document types" refer to the “ECM” kind.
A schema describes the names and types of some fields. The name is a simple string, like "title", and the type describes what kind of information it stores, like a string, an integer or a date.
First, we create a schema in the
resources/schemas/sample.xsd file:
<?xml version="1.0"?> <xs:schema xmlns:xs="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" targetNamespace="http://project.nuxeo.org/sample/schemas/sample/"> <xs:element name="sample1" type="xs:string"/> <xs:element name="sample2" type="xs:string"/> </xs:schema>
This schema defines two things:
an XML namespace that will be associated with the schema,
two elements and their type.
The two elements are sample1
and sample2. They are both of type
xs:string, which is a standard type defined by the XML Schema
specification.
This schema has to be referenced by a configuration file so that the
system knows it has to be read. The configuration file will be placed in
OSGI-INF/core-types-contrib.xml (the name is just a
convention):
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.project.sample.coreTypes">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.TypeService" point="schema">
<schema name="sample" src="schemas/sample.xsd"/>
</extension>
</component>
We name our schema sample, and the .xsd schema
was placed under resources/ which means that at
runtime, it will be available directly from the Jar, therefore we
reference it through the path schemas/sample.xsd. The
schema is registered through an extension point of the Nuxeo component
org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.TypeService named
schema. Our own extension component is given a name,
org.nuxeo.project.sample.coreTypes, which is not very
important as we only contribute to existing extension points and don't
define new ones.
Finally, we tell the system that the
OSGI-INF/core-types-contrib.xml file has to be read,
by mentioning it in the Nuxeo-Component part of the
META-INF/MANIFEST.MF file of our bundle:
Manifest-Version: 1.0 Bundle-ManifestVersion: 1 Bundle-Name: NXSample project Bundle-SymbolicName: org.nuxeo.project.sample;singleton:=true Bundle-Version: 1.0.0 Bundle-Vendor: Nuxeo Require-Bundle: org.nuxeo.runtime, org.nuxeo.ecm.core.api, org.nuxeo.ecm.core Provide-Package: org.nuxeo.project.sample Nuxeo-Component: OSGI-INF/core-types-contrib.xml
By itself, the schemas is not very useful. We associate it with a
new “core” document type that we will be creating. In the same
OSGI-INF/core-types-contrib.xml as above, we add the
following:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.project.sample.coreTypes">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.TypeService" point="schema">
<schema name="sample" src="schemas/sample.xsd" prefix="smp"/>
</extension>
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.TypeService" point="doctype">
<doctype name="Sample" extends="Document">
<schema name="common"/>
<schema name="dublincore"/>
<schema name="sample"/>
</doctype>
</extension>
</component>
The document type is defined through a contribution to an other
extension point, doctypes, of the same extension
component as before, org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.TypeService.
We specify that our document type, Sample, will be an
extension of the standard system type Document, and
that it will be composed of three schemas, two standard ones and our
specific one.
The Dublin Core schema that we use already contains standard metadata fields, like a title, a description, the modification date, the document contributors, etc. Adding it to our document type ensures that a minimal level of functionality will be present.
After the “core” document type, we need to create the “ECM” document
type. This is done through a contribution to another extension point, that
we place in the OSGI-INF/ecm-types-contrib.xml, the
basic structure of this file is:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.project.sample.ecm.types">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.types.TypeService" point="types">
<type id="Sample" coretype="Sample">
...
</type>
</extension>
</component>
As of this writing, the document type id has to be the same as the underlying core type; this restriction may be lifted in the future. The type element will contain all the information for this type, this is described below.
This extension file is added to
META-INF/MANIFEST.MF so that it will be taken into
account by the deployment mechanism:
Nuxeo-Component: OSGI-INF/core-types-contrib.xml, OSGI-INF/ecm-types-contrib.xml
Inside the type element, we provide various information, described below.
<label>Sample document</label> <icon>/icons/file.gif</icon>
The label and icon are used by the user interface, for instance in the creation page when a list of possible types is displayed. The icon is also used whenever a list of document wants to associate an icon with each.
<default-view>view_documents</default-view>
The default view specifies the name of the Facelet to use for this
document if nothing is specified. This corresponds to a file that lives
in the webapp, in this case view_documents.xhtml is a
standard view defined in the base Nuxeo bundle, that takes care of
displaying available tabs, and the document body according to the
currently selected type. Changing it is not advised unless extremely
nonstandard rendering is needed.
Here is the new layout configuration:
<layouts mode="any"> <layout>heading</layout> <layout>note</layout> </layouts>
Layouts are defined in a given mode (default modes are "create", "edit" and "view") ; layouts in the "any" mode will be merged with layouts defined for specific modes.
The layout names refer to layouts defined on another extension point. Please see the layouts section for more information.
Here is the old layout configuration that has been replaced by the above. If present, it is used instead of the new configuration for compatibility purposes.
<layout>
<widget jsfcomponent="h:inputText"
schemaname="dublincore" fieldname="title"
required="true" />
<widget jsfcomponent="h:inputTextarea"
schemaname="dublincore" fieldname="description" />
<widget jsfcomponent="h:inputText"
schemaname="sample" fieldname="sample1" />
<widget jsfcomponent="h:inputText"
schemaname="sample" fieldname="sample2" />
</layout>
This section defines a series of widgets, that describe what the standard layout of this document type will be. A layout is a series of widgets, which make the association between the field of a schema with a JSF component.
The layout is used by the standard Nuxeo modification and summary views, to automatically display the document according to the layout rules. Note that the layout system is still young and is subject to minor changes in the future. Here we define four widgets, displayed as simple input fields or as a text area.
<type id="Folder" coretype="Folder">
<subtypes>
<type>Sample</type>
</subtypes>
</type>
<type id="Workspace" coretype="Workspace">
<subtypes>
<type>Sample</type>
</subtypes>
</type>
This contributes a rule to an already existing type,
Folder. The subtypes element specifies which types
can be created inside the type in which the element is embedded.
Here, we specify that our Sample type can be
created in a Folder and a
Workspace.
The goal is to contribute a way to define hidden cases for the subtypes definition. A syntax like the following can be used:
<type id="Workspace">
<subtypes>
<type>Workspace</type>
<type hidden="create">Folder</type>
<type>File</type>
<type>Note</type>
</subtypes>
</type>
If more than one hidden cases needs to be defined, then a syntax like the following can be used:
<type id="Workspace">
<subtypes>
<type>Workspace</type>
<type hidden="create, paste">Folder</type>
<type>File</type>
<type>Note</type>
</subtypes>
</type>The hidden cases are stored in a list ([create, paste] for the above example), so if a check is needed for a hidden case, then the hidden cases list ought to be verified if contains that particular case.
The final OSGI-INF/ecm-types-contrib.xml
looks like:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.project.sample.ecm.types">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.types.TypeService" point="types">
<type id="Sample" coretype="Sample">
<label>Sample document</label>
<icon>/icons/file.gif</icon>
<default-view>view_documents</default-view>
<layout>
<widget jsfcomponent="h:inputText"
schemaname="dublincore" fieldname="title"
required="true" />
<widget jsfcomponent="h:inputTextarea"
schemaname="dublincore" fieldname="description" />
<widget jsfcomponent="h:inputText"
schemaname="sample" fieldname="sample1" />
<widget jsfcomponent="h:inputText"
schemaname="sample" fieldname="sample2" />
</layout>
</type>
<type id="Folder" coretype="Folder">
<subtypes>
<type>Sample</type>
</subtypes>
</type>
<type id="Workspace" coretype="Workspace">
<subtypes>
<type>Sample</type>
</subtypes>
</type>
</extension>
</component>
The ExceptionHandlingService handles the exceptions that bubbled outside of Nuxeo. It allows to define handlers to forward to an error page with adequate messages and logs.
It is composed of 3 extension points: the errorHandlers configures the handlers, the requestdump configures the way the request will be written to error log and listener allows to set a listener to the process so state can be restore in case of error.
This service is only available in Nuxeo 5.2
The request dump extension point allows to contribute a RequestDumper class. It takes a request as parameter and output the string that will be written to error log. The default contribution is:
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.web.common.exceptionhandling.service.ExceptionHandlingService"
point="requestdump">
<requestdump
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.web.common.exceptionhandling.service.DefaultRequestDumper" />
</extension>
It writes the attributes of the request.
The listener extension point allows to contribute a listener that will be called during the different phase of the exception handling. The default contribution does nothing (this is use by WebEngine):
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.web.common.exceptionhandling.service.ExceptionHandlingService"
point="listener">
<listener
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.web.common.exceptionhandling.service.NullExceptionHandlingListener" />
</extension>
This contribution is over written in the module nuxeo-platform-webapp-core with:
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.web.common.exceptionhandling.service.ExceptionHandlingService"
point="listener">
<listener
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.webapp.shield.SeamExceptionHandlingListener" />
</extension>
This listener restore the faces/seam context before to write the attributes (use by NuxeoEP).
The errorhandlers extension point allows to configure the different handler. General attribute are:
errorhandlers attributes
The message bundle to use. The default bundle used in Nuxeo is messages.
The name of the logger to use. Default is nuxeo-error-log. If you change this value, you need to update your logging configuration.
The page to which you will be forwarded if no page is defined in the handler configuration.
The attributes for each handler are:
A regular expression, if matched the Exception we are handling, this handler will be used. The last handler should use ".*" as a Regular Expression.
The key, in the message bundle defined in the general attribute, of the message that will be output to the user.
The error page we should forward to. If not defined we will forward to the default error page as defined in the general attribute.
The status code set to the response. If none the default code will be set.
The default configuration is:
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.web.common.exceptionhandling.service.ExceptionHandlingService"
point="errorhandlers">
<errorHandlers bundle="messages" loggerName="nuxeo-error-log" defaultpage="nuxeo_error.jsp">
<handlers>
<handler error=".*NoSuchDocumentException" message="Error.Document.Not.Found" code="404"/>
<handler error="javax.jcr.ItemNotFoundException" message="Error.Document.NotFound" code="404"/>
<handler error=".*NoSuchPropertyException" message="Error.Document.NoSuchProperty"/>
<handler error=".*SecurityException" message="Error.Insuffisant.Rights"/>
<handler error=".*" message="Error.Unknown"/>
</handlers>
</errorHandlers>
</extension>
The User Interface framework uses different kinds of concepts to make the interface configurable in the same way that the application itself is.
Links and pages that appear on the site can be the result of a "static" template written in the XHTML language, but can also be the result of a configuration change, taken into account thanks to more "generic" XHTML pages.
The following chapters will explain how configuration and templating combine to achieve the UI of the site.
In this chapter, an action will stand for any kind of command that can be triggered via user interface interaction. In other words, it will describe a link and other information that may be used to manage its display (the link label, an icon, security information for instance).
Custom actions can be contributed to the actions service, using its extension point. Their description is then available through this service to control where and how they will be displayed.
An action can be registered using the following example extension:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.actions.ActionService"
point="actions">
<action id="logout" link="#{loginLogoutAction.logout}"
label="command.logout">
<category>USER_SERVICES</category>
</action>
</extension>
Example 7.1. Example of an action registration
The above action will be used to display a "logout" link
on the site. Here are its properties:
id: string identifying the action. In
the example, the action id is "logout".
label: the action name that will be
used when displaying the link. In the example, the label is
"command.logout". This label is a message that will be
translated at display.
link: string representing the command
the action will trigger. This string may represent a different
action given the template that will display the action. In the
example, a JSF command link will be used, so it represents an
action method expression. The seam component called
"loginLogoutAction" holds a method named "logout" that will
perform the logout and return a string for navigation.
category: a string useful to group
actions that will be rendered in the same area of a page. An
action can define several categories. Here, the only category
defined is "USER_SERVICES". It is designed to group all the
actions that will be displayed on the right top corner of any
page of the site.
Other properties can be used to define an action. They are
listed here but you can have a look at the main actions contributions
file for more examples:
nuxeo-platform-webapp-core/srs/main/resources/OSGI-INF/actions-contrib.xml.
filter-ids: id of a filter that will be
used to control the action visibility. An action can have
several filters: it is visible if all its filters grant the
access.
filter: a filter definition can be done
directly within the action definition. It is a filter like
others and can be referred by other actions.
icon: the optional icon path for this
action.
confirm: an optional Javascript
confirmation string that can be triggered when executing the
command.
order: an optional integer used to sort
actions within the same category. This attribute may be
deprecated in the future.
enabled: boolean indicating whether the
action is currently active. This can be used to hide existing
actions when customizing the site behavior.
Actions extension point provides merging features: you can change an existing action definition in your custom extension point provided you use the same identifier. Properties holding single values (label, link for instance) will be replaced using the new value. Properties holding multiple values (categories, filters) will be merged with existing values.
Actions in the same category are supposed to be displayed in the same area of a page. Here are listed the main default categories if you want to add an action there:
USER_SERVICES: used to display actions
in the top right corner of every page. The link attribute should
look like a JSF action command link. See the example
above.
VIEW_ACTION_LIST: used for tabs
displayed on every document. As each tab is not displayed in a
different page, but just includes a specific template content in
the middle of the page, the link attribute has to be a template
path. For instance:
<action id="TAB_VIEW" link="/incl/tabs/document_view.xhtml" enabled="true"
order="0" label="action.view.summary">
<category>VIEW_ACTION_LIST</category>
<filter-id>view</filter-id>
</action>
<action id="TAB_CONTENT" link="/incl/tabs/document_content.xhtml" order="10"
enabled="true" label="action.view.content">
<category>VIEW_ACTION_LIST</category>
<filter-id>view_content</filter-id>
</action>
SUBVIEW_UPPER_LIST: used to display
actions just below a document tabs listing. As
USER_SERVICES, these actions will be
displayed using a command link, so the link attribute has to be
an action method expression. For instance:
<action id="newSection" link="#{documentActions.createDocument('Section')}"
enabled="true" label="command.create.section"
icon="/icons/action_add.gif">
<category>SUBVIEW_UPPER_LIST</category>
<filter id="newSection">
<rule grant="true">
<permission>AddChildren</permission>
<type>SectionRoot</type>
</rule>
</filter>
</action>
<action id="newDocument" link="select_document_type" enabled="true"
label="action.new.document" icon="/icons/action_add.gif">
<category>SUBVIEW_UPPER_LIST</category>
<filter-id>create</filter-id>
</action>
An action visibility can be controlled using filters. An action filter is a set of rules that will apply - or not - given an action and a context.
Filters can be registered using their own extension point, or registered implicitly when defining them inside of an action definition:
<filter id="view_content">
<rule grant="true">
<permission>ReadChildren</permission>
<facet>Folderish</facet>
</rule>
<rule grant="false">
<type>Root</type>
</rule>
</filter>
Example 7.2. Example of a filter registration
<action id="newSection" link="#{documentActions.createDocument('Section')}"
enabled="true" label="command.create.section"
icon="/icons/action_add.gif">
<category>SUBVIEW_UPPER_LIST</category>
<filter id="newSection">
<rule grant="true">
<permission>AddChildren</permission>
<type>SectionRoot</type>
</rule>
</filter>
</action>
Example 7.3. Example of a filter registration inside an action registration
A filter can accept any number of rules. It will grant
access to an action if, among its rules, no denying rule
(grant=false) is found and at least one granting
rule (grant=true) is found. A general rule to
remember is that if you would like to add a filter to an action that
already has one or more filters, it has to hold constraining rules: a
granting filter will be ignored if another filter is already too
constraining.
If no rule is set, the filter will grant access by default.
The default filter implementation uses filter rules with the following properties:
grant: boolean indicating whether this
is a granting rule or a denying rule.
permission: permission like "Write"
that will be checked on the context for the given user. A rule
can hold several permissions: it applies if user holds at least
one of them.
facet: facet like "Folderish" that can
be set on the document type
(org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.types.Type) to
describe the document type general behavior. A rule can hold
several facets: it applies if current document in context has at
least one of them.
condition: EL expression that can be
evaluated against the context. The Seam context is made
available for conditions evaluation. A rule can hold several
conditions: it applies if at least one of the conditions is
verified.
type: document type to check against
current document in context. A rule can hold several types: it
applies if current document is one of them. The fake 'Server'
type is used to check the server context.
schema: document schema to check
against current document in context. A rule can hold several
schemas: it applies if current document has one of them.
group: group like "members" to check
against current user in context. A rule can hold several
groups: it applies if current user is in one of them.
Filters do not support merging, so if you define a filter with an id that is already used in another contribution, only the first contribution will be taken into account.
It is important to understand that an action does *not* define the way it will be rendered: This is left to pages, templates and other components displaying it. Most of the time, actions will be rendered as command links or command buttons.
For instance, actions using the USER_SERVICES
category will be rendered as action links:
<nxu:methodResult name="actions"
value="#{webActions.getActionsList('USER_SERVICES')}">
<nxu:dataList layout="simple" var="action" value="#{actions}"
rowIndexVar="row" rowCountVar="rowCount">
<h:outputText value=" | " rendered="#{row!=(rowCount-1)}" />
<nxh:commandLink action="#{action.getLink()}">
<t:htmlTag value="br" rendered="#{row==(rowCount-1)}" />
<h:outputText value="#{messages[action.label]}" />
</nxh:commandLink>
</nxu:dataList>
</nxu:methodResult>
The nxu:methodResult tag is only used to
retrieve the list of actions declared for the
USER_SERVICES category. The
nxh:commandLink is used instead of a simple
h:commandLink so that it executes commands that
where described as action expression methods.
Another use case is the document tabs: actions using the
VIEW_ACTION_LIST category will be rendered as
action links too, but actions are managed by a specific seam component
that will hold the information about the selected tab. When clicking
on an action, this selected tab will be changed and the link it points
to will be displayed.
First of all, we have to make the difference between a view in a standard JSF way (navigation case view id, navigation case output) and views in Nuxeo 5 (document type view, creation view)
A standard JSF navigation rule can be defined in the
OSGI-INF/deployment-fragment.xml files, inside
the faces-config#NAVIGATION directive.
<extension target="faces-config#NAVIGATION">
<navigation-case>
<from-outcome>create_document</from-outcome>
<to-view-id>/create_document.xhtml</to-view-id>
<redirect />
</navigation-case>
<navigation-case>
<from-outcome>view_documents</from-outcome>
<to-view-id>/view_documents.xhtml</to-view-id>
<redirect />
</navigation-case>
</extension>
Example 7.4. Example of a navigation rule case definitions
A certain Nuxeo document type, can have defined a default view
(used to view/edit the document) and a create view (used to create the
document). These views are specified in the
OSGI-INF/ecm-types-contrib.xml file, as in the
following example.
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.types.TypeService" point="types">
<type id="Workspace" coretype="Workspace">
<label>Workspace</label>
<icon>/icons/workspace.gif</icon>
<icon-expanded>/icons/workspace_open.gif</icon-expanded>
<default-view>view_documents</default-view>
<create-view>create_workspace</create-view>
</type>
</extension>
Example 7.5. Example of view definitions for a document type
The default view of a document is rendered as a list of tabs. As
mentioned before, the document tabs are defined as actions in the
OSGI-INF/actions-contrib file, having as category
VIEW_ACTION_LIST. A tab can be added to a document
default view as shown in the following example.
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.actions.ActionService" point="actions">
<action id="TAB_EDIT" link="/incl/tabs/document_edit.xhtml" enabled="true"
order="20" label="action.view.edit" icon="/icons/file.gif">
<category>VIEW_ACTION_LIST</category>
<filter-id>edit</filter-id>
<filter-id>mutable_document</filter-id>
</action>
</extension>
Example 7.6. Example of tab definition for a default view of a document type
There are two services that help building GET URLs to restore a Nuxeo context. The default configuration handle restoring the current document, the view, current tab and current sub tab.
The service handling document views allows registration of codecs. Codecs manage coding of a document view (holding a document reference, repository name as well as key-named string parameters) in to a URL, and decoding of this URL into a document view.
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.url.service.DocumentViewCodecService"
point="codecs">
<documentViewCodec name="docid" enabled="true" default="true" prefix="nxdoc"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.url.codec.DocumentIdCodec" />
<documentViewCodec name="docpath" enabled="true" default="false" prefix="nxpath"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.url.codec.DocumentPathCodec" />
</extension>
Example 7.7. Example of a document view codec registration
In this example, the docid codec uses the document uid to
resolve the context. Urls are of the form
http://site/nuxeo/nxdoc/demo/docuid/view. The docpath codec uses the
document path to resolve the context. Urls are of the form
http://site/nuxeo/nxpath/demo/path/to/my/doc@view.
Additional parameters are coded/decoded as usual request parameters.
Note that when building a document view, the url service will require a view id. The other information (document location and parameters) are optional, as long as they're not required for your context to be initialized correctly.
The service handling URLs allows registration of patterns. These patterns help saving the document context and restoring it thanks to information provided by codecs. The URL service will iterate through its patterns, and use the first one that returns an answer (proving decoding was possible).
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.rest.URLService"
point="urlpatterns">
<urlPattern name="default" enabled="true">
<defaultURLPolicy>true</defaultURLPolicy>
<needBaseURL>true</needBaseURL>
<needRedirectFilter>true</needRedirectFilter>
<needFilterPreprocessing>true</needFilterPreprocessing>
<codecName>docid</codecName>
<actionBinding>#{restHelper.initContextFromRestRequest}</actionBinding>
<documentViewBinding>#{restHelper.documentView}</documentViewBinding>
<newDocumentViewBinding>#{restHelper.newDocumentView}</newDocumentViewBinding>
<bindings>
<binding name="tabId">#{webActions.currentTabId}</binding>
<binding name="subTabId">#{webActions.currentSubTabId}</binding>
</bindings>
</urlPattern>
</extension>
Example 7.8. Example of a url pattern registration
In this example, the "default" pattern uses the above
"docid" codec. Its is set as the default URL policy, so that it's used
by default when caller does not specify a pattern to use. It needs the
base URL: the docid codec only handles the second part if the URL. It
needs redirect filter: it will be used to provide the context
information to store. It needs filter preprocessing: it will be used to
provide the context information to restore. It's using the docid
codec.
The action binding method handles restoring of the context in the Seam context. It takes a document view as parameter. It requires special attention: if you're using conversations (as Nuxeo does by default), you need to annotate this method with a "@Begin" tag so that it uses the conversation identifier passed as a parameter if it's still valid, or initiates a new conversation in other cases. The method also needs to make sure it initializes all the seam components it needs (documentManager for instance) if they have not be in intialized yet.
The additional document view bindings are used to pass document view information through requests. The document view binding maps to corresponding getters and setters. The new document view binding is used to redirect to build GET URL in case request is a POST: it won't have the information in the URL so it needs to rebuild it.
Other bindings handle additional request parameters. In this example, they're used to store and restore tab and sub tab information (getters and setters have to be defined accordingly).
The URL patterns used need to be registered on the authentication service so that they're considered as valid urls. Valid urls will be stored in the request, so that if authentication is required, user is redirected to the url after login.
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.auth.service.PluggableAuthenticationService"
point="startURL">
<startURLPattern>
<patterns>
<pattern>nxdoc/</pattern>
</patterns>
</startURLPattern>
</extension>
Example 7.9. Example of a start url pattern registration
Just the start of the url is required in this configuration.
Contributions are merged: it is not possible to remove an existing start
pattern.
The URL patterns used also need to be handled by the default nuxeo authentication service so that login mechanism (even for anonymous) applies for them.
<extension target="web#STD-AUTH-FILTER">
<filter-mapping>
<filter-name>NuxeoAuthenticationFilter</filter-name>
<url-pattern>/nxdoc/*</url-pattern>
<dispatcher>REQUEST</dispatcher>
<dispatcher>FORWARD</dispatcher>
</filter-mapping>
</extension>
Example 7.10. Example authentication filter configuration
This is a standard filter mapping configuration.
There are some JSF tags and functions helping you to define what kind of GET URL should be displayed on the interface.
<nxd:restDocumentLink document="#{doc}">
<nxh:outputText value="#{nxd:titleOrId(doc)}" />
</nxd:restDocumentLink>
Example 7.11. Example of nxd:restDocumentLink use
In this example, the tag will print a simple link, using the
default pattern, and build the document view using given document model,
using its default view.
Please refer to the tag library documentation available at http://doc.nuxeo.org/5.1/tlddoc/nxd/restDocumentLink.html for additional parameters: it's possible to set the tab, sub tab, and use a specific URL pattern.
Note that you can also use JSF functions to build the GET URL. This is what's done for file links: the function queries the URL policy service to build the URL.
<nxh:outputLink rendered="#{doc.hasSchema('file') and !empty doc.file.content}"
value="#{nxd:fileUrl('downloadFile', doc, 'file:content', doc.file.filename)}">
<nxh:graphicImage value="/icons/download.png" style="vertical-align:middle"
title="#{doc.file.filename}" />
</nxh:outputLink>
Example 7.12. Example of a jsf function use
public static String fileUrl(String patternName, DocumentModel doc,
String blobPropertyName, String filename) {
try {
DocumentLocation docLoc = new DocumentLocationImpl(doc);
Map<String, String> params = new HashMap<String, String>();
params.put(DocumentFileCodec.FILE_PROPERTY_PATH_KEY,
blobPropertyName);
params.put(DocumentFileCodec.FILENAME_KEY, filename);
DocumentView docView = new DocumentViewImpl(docLoc, null, params);
// generate url
URLPolicyService service = Framework.getService(URLPolicyService.class);
if (patternName == null) {
patternName = service.getDefaultPatternName();
}
return service.getUrlFromDocumentView(patternName, docView,
BaseURL.getBaseURL());
} catch (Exception e) {
log.error("Could not generate url for document file", e);
}
return null;
}
Example 7.13. fileUrl method code
Similar methods exist for more complex urls, when handling files in list for instance. Please refer to the list at http://doc.nuxeo.org/5.1/tlddoc/nxd/tld-summary.html.
The Document List Manager provides a service to manage lists of Nuxeo documents.
These lists of documents can have properties such as:
a name, defined by name attribute.
a scope (session or conversation), defined by
<isSession/> tag - it defines if the memory
storage occurs in the Seam session context or in the Seam
conversation context.
a persistence (SQL directory or not present), defined by
<persistent/> tag - the service persists
only the list of the document references, not the real documents;
the lists of document references is persisted in a SQL directory,
which is generic and does not need any configuration.
The lists of documents can be invalidated when Seam events are
raised. This is usefull, for example, for resetting
CURRENT_SELECTION lists when the user change the
current folder or when a new search is performed.
Documents lists can be defined like in the following example
(OSGI-INF/documentslists-contrib.xml):
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.webapp.documentsLists.DocumentsListsService" point="list">
<documentsList name="CLIPBOARD">
<category>CLIPBOARD</category>
<imageURL>/img/clipboard.gif</imageURL>
<title>workingList.clipboard</title>
<defaultInCategory>false</defaultInCategory>
<supportAppends>false</supportAppends>
</documentsList>
<documentsList name="CURRENT_SELECTION">
<events>
<event>folderishDocumentSelectionChanged</event>
<event>searchPerformed</event>
</events>
<isSession>false</isSession>
</documentsList>
</extension>
Example 7.14. Example of documents lists definition
The File Manager provides a service which exposes a simple API in order to create a Nuxeo document model from a passed blob file. Also, this service exposes as extension point which can be used to define plugins.
When the File Manager service is called, it will detect the mime-type of the passed blob, and will try to find a plugin to hadle the creation of a Nuxeo document model based on the detected mime-type.
Typical usages:
txt/html/xml files - a Note document is
created.
image files - a Picture document is created
(if nuxeo-platform-imaging addon is
deployed).
folder - a Folder document is created.
other files - a File document is
created.
Pugins can be defined like in the following example
(OSGI-INF/nxfilemanager-plugins-contrib.xml):
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.filemanager.service.FileManagerService" point="plugins">
<plugin name="Noteplugin"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.filemanager.service.extension.NotePlugin">
<filter>text/plain</filter>
<filter>text/html</filter>
<filter>application/xhtml+xml</filter>
<filter>application/xml</filter>
<filter>text/xml</filter>
</plugin>
</extension>
Example 7.15. Example of File Manager plugins definition
As a client of the File Manager service can be used the browser plugins (for Firefox and Internet Explorer) which can be be downloaded through the links from the default Nuxeo 5 login page. These plugins enable the user to create Nuxeo documents just by dragging & dropping folders/files to the browser. The plugins use a restlet (HTTP API) to send files/folders to the Nuxeo 5 Platform. The restlets use the File Manager serivce in order to create a Nuxeo document from the passed file.
Please refer to the tag library documentation available at http://doc.nuxeo.org/5.1/tlddoc/.
Let our artists go wild on imaginative page layouts.
-- Grant Morrison
Layouts are used to generate pages rendering from an xml configuration.
In a document oriented perspective, layouts are mostly used to display a document metadata in different use cases: present a form to set its schemas fields when creating or editing the document, and present these fields values when simply displaying the document. A single layout definition can be used to address these use cases as it will be rendered for a given document and in a given mode.
In this chapter we will see how to define a layout, link it to a document type, and use it in XHTML pages.
A layout is a group of widgets that specifies how widgets are assembled and displayed. It manages widget rows and has global control on the rendering of each of its widgets.
It's all the same machine, right? The Pentagon, multinational corporations, the police! You do one little job, you build a widget in Saskatoon and the next thing you know it's two miles under the desert, the essential component of a death machine!
-- Holloway, Cube
A widget defines how one or several fields from a schema will be presented on a page. It can be displayed in several modes and holds additional information like for instance the field label. When it takes user entries, it can perform conversion and validation like usual JSF components.
A widget definition includes the mention of its type. Widget types make the association between a widget definition and the jsf component tree that will be used to render it in a given mode.
The layout modes can be anything although some default modes are included in the application: create, edit, view, listing and search.
The widget modes are more restricted and widget types will usually only handle two modes: edit and view. The widget mode is computed from the layout mode following this rule: if the layout is in mode create, edit or search, the widget will be in edit mode. Otherwise the widget will be in view mode.
It is possible to override this behavior in the widget definition, and state that, for instance, whatever the layout mode, the widget will be in view mode so that it only displays read-only values. The pseudo-mode "hidden" can also be used in a widget definition to exclude this widget from the layout in a given mode.
The pseudo mode "any" is only used in layouts and widgets definitions to set up default values.
Custom layouts can be contributed to the web layout service, using its extension point. The layout definition is then available through the service to control how it will be displayed in a given mode.
Some jsf tags have been added to the Nuxeo ECM layout tag library to make then easily available from an xhtml page.
Layouts are registered using a regular extension point on the Nuxeo ECM layout service. Here is a sample contribution.
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.forms.layouts.webapp">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.forms.layout.WebLayoutManager"
point="layouts">
<layout name="heading">
<templates>
<template mode="any">/layouts/layout_default_template.xhtml</template>
</templates>
<rows>
<row>
<widget>title</widget>
</row>
<row>
<widget>description</widget>
</row>
</rows>
<widget name="title" type="text">
<labels>
<label mode="any">label.dublincore.title</label>
</labels>
<translated>true</translated>
<fields>
<field>dc:title</field>
</fields>
<properties widgetMode="edit">
<property name="required">true</property>
</properties>
</widget>
<widget name="description" type="textarea">
<labels>
<label mode="any">label.dublincore.description</label>
</labels>
<translated>true</translated>
<fields>
<field>dc:description</field>
</fields>
</widget>
</layout>
</extension>
</component>
Example 8.1. Sample layout contribution to the layout service.
The above layout definition is used to display the title and the description of a document. Here are its properties:
name: string used as an identifier. In the
example, the layout name is "heading".
templates: list of templates to use for this
layout global rendering. In the example, the layout template in any
mode is the xhtml file at "/layouts/layout_default_template.xhtml".
Please refer to section about custom layout templates for
more information.
rows: definition about what widgets will have
to be displayed on this row. Each row can hold several widgets, and an
empty widget tag can be used to control the alignment. The widget has
to match a widget name given in this layout definition. In the
example, two rows have been defined, the first one will hold the
"title" widget, and the second one will hold the "description"
widget.
widget: a layout definition can hold any
number of widget definitions. If the widget is not referenced in the
rows definition, it will be ignored. Since 5.1.7 and 5.2.0, it will be
searched in the global widget registry before being ignored. This new
feature is a convenient way to share widget definitions between
layouts. Please refer the widget
definition section.
Two widget definitions are presented on the above example. Let's look into the "title" widget and present its properties:
name: string used as an identifier in the
layout context. In the example, the widget name is "title".
type: the widget type that will manage the
rendering of this widget. In this example, the widget type is "text".
This widget type is a standard widget types, more information about
widget types is available here.
labels: list of labels to use for this widget
in a given mode. If no label is defined in a specific mode, the label
defined in the "any" mode will be taken as default. In the example, a
single label is defined for any mode to the "label.dublicore.title"
message. If no label is defined at all, a default label will be used
following the convention:
"label.widget.[layoutName].[widgetName]".
translated: string representing a boolean
value ("true" or "false") and defaulting to "false". When set as
translated, the widget labels will be treated as messages and
displayed translated. In the example, the "label.dublincore.title"
message will be translated at rendering time. Default is true.
fields: list of fields that will be managed
by this widget. In the example, we handle the field "dc:title" where
"dc" is the prefix for the "dublincore" schema. If the schema you
would like to use does not have a prefix, use the schema name instead.
Note that most of standard widget types only handle one field. Side
note: when dealing with an attribute from the document that is not a
metadata, you can use the property name as it will be resolved like a
value expression of the form #{document.attribute}.
properties: list of properties that will
apply to the widget in a given mode. Properties listed in the "any"
mode will be merged with properties for the specific mode. Depending
on the widget type, these properties can be used to control what jsf
component will be used and/or what attributes will be set on these
components. In standard widget types, only one component is used given
the mode, and properties will be set as attributes on the component.
For instance, when using the "text" widget type, every property
accepted by the "<h:inputText />" tag can be set as properties
on "edit" and "create" modes, and every property accepted by the
"<h:outputText />" tag can be set as properties. Properties can
also be added in a given widget mode.
Additional properties can be set on a widget:
helpLabels: list that follows the same
pattern as labels, but used to set help labels.
widgetModes: list of local modes used to
override the local mode (from the layout).
subWidgets: list of widget definitions, as
the widget list, used to describe sub widgets use to help the
configuration of some complex widget types.
Here is a more complex layout contribution that shows the syntax to use for these additional properties:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.forms.layouts.webapp">
<!-- WARNING: this extension point is only available in 5.1.7 and 5.2.0 -->
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.forms.layout.WebLayoutManager"
point="widgets">
<!-- global definition of a widget so that it can be used
in several layouts -->
<widget name="description" type="textarea">
<labels>
<label mode="any">description</label>
</labels>
<translated>true</translated>
<fields>
<field>dc:description</field>
</fields>
<properties widgetMode="edit">
<property name="styleClass">dataInputText</property>
</properties>
</widget>
</extension>
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.forms.layout.WebLayoutManager"
point="layouts">
<layout name="complex">
<templates>
<template mode="any">/layouts/layout_default_template.xhtml</template>
</templates>
<rows>
<row>
<widget>identifier</widget>
</row>
<row>
<!-- reference a global widget -->
<widget>description</widget>
</row>
</rows>
<widget name="identifier" type="text">
<labels>
<label mode="any">label.dublincore.title</label>
</labels>
<translated>true</translated>
<fields>
<field>uid:uid</field>
</fields>
<widgetModes>
<!-- not shown in create mode -->
<mode value="create">hidden</mode>
</widgetModes>
<properties widgetMode="edit">
<!-- required in widget mode edit -->
<property name="required">true</property>
</properties>
<properties mode="view">
<!-- property applying in view mode -->
<property name="styleClass">cssClass</property>
</properties>
</widget>
</layout>
</extension>
</component>
Example 8.2. Sample complex layout contribution to the layout service.
Layouts can also be used to render table rows, as long as their mode (or their widgets mode) do not depend on the iteration variable, as the layout is built when building the JSF tree (too early in the JSF construction mechanism for most iteration variables).
For this usage, columns/column aliases have been defined because they are more intuitive when describing a row in the layout. The layout layout_listing_template.xhtml makes it possible to define new properties to take care of when rendering the table header or columns.
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.forms.layouts.webapp.listing">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.forms.layout.WebLayoutManager"
point="widgets">
<widget name="listing_selection_box_with_current_document"
type="listing_selection_box_with_current_document">
<labels>
<label mode="any"></label>
</labels>
<fields>
<field>selected</field>
<field>data.ref</field>
</fields>
</widget>
<widget name="listing_icon_type" type="listing_icon_type">
<labels>
<label mode="any"></label>
</labels>
<fields>
<field>data</field>
<field>data.ref</field>
<field>data.type</field>
<field>data.folder</field>
</fields>
</widget>
<widget name="listing_title_link" type="listing_title_link">
<labels>
<label mode="any">label.content.header.title</label>
</labels>
<translated>true</translated>
<fields>
<field>data</field>
<field>data.ref</field>
<field>data.dc.description</field>
<field>data.file.content</field>
<field>data.file.filename</field>
</fields>
<properties mode="any">
<property name="file_property_name">file:content</property>
<property name="file_schema">file</property>
</properties>
</widget>
<widget name="listing_modification_date" type="datetime">
<labels>
<label mode="any">label.content.header.modified</label>
</labels>
<translated>true</translated>
<fields>
<field>data.dc.modified</field>
</fields>
<properties widgetMode="any">
<property name="pattern">#{nxu:basicDateAndTimeFormater()}</property>
</properties>
</widget>
</extension>
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.forms.layout.WebLayoutManager"
point="layouts">
<layout name="document_listing_sample">
<templates>
<template mode="any">/layouts/layout_listing_template.xhtml</template>
</templates>
<properties mode="any">
<property name="showListingHeader">true</property>
<property name="showRowEvenOddClass">true</property>
</properties>
<columns>
<column>
<properties mode="any">
<property name="isListingSelectionBoxWithCurrentDocument">
true
</property>
<property name="useFirstWidgetLabelAsColumnHeader">false</property>
<property name="columnStyleClass">iconColumn</property>
</properties>
<widget>listing_selection_box_with_current_document</widget>
</column>
<column>
<properties mode="any">
<property name="useFirstWidgetLabelAsColumnHeader">false</property>
<property name="columnStyleClass">iconColumn</property>
</properties>
<widget>listing_icon_type</widget>
</column>
<column>
<properties mode="any">
<property name="useFirstWidgetLabelAsColumnHeader">true</property>
<property name="sortPropertyName">dc:title</property>
</properties>
<widget>listing_title_link</widget>
</column>
<column>
<properties mode="any">
<property name="useFirstWidgetLabelAsColumnHeader">true</property>
<property name="sortPropertyName">dc:modified</property>
</properties>
<widget>listing_modification_date</widget>
</column>
</columns>
</layout>
</extension>
</component>
Example 8.3. Sample complex layout contribution to the layout service.
Here widgets have been defined globally, as well as their types. New widget types, or simply widget templates, can be made taking example on the existing ones, see http://hg.nuxeo.org/nuxeo/nuxeo-jsf/file/5.3/nuxeo-platform-webapp-base/src/main/resources/OSGI-INF/layouts-listing-contrib.xml.
More information about how to write a listing layout template can be read below.
Some variables are made available to the EL context when using layout or widget templates.
Inside the layout context, the following
global variables are available: value (and equivalent document) +
levels and changing "value" context
layoutValue: represents the value (evaluated) passed in a "nxl:layout" or "nxl:documentLayout" tag attributes.
layoutMode: represents the mode (evaluated) passed in a "nxl:layout" or "nxl:documentLayout" tag attributes.
value: represents the current value as manipulated by the tag: in a "nxl:layout" tag, it will represent the value resolved from the "value" tag attribute ; in a "nxl:widget" tag, it will represent the value resolved from the "value" tag attribute. This value will work with field information passed in the widget definition to resolve fields and subfields. The variable "document" is available as an alias, although it does not always represent a document model (as layouts can aplly to any kind of object).
value_n: represents the current value as manipulated by the tag, as above, excepts it includes the widget level (value_0, value_1, etc...). This is useful when needing to use the value as defined in a parent widget, for instance.
Inside a layout template, the variable "layout" is
available, it make its possible to access the generated layout
object.
Inside a "nxl:layoutRow", or equivalent
"nxl:layoutColumn" tag, the variables "layoutRow" and "layoutRowIndex"
are available to access the generated layout row, and its index within
the iteration over rows. The equivalent "layoutColumn" and
"layoutColumnIndex" variables are also available.
Inside a "nxl:layoutRowWidget", or equivalent "nxl:layoutColumn" widget, the variables "widget" and "widgetIndex" are available to access the generated current widget, and its index in the row or column. The variables added the level information are also available: widget_0, widget_1, ... and widgetIndex_0, widgetIndex_1... This is useful when needed to use the widget as defined in a higher level.
Inside a widget template, some "field_n" variables are available: "field_0" represents the resolved first field value, "field_1" the second value, etc... Since 5.3.1, the variable "field" is available as an alias to "field_0". Since 5.3.2, the widget properties are also exposed for easier resolution of EL expressions: for instance, the variable "widgetProperty_onchange" represents the resolved property with name "onchange".
The complete reference is available at http://doc.nuxeo.org/current/tlddoc/nxl/tld-summary.html.
Layouts can be linked to a document type definition by specifying the layout names:
<layouts mode="any"> <layout>heading</layout> <layout>note</layout> </layouts>
Layouts are defined in a given mode; layouts in the "any" mode will be used as default when no layouts are given in specific modes.
Since 5.2.GA, it is possible to merge layouts when redefining the document type, adding a property append="true":
<layouts mode="any" append="true"> <layout>newLayout</layout> </layouts>
Since 5.3.1, a new mode "listing" can used for folderish documents. Their default content will use the given layouts to make it possible to switch between the different presentations.
Some default listing layouts have been defined, the one used by default when no layout is given in this mode is "document_listing". To remove the layouts defined by default on a document type, override it without listing any modes.
<layouts mode="listing"> </layouts> <layouts mode="listing"> <layout>document_listing</layout> <layout>document_listing_compact_2_columns</layout> <layout>document_icon_2_columns</layout> </layouts>
Layouts with a name that ends with "2_columns" will be displayed on two columns by default. The layout name will be used as a message key for the selector label.
Layouts can be displayed thanks to a series a JSF tags that will query the web layout service to get the layout definition and build it for a given mode.
For instance, we can use the documentLayout tag to
display the layouts of a document:
<div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
xmlns:nxl="http://nuxeo.org/nxforms/layout">
<nxl:documentLayout mode="view" value="#{currentDocument}" />
</div>We can also display a specific layout for a document, even if it is not specified in the document type definition:
<div xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"
xmlns:nxl="http://nuxeo.org/nxforms/layout">
<nxl:layout name="heading" mode="view" value="#{currentDocument}" />
</div>
You can include a layout in a dataTable tag, but cannot make its mode depend on the iteration variable. If you need to do so, recommendation is to use nxu:repeat tag and handle all the <table> works by yourself.
Please refer to the tag library documentation available at http://doc.nuxeo.org/current/tlddoc/nxl/tld-summary.html.
A series of widget types has been defined for the most generic uses cases.
Please refer to the tag library documentation available at http://doc.nuxeo.org/5.1/tlddoc/ for nuxeo jsf tags.
The text widget displays an input text in create or edit mode, with
additional message tag for errors, and a regular text output in any other
mode. Widgets using this type can provide properties accepted on a
<h:inputText /> tag in create or edit mode, and
properties accepted on a <h:outputText /> tag in other
modes.
The int widget displays an input text in create or edit mode, with
additional message tag for errors, and a regular text output in any other
mode. It uses a number converter. Widgets using this type can provide
properties accepted on a <h:inputText /> tag in create
or edit mode, and properties accepted on a <h:outputText
/> tag in other modes.
The secret widget displays an input secret text in create or edit
mode, with additional message tag for errors, and nothing in any other
mode. Widgets using this type can provide properties accepted on a
<h:inputSecret /> tag in create or edit mode.
The textarea widget displays a textarea in create or edit mode, with
additional message tag for errors, and a regular text output in any other
mode. Widgets using this type can provide properties accepted on a
<h:inputTextarea /> tag in create or edit mode, and
properties accepted on a <h:outputText /> tag in other
modes.
The datetime widget displays a javascript calendar in create or edit
mode, with additional message tag for errors, and a regular text output in
any other mode. It uses a date time converter. Widgets using this type can
provide properties accepted on a <nxu:inputDatetime />
tag in create or edit mode, and properties accepted on a
<h:outputText /> tag in other modes. The converter will
also be given these properties.
The template widget displays a template content whatever the mode. Widgets using this type must provide the path to this template; this template can check the mode to adapt the rendering.
Information about how to write a template is given in the custom widget template section.
The file widget displays a file uploader/editor in create or edit
mode, with additional message tag for errors, and a link to the file in
other modes. Widgets using this type can provide properties accepted on a
<nxu:inputFile /> tag in create or edit mode, and
properties accepted on a <nxu:outputFile /> tag in
other modes.
The htmltext widget displays an html text editor in create or edit
mode, with additional message tag for errors, and a regular text output in
other modes (without escaping the text). Widgets using this type can
provide properties accepted on a <nxu:editor /> tag in
create or edit mode, and properties accepted on a <nxu:outputText
/> tag in other modes.
The selectOneDirectory widget displays a selection of directory
entries in create or edit mode, with additional message tag for errors,
and the directory entry label in other modes. Widgets using this type can
provide properties accepted on a <nxd:selectOneListbox
/> tag in create or edit mode, and properties accepted on a
<nxd:directoryEntryOutput /> tag in other modes.
The selectManyDirectory widget displays a multi selection of
directory entries in create or edit mode, with additional message tag for
errors, and the directory entries labels in other modes. Widgets using
this type can provide properties accepted on a
<nxd:selectManyListbox /> tag in create or edit mode,
and properties accepted on a <nxd:directoryEntryOutput
/> tag in other modes.
The list widget displays an editable list of items in create or edit
mode, with additional message tag for errors, and the same list of items
in other modes. Items are defined using sub widgets configuration. This
actually a template widget type whose template uses a
<nxu:inputList /> tag in edit or create mode, and a
table iterating over items in other modes.
Some templating feature have been made available to make it easier to control the layouts and widgets rendering.
A layout can define an xhtml template to be used in a given mode. Let's take a look at the default template structure.
<f:subview
xmlns:c="http://java.sun.com/jstl/core"
xmlns:f="http://java.sun.com/jsf/core"
xmlns:h="http://java.sun.com/jsf/html"
xmlns:nxl="http://nuxeo.org/nxforms/layout"
xmlns:nxu="http://nuxeo.org/nxweb/util"
xmlns:nxd="http://nuxeo.org/nxweb/document"
id="#{layout.id}">
<c:if test="#{layout.mode != 'edit' and layout.mode != 'create'}">
<table class="dataInput">
<tbody>
<nxl:layoutRow>
<tr>
<nxl:layoutRowWidget>
<td class="labelColumn">
<c:choose>
<c:when test="#{widget.translated}">
<h:outputText value="#{messages[widget.label]}" />
<c:if test="#{!empty widget.helpLabel}">
<h:outputText value=" " />
<h:graphicImage value="/icons/info.gif"
title="#{messages[widget.helpLabel]}"
alt="#{messages[widget.helpLabel]}" />
</c:if>
</c:when>
<c:otherwise>
<h:outputText value="#{widget.label}" />
<c:if test="#{!empty widget.helpLabel}">
<h:outputText value=" " />
<h:graphicImage value="/icons/info.gif"
title="#{widget.helpLabel}"
alt="#{widget.helpLabel}" />
</c:if>
</c:otherwise>
</c:choose>
</td>
<td class="fieldColumn" colspan="#{nxu:test(layoutRow.size==1, 2*layout.columns-1, 1)}">
<nxl:widget widget="#{widget}" value="#{value}" />
</td>
</nxl:layoutRowWidget>
</tr>
</nxl:layoutRow>
</tbody>
</table>
</c:if>
<c:if test="#{layout.mode == 'edit' or layout.mode == 'create'}">
<table class="dataInput">
<tbody>
<nxl:layoutRow>
<tr>
<nxl:layoutRowWidget>
<td class="labelColumn">
<c:choose>
<c:when test="#{widget.translated}">
<h:outputText value="#{messages[widget.label]}"
styleClass="#{nxu:test(widget.required, 'required', '')}" />
<c:if test="#{!empty widget.helpLabel}">
<h:outputText value=" " />
<h:graphicImage value="/icons/info.gif"
title="#{messages[widget.helpLabel]}"
alt="#{messages[widget.helpLabel]}" />
</c:if>
</c:when>
<c:otherwise>
<h:outputText value="#{widget.label}"
styleClass="#{nxu:test(widget.required, 'required', '')}" />
<c:if test="#{!empty widget.helpLabel}">
<h:outputText value=" " />
<h:graphicImage value="/icons/info.gif"
title="#{widget.helpLabel}"
alt="#{widget.helpLabel}" />
</c:if>
</c:otherwise>
</c:choose>
</td>
<td class="fieldColumn" colspan="#{nxu:test(layoutRow.size==1, 2*layout.columns-1, 1)}">
<nxl:widget widget="#{widget}" value="#{value}" />
</td>
</nxl:layoutRowWidget>
</tr>
</nxl:layoutRow>
</tbody>
</table>
</c:if>
</f:subview>
Example 8.4. Default layout template
This template is intended to be unused in any mode, so the layout mode is checked to provide a different rendering in "edit" or "create" modes and other modes.
When this template is included in the page, several variables are made available:
layout: the computed layout value ; its mode
and number of columns can be checked on it.
value or document: the
document model (or whatever item used as value).
The layout system integration using facelets features requires that
iterations are performed on the layout rows and widgets. The
<nxl:layoutRow> and <nxl:layoutRowWidget /> trigger these
iterations. Inside the layoutRow tag, two more variables are made
available: layoutRow and
layoutRowIndex. Inside the layoutRowWidget, two more
variables are made available: widget and
widgetIndex.
These variables can be used to control the layout rendering. For instance, the default template is the one applying the "required" style on widget labels, and translating these labels if the widget must be translated. It also makes sure widgets on the same rows are presented in the same table row.
This layout intends to render columns within a table: each line will be filled thanks to a layout configuration. It is only used in view mode. Let's take a look at the default listing template structure.
<f:subview
xmlns:c="http://java.sun.com/jstl/core"
xmlns:f="http://java.sun.com/jsf/core"
xmlns:h="http://java.sun.com/jsf/html"
xmlns:nxl="http://nuxeo.org/nxforms/layout"
xmlns:nxu="http://nuxeo.org/nxweb/util"
xmlns:nxd="http://nuxeo.org/nxweb/document"
id="#{layout.id}">
<c:if test="false">
Layout template applying to an item instance of SelectDataModel named "documents"
Other needed parameters are:
- provider: instance of a ResultProvider to handle sort
- layoutListingStatus: iteration status, used to print table header
matching widget label.
</c:if>
<c:if test="#{showListingHeader and layout.properties.showListingHeader}">
<thead>
<tr>
<nxl:layoutColumn>
<th>
<c:choose>
<c:when test="#{layoutColumn.properties.isListingSelectionBox}">
<h:selectBooleanCheckbox id="#{layoutColumn.widgets[0].name}_header"
onclick="selectDataTablePageForDocument('#{documents.name}', '#{provider.name}', this.checked, '#{listName}', '#{currentDocument.ref}')"
title="#{messages['tooltip.content.select.all']}" />
</c:when>
<c:when test="#{layoutColumn.properties.isListingSelectionBoxWithCurrentDocument}">
<h:selectBooleanCheckbox id="#{layoutColumn.widgets[0].name}_header"
onclick="selectDataTablePage('#{documents.name}', '#{provider.name}', this.checked, '#{listName}')"
title="#{messages['tooltip.content.select.all']}" />
</c:when>
<c:when test="#{layoutColumn.properties.useFirstWidgetLabelAsColumnHeader}">
<c:choose>
<c:when test="#{provider.sortable and !empty layoutColumn.properties.sortPropertyName}">
<h:commandLink immediate="true" action="#{sortActions.repeatSearch}"
id="#{layoutColumn.widgets[0].name}_header_sort">
<f:param name="providerName" value="#{provider.name}" />
<f:param name="sortColumn" value="#{layoutColumn.properties.sortPropertyName}" />
<h:outputText value="#{layoutColumn.widgets[0].label}"
rendered="#{!layoutColumn.widgets[0].translated}" />
<h:outputText value="#{messages[layoutColumn.widgets[0].label]}"
rendered="#{layoutColumn.widgets[0].translated}" />
<c:if test="#{provider.sortInfo.sortColumn == layoutColumn.properties.sortPropertyName}" >
<h:graphicImage value="/icons/arrow_down.gif"
rendered="#{provider.sortInfo.sortAscending}" />
<h:graphicImage value="/icons/arrow_up.gif"
rendered="#{!provider.sortInfo.sortAscending}" />
</c:if>
</h:commandLink>
</c:when>
<c:otherwise>
<h:outputText value="#{layoutColumn.widgets[0].label}"
rendered="#{!layoutColumn.widgets[0].translated}" />
<h:outputText value="#{messages[layoutColumn.widgets[0].label]}"
rendered="#{layoutColumn.widgets[0].translated}" />
</c:otherwise>
</c:choose>
</c:when>
</c:choose>
</th>
</nxl:layoutColumn>
</tr>
</thead>
</c:if>
<c:set var="trStyleClass" value="#{nxu:test(layoutListingStatus.index%2 ==0, 'dataRowEven', 'dataRowOdd')}" />
<tr class="#{nxu:test(layout.properties.showRowEvenOddClass, trStyleClass, '')}">
<nxl:layoutColumn>
<td class="#{layoutColumn.properties.columnStyleClass}">
<nxl:layoutColumnWidget>
<nxl:widget widget="#{widget}" value="#{value}" />
<c:if test="#{layoutColumn.size > 1 and layoutColumn.size > widgetIndex + 1 and widgetIndex > 0}">
<br />
</c:if>
</nxl:layoutColumnWidget>
</td>
</nxl:layoutColumn>
</tr>
</f:subview>
Example 8.5. Listing layout template
As you can see, this layout make it possible to use the first defined widget in a given column to print a label, and maybe translate it. It also relies on properties defined in the layout or layout column properties to handle selectio, column style class, sorting on the provider,...
Any custom template can be defined following this example to handle additional properties to disxplay on the final table header and columns.
The template widget type makes it possible to set a template to use as an include.
Let's have a look at a sample template used to present contributors to a document.
<div xmlns:f="http://java.sun.com/jsf/core"
xmlns:h="http://java.sun.com/jsf/html"
xmlns:a4j="https://ajax4jsf.dev.java.net/ajax"
xmlns:t="http://myfaces.apache.org/tomahawk"
xmlns:nxdir="http://nuxeo.org/nxdirectory">
<t:dataList id="#{widget.id}" var="listItem" value="#{field_0}"
layout="simple" styleClass="standardList">
<h:graphicImage value="/icons/html.png" />
<h:commandLink value="#{listItem}" immediate="true"
action="#{userManagerActions.viewUser}">
<f:param name="usernameParam" value="#{listItem}" />
</h:commandLink>
<br />
</t:dataList>
</div>
Example 8.6. Sample template for a widget
This widget presents the contributors of a document with specific links on each on these user identifier information.
Having a widget type just to perform this kind of rendering would be overkill, so using a widget with type "template" can be useful here.
When this template is included in the page, the
widget variable is made available:
Some rules must be followed when writing xhtml to be included in templates:
Use the widget id as identifier: the widget id is computed to be unique within the page, so it should be used instead of fixed id attributes so that another widget using the same template will not introduce duplicated ids in the jsf component tree.
Use the variable with name following the
field_n pattern to reference field values. For
instance, binding a jsf component value attribute to
#{field_0} means binding it to the first field
definition.
The standard widget type "list" is actually a widget of type "template" using a static template path: /widgets/list_widget_template.xhtml. If this default behavior does not suit your needs, you can simply copy this template, make your changes, and use a widget of type "template" with the new template path.
This template assumes that each element of the list will be displayed using subwidgets definitions.
For instance, to handle a list of String elements, you can use the definition:
<widget name="contributors" type="list">
<fields>
<field>dc:contributors</field>
</fields>
<subWidgets>
<widget name="contributor" type="text">
<fields>
<field></field>
</fields>
</widget>
</subWidgets>
</widget>
The empty field definition in the subwidget is used to specify that each element of the list is itself the element to display.
With nuxeo version <= 5.3.0, to handle a list of complex properties (each entry of the list is a map with keys 'name' and 'email' for instance), you can use the definition:
<widget name="employees" type="list">
<fields>
<field>company:employees</field>
</fields>
<subWidgets>
<widget name="employee" type="template">
<labels>
<label mode="any"></label>
</labels>
<fields>
<field></field>
</fields>
<properties mode="any">
<property name="template">
/widgets/complex_widget_template.xhtml
</property>
</properties>
<!-- subwidgets for complex -->
<subWidgets>
<widget name="name" type="text">
<fields>
<field>name</field>
</fields>
</widget>
<widget name="email" type="text">
<fields>
<field>email</field>
</fields>
</widget>
</subWidgets>
</widget>
</subWidgets>
</widget>
With nuxeo version > 5.3.0, to handle a list of complex properties (each entry of the list is a map with keys 'name' and 'email' for instance), you can use the definition:
<widget name="employees" type="list">
<fields>
<field>company:employees</field>
</fields>
<subWidgets>
<widget name="employee" type="template">
<labels>
<label mode="any"></label>
</labels>
<properties mode="any">
<property name="template">
/widgets/complex_list_item_widget_template.xhtml
</property>
</properties>
<!-- subwidgets for complex -->
<subWidgets>
<widget name="name" type="text">
<fields>
<field>name</field>
</fields>
</widget>
<widget name="email" type="text">
<fields>
<field>email</field>
</fields>
</widget>
</subWidgets>
</widget>
</subWidgets>
</widget>
A builtin template has been added to handle complex properties. It is available at /widgets/complex_widget_template.xhtml. It assumes that each element of the complex property will be displayed using subwidgets definitions.
To handle a complex property (the value is a map with keys 'name' and 'email' for instance, you can use the definition:
<widget name="manager" type="template">
<fields>
<field>company:manager</field>
</fields>
<properties mode="any">
<property name="template">
/widgets/complex_widget_template.xhtml
</property>
</properties>
<subWidgets>
<widget name="name" type="text">
<fields>
<field>name</field>
</fields>
</widget>
<widget name="email" type="text">
<fields>
<field>email</field>
</fields>
</widget>
</subWidgets>
</widget>
A builtin template has been added to handle sublists: the original "list" widget is equivalent to a widget of type "template" using the file "/widgets/list_widget_template.xhtml". To handle the sublist, this template needs to be changed. The file "list_subwidget_template.xhtml" is available for it since nuxeo version 5.2 GA.
To handle a sublist property, you can use take example on this definition:
<widget name="employees" type="list">
<fields>
<field>company:employees</field>
</fields>
<subWidgets>
<widget name="employee" type="template">
<labels>
<label mode="any"></label>
</labels>
<properties mode="any">
<property name="template">
/widgets/complex_list_item_widget_template.xhtml
</property>
</properties>
<!-- subwidgets for complex -->
<subWidgets>
<widget name="phoneNumbers" type="template">
<fields>
<field>phoneNumbers</field>
</fields>
<properties mode="any">
<property name="template">
/widgets/list_subwidget_template.xhtml
</property>
</properties>
<subWidgets>
<widget name="phoneNumber" type="text">
<label mode="any"></label>
<fields>
<field></field>
</fields>
</widget>
</subWidgets>
</widget>
</subWidgets>
</widget>
</subWidgets>
</widget>
Custom widget types can be added to the standard list thanks to another extension point on the web layout service.
Here is a sample widget type registration:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.forms.layout.MyContribution">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.forms.layout.WebLayoutManager"
point="widgettypes">
<widgetType name="customtype">
<handler-class>
org.myproject.MyCustomWidgetTypeHandler
</handler-class>
<property name="foo">bar</property>
</widgetType>
</extension>
</component>
Example 8.7. Sample widget type contribution to the layout service.
The custom widget type class must follow the org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.forms.layout.facelets.WidgetTypeHandler interface.
Additional properties can be added to the type registration so that the same class can be reused with a different behavior given the property value.
The widget type handler is used to generate facelet tag handlers dynamically taking into account the mode, and any other properties that can be found on a widget.
The best thing to do before writing a custom widget type handler is to go see how standard widget type handlers are implemented, as some helper methods can be reused to ease implementation of specific behaviors.
Layouts can be used with other kind of objects than documents.
The field definition has to match a document property for which setters and getters will be available, or the "value" property must be passed explicitely for the binding to happen. Depending on the widget, other kinds of bindings can be done.
Events and event listeners have been introduced at the Nuxeo core level to allow pluggable behaviors when managing documents (or any kinds of objects of the site).
Whenever an event happens (document creation, document modification, relation creation, etc...), an event is sent to the event service that dispatches the notification to its listeners. Listeners can perform whatever action when receiving an event.
A core event has a source which is usually the document model currently being manipulated. It can also store the event identifier, that gives information about the kind of event that is happening, as well as the principal connected when performing the operation, an attached comment, the event category, etc..
Events sent to the event service have to follow the
org.nuxeo.ecm.core.api.event.CoreEvent
interface.
A core event listener has a name, an order, and may have a set of event identifiers it is supposed to react to. Its definition also contains the operations it has to execute when receiving an interesting event.
Event listeners have to follow the
org.nuxeo.ecm.core.listener.EventListener
interface.
Several event listeners exist by default in the nuxeo platform, for instance:
DublincoreListener: it listens to
document creation/modification events and sets some dublincore
metadata accordingly (date of creation, date of last modification,
document contributors...)
DocUidGeneratorListener: it listens to
document creation events and adds an identifier to the document if
an uid pattern has been defined for this document type.
DocVersioningListener: it listens to
document versioning change events and changes the document version
numbers accordingly.
Event listeners can be plugged using extension points. Here are some examples of event listeners registration.
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="DublinCoreStorageService" version="1.0.0">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.listener.CoreEventListenerService"
point="listener">
<listener name="dclistener"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.dublincore.listener.DublinCoreListener"
order="120" />
</extension>
</component>
Example 9.1. DublincoreListener registration sample
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.uidgen.service.UIDGeneratorService">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.listener.CoreEventListenerService"
point="listener">
<listener name="uidlistener"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.uidgen.corelistener.DocUIDGeneratorListener"
order="10">
<event>documentCreated</event>
</listener>
</extension>
</component>
Example 9.2. UIDGenerator listener registration sample with event filtering
The only thing needed to add an event listener is to declare
its name and its class. Sometimes the order in which listeners are called
matters so an integer order can be set to control it. A filtering on event
ids can be done when registering it too, though the notification method
could handle it too.
For instance, the UIDgenerator service will only be notified when the event service receives a document creation event.
Since release of Nuxeo EP version 5.0 M3, events involving documents send the document model as source of the event. They used to send the document itself, which was wrong and has been changed in a compatible way.
Old school event listeners should still work ok for now, but should be migrated soon as the compatibility may introduce bugs and will be removed shortly.
To migrate your event listener, make it implement the empty
interface
org.nuxeo.ecm.core.listener.DocumentModelEventListener,
and make it deal with a DocumentModel instead of a
Document as event source.
If your event listener does not care about the source, or the event it deals with is not a document, you do not have to do anything.
To add an event, you have to create it and then notify listeners passing the even to the listener service. Here is a sample code on how to do it:
CoreEvent coreEvent = new CoreEventImpl(eventId, source, options,
getPrincipal(), category, comment);
CoreEventListenerService service = NXCore.getCoreEventListenerService();
if (service != null) {
service.notifyEventListeners(coreEvent);
} else {
throw new ClientException("Can't get Event Listener Service");
}
Events that are fired at the core level are forwarded to a JMS topic called NXPMessage.
This forwarding is done by a dedicated CoreEventListener (called
JMSEventListener contributed by the
nuxeo-platform-events-core bundle).
In order to be sure that when an JMS event is received the associated DocumentModel is available, all document oriented messages that may occur at core level are forwarded to the JMS topic when the session repository is saved (ie: when data is committed).
In some cases, depending on own the Core API is used, some messages can be duplicated within the same transaction (like modifying several times the same document), the JMSEventListener marks all duplicated messages before sending them to JMS, its JMS messages receiver to choose to process or not the duplicated messages.
During the forwarding on the JMS Topic, the coreEvents are converted to EventMessage. The main difference is that the EventMessage does not contains the DocumentData (ie: all schemas and fields are unloaded), this is done in order to avoid overloading JMS.
The simplest way to add a JMS message listener is simply to define a Message Driven Bean that is bound to the NXPMessage Topic.
Here is a simple example a the definition of such a MDB :
@MessageDriven(activationConfig = {
@ActivationConfigProperty(propertyName = "destinationType", propertyValue = "javax.jms.Topic"),
@ActivationConfigProperty(propertyName = "destination", propertyValue = "topic/NXPMessages"),
@ActivationConfigProperty(propertyName = "providerAdapterJNDI",
propertyValue = "java:/NXCoreEventsProvider"),
@ActivationConfigProperty(propertyName = "acknowledgeMode", propertyValue = "Auto-acknowledge") })
@TransactionManagement(TransactionManagementType.CONTAINER)
public class NXAuditMessageListener implements MessageListener {
private static final Log log = LogFactory.getLog(NXAuditMessageListener.class);
@TransactionAttribute(TransactionAttributeType.REQUIRED)
public void onMessage(Message message) {
try {
final Serializable obj = ((ObjectMessage) message).getObject();
if (!(obj instanceof DocumentMessage)) {
log.debug("Not a DocumentMessage instance embedded ignoring.");
return;
}
DocumentMessage docMessage = (DocumentMessage) obj;
String eventId = docMessage.getEventId();
log.debug("Received a message with eventId: " + eventId);
...
The DocumentMessage is a subclass of the
DocumentModel.
An important point to remember is that the MDB is executed asynchronously in a dedicated thread:
there is no JAAS Session established: you can not access the repository without this
the DocumentMessage is not bound to an
existing CoreSession: you can not use the
DocumenMessage to do lazy loading (ie:
DocumentMessage.getProperty())
So, in order to extract some document oriented properties of the document associated to the event, you must:
Establish a JAAS Session
get a connected DocumentModel using the
DocumentRef provided by the
DocumentMessage
Here is a code sample for this:
LoginContext lc;
CoreSession session;
String repositoryName = docMessage.getRepositoryName();
try {
log.debug("trying to connect to ECM platform");
lc = Framework.login();
session = Framework.getService(RepositoryManager.class).getRepository(repositoryName).open();
DocumentModel connectedDoc = session.getDocument(docMessage.getRef());
...
} finally {
if (session != null)
CoreInstance.getInstance().close(session.getSessionId())
if (lc != null)
lc.logout();
}
The notification framework provides a way to notify the users regarding different events as they happen in the system.
A notification is an alert that is sent to some users when an event takes place in the system (e.g. a document is created or deleted, a document is modified or published, a comment was entered, etc.).
A notification is defined by following attributes:
name: must be unique
channel: email, SMS, Jabber, etc.
events: a series of events to which it responds
template: is a file in which is stored the text that is sent to an user - it may be dynamic
In order to define a notification, one must declare all these attributes in a contribution file.
The channel is the communication channel used by the notification service to send alerts(notifications) to users.
In order to define a new channel (by default only email channel is
used) the ChannelNotificator interface must
be implemented.
It has 2 methods:
isInterestedInNotification(Notification
docMessage) usually checks if the channel is
right.
sendNotification(DocumentMessage
docMessage) sends the actual notification. For now only
email notification channel is implemented.
A notification must be defined in a xml file like the default
notification-contrib.xml that is used by
default.
Default defined notification may be disabled by setting
enabled="false".
In order to define a new notification one must place a definition like this one in his contribution file :
<notification name="Modification" channel="email" enabled="true"
availableIn="workspace" autoSubscribed="false"
template="modif" subject="Document modified"
subjectTemplate="subjectModif"
label="label.nuxeo.notifications.modif">
<event name="documentModified"/>
<event name="contentSubdocumentModified"/>
</notification>
As you may see above a notification must declare a list of events to
which it reacts. In our case documentModified
contentSubdocumentModified.
Also a notification must have a name that must be unique within the application. A label must also be specified for i18n.
The attribute enabled is used to enable / disable specific notifications.
The attribute autoSubscribed is set to true
when we want that a notification is sent to all concerned users. In this
case within the eventInfo map there must be loaded also
the users that are concerned. For example if we want that some users (ex:
administrators or workflow manager) to get a notification each time a task
is assigned to them, we must use autoSubscribed="true" and
put the usernames of all users in the eventInfo of the
event under the key recipients.
The attribute availableIn is used in order to
restrict the scope of a notification. For example if we want to define a
notification that is triggered each time the document is modified, then it
would not be used inside a section, because sections contain documents
that cannot be modified, only published. So in order to hide this
notification inside a section, we specify
availableIn="workspace". The accepted values are
workspace, section and
all.
The template attribute specifies the name of a template that will be
used for generating the body of the email(notification). This name is
associated with a file using another extension point like this:
<template name="modif" src="templates/modif.ftl"
/>.
Inside a *.ftl file there may be inserted some
dynamic parts like the document name, the user triggering the event, etc.
Any data that one wishes to put inside the body of the email, or its
subject, he must put that data in the eventInfo map
under a unique key. Then inside the template file that data will be
displayed using ${key}.
For the email notification a subject is used. This subject is a
string but is also dynamic following the same rules as the body inside the
template files. For those who wants more parameterizable subject, you can
use the subjectTemplate attribute : it specifies the name of the template
used for generating the subject and into which you can write dynamic
content. As for the template attribute, the association between the name
and the file is done using an extension point like <template
name="subjectModif" src="templates/subjectModificationTemplate.ftl"
/>.
If both subject and subjectTemplate attributes are filled, the subjectTemplate attribute will be used to generate the subject.
Note that if you are writing an HTML based template it will be
advised to use HTML encoded letters when there is accentuated letters (in
French for example "é" will be "é"). The
htmlEscape method is provided while writing
templates to transform accentuated characters in data from the
eventInfo map.
<p> Your comment here : ${htmlEscape(key)} </p>
indexableDocType extension pointresource extension pointThis chapter presents the architecture of the indexing and search service in Nuxeo EP 5.
For obvious performance and volume considerations, the search service doesn't index all the content of the application, nor does it provide the full content in search results. This must be specified in the configuration, along with what to do with the data.
The search service configuration is done by the standard Nuxeo
Runtime extension point system. The target is
org.nuxeo.ecm.core.search.service For a complete
example, check the default configuration file:
nuxeo-platform-search-core/OSGI_INF/nxsearch-contrib.xml
(from Nuxeo EP sources).
The main concepts are Resource and Field. A Resource holds several fields. It has a name and a prefix, which is used, e.g, in queries. Resources are supposed to be unsplittable, but they are usually aggregated. It's up to the backend to decide how to handle that aggregation; this goes beyond the scope of the present documentation.
At this point the search service handles documents only, so it's safe to say that documents correspond to aggregates of resources, and resources correspond to schemas. In the future, there'll be more types of resources.
The core types of documents to index have to be registered against this extension point, in which the schemas to index are bound to each document type.
Here's an example demonstrating the available patterns:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.search.service.SearchServiceImpl"
point="indexableDocType">
(...)
<indexableDocType name="DocType1" indexAllSchemas="true"/>
<indexableDocType name="DocType2" indexAllSchemas="true">
<exclude>unwanted_schema</exclude>
</indexableDocType>
<indexableDocType name="DocType3">
<resource>indexed_schema</resource>
</indexableDocType>
</extension>
In this example, the Search service will index all schemas for
documents of type DocType1, all schemas except
unwanted_schema for type
DocType2 and only
indexed_schema for type
DocType3.
Each ot these indexable schemas will be processed according to the corresponding indexable schema resource if available in the configuration, or to the default one .
In particular, the behavior of data from a given schema is homogeneous across all document types.
This extension point is used to declare an indexable resource. In
5.1M2, the only provided indexable resource type is the
schema resource type. but the logic will stay the
same for future types. Recall that resources are made of
fields. Here's an example of schema indexing
resource, without fields details.
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.search.service.SearchServiceImpl"
point="resource" type="schema">
<resource name="dublincore" prefix="dc" indexAllFields="true">
<excludedField>issued</excludedField>
<field name="title" (...) />
</resource>
<resource name="book" prefix="bk" type="schema">
<field name="barcode" (...) />
</resource>
</extension>
The type specified that the resource is a
docuemnt schema resource.
The name and prefix
attributes are mandatory. They should match the ones from the
schema extension point of
org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.TypeService as in,
e.g.:
<schema name="dublincore" prefix="dc" src="schema/dublincore.xsd"/> <schema name="common" src="schema/common.xsd" />
A
missing prefix in the core configuration as in the
common schema declaration in the example above will
default to the schema name.
The prefix is important, since all subsequent references to the
fields (in queries and raw search results) take the
prefix:fieldName form.
Fields behavior is designed to be uniform across the different kinds of resources.
The field type tells the search engine how to process the field. This is a mandatory, case-insensitive, attribute.
The following table summarizes the available types. The listed Java classes are guaranteed to work. The backend might implement more converting facilities.
| Type | Java classes | Comment |
|---|---|---|
| Keyword | String | Meant for technical non binary strings such as vocabulary keys, user identifiers etc. Equality matches are guaranteed to be exact. |
| Text | String | Upon indexation, these fields are tokenized and analyzed to support fulltext queries. |
| Path | org.nuxeo.common.utils.Path, String | Dedicated to |
| Date | java.util.Calendar | For date and time indexing |
| Int | int | |
| Builtin | Reserved for internal use |
At indexing time, the contents of text fields goes through the process of tokenization and analysis, whose main goal is to provide fulltext search capabilities, usually at the expense of exact matches.
Tokenization means converting the textual content in a stream of words (tokens). During the analysis step, this raw stream is altered to better suit the needs of fulltext searches. It is for example common practice to strip the stream of so-called stop words (most commons words in the language) and to degrade accented characters. One can apply further linguistical processing, such as stemming or synonym analysis.
The name of analyzer to use on a given text field is specified
through the analyzer attribute. The Search Service
acts as a pure forwarder, sending the raw text to the backend, along
with the specified analyzer name.
The default value for the analyzer attribute is
default. The attribute is simply ignored for other field
types.
To enable queries on a given field, one must set the
indexed attribute to
true.
To make it possible to provide the full field value in search
results, one must set the stored attribute to
true. One must keep in mind that the purpose is
to present the user a limited yet sufficient set of information
along with search results, i.e, in a swifter way than having to
fetch it from the core, and not to duplicate the content in the
search databases.
Multivalued fields have to be flagged by setting the
multiple attribute to
true.
Depending on field types and on the processing that's been
done by the backend, the possibility to use the field value as a
sort key might require some additional resources. To force the
backend to give this extra effort, set the
sortable attribute to
true.
The binary attribute is used to mark binary fields, e.g, to trigger conversions (not used in 5.1M2).
For a schema resource that isn't explicitely declared and
nevertheless used, for instance because of an
indexAllSchemas statement, a default
configuration is inferred, with the prefix read from the Core
configuration, and fields as below, i.e., as if there was an
indexAllFields="true" attribute.
auto-configured fields are unstored
If there is only one relevant type from the table above, it is applied.
The multiple attribute is properly
set.
auto-configured String fields get the
keyword type.
<resource name="dublincore" prefix="dc" indexAllFields="true" type="schema">
<field name="title" analyzer="default"
stored="true" indexed="true" type="Text"
binary="false" sortable="true"/>
</resource>
Example 11.1. Relying on automatic field configuration on all fields but one
The search service exposes the searchQuery
method as a unique entry point. The method takes as input an instance of
ComposedNXQuery, which encapsulates the parsed NXQL
query and a SearchPrincipal instance that will be
checked against the security indexes, and paging information for the
results.
Although the input of searchQuery is an
already parsed NXQL statement, we'll use NXQL query strings in the sequel
for clarity. NXQL query strings are parsed by the method
parse of the static
org.nuxeo.ecm.core.query.sql.SQLQueryParser
class.
Within NXQL requests, references to fields values have to follow the "prefix:fieldName" scheme, where prefix and fieldName have been specified through the configuration extension points (recall that for automatically indexed schema resources, the prefix defaults to the one defined in the schema definition).
Literals (constants) follow the JCR specifications. Notably:
String literals have to be enclosed in single quotes
Lists have to be enclosed in parenthesizes
Recall that "dc" is the prefix for the "dublincore" schema.
SELECT * FROM Document WHERE dc:title='Nuxeo book' ORDER BY dc:created DESC
Example 11.2. Sample NXQL queries
Most WHERE statements behave as described in
the JCR specification, which is itself based on general SQL. Instead of
covering every aspect of NXQL, in the current state of this documentation,
we'll focus on differences and behaviors that might appear to be counter
intuitive.
Although the Search Service is meant to provide an unified abstraction on the tasks of indexing and querying, text fields have to be somewhat an exception. Indeed, search engines have very different capabilities, depending on provided analyzers. They are nonetheless all expected to provide a direct syntax for full text searches, that an end user can use from, e.g., an input box on a web page. Given the very special kind of constraint that indexing a text field represents, it's not guaranteed that exact matches are supported.
See Section 11.4.4, “Text fields behavior” from the documentation of the Compass backend to get a more concrete view on this (with examples).
The backend uses the closest thing to exact matches it
supports to treat = predicates.
The syntax of LIKE predicates is
backend dependent. It follows the backend's full text query
syntax
The CONTAINS from JCR is
not supported. Use a
LIKE statement on the main full-text field
(see Section 11.3.2.3, “Pseudo fields”).
On a multi-valued field, the = operator is
true if the right operand belongs to the set of field values. The
IN operator is true if the intersection between the
set of field values and the right operand is non empty.
SELECT * FROM Document WHERE dc:contributors = 'sally'
Example 11.3. Finding documents on which user sally contributed
SELECT * FROM Document WHERE dc:contributors IN ('sally', 'harry')
Example 11.4. Finding documents on which user sally or harry contributed
This behavior is in conformance with the JCR specification, which states it the following more general terms:
In the WHERE clause the comparison operators function the same way they do in XPath when applied to multi-value properties: if the predicate is true of at least one value of a multi-value property then it is true for the property as whole.
The following fields are available on all document resources. They don't correspond to document fields and aren't configurable, that's why they're called pseudo-fields.
The names of these fields are synchronized with constants from the
class BuiltinDocumentFields. Any use from java
code should rely on these.
| Constant | Field name | Description |
|---|---|---|
| FIELD_FULLTEXT | ecm:fulltext | The default full-text aggregator (string) |
| FIELD_DOC_PATH | ecm:path | The document path (string) |
| FIELD_DOC_NAME | ecm:name | The document name (last component of the path, string) |
| FIELD_DOC_URL | ecm:url | The document URL (string) |
| FIELD_DOC_REF | ecm:id | The DocumentRef as fetched from the
core |
| FIELD_DOC_PARENT_REF | ecm:parentId | The parent DocumentRef |
| FIELD_DOC_TYPE | ecm:primaryType | The Core type (string) |
| FIELD_DOC_FACETS | ecm:mixinType | The facets (multiple) |
| FIELD_DOC_LIFE_CYCLE | ecm:currentLifeCycleState | The document life cycle (string) |
| FIELD_DOC_VERSION_LABEL | ecm:versionLabel | The version label (string) |
| FIELD_DOC_IS_CHECKED_IN_VERSION | ecm:isCheckedInVersion | A boolean (0 or 1) that states if document is a frozen version (not live nor proxy) |
| FIELD_DOC_IS_PROXY | ecm:isProxy | A boolean (0 or 1) that states if document is a proxy (targetting other documents) |
| FIELD_DOC_REPOSITORY_NAME | ecm:repositoryName | The document repository name (string) |
Compass is a popular wrapper around Apache Lucene. This plugin allows to use it as a backend for the Search Service.
Compass configuration is split in a master XML configuration file and one or several mapping files. The latter specifies the treatments that resources and fields (properties in Compass terminology), while the former is to be used to tune JTA transactions, data sources, and to register configuration of analyzers and converters.
The contents of these files are covered in great details in the Compass 1.1 documentation. In the present documentation, we'll focus on integration matters with the Nuxeo Search Service.
All Compass specific configuration files are relative to the classpath of the compass plugin. A default configuration is provided for Nuxeo EP 5 WebApp. To customize it, one sadly has to put the configuration at the right place within the backend's JAR.
Here is an ant fragment to perform this in a JBoss context,
assuming that the Search Service has already been installed in the
application server and that the server's deployment directory is stored
in the deploy.dir property.
<copy todir="${deploy.dir}/nuxeo.ear/system/nuxeo-platform-search-compass-plugin-1.0.0-SNAPSHOT.jar"
overwrite="true" failonerror="false">
<fileset dir="src/main/resources">
<include name="myfile.xml" />
</fileset>
</copy>
The backend's JAR is included as a directory in
nuxeo.ear during the Maven build of
nuxeo-platform-ear for this single purpose. This is
prone to change in the future.
The Compass backend itself is registered against the Search
Service through the searchEngineBackend extension
point of
org.nuxeo.ecm.core.search.service.SearchServiceImpl.
Your component can use the configurationFileName
element to specify a path to the master configuration file, like this:
<searchEngineBackend name="compass" default="true"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.search.backend.compass.CompassBackend">
<configurationFileName>/mycompass.cfg.xml</configurationFileName>
</searchEngineBackend>
The default path is /compass.cfg.xml.
Compass supports several storage possibilities, called connections in Compass configuration objects. The configuration is done trough a Nuxeo Runtime extension point and possibly within the Compass master configuration file. The extension point always takes precedence over the Compass file, but can be used to fall back to Compass file, that offers currently more possibilities.
The target is
org.nuxeo.ecm.core.search.backend.compass.CompassBackend,
and the point is connection. Contributions are made
of a single XML element; the latest one wins.
To set the connection to a file system Lucene store, put a
file element in the contribution, and set the
path attribute to the target location. If the path
doesn't start with /, it will be interpreted as
being relative to Nuxeo Runtime's home directory, e.g,
/opt/jboss/server/default/data/NXRuntime in the
default Nuxeo EP installation on JBoss.
Other connection types, notably JDBC, are defined by the Compass
configuration file, one has to put the default XML
element in the contribution, like this:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.search.backend.compass.CompassBackend"
point="connection">
<default/>
</extension>
The default connection is a relative file system one, hosted in
the nxsearch-compass sub directory of Nuxeo
Runtime's home.
The master configuration file holds the definition and configuration of analyzers: a lookup name gets associated to an analyzer type and options. The Compass backend makes Compass use directly the name declared in the Search Service as the lookup name, configuration, therefore one has to ensure here that all of these do exist in the Compass configuration.
Together with the registration itself comes the configuration of analyzers. For instance, an analyzer discarding stop words might be given the full list of stop words.
Compass comes with a two predefined analyzers:
default and search. You can
reconfigure them as well.
See the relevant part in Compass documentation for details and sample configurations.
Lucene only knows about character strings. Therefore, typed data such as dates and integers must be converted in strings to get into Lucene and back. Compass provides helpers for this and the Compass backend uses them directly.
In the master configuration file, one register available
converters in the form of a lookup name and a Java class. Lots of
converters are already registered by default, covering most basic types.
The compass.cfg.xml file shipping with the Compass
backend redefines one (the date converter).
For the time being, a part of the Search Service configuration has to be duplicated in the Compass mappings XML file.
Currently, the Compass backend can't force Compass to use a given
converter and/or analyzer on a given field. It must
therefore be specified in the mappings file, which is itself loaded from
the master configuration file. The default name for this file is
nxdocument.cpm.xml.
Here's a sample, inspired from the mappings file provided with the backend.
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<!DOCTYPE compass-core-mapping PUBLIC
"-//Compass/Compass Core Mapping DTD 1.0//EN"
"http://www.opensymphony.com/compass/dtd/compass-core-mapping.dtd">
<compass-core-mapping>
<resource alias="nxdoc"
sub-index="nxdocs"
analyzer="default"
all="false">
<resource-id name="nxdoc_id"/>
<resource-property name="dc:created" converter="date"
store="yes" index="un_tokenized" />
<resource-property name="dc:title" analyzer="french" />
</resource>
</compass-core-mapping>
In Compass' terminology, fields are called properties. The name of the Compass property corresponding to a Nuxeo indexed field coincides with the field's prefixed name.
Some important remarks:
Start from the current mappings file shipping with your version of the compass backend and keep it up to date afterwards
Don't change anything besides
resource-property elements.
An exception to the above rules: you may experiment with the
sub-index attribute, according to your
performance needs.
Follow the instructions from Section 11.4.1.1, “Configuration files location”
Everything in this part applies to fields that have explicitly been declared with a "text" type through the extension point. Anything that's meant for text fields in the mappings configuration files will be ignored if the field has another type.
At indexing time, the text field is analyzed using the analyzer from the Compass configuration file regardless what has been configured through the Search Service extension point.
Equality statements in WHERE clauses are transformed into the closest thing that Lucene can provide on an analyzed field, namely a phrase query.
On the other hand, LIKE clauses are directly fed to Lucene's
QueryParser. To search documents whose title
starts with "nux", one may write
SELECT * FROM Document WHERE dc:title LIKE 'nux*'
The following two statements are equivalent. The second one is the QueryParser syntax for phrase queries.
... WHERE dc:title='Nuxeo Book' ... WHERE dc:title LIKE '"Nuxeo Book"'
Lucene's QueryParser syntax is really
powerful, you can specify how close two words can be, apply fine grained
boosts for the relevance ordering, and more. The only restriction you
have on LIKE statements for text fields within the Compass backend is
the choice of field. In other words, the colon character is
escaped.
You would need to query date fields, like creation, modification or expiration date, that are provided by Nuxeo Platform. In these cases, it would be interesting to use BETWEEN clauses, associated with DATE keyword, which allows to convert strings as date values.
Documents created in the first term of 2008:
... WHERE dc:created BETWEEN DATE '2008-01-01' AND DATE '2008-03-31'
Documents modified in may 2007:
... WHERE dc:modified BETWEEN DATE '2007-05-01' AND DATE '2007-05-31'
Example 11.5. Date queries
You should be aware of the following trap in Lucene queries: purely negative queries don't match anything, even if they are themselves nested in a boolean query that has positive statements. The Compass backend uses the standard way to circumvent this limitation, provided that the negative aspect can be seen from the NXQL structure, i.e., not enclosed in a Lucene QueryParser literal.
Queries that won't return anything:
... WHERE dc:title LIKE '-book' ... WHERE dc:title LIKE 'nuxeo' AND dc:title LIKE '-book'
Queries that should work as intended (the last three being equivalent):
... WHERE dc:title NOT LIKE 'book' ... WHERE dc:title LIKE 'nuxeo' AND dc:title NOT LIKE 'book' ... WHERE dc:title LIKE 'nuxeo' AND NOT dc:title LIKE 'book' ... WHERE dc:title LIKE '+nuxeo -book'
Example 11.6. Negative queries
The Nuxeo theme notion is wider than the notion attached to the same word in portal concepts. Indeed, the Nuxeo Theme defines all the look and feel of your webapp: composition, layout and graphical appearance. Nuxeo does not aim at developing a portal, i.e. a JSR 168 container, but it authorizes a kind of page and widget management to get some flexibility in the design you want to give to your webapp. The tool to enable you manage those aspects is "Nuxeo Theme editor", that you can make appear with the following command when you are in Nuxeo Web app:
To switch to Nuxeo Theme editor click on the 'Themes Management' link in the user services panel.

Alternatively, you can type 'shift'+'alt'+'t'. To switch to Nuxeo Theme editor with Mozilla / Firefox < 2.0 type 'alt'+'t'

One special fragment is the Facelet region: in the properties tab of the editor you can specify the name of a faces to directly integrate it into your page.
To use Nuxeo theme editor, you need to understand its model. The main entity is the theme. Then a theme may have many pages. For each pages, you define a layout (a canvas) and add a list of fragments (widget). The graphical editor uses a tab (theme) and sub-tab (page) system. When you want to add a new page or theme click on "+" at the end of the tab list. For a page you have three possible views:
wysiwyg: you can move the widgets and evaluate the rendering.
fragments: to put the widgets in their placeholder (= a cell). You can put many widgets in a place holder.
layout: you can create new rows and divide the rows into cells, and specify the width of each cell (just edit the nn% on the screen).
You can click on a fragment to edit it. When you edit a fragment you have a multitab editor to specify:
custom properties of the fragment: e.g. the text if it is a text fragment,
the graphical object (the widget) associated
the style of each HTML object that composes the widget.
then you specify the perspective in which the fragment can be seen.
One special fragment is the Facelet region: in the properties tab of the editor you can specify the name of a faces to directly integrate it into your page.
Nuxeo Editor is done for not having to understand the underground
mechanism. Yet it can be good to understand the background to better
leverage the tool and its possibilities. The Nuxeo component that manages
the customization and extension of Nuxeo EP 5 look and feel is:
org.nuxeo.theme.services.ThemeService. To register a
whole theme (widget, style, layout etc. ...) you need to contribute to the
extension point "theme" this way:
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.theme.services.ThemeService" point="themes">
<theme> <src>META-INF/nxthemes-setup.xml</src>
</theme> </extension>In the trunk, the default theme is in the webapp project. Having a look inside enables us to discover the main features.
The file starts with the elements declaration, we define the pages, the rows (section markup), the cells and the fragments in the cells.
<theme name="default"> <layout>
<page name="default"> <section> <cell> <fragment
type="generic fragment" /> </cell> <cell> <fragment
type="generic fragment" /> </cell> <cell> <fragment
type="generic fragment" /> </cell> </section>
</page> <page name = ...> . . . </page>
</layout> </theme> All this markup refers
to an Element subtype in the java model:
PageElement,
CellElement... The fragment element, the one that gives the widget
oriented capacity to Nuxeo is typed: we have in the default distribution
"generic fragment", "action fragments". A typed fragment returns a model
to be displayed and edit in the edit mode of the fragments. This model
is often (but not always) what we can see in the "properties" tab of the
fragment editor. For now there is in the default Nuxeo
distribution:
generic fragment (empty model)
textual fragment
region fragment
action fragment
The fragment can also receive a perspective attribute that
specifies in which perspective it will be displayed (the fourth tab in
the fragment editor). You can then propose to Nuxeo user the same kind
of experience you have in Eclipse. The perspective are specified in the
perspective extension point of !ThemeService component.
Then, once you declared all the elements, you can format them through different axes :
their layout
their rendering (their view)
their style
To do this, you put, inside the <theme>
markup, children markup from those types:
layout --> <layout element =
...>
rendering --> <widget element
...>
style --> <style element =
...>
Those 3 markups use the attribute element to get the reference to which element of your skeleton they will be applied:
element="page[3]/section[3]/cell[1]"
Indeed each element is rendered by a view.
<widget element="page"> <view>page
frame</view> </widget> This view is
defined like this (with another extension point of !ThemeService: views):
<view
name="page frame"> <element-type>page</element-type>
<format-type>widget</format-type>
<class>org.nuxeo.theme.jsf.views.JSFView</class>
<template>nxthemes/jsf/widgets/page-frame.xml</template>
</view> We can see that a view is associated to
an element type. The element types contributions should be reserved to
Nuxeo only (one should manage with existing ones). The template markup
gives the html/faces/text code to be used for rendering the view.
Notice that in the view, you can access the fragment model data
through the EL call nxthemesInfo.model.
<h:outputText escape="false"
value="#{nxthemesInfo.model.body}" />
The layout properties are given like this (still under the <theme> markup) :
<layout element="page[3]/section[3]/cell[1]">
<width>50%</width> <padding>20px</padding>
<margin>0</margin> </layout>This enables to adjust the position of the fragments inside.
Then comes the style properties. Again, you
apply them to an element:
<style
element="page[1]/section[3]/cell[1]|page[3]/section[4]/cell[1]">
<selector path=""> <color>#757575</color>
<border-style>solid none none none</border-style>
<border-color>#003366</border-color>
<border-width>1px</border-width> <background> #FFF
url(/nuxeo/img/gray_gradient.gif) top left repeat-x
</background> <padding>5px 15px 5px 5px</padding>
</selector> <selector path="div">
<font-size>9px</font-size> </selector>
</style>The selector specifies the markup to which the defined style is applied. The style definition used is the one of the deeper upper-element that has a style definition specified. To be exhaustive, we need to present the filter system (TODO)
We have seen how to define a theme. Now we need to see how a theme is applied. More precisely, how do I manage the choice of the page I will display? In fact, the Nuxeo Theme framework proposes many ways to specify the theme applied to the webapp for a given view:
with a cookie
with a request parameter (?theme= ...)
with an association between a JSF view id and a theme
So how to manage priority when more than one parameter is passed
to the framework? The !ThemeService component
has another extension point to achieve this: the negotiation extension point. Not only can it be
used to select a theme but it also works with other objects as we will
see later.
<negotiation object="theme"
strategy="nuxeo5">
<scheme>org.nuxeo.theme.jsf.negotiation.theme.RequestParameter</scheme>
<scheme>org.nuxeo.theme.jsf.negotiation.theme.CookieValue</scheme>
<scheme>org.nuxeo.theme.jsf.negotiation.theme.ViewId</scheme>
<!-- local theme (specific to nuxeo5) -->
<scheme>org.nuxeo.ecm.webapp.theme.LocalTheme</scheme>
<scheme>org.nuxeo.theme.jsf.negotiation.theme.DefaultTheme</scheme>
</negotiation>As we can see in the example, the negotiation point defines the order in which the different methods for obtaining the current theme information are applied. This negotiation feature also applies to other Nuxeo Theme objects like the engine, the mode, the perspective.
Engine and filter are two notions that work together. An engine is the combination of different filters, and a filter is a "sub-unit" of rendering. So the engine is the global renderer of your web app. From the elements skeleton, it will generate the graphical appearance, passing each element through different black boxes, depending on the type of the element. Here is the definition of the default engine of Nuxeo.
<engine name="default"> <renderer
element="theme"> <filter>add widget</filter>
<filter>collect xmlns</filter> </renderer>
<renderer element="page"> <filter>add widget</filter>
<filter>set layout</filter> <filter>set
style</filter> </renderer> <renderer
element="section"> <filter>add widget</filter>
<filter>set layout</filter> <filter>set
style</filter> </renderer> <renderer element="cell">
<filter>add widget</filter> <filter>set
layout</filter> <filter>set style</filter>
</renderer> <renderer element="fragment">
<filter>control fragment visibility</filter>
<filter>add widget</filter> <filter>set
style</filter> <filter>write fragment tag</filter>
</renderer> </engine> The engine, that you
register in the ThemeService component through the
"engines" extension point lets you add for each type of element some
"filters" that will do some work around the markup content at rendering
time. Nuxeo already uses filters like the style fitler, that put the
style definition you chose, the layout filter, the "drag'n drop"
filter... One interesting use of the filters is illustrated with the
Nuxeo Theme editor: when you type shift+alt+t, the
display changes and you are in the WYSIWYG Nuxeo theme editor. But all
the components that make your page are still here, they just look a bit
different because, some different filters are used. For instance,
because of the drag'n drop filter presence, you can move the
fragments.
Graphical components may need some external resources such as CSS or JavaScript libraries. Nuxeo theme has an embedded resource management system that at rendering time automatically computes the list of the files needed for rendering a page. Resources are served using gzip compression when supported by the browser. JavaScript resources are also compressed using Dojo's ShrinkSafe. Finally all files of a same type (.css or .js) are concatenated. This reduces the number of individual downloads and it enables to manage dependencies between resources. Indeed, at declaration time you can specify the dependencies for a given resource:
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.theme.services.ThemeService" point="resources">
<resource name="controls.js">
<path>nxthemes/jsf/scripts/scriptaculous/controls.js</path>
<require>effects.js</require>
<require>prototype.js</require> </resource>
</extension>
Then, when you register the view associated to an element, you specify the resources it needs:
<view name="nuxeo5
clip board"> <format-type>widget</format-type>
<class>org.nuxeo.theme.jsf.views.JSFView</class>
<template>incl/user_clipboard.xhtml</template>
<resource>dragdrop.js</resource>
</view>
The last concept you need to know about to completely control the look and feel of your application is the application extension point:
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.theme.services.ThemeService" point="applications">
<application root="/nuxeo"> <negotiation>
<strategy>nuxeo5</strategy>
<default-engine>default</default-engine>
<default-theme>default/default</default-theme>
<default-perspective>default</default-perspective>
</negotiation> <resource-caching>
<lifetime>36000</lifetime> </resource-caching>
<view id="/create_relation_search_document_popup.xhtml">
<theme>default/popup</theme> </view> <view
id="/user_dashboard.xhtml">
<theme>default/user_dashboard</theme> </view> <view
id="/view_calendar.xhtml">
<perspective>view_calendar</perspective> </view>
<view id="/print.xhtml">
<perspective>print</perspective> </view>
</application> </extension>As you can see in the example, an application is associated to a web-app root context. There you specify the strategy (a negotiation grouping feature), the default engine, the default theme and perspective. You also specify the caching policy and there you also declare the JSF view id / theme association that we went through earlier in this tutorial.
Eventually, all theme and styling work will be done in the Theme
Editor. For now, we have to use both the editor and the file theme-default.xml in nuxeo/nuxeo-platform/nuxeo-platform-webapp-core/src/main/resources/META-INF/.
What can be done in the editor: page layout, widget moving, fragment styling, page/section/cell preset borders and backgrounds
What must be done in theme-default.xml :
commons styles and their inheritance
In addition to the theme-default.xml come
palettes: a bunch of presets for colors, backgrounds, fonts and other css
attributes. Nuxeo EP 5 supports text palettes and GIMP/Photoshop palettes
(for the colors).
When you add images or modify theme-default.xml, you have to redeploy your Nuxeo
5.
In case of doubt, try using the editor, because the produced code is much cleaner and compliant than anything you would write manually :-)
The file theme-default.xml is
structured as follows:
Pages and their layout
widgets in pages
definition of predefined styles (using preset values from palettes)
cell and fragments styling
In theme-contrib.xml we have our theme
called:
<!-- themes --> <extension
target="org.nuxeo.theme.services.ThemeService" point="themes">
<theme> <src>META-INF/theme-default.xml</src>
</theme> </extension>
In the editor, in Manage Themes tab, it gives:

This file is deployed in JBoss. If you modify the theme using the
editor all changes will be lost so think of downloading the theme to
your Desktop, to replace the theme-default.xml in your local copy of Nuxeo EP
5.
A good way of working with this file is to add your working copy
in theme-contrib.xml. It is possible in
NXThemes to load several themes and page.
Add your file(s) in themes-contrib.xml,
for example:
<theme>
<src>file:///path/to/sources/nuxeo/nuxeo-platform/nuxeo-platform-webapp-core/src/main/resources/META-INF/nxthemes-setup.xml</src>
</theme>
After a redeployment, in the 'Manage Themes' section we now have a theme that can be reloaded directly from the file-system!
Starting from there, here are two ways of developing smartly:
Edit your theme-default.xml in
Eclipse (or in your XML editor) then go to theme editor, in Manage
Themes tab and click "Reload" on your local file: you can directly
see the changes you made in the XML source.
Modify the theme inside the editor, then go to Manage Themes tab and click on "Save" action. All changes will be saved in the file.
The palettes are in nuxeo/nuxeo-platform/nuxeo-platform-webapp-core/src/main/resources/themes.palettes/
They are called in nuxeo/nuxeo-platform/nuxeo-platform-webapp-core/src/main/resources/OSGI-INF/theme-contrib.xml:
<!-- Styles presets --> <extension
target="org.nuxeo.theme.services.ThemeService" point="presets">
<palette name="Nuxeo default fonts"
src="themes/palettes/nxfonts.properties" category="font" />
<palette name="Nuxeo psd colors"
src="themes/palettes/nxcolors.aco" category="color" />
<palette name="Nuxeo default backgrounds"
src="themes/palettes/nxbackgrounds.properties" category="background"
/> </extension>
There are 3 default palettes:
nxbackgrounds.properties that
specifies the banner's css background and the shadow under
it
nxcolors.aco that contains nuxeo
default colors in a photoshop palette format
nxfonts.properties that contains
default css font, small and 4 levels of titles
The easiest way for you to customize yout Nuxeo EP 5 app is to modify the existing palettes!
For example, in nxfonts.properties
change the line
default=11px Verdana, Arial,
sans-serif
to
default=12px Courier, serif
Then all the fonts of the app will be changed to your new value!
We advise you to add your own color palette.
Currently in nxthemes-setup.xml we have a
style named default buttons, which is defined as:
<style name="default buttons"> <selector
path="input.button">
<background>url(/nuxeo/img/button_1.gif) 0 0 repeat-x
#e3e6ea</background> <font preset="default (Nuxeo default
fonts)"/> <margin>5px 10px 10px 0px</margin>
<color>#000</color>
<border-style>solid</border-style>
<border-width>1px</border-width>
<border-color>#ccc #666 #666 #ccc</border-color>
<padding>2px 5px 2px 5px</padding>
<cursor>pointer</cursor> </selector> <selector
path="input.button:hover"> <color preset="white (Nuxeo psd
colors)"/> <font preset="default (Nuxeo default fonts)"/>
<background>url(/nuxeo/img/button_2.gif) 0 0 repeat-x
#3f89ef</background> <border-color>#0099ff #0066cc
#0066cc #0099ff</border-color>
<border-style>solid</border-style>
<border-width>1px</border-width> </selector>
<selector path="input.button[disabled=disabled],
input.button[disabled=disabled]:hover">
<color>#c1c1c1</color> <font preset="default (Nuxeo
default fonts)"/>
<background>url(/nuxeo/img/button_disabled.gif) 0 0 repeat-x
#ebeff4</background> <border-color>#ccc #999 #999
#ccc</border-color> <cursor>default</cursor>
<border-style>solid</border-style>
<border-width>1px</border-width> </selector>
</style>
We can see that:
a style that does not apply to an element is name
inside this style, several HTML attributes/classes are called
palette preset are called, such as the font attribute
Predefined styles are also a good way of efficiently changing the look of your application because you need to change the CSS only once!
Later in the file we notice that the 'user services' fragment takes the default buttons style preset:
<!-- user services --> <style
element="page[1]/section[1]/cell[2]/fragment[1]|page[3]/section[1]/cell[2]/fragment[1]"
inherit="default buttons">
It means that the styles defined for the buttons will be applied to the 'user services' fragment (user links and search in the banner).
As we explained earlier, layout editing and local styling can be done in the theme editor.
In the editor, click on an element you want to style, click "Edit" in the Menu. Here we chose the RSS/Atom link button

Access the Style tab.

The existing selectors are on the right in the Properties box, otherwise move the mouse over the preview area and click on an element to create a CSS selector path.

We choose to change the small font preset to the default one. As you see, the Style picker shows all the palettes and all the presets are rendered. We remove the background property for the syndication links button and add a preset background-color, our RSS/Atom button is all changed now:

When you are done with managing your theme you might want to save it to your local copy of Nuxeo. Just go in the Manage Themes tab, download the custom theme to your computer, then put it in your repository.
Congratulation, you have just customized the Nuxeo EP theme!
You may want to modify an existing fragment to customize your
project, let's say you want your compagny logo instead of Nuxeo EP's
and you own corporate links in the footer. We won't create &
declare new fragments (as we saw, fragments and their resources are
defined in theme-contrib.xml), we'll use
the default-ones to override Nuxeo EP's, considering you have your own
project using Nuxeo EP default as made in the sample
project.
Here are the steps do to so:
copy your logo (let's call it corporate_logo.gif) to your.project/src/main/resources/nuxeo.war/img
copy and paste logo.xhtml and
footer.xhtml from nuxeo/nuxeo-platform/nuxeo-platform-webapp/src/main/resources/nuxeo.war/incl
to your.project/src/main/resources/nuxeo.war/incl
so it's overridden when doing your
ant.
This is a general principle for
nuxeo.war folder. The contents of the
/img/ folder of your app are the contents
of Nuxeo EP's default .../nuxeo.war/img folder. Every specific
resource in your.project/.../nuxeo.war/img come in
addition of what is already in default .../nuxeo.war/img if non-existing there
with same filename, or come instead of what is existing in default
.../nuxeo.war/img if same
filename.
edit logo.xhtml that currently
contains
<div xmlns:h="http://java.sun.com/jsf/html"
xmlns:ui="http://java.sun.com/jsf/facelets"
xmlns:f="http://java.sun.com/jsf/core"
xmlns:t="http://myfaces.apache.org/tomahawk"
xmlns:nxu="http://nuxeo.org/nxweb/util"
xmlns:c="http://java.sun.com/jstl/core" class="menu">
<div> <h:form> <h:commandLink
action="#{navigationContext.goHome()}"> <h:graphicImage
value="#{logoHelper.logoURL}" alt="Nuxeo EP 5" width="194"
height="99" /> </h:commandLink> </h:form>
</div> </div>
change the line <h:graphicImage
value="#{logoHelper.logoURL}" alt="Nuxeo EP 5" width="194"
height="99" /> for something like <img src="/nuxeo/img/corporate_logo.gif"
alt="My corporate logo" /> and save your changes
edit footer.xhtml that currently
contains
<div xmlns:h="http://java.sun.com/jsf/html"
xmlns:ui="http://java.sun.com/jsf/facelets"
xmlns:f="http://java.sun.com/jsf/core"> <ui:insert
name="footer"> Copyright
<f:verbatim>&copy;</f:verbatim> 2006 Nuxeo.
Visit <!-- --> <h:outputLink
value="http://www.nuxeo.com"> <h:outputText
value="nuxeo.com" /> </h:outputLink> | Get <!--
--><h:outputLink
value="http://www.nuxeo.com/en/services/support/">
<h:outputText value="support" /> </h:outputLink> |
Join the <!-- --> <h:outputLink
value="http://www.nuxeo.org/sections/community">
<h:outputText value="community" /> </h:outputLink>
<br /> <h:form> <h:outputText
value="#{messages['label.selectLocale']}" />
<h:selectOneMenu value="#{localeSelector.localeString}"
styleClass="langSelect"> <f:selectItems
value="#{localeSelector.supportedLocales}"/>
</h:selectOneMenu> <h:commandButton
action="#{localeSelector.select}"
value="#{messages['command.changeLocale']}" class="langSubmit"
/> </h:form> </ui:insert>
</div
Change from Copyright to <br /> by something like <a href="http://yoursite.com">My Corporate
Site</a>, save your changes
Do an ant on your projet, rerun your jboss and appreciate the changes...
Congratulation, you have just customized some Nuxeo EP fragments!
We rarely create a theme from scratch. Since the default, popup and dashboards are used in every projetc, we usually duplicate the default theme and use it as a basis. But let's pretend you want to add a completely new and custom theme to your project. Here are the steps.
We assume you are familiar to Nuxeo EP way and have read the theme section above!
Log in as Administrator
Go to the Manage Theme view
Click the plus tab, right next to the themes names

Define a (smart) name. We are currently using "cuztom"

You have a page called "default", toy with it, add sections and fragments, color the areas so your theme is not empty. We recommend to add a region fragment with name set as body so the main content is displayed.

You can add pages to your theme by clicking the plus tab next to the pages names.
Go the manage themes tab
Download your theme

You will need a few files/declaration to set your new theme.
What we will be overriding in our project is /nuxeo/nuxeo-platform/nuxeo-platform-webapp-core/src/main/resources/.
Make sure that:
You copied your downloaded cuztom theme (or duplicate
default nuxeo theme, of course) to /yourproject/.../resources/themes
META-INF/META-INF.MF calls your
OSGI-INF/cuztom-theme-contrib.xml as
component
You have a OSGI-INF/cuztom-theme-contrib.xml with
inside:
The component name set is your
project's
The theme extension point
contains your JBoss's theme file
The theme extension point
contains your local theme file (if you plan to work that
way)

The applications extension point
set the negociation with your theme as default
theme

If you have specific fragments or palettes, declare them there.
Your new theme is now part of your project and set as default. Your can ant your app and re-run JBoss.
A good way to name your files is to add your project's name
before the current Nuxeo filename. For an example, theme-contrib.xml may become cuztom-theme-contrib.xml.
Your now all set to create your own design with all the tools explained in the sections above:
Create fragments, declare theme in cuztom-theme-contrib.xml and drop them into
your pages using the theme editor
Add palettes, declare them, call them in your theme-file.
Create generic style and make elements inherit of it.
Modify the structure of the pages with the theme editor and save your changes in your local files
Add style in your local files and reload the theme using the Manage Theme tab in theme editor.
Add images and icon into your nuxeo.war folder and call them in the style, in the actions-contrib.xml or in the fragments.
Have fun and send us your creations!
In Nuxeo EP, the concept of a user is needed for two main reasons:
Users are needed for authentication and authorization to work,
Users have associated information that can be displayed, for instance to display someone's full name or email address.
An abstraction, the
UserManager, centralizes the
way a Nuxeo EP application deals with users (and groups of users). The
UserManager is queried by the platform's
LoginModule when someone
attemps to authenticate against the framework. It is also queried whenever
someone wants the last name or email of a user for instance, or to get all
users having "Bob" as their first name.
The data about users (login, password, name, personal information, etc.) and the groups they belong to (simple members, or any application-related group) are managed through the Directory abstraction. This means that users can be stored in LDAP or in SQL, and groups can be part of the LDAP tree or stored in a SQL table, but the application doesn't see the difference as long as the connectors are configured properly.
To define a new source of users, you simply define a new directory (or redefine the default one) to use different connection and schema information. We'll use an example where the pet-name field is added to the user's schema.
Let's start by defining our new schema in a
.xsd file, myuser.xsd:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<xs:schema xmlns:xs="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema"
xmlns:nxs="http://www.nuxeo.org/ecm/schemas/user"
targetNamespace="http://www.nuxeo.org/ecm/schemas/user">
<xs:include schemaLocation="base.xsd" />
<xs:element name="username" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="password" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="email" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="firstName" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="lastName" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="company" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="petName" type="xs:string" />
<!-- inverse reference -->
<xs:element name="groups" type="nxs:stringList" />
</xs:schema>
This schema must be registered in an extension point:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.TypeService" point="schema"> <schema name="myuser" src="myuser.xsd" /> </extension>
TODO: FG groups
The user schema can now be used when we define a new directory,
MyUserDirectory. A SQL directory is defined like
this:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.directory.sql.SQLDirectoryFactory" point="directories"> <directory name="MyUserDirectory"> <schema>myuser</schema> <idField>username</idField> <passwordField>password</passwordField> <dataSource>java:/nxsqldirectory</dataSource> <table>myusers</table> <dataFile>myusers.csv</dataFile> <createTablePolicy>on_missing_columns</createTablePolicy> <references> <inverseReference field="groups" directory="groupDirectory" dualReferenceField="members" /> </references> </directory> </extension>
And we can provide a file, myusers.csv, which
will be used to populate the table if it is missing:
username, password, firstName, lastName, company, email, petName bob,bobSecret,Bob,Doe,ACME,bob@example.com,Lassie
If instead we had used an LDAP directory, the configuration would look like:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.directory.ldap.LDAPDirectoryFactory" point="servers"> <server name="default"> <ldapUrl>ldap://localhost:389</ldapUrl> <bindDn>cn=manager,dc=example,dc=com</bindDn> <bindPassword>secret</bindPassword> </server> </extension> <extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.directory.ldap.LDAPDirectoryFactory" point="directories"> <directory name="MyUserDirectory"> <schema>myuser</schema> <idField>username</idField> <passwordField>password</passwordField> <server>default</server> <searchBaseDn>ou=people,dc=example,dc=com</searchBaseDn> <searchClass>inetOrgPerson</searchClass> <searchScope>subtree</searchScope> <fieldMapping name="username">uid</fieldMapping> <fieldMapping name="password">userPassword</fieldMapping> <fieldMapping name="email">mail</fieldMapping> <fieldMapping name="firstName">givenName</fieldMapping> <fieldMapping name="lastName">sn</fieldMapping> <fieldMapping name="company">o</fieldMapping> <references> <inverseReference field="groups" directory="groupDirectory" dualReferenceField="members" /> </references> </directory> </extension>
Detailed configuration on SQL Directories and LDAP Directories can be found in Chapter 19, Directories and Vocabularies.
We can now tell the UserManager that this directory should be the one to use when dealing with users:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.usermanager.UserService" point="userManager">
<userManager>
<users>
<directory>MyUserDirectory</directory>
<emailField>email</emailField>
<searchFields append="true">
<searchField>username</searchField>
<searchField>firstName</searchField>
<searchField>lastName</searchField>
<searchField>myfield</searchField>
</searchFields>
</users>
</userManager>
</extension>
This configuration also sets the email field, and search fields that have to be queried when searching for users. It can be completed to set the anonymous user, add virtual users, or set the group directory properties.
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.usermanager.UserService" point="userManager">
<userManager>
<users>
<directory>MyUserDirectory</directory>
<emailField>email</emailField>
<searchFields append="true">
<searchField>username</searchField>
<searchField>firstName</searchField>
<searchField>lastName</searchField>
<searchField>myfield</searchField>
</searchFields>
<listingMode>tabbed</listingMode>
<anonymousUser id="Anonymous">
<property name="firstName">Anonymous</property>
<property name="lastName">User</property>
</anonymousUser>
<virtualUser id="MyCustomAdministrator" searchable="false">
<password>secret</password>
<property name="firstName">My Custom</property>
<property name="lastName">Administrator</property>
<group>administrators</group>
</virtualUser>
<virtualUser id="MyCustomMember" searchable="false">
<password>secret</password>
<property name="firstName">My Custom</property>
<property name="lastName">Member</property>
<group>members</group>
<group>othergroup</group>
<propertyList name="listprop">
<value>item1</value>
<value>item2</value>
</propertyList>
</virtualUser>
<virtualUser id="ExistingVirtualUser" remove="true" />
</users>
<defaultAdministratorId>Administrator</defaultAdministratorId>
<!-- available tags since 5.3.1 -->
<administratorsGroup>myAdmins</administratorsGroup>
<administratorsGroup>myOtherAdmins</administratorsGroup>
<disableDefaultAdministratorsGroup>
false
</disableDefaultAdministratorsGroup>
<!-- end of available tags since 5.3.1 -->
<userSortField>lastName</userSortField>
<userPasswordPattern>^[a-zA-Z0-9]{5,}$</userPasswordPattern>
<groups>
<directory>somegroupdir</directory>
<membersField>members</membersField>
<subGroupsField>subgroups</subGroupsField>
<parentGroupsField>parentgroup</parentGroupsField>
<listingMode>search_only</listingMode>
</groups>
<defaultGroup>members</defaultGroup>
<groupSortField>groupname</groupSortField>
</userManager>
</extension>The anonymous user represents a special kind of virtual user, used to represent users that do not need to log in the application. This feature is used in conjunction with the anonymous plugin (see next chapter).
Virtual users can be added for authentication. Properties are used to create the appropriate model as if user was retrieved from the user directory. This is a convenient way to add custom users to the application when the user directory (using LDAP for instance) cannot be modified. Virtual users with the "administrators" group will have the same rights than the default administrator.
The default administrator id can be set either to an existing or virtual user. This user will be virtually member of all the groups declared as administrators (by default, the group named "administrators" is used).
Since 5.3.1, new administrators groups can be added using the "administratorsGroup" tag. Several groups can be defined, adding as many tags as needed. The default group named "administrators" can be disabled by setting the "disableDefaultAdministratorsGroup" to "true" (defaults to false): only new defined administrators groups will then be taken into account. Note that disabling this default group should be done after setting up custom rights in the repository, as this group is usually defined as the group of users who have all permissions at the root of the repository. Administrators groups will have access to vocabulary management, theme editor,... They are also added local rights when blocking permissions to avoid lockups.
The group directory can also be configured to define the groups hierarchy and the contained users. This configuration has to match the user directory inverse references.
Every authenticated user will be placed in the configured default group. This group does not need to exist in the backing group directory, nor does any other group listed in virtual users configuration.
Since 5.2.GA, The default users and groups management pages use some layouts for display. If you're using custom schemas and would like to display your new fields, or would like to change the default display, you can redefine layouts names "user" and "group" by contributing new layouts with this name. See chapter Chapter 8, Layouts for more information about layouts configuration.
Do not forget to put "<require>org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.forms.layouts.webapp</require>" on your layout contribution to ensure default layouts are overridden.
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.forms.layouts.usersAndGroups">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.forms.layout.WebLayoutManager"
point="layouts">
<layout name="user">
<templates>
<template mode="any">/layouts/layout_default_template.xhtml</template>
</templates>
<rows>
<row>
<widget>username</widget>
</row>
<row>
<widget>firstname</widget>
</row>
<row>
<widget>lastname</widget>
</row>
<row>
<widget>company</widget>
</row>
<row>
<widget>email</widget>
</row>
<row>
<widget>firstPassword</widget>
</row>
<row>
<widget>secondPassword</widget>
</row>
<row>
<widget>passwordMatcher</widget>
</row>
<row>
<widget>groups</widget>
</row>
</rows>
<widget name="username" type="text">
<labels>
<label mode="any">username</label>
</labels>
<translated>true</translated>
<fields>
<field schema="user">username</field>
</fields>
<widgetModes>
<mode value="create">edit</mode>
<mode value="editPassword">hidden</mode>
<mode value="any">view</mode>
</widgetModes>
<properties widgetMode="edit">
<property name="required">true</property>
<property name="styleClass">dataInputText</property>
<property name="validator">
#{userManagerActions.validateUserName}
</property>
</properties>
</widget>
<widget name="firstname" type="text">
<labels>
<label mode="any">firstName</label>
</labels>
<translated>true</translated>
<fields>
<field schema="user">firstName</field>
</fields>
<widgetModes>
<mode value="editPassword">hidden</mode>
</widgetModes>
<properties widgetMode="edit">
<property name="styleClass">dataInputText</property>
</properties>
</widget>
<widget name="lastname" type="text">
<labels>
<label mode="any">lastName</label>
</labels>
<translated>true</translated>
<fields>
<field schema="user">lastName</field>
</fields>
<widgetModes>
<mode value="editPassword">hidden</mode>
</widgetModes>
<properties widgetMode="edit">
<property name="styleClass">dataInputText</property>
</properties>
</widget>
<widget name="company" type="text">
<labels>
<label mode="any">company</label>
</labels>
<translated>true</translated>
<fields>
<field schema="user">company</field>
</fields>
<widgetModes>
<mode value="editPassword">hidden</mode>
</widgetModes>
<properties widgetMode="edit">
<property name="styleClass">dataInputText</property>
</properties>
</widget>
<widget name="email" type="text">
<labels>
<label mode="any">email</label>
</labels>
<translated>true</translated>
<fields>
<field schema="user">email</field>
</fields>
<widgetModes>
<mode value="editPassword">hidden</mode>
</widgetModes>
<properties widgetMode="edit">
<property name="required">true</property>
<property name="styleClass">dataInputText</property>
</properties>
</widget>
<widget name="firstPassword" type="secret">
<labels>
<label mode="any">password</label>
</labels>
<translated>true</translated>
<fields>
<field schema="user">password</field>
</fields>
<widgetModes>
<mode value="create">edit</mode>
<mode value="editPassword">edit</mode>
<mode value="any">hidden</mode>
</widgetModes>
<properties widgetMode="edit">
<property name="required">true</property>
<property name="styleClass">dataInputText</property>
</properties>
</widget>
<widget name="secondPassword" type="secret">
<labels>
<label mode="any">password.verify</label>
</labels>
<translated>true</translated>
<widgetModes>
<mode value="create">edit</mode>
<mode value="editPassword">edit</mode>
<mode value="any">hidden</mode>
</widgetModes>
<properties widgetMode="edit">
<property name="required">true</property>
<property name="styleClass">dataInputText</property>
</properties>
</widget>
<widget name="passwordMatcher" type="template">
<labels>
<label mode="any"></label>
</labels>
<translated>true</translated>
<widgetModes>
<mode value="create">edit</mode>
<mode value="editPassword">edit</mode>
<mode value="any">hidden</mode>
</widgetModes>
<properties widgetMode="edit">
<!-- XXX: depends on firstPassword and secondPassword widget names -->
<property name="template">
/widgets/user_password_validation_widget_template.xhtml
</property>
</properties>
</widget>
<widget name="groups" type="template">
<labels>
<label mode="any">label.userManager.userGroups</label>
</labels>
<translated>true</translated>
<fields>
<field schema="user">groups</field>
</fields>
<widgetModes>
<mode value="edit">
#{nxu:test(currentUser.administrator, 'edit', 'view')}
</mode>
<mode value="editPassword">hidden</mode>
</widgetModes>
<properties widgetMode="any">
<property name="template">
/widgets/user_suggestion_widget_template.xhtml
</property>
<property name="userSuggestionSearchType">GROUP_TYPE</property>
</properties>
</widget>
</layout>
<layout name="group">
<templates>
<template mode="any">/layouts/layout_default_template.xhtml</template>
</templates>
<rows>
<row>
<widget>groupname</widget>
</row>
<row>
<widget>members</widget>
</row>
<row>
<widget>subgroups</widget>
</row>
</rows>
<widget name="groupname" type="text">
<labels>
<label mode="any">label.groupManager.groupName</label>
</labels>
<translated>true</translated>
<fields>
<field schema="group">groupname</field>
</fields>
<widgetModes>
<mode value="create">edit</mode>
<mode value="any">hidden</mode>
</widgetModes>
<properties widgetMode="any">
<property name="required">true</property>
<property name="styleClass">dataInputText</property>
</properties>
</widget>
<widget name="members" type="template">
<labels>
<label mode="any">label.groupManager.userMembers</label>
</labels>
<translated>true</translated>
<fields>
<field schema="group">members</field>
</fields>
<properties widgetMode="any">
<property name="template">
/widgets/user_suggestion_widget_template.xhtml
</property>
<property name="userSuggestionSearchType">USER_TYPE</property>
</properties>
</widget>
<widget name="subgroups" type="template">
<labels>
<label mode="any">label.groupManager.groupMembers</label>
</labels>
<translated>true</translated>
<fields>
<field schema="group">subGroups</field>
</fields>
<properties widgetMode="any">
<property name="template">
/widgets/user_suggestion_widget_template.xhtml
</property>
<property name="userSuggestionSearchType">GROUP_TYPE</property>
</properties>
</widget>
</layout>
</extension>
</component>
Example 13.1. Sample layout contribution for users and groups management.
Before 5.2.GA, you need to redefine the deprecated layout
configuration of two standard document types, User
and UserCreate (which are used in the default user
management screens and backing beans) to add our new field:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.types.TypeService" point="types">
<type id="User" coretype="User">
<label>User</label>
<icon>/icons/user.gif</icon>
<default-view>view_user</default-view>
<layout>
<widget schemaname="myuser" fieldname="username"
jsfcomponent="h:inputTextReadOnly" />
<widget schemaname="myuser" fieldname="firstName"
jsfcomponent="h:inputText" />
<widget schemaname="myuser" fieldname="lastName"
jsfcomponent="h:inputText" />
<widget schemaname="myuser" fieldname="email"
jsfcomponent="h:inputText" />
<widget schemaname="myuser" fieldname="company"
jsfcomponent="h:inputText" />
<widget schemaname="myuser" fieldname="petName"
jsfcomponent="h:inputText" />
</layout>
</type>
<type id="UserCreate" coretype="UserCreate">
<label>UserCreate</label>
<icon>/icons/user.gif</icon>
<default-view>create_user</default-view>
<layout>
<widget schemaname="myuser" fieldname="username"
jsfcomponent="h:inputText" required="true" />
<widget schemaname="myuser" fieldname="password"
jsfcomponent="h:inputSecret" required="true" />
<widget schemaname="myuser" fieldname="firstName"
jsfcomponent="h:inputText" />
<widget schemaname="myuser" fieldname="lastName"
jsfcomponent="h:inputText" />
<widget schemaname="myuser" fieldname="email"
jsfcomponent="h:inputText" required="true" />
<widget schemaname="myuser" fieldname="company"
jsfcomponent="h:inputText" />
<widget schemaname="myuser" fieldname="petName"
jsfcomponent="h:inputText" />
</layout>
</type>
</extension>
Nuxeo Authentication is based on the JAAS standard.
Authentication infrastructure is based on 2 main components :
a JAAS Login Module: NuxeoLoginModule
a Web Filter: NuxeoAuthenticationFilter
Users and groups are managed via the UserManagerService that handles the indirection to users and groups directories (SQL or LDAP).
Nuxeo authentication framework is pluggable so that you can contribute new plugin and don't have to rewrite and reconfigure a complete JAAS infrastructure.
NuxeoLoginModule is a JAAS LoginModule. It is responsible for handling all login call within Nuxeo's security domains:
nuxeo-ecm: for the service stack and the core
nuxeo-ecm-web: for the web application on the top of the
service stack
On JBoss application server, the JBoss Client Login module is used to propagate security between the web part and the service stack.
Here is the default JBoss security configuration:
<domain name="nuxeo-ecm-web">
<login-module code = "org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.login.NuxeoLoginModule"
flag = "required">
<option name="principalClassName">org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.login.NuxeoPrincipal</option>
<option name="useUserIdentificationInfoCB">true</option>
</login-module>
<login-module code="org.jboss.security.ClientLoginModule" flag="required">
<option name="password-stacking">true</option>
<option name="restore-login-identity">true</option>
<option name="multi-threaded">true</option>
</login-module>
</domain>
<domain name="nuxeo-ecm">
<login-module code = "org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.login.NuxeoLoginModule" flag = "required">
<option name="principalClassName">org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.login.NuxeoPrincipal</option>
<option name="useUserIdentificationInfoCB">true</option>
</login-module>
</domain>
As shown by this configuration, the principals returned by
NuxeoLoginModule is org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.login.NuxeoPrincipal.
Each protected service declares the nuxeo-ecm security domain
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<jboss>
<enterprise-beans>
<session>
<ejb-name>DocumentManagerBean</ejb-name>
<security-domain>nuxeo-ecm</security-domain>
</session>
</enterprise-beans>
</jboss>
NuxeoLoginModule mainly handles 2 tasks:
login user
This means extract information from the CallBack stack and validate identity.
NuxeoLoginModule supports several types of CallBacks (including Nuxeo specific CallBack) and uses a plugin system to be able to validate user identity in a pluggable way.
Principal creation
For that NuxeoLoginModule uses Nuxeo UserManager service that does the indirection to the users/groups directories.
When used in conjunction with UserIdentificationInfoCallback (Nuxeo custom CallBack system), the LoginModule will choose the right LoginPlugin according to the CallBack information.
Because validating User identity can be more complex that just checking login/password, NuxeoLoginModule exposes an extension point to contribute new LoginPlugins
Each LoginPlugin has to implement the
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.login.LoginPlugin interface.
Main method is:
String validatedUserIdentity(UserIdentificationInfo userIdent)
that is used to validate the UserIdentificationInfo.
Typically, default implementation will extract Login/Password from UserIdentificationInfo and call the checkUsernamePassword against the UserManager that will validate this information against the users directory.
Other plugins can use other informations carried by UserIdentificationInfo (token, ticket ...) to validate the identity against an external SSO system. The UserIdentificationInfo also carries the LoginModule plugin name that must be used to validate identity. Even if technically, a lot of SSO system could be implemented using this plugin system, most SSO implementations have be moved to the Authentication Plugin at the Web Filter level, because they need a http dialog.
For now, the NuxeoLoginModule has only two way to handle validateUserIdentity:
default
Uses UserManager
Trusted_LM
This plugin assumes the user identity has already been validated by the authentication filter, so the validatedUserIdentity will always return true. Using this LoginModule plugin, a user will be logged if the user exists in the UserManager. This plugin is used for most SSO system in conjunction with a Authentication plugin that will actually do the work of validating password or token.
The Login system can be used via Remote EJB calls.
You can login as System user:
LoginContext lc = Framework.login(); // do some service calls lc.logout();
You can login using user / password:
LoginContext lc = Framework.login(userName, password); // do some service calls lc.logout();
You can also call the login method and pass it directly a CallBackHandler. This can be used in conjunction with org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.api.login.UserIdentificationInfoCallbackHandler.
The Web Authentication filter is responsible for:
guarding access to web resources
The filter can be parameterized to guard urls with a given pattern
finding the right plugin to get user identification information
This can be getting a userName/Password, getting a token in a cookie or a header, redirecting user to another authentication server.
create the LoginContext
This means creating the needed callBacks and call the JAAS Login
store and reestablish login context
In order to avoid recreating a login context for each request, the LoginContext is cached.
The NuxeoAuthenticationFilter is one of the top level filter in Nuxeo Web Filters stack.
For each request it will try to find a existing LoginContext and create a RequestWrapper that will carry the NuxeoPrincipal.
If no existing LoginContext is found it will try to prompt the client for authentication information and will establish the login context.
If order to execute the task of prompting the client and retrieving UserIndetificationInfo, the filter will rely on a set of configured plugins.
Each plugin must:
Implement org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.auth.interfaces.NuxeoAuthenticationPlugin
The two main methods are:
Boolean handleLoginPrompt(HttpServletRequest httpRequest,HttpServletResponse httpResponse, String baseURL); UserIdentificationInfo handleRetrieveIdentity(HttpServletRequest httpRequest, HttpServletResponse httpResponse);
Define the LoginModule plugin to use if needed
Typically, SSO AuthenticationPlugin will do all the work and will use the Trusted_LM LoginModule Plugin.
Define if stating URL must be saved
AuthenticationPlugins that uses HTTP redirect in order to do the login prompt will let the Filter store the first accessed URL in order to cleanly redirect the user to the page he asked after the authentication is successful.
Additionnaly, AuthenticationPlugin can also implement the
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.auth.interfaces.NuxeoAuthenticationPluginLogoutExtension
interface if a specific processing must be done when logging out.
Here is a sample XML descriptor for registering an AuthenticationPlugin:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.auth.defaultConfig">
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.auth.service.PluggableAuthenticationService"
point="authenticators">
<authenticationPlugin name="FORM_AUTH" enabled="true"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.auth.plugins.FormAuthenticator">
<needStartingURLSaving>true</needStartingURLSaving>
<parameters>
<parameter name="LoginPage">login.jsp</parameter>
<parameter name="UsernameKey">user_name</parameter>
<parameter name="PasswordKey">user_password</parameter>
</parameters>
</authenticationPlugin>
</extension>
</component>
As you can see in the above example, the descriptor contains the parameters tag that can be used to embed arbitrary additional configuration that will be specific to a given AuthenticationPlugin. In the above example, it is used to define the field names and the JSP file used for form based authentication.
NuxeoAuthenticationFilter supports several authentication system. This is, for example, useful for having users using Form based authentication and having RSS clients using Basic Authentication. Because of that AuthenticationPlugin must be ordered. For that purpose, NuxeoAuthenticationFilter uses a dedicated extension point that let you define the AuthenticationChain.
<component name="Anonymous.auth.activation">
<require>org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.auth.defaultConfig</require>
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.auth.service.PluggableAuthenticationService"
point="chain">
<authenticationChain>
<plugins>
<plugin>BASIC_AUTH</plugin>
<plugin>ANONYMOUS_AUTH</plugin>
<plugin>FORM_AUTH</plugin>
</plugins>
</authenticationChain>
</extension>
</component>
The NuxeoAuthenticationFilter will use this chain to trigger the
login prompt. When authentication is needed, the Filter will call, in a
first round, the handleRetrieveIdentity method on
all the plugins in the order of the authentication chain and then, in a
second round, the handleLoginPrompt method in the
same order on all the plugins if the authentication could not be achieved
in the first round. The aim is to have as much automatic authentications
as possible, that's why all the manual authentications (those which need a
prompt) are done in a second round.
Some authentication plugins may choose to trigger or not the LoginPrompt depending on the situation. For example: the BasicAuthentication plugin generates the login prompt (in the case of the BasicAuthentication plugin the login prompt is an HTTP basic authentication which takes the form of a popup) only for specific URLs used for RSS feeds or restlet calls. This allows the platform to be easily called by Restlets and RSS clients without bothering browser clients who are presented with web forms to authenticate.
NuxeoAuthenticationFilter comes with two built-in authentication plugins:
FORM_AUTH: Form based Authentication
This is a standard form based authentication. Current implementation let you configure the name of the Login and Password fields, and the name of the page used to display the login page
BASIC_AUTH: Basic HTTP Authentication
This plugin supports standard HTTP Basic Authentication. By default, this plugin only generates the authentication prompt on configured URLs.
There are also additional components that provides other Authentication plugins (see below).
Nuxeo provides a set of other authentication plugins that are not installed by default with the standard Nuxeo EP setup. These plugins can be downloaded and installed separately.
This plugin implements a client for CAS SSO system (Central Authentication System). It can be configured to use a CAS proxy. It has been tested and reported to work with CAS V2.
It's easy to test this plugin by installing the JA-SIG Central Authentication Service Open Source CAS server.
To install this authentication plugin, you need to:
be sure that there is a CAS server already setup and running
download the nuxeo-platform-login-cas2 plugin
put it in $JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/plugins and restart the server
configure the CAS2 descriptor
put CAS2 plugin into the authentication chain
In order to configure CAS2 Auth, you need to create an XML
configuration file into
$JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/config
Here is a sample file named CAS2-config.xml.
<component name="MyAPP.Cas2SSO">
<require>org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.auth.defaultConfig</require>
<require>org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.login.Cas2SSO</require>
<!-- configure you CAS server parameters -->
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.auth.service.PluggableAuthenticationService"
point="authenticators">
<authenticationPlugin
name="CAS2_AUTH">
<loginModulePlugin>Trusting_LM</loginModulePlugin>
<parameters>
<parameter name="ticketKey">ticket</parameter>
<parameter name="appURL">http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/nxstartup.faces</parameter>
<parameter name="serviceLoginURL">http://127.0.0.1:8080/cas/login</parameter>
<parameter name="serviceValidateURL">http://127.0.0.1:8080/cas/serviceValidate</parameter>
<parameter name="serviceKey">service</parameter>
<parameter name="logoutURL">http://127.0.0.1:8080/cas/logout</parameter>
</parameters>
</authenticationPlugin>
</extension>
<!-- Include CAS2 into authentication chain -->
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.auth.service.PluggableAuthenticationService"
point="chain">
<authenticationChain>
<plugins>
<plugin>BASIC_AUTH</plugin>
<plugin>CAS2_AUTH</plugin>
</plugins>
</authenticationChain>
</extension>
</component>
Tip: If while authenticating on the CAS server you get in the logs the following exception, it simply means that the user JOEUSER does not exist in the Nuxeo directory and does not mean that the CAS process is not working.
ERROR [org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.login.NuxeoLoginModule] createIdentity failed
javax.security.auth.login.LoginException: principal JOEUSER does not exist
at org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.login.NuxeoLoginModule.createIdentity(NuxeoLoginModule.java:304)
at org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.login.NuxeoLoginModule.validateUserIdentity(NuxeoLoginModule.java:362)
at org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.login.NuxeoLoginModule.getPrincipal(NuxeoLoginModule.java:216)
at org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.login.NuxeoLoginModule.login(NuxeoLoginModule.java:271)
at sun.reflect.NativeMethodAccessorImpl.invoke0(Native Method)
at sun.reflect.NativeMethodAccessorImpl.invoke(NativeMethodAccessorImpl.java:39)
at sun.reflect.DelegatingMethodAccessorImpl.invoke(DelegatingMethodAccessorImpl.java:25)
at java.lang.reflect.Method.invoke(Method.java:585)
at javax.security.auth.login.LoginContext.invoke(LoginContext.java:769)
at javax.security.auth.login.LoginContext.access$000(LoginContext.java:186)
at javax.security.auth.login.LoginContext$4.run(LoginContext.java:683)
at java.security.AccessController.doPrivileged(Native Method)
at javax.security.auth.login.LoginContext.invokePriv(LoginContext.java:680)
at javax.security.auth.login.LoginContext.login(LoginContext.java:579)
at org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.auth.NuxeoAuthenticationFilter.doAuthenticate(NuxeoAuthenticationFilter.java:205)
This plugin assumes Nuxeo is behind a authenticating reverse proxy that transmit user identity using HTTP headers. This modules has be used on projects that uses a apache reverse proxy using client certificates to authenticate. SSO system (Central Authentication System V2):
To install this authentication plugin, you need to:
download the nuxeo-platform-login-mod_sso plugin
put it in
$JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/plugins and restart
the server
configure the plugin via an XML descriptor
put the plugin into the authentication chain
In order to configure this plugin, you need to create an XML
configuration file into
$JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/config
Here is a sample file named proxy-auth-config.xml.
<component name="MyAPP.Mod_sso">
<require>org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.auth.defaultConfig</require>
<require>org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.login.Proxy</require>
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.auth.service.PluggableAuthenticationService"
point="authenticators">
<authenticationPlugin
name="PROXY_AUTH">
<loginModulePlugin>Trusting_LM</loginModulePlugin>
<parameters>
<!-- configure here the name of the http header that is used to retrieve user identity -->
<parameter name="ssoHeaderName">remote_user</parameter>
</parameters>
</authenticationPlugin>
</extension>
<!-- Include Proxy Auth into authentication chain -->
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.auth.service.PluggableAuthenticationService"
point="chain">
<authenticationChain>
<plugins>
<!-- Keep basic Auth at top of Auth chain to support RSS access via BasicAuth -->
<plugin>BASIC_AUTH</plugin>
<plugin>PROXY_AUTH</plugin>
</plugins>
</authenticationChain>
</extension>
</component>
This plugin uses JCIFS to handle NTLM authentication.
This plugging was partially contributed by Nuxeo EP users and has been reported to work by several users.
If you have troubles with latest version of IE on POST requests, please see JCIFS instructions on that (http://jcifs.samba.org/src/docs/ntlmhttpauth.html#post).
To install this authentication plugin, you need to :
download the nuxeo-platform-login-ntlm plugin
put it in
$JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/plugins and restart
the server
configure the plugin via an XML descriptor
put the plugin into the authentication chain
In order to configure this plugin, you need to create an XML
configuration file into
$JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/config
Here is a sample file named ntlm-auth-config.xml.
<component name="MyAPP.NTLM">
<require>org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.auth.defaultConfig</require>
<require>org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.login.NTLM</require>
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.auth.service.PluggableAuthenticationService"
point="authenticators">
<authenticationPlugin
name="NTLM_AUTH">
<loginModulePlugin>Trusting_LM</loginModulePlugin>
<parameters>
<!-- Add here parameters for you domain, please ee http://jcifs.samba.org/src/docs/ntlmhttpauth.html
<parameter name="jcifs.http.domainController">MyControler</parameter>
-->
</parameters>
</authenticationPlugin>
</extension>
<!-- Include NTLM Auth into authentication chain -->
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.auth.service.PluggableAuthenticationService"
point="chain">
<authenticationChain>
<plugins>
<plugin>BASIC_AUTH</plugin>
<plugin>NTLM_AUTH</plugin>
<plugin>FORM_AUTH</plugin>
</plugins>
</authenticationChain>
</extension>
</component>
This plugin provides a way to handle identity propagation between an external application and Nuxeo. It was coded in order to propagate user identify between a JSR168 portal and a Nuxeo server. See the Nuxeo-Http-client-library for more information.
To install this authentication plugin, you need to :
download the nuxeo-platform-login-portal-sso plugin
put it in
$JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/plugins and restart
the server
configure the plugin via an XML descriptor
put the plugin into the authentication chain
In order to configure this plugin, you need to create an XML
configuration file into
$JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/config
Here is a sample file named portal-auth-config.xml.
<component name="MyAPP.postal_sso">
<require>org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.auth.defaultConfig</require>
<require>org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.login.Portal</require>
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.auth.service.PluggableAuthenticationService"
point="authenticators">
<authenticationPlugin
name="PORTAL_AUTH">
<loginModulePlugin>Trusting_LM</loginModulePlugin>
<parameters>
<!-- define here shared secret between the portal and Nuxeo server -->
<parameter name="secret">nuxeo5secretkey</parameter>
<parameter name="maxAge">3600</parameter>
</parameters>
</authenticationPlugin>
</extension>
<!-- Include Portal Auth into authentication chain -->
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.auth.service.PluggableAuthenticationService"
point="chain">
<authenticationChain>
<plugins>
<!-- Keep basic Auth at top of Auth chain to support RSS access via BasicAuth -->
<plugin>BASIC_AUTH</plugin>
<plugin>PORTAL_AUTH</plugin>
<plugin>FORM_AUTH</plugin>
</plugins>
</authenticationChain>
</extension>
</component>
This plugin provides anonymous authentication. Users are automatically logged as a configurable Anonymous user. This modules also includes additional actions (to be able to login when already logged as Anonymous) and a dedicated Exception handling (to automatically redirect Anonymous users to login screen after a security error).
To install this authentication plugin, you need to :
download the nuxeo-platform-login-anonymous plugin
put it in
$JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/plugins and restart
the server
configure the plugin via an XML descriptor (define who the anonymous user will be)
put the plugin into the authentication chain
In order to configure this plugin, you need to create an XML
configuration file into
$JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/config
Here is a sample file named anonymous-auth-config.xml.
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.login.anonymous.config">
<!-- Make sure these components are read first -->
<require>org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.auth.defaultConfig</require>
<require>org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.login.anonymous</require>
<!-- Add an Anonymous user -->
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.usermanager.UserService"
point="userManager">
<userManager>
<users>
<anonymousUser id="Guest">
<property name="firstName">Guest</property>
<property name="lastName">User</property>
</anonymousUser>
</users>
</userManager>
</extension>
<!-- Override the default authentication chain present in
nuxeo-platform-ui-web to add ANONYMOUS_AUTH. -->
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.auth.service.PluggableAuthenticationService"
point="chain">
<authenticationChain>
<plugins>
<plugin>BASIC_AUTH</plugin>
<plugin>ANONYMOUS_AUTH</plugin>
<plugin>FORM_AUTH</plugin>
</plugins>
</authenticationChain>
</extension>
</component>
The Security Service provides an extension point to plug custom security policies that do not rely on the document security settings. For instance, it can be used to define permissions according to the document metadata, or to the logger user information.
Policies are set in two places:
in the core where custom checks of permission can be performed before resolving the document security using its ACP.
in the search where the query can be patched with custom constraints before processing it.
Policies are checked in the order given as a parameter when registering them.
On the core side, they are used when checking permissions: they can grant or deny access, in case following policies - as well as the default security check relying on the ACP set on the document - will be ignored. They can also return an undefined access, in case following policy checks will continue.
When defining a custom policy for the Read permission, queries to the search service have to be adapted to have the same constraints: otherwise some queries will not return documents that the user can see, or will return documents that the user cannot see. Search policies are used when performing any search.
These policies are set on different services and follow different interfaces. When deploying on multi machines environment, where search and core may be hosted on different machines, the core and search policies will have to be deployed on the corresponding machine.
To register a core security policy, you need to write a contribution specifying the class name of your implementation.
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.securityPolicy.accessLevelContrib">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.security.SecurityService"
point="policies">
<policy name="accessLevel"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.security.AccessLevelSecurityPolicy" order="0" />
</extension>
</component>
Example 14.1. Sample core security policy contribution
Here is a sample contribution: core policies have to follow the org.nuxeo.ecm.core.security.SecurityPolicy interface.
public class AccessLevelSecurityPolicy extends AbstractSecurityPolicy {
public Access checkPermission(Document doc, ACP mergedAcp,
Principal principal, String permission,
String[] resolvedPermissions, String[] additionalPrincipals) {
Access access = Access.UNKNOWN;
try {
if (principal instanceof NuxeoPrincipal) {
DocumentModel userModel = ((NuxeoPrincipal) principal).getModel();
if (userModel != null) {
Long accessLevel = (Long) userModel.getPropertyValue("user:accessLevel");
Long securityLevel = (Long) doc.getPropertyValue("sp:securityLevel");
if (accessLevel < securityLevel) {
access = Access.DENY;
}
}
}
} catch (Exception e) {
}
return access;
}
}
Here a specific check is done on all documents, regardless of the permission being checked. A property on the document (securityLevel) is checked against a property set on the user model (accessLevel).
Note that the "unknown" access is returned when the policy should not interfere with the standard security check.
The search policy can be registered in the same way than a cor security policy. Search policies have to follow the org.nuxeo.ecm.core.security.SecurityPolicy interface, and implement methods that will return query transformers.
Here is a sample contribution:
public class NoFileSecurityPolicy extends AbstractSearchPolicy {
public Access checkPermission(Document doc, ACP mergedAcp,
Principal principal, String permission,
String[] resolvedPermissions, String[] additionalPrincipals) {
if (doc.getType().getName().equals("File")) {
return Access.DENY;
}
return Access.UNKNOWN;
}
@Override
public boolean isExpressibleInQuery() {
return true;
}
/**
* Transformer that adds {@code AND ecm:primaryType <> 'File'} to the query.
*/
public static class NoFileTransformer implements Transformer {
public static final Predicate NO_FILE = new Predicate(new Reference(
"ecm:primaryType"), Operator.NOTEQ, new StringLiteral("File"));
public SQLQuery transform(SQLQuery query) {
WhereClause where = query.where;
Predicate predicate;
if (where == null || where.predicate == null) {
predicate = NO_FILE;
} else {
predicate = new Predicate(NO_FILE, Operator.AND,
where.predicate);
}
SQLQuery newQuery = new SQLQuery(query.select, query.from,
new WhereClause(predicate), query.groupBy, query.having,
query.orderBy, query.limit, query.offset);
return newQuery;
}
}
public static final Transformer NO_FILE_TRANSFORMER = new NoFileTransformer();
@Override
public Transformer getQueryTransformer() {
return NO_FILE_TRANSFORMER;
}
}
As a check is done on the core side regardless of the permission, it will also apply for the "Read" permission which is checked when navigating to a document. Without this policy, searches would return documents that the user may not be able to see, and would generate a security exception when the user clicks on the document link.
The same checks here are performed on the core and added as constraint to the search query.
For additional information about NXQL queries, please refer to the Section 11.3, “Programmatic Searching” section.
A workflow definition is designed for a given workflow engine backend and not for the Nuxeo workflow service itself. Nuxeo workflow doesn't specify a new process definition language. Thus it has no Nuxeo specificities speaking of format or process definition language. For instance, if you use jBPM as a backend with Nuxeo 5 then the workflow definition should be a standard jpdl file that you may have designed using your favorite editor or still if you are using Shark as a backend then the workflow definition will be a standard WFMC process definition.
Once your workflow definition has been designed and is ready you can deploy it in Nuxeo workflow. Of course, the target workflow engine backend plugin should be deployed and registered against the workflow service.
The Nuxeo workflow service provides a dedicated extension point for workflow definition deployment. The extension point is called definition.
In this case, the workflow definition will be deployed at application server deployment time (For now, this is the case when the application server is starting up since hot deployment is not yet possible using Nuxeo Runtime at the time of writing this document).It means this way of deploying workflow definition is not suitable for all cases. See the next subsections for other ways of deploying workflow definitions.
Below is an example of a jPDL workflow definition contribution for the jBPM backend. This XML fragment would be defined in a contribution registered as a component in a bundle:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="com.company.workflow.sample.contributions">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.workflow.service.WorkflowService"
point="definition">
<definition>
<engineName>jbpm</engineName>
<mimetype>text/xml</mimetype>
<definitionPath>workflows/process_definition.xml</definitionPath>
</definition>
</extension>
</component>
engineName: name specified for the target backend at workflow service registration time (see workflow service backend extension point)
mimetype: mimetype of the workflow definition. This is especially interesting in case of the format is binary. (serialization issue at deployment time)
definitionPath: bundle relative path of the workflow definition to deploy.
In this situation here is how would look the tree:
com.company.workflow /
META-INF /
workflows /
process_definition.xml
MANIFEST.MF
OSGI-INF /
workflow-definitions-contrib.xml
Nuxeo jBPM Service is a task and work flow management service based on jBPM. One can use this service without knowledge of jBPM, but for any advance use a good knowledge is necessary, please refer to jBPM documentation .
The service provides:
an easy way to deploy process definitions (see Section 15.2.2.5, “deployer extension point”)
2 abstract classes to test process definition and the jBPM service using those definitions (see Section 15.2.5.4, “How to test a process ?”)
A set of convention to facilitate manipulation of documents (see Section 15.2.3, “Document management”)
Helpers class to create ActionHandler, AssignmentHandler, DecisionHandler and TaskControllerHandler that interact with repository, user manager and documents. (see Section 15.2.3, “Document management”)
A set of hibernate queries that optimize queries on documents. (see Section 15.2.5.1, “How to optimize jBPM service ?”)
2 default workflows for document validation. (see Section 15.2.4, “Default processes”)
jBPM can be used for different use cases. The default Nuxeo contributions uses it as a simple workflow management on a single document. You could use it for complex BPM, SOA orchestration or pageflow management. All those different uses make it impossible to send meaningful event at the service level.
So we let the responsibility of sending event to the user of the jBPM service. It is the responsibility of the user of the service to send event .
For example, the default workflow will send a workflowStart event when the user presses the 'Start Workflow' button. (However, the jBPM process has already started and 2 tasks have already been completed at this stage). The default workflow also sends event (workflowTaskAssign) when a task is assigned to a pooled actors (This is not considered a task assignment for jBPM) and send a mail to each pooled actor.
If you use jBPM for workflow management on documents, we recommend that you use the event named in JbpmEventNames. You can check the default workflow, the TaskNotificationHandler or the JbpmActionsBean for code that sends event.
jBPM uses a JobExecutor to run asynchronous node and timer. The
default Nuxeo configuration does not use nor start a JobExecutor.
However, from version 5.3.1, it comes bundle with a JobExecutor. To
start the JobExecutor when Nuxeo starts, you need to set the property
"org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.jbpm.startJobExecutor" to true in any of the
*.properties in nuxeo.ear/config.
They are 2 differences between the default jBPM JobExecutor and Nuxeo's JobExecutor. Firstly, Nuxeo's uses a transaction to run jobs. Secondly, Nuxeo's notifies the event service so asynchronous event thrown from a job will be handle correctly.
Nuxeo configures jBPM in 2 steps . First, it creates named configurations using configurationPath extension point, such as:
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.jbpm.core.JbpmService"
point="configurationPath">
<configuration name="prod" path="config/jbpm.cfg.xml" />
</extension>
Finally, it gives the configuration to use:
<component
name="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.jbpm.core.ActiveConfiguration">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.jbpm.core.JbpmService"
point="activeConfiguration">
<configuration name="prod" />
</extension>
</component>
From version 5.3, the default activeConfiguration is 'runtime'. This is not the name of a configuration that was contributed. It is a keyword meaning that the configuration name will be chosen at runtime. The workflow service comes bundle with different configuration (jboss, jetty ...).
From version 5.3, the runtime configuration name is a keyword for an activeConfiguration and should not be used as a configuration name.
If you want to use a different configuration you just need to overwrite the org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.jbpm.core.ActiveConfiguration component.
The default configuration uses a transactional persistent service. It also adds to the default hibernate configuration a nuxeo.hibernate.queries.hbm.xml file with nuxeo's specific queries.
The default hibernate configuration, referenced in jbpm.cfg.xml, is not for production. For production, you should comment out the 'hibernate.hbm2ddl' property. You also should ask your DBA to finalize your database schema for your target database (Derby should not be used in production).
To contribute a new process definition, contribute to the processDefinition extension point by giving the definition path relative to the root of the package and the name of the deployer.
The default contribution is:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.jbpm.core.JbpmService"
point="processDefinition">
<processDefinition path="process/parallel-review.xml" deployer="nuxeoProperties" />
<processDefinition path="process/validation-review.xml" deployer="nuxeoProperties" />
</extension>
jBPM needs to keep all process definition versions in persistent storage, so a process may finish with the same definition it started with. When Nuxeo starts, the jBPM service needs to know if a process definition is to be deployed as a new version. The Deployer is responsible for process definition deployment, you choose how processes are deployed by choosing a Deployer.
The service comes with 3 Deployers:
This deployer is depreacated and shouldn't be used (see https://jira.nuxeo.org/browse/NXP-4650
This deployer will deploy a process definition unless the property
'org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.jbpm.deployProcessDefinition' is set to false in
nuxeo.properties. It is recommended to use it, and
set the property to false after the process have been deployed (when
a server is restarted but after all process definition have been used
once).
This deployer never deploys a process definition.
This deployer always deploys a process definition.
You can contribute to new Deployer by contributing to the deployer extension-point. The contributed class needs to implement the ProcessDefinitionDeployer interface. It can also extend the AbstractProcessDefinitionDeployer that provides some helpers method.
The default contribution is:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.jbpm.core.JbpmService"
point="deployer">
<deployer name="always"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.jbpm.core.deployer.AlwaysDeployer" />
<deployer name="never"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.jbpm.core.deployer.NeverDeployer" />
<deployer name="ifChanged"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.jbpm.core.deployer.IfChangedDeployer" />
<deployer name="nuxeoProperties"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.jbpm.core.deployer.NuxeoPropertiesDeployer" />
</extension>
The security extension point allows to contribute a security policy to a process definition. This security policy is used in the document related methods of the JbpmService.
The default contribution is:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.jbpm.core.JbpmService"
point="securityPolicy">
<securityPolicy
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.jbpm.core.service.DefaultJbpmSecurityPolicy"
for="review_parallel" />
<securityPolicy
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.jbpm.core.service.DefaultJbpmSecurityPolicy"
for="review_approbation" />
</extension>
This class follows the JbpmSecurityPolicy interface, and is used to define who is allowed to edit the process (administrator or initiator). Other permissions (who is allowed to add some reviewers for instance) is left out to the interface.
The typeFilter extension point allows to bind process definition to a type of document. This is used in the default 'Workflow' tab to show what choices to offer to the user.
The default contribution is:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.jbpm.core.JbpmService"
point="typeFilter">
<type name="Note">
<processDefinition>review_parallel</processDefinition>
<processDefinition>review_approbation</processDefinition>
</type>
<type name="File">
<processDefinition>review_parallel</processDefinition>
<processDefinition>review_approbation</processDefinition>
</type>
</extension>
The jBPM service provides a set of methods to interact with a single document. We use a simple convention to attach a document to a process instance. 2 variables are added to the process instance:
The id of the document.
The name of the document's repository.
The VariableName enum
on the JbpmService names the different variables.
The abstract class
AbstractJbpmHandlerHelper
implements ActionHandler,
AssignmentHandler, DecisionHandler and TaskControllerHandler. It provides useful methods
when dealing with document and repository.

Description
When the process is started, 3 variables are
added
to the
process: the document id and the
repository name variable, the transition to follow(
endLifecycleTransition
variable). A start state
task is also created to
capture the initiator actor id. It is retrievable afterward as the
'initiator' swimlane.
A task is created for the initiator. At the end of this task a 'participants' variable is added to the process. It is a list with one item per participant.
This is an action node. The process sets up the rights on the document so all participants can read it.
It uses an action node defined in the Nuxeo jBPM service. It creates a child token for each item of the list given as parameter in the process definition. In this case, a child token is created for each participant. On each child token, a variable named participant will hold the participant.
A task for the participant. If it is rejected, adds a variable named 'rejected' to the process. (The process is therefore considered rejected if only one participant rejects it)
A normal jBPM join. Waits for all participants to finish their tasks before resuming.
A decision node that checks if there is a 'rejected' variable. If there is, go to end. Otherwise go to follow transition node.
The attached document follows the named transition

Description
Same as for the parallel review process.
Same as for the parallel review process.
Check if there is an item in the participants list. If there isn't, then go to follow transition. Otherwise go to set up rights. Remove the first item of 'participants' list and put it in the participant variable. In any case, remember the previous participant in the previousActorId variable (the initiator if no previous participant).
Makes the document readable to the participants
Create a task for participant. If she validates, then go to condition on participants otherwise to validate after reject node.
Create a task for previousActorId user. She has to validate the node.
The document follows the transition set in the transition variable.
The jBPM service methods on documents use the jBPM API. To find task related to a document it iterates over all the tasks and checks its variables.
If you have a lot of tasks, such a behavior can be too costly.
We recommend in such a case to create a hibernate query and to
call this query from your own jbpmOperation object. The module
nuxeo-platform-jbpm-core comes with a
nuxeo.hibernate.queries.hbm.xml that
you can use. If you create your own query file, you need to add it in the hibernate configuration file.
If you need to query on property of the attached document, you can optimize the query by directly using the repository (this is valid only when using the sql backend). You need to create a class to map to the schema you want to query and add the hibernate annotation, you'll then be able to create a hbm query using the schema. You need to keep in mind that hibernate or the repository could be caching data, using such queries should be used carefully.
The jBPM service can also be used as a simple task management service. The publication service uses it that way. It creates a task when someone needs to validates a publishing request. There is no process instance attached to it (but still a document attached to the task).
The code to create a task is:
TaskInstance ti = new TaskInstance();
ti.setPooledActors(new String[]{"some", "actors"});
Map<String, Serializable> variables = new HashMap<String, Serializable>();
variables.put(JbpmService.VariableName.documentId.name(), document.getId());
variables.put(JbpmService.VariableName.documentRepositoryName.name(), document.getRepositoryName());
ti.setVariables(variables);
ti.setName("my task");
ti.setCreate(new Date());
jbpmService().saveTaskInstances(Collections.singletonList(ti));
jBPM keeps all tasks, processes and definitions in the database. If you don't need to keep an history of the processes, you have two ways to delete unwanted data.
You can use the event service to call the deleteProcess on all finished process periodically (Note: the default process in Nuxeo finishes only when all tasks are finished).
You can run a SQL procedure at the database level to remove the ended process and attached tasks.
Testing a process is done in two steps. The first step is to test the process definition itself. The second is to test the use of the process definition by the jbpm service and your other methods.
To test a process definition, you can extend the AbstractProcessDefinitionTest and implement the getProcessDefinitionResource() methods. It should return the path of the process definition. You can then use the jbpmContext variable to interact with the process definition. You might have trouble if one of your action requests some of Nuxeo services. If your handlers extend the AbstractJbpmHandlerHelper, you can surround the logic inside a if(nuxeoHasStarted()){....}. This way no nuxeo services will be called inside unit test without services.
If you want to test a process definition and its interaction with nuxeo service, you can have a look at JbpmServiceTest. It creates a repository, deploys the user manager service and the sql directory.
To add a new worfklow you need to follow these step:
Create a new process definition and register it using the processDefinition extention point.
Add a security policy and a type filter using the securityPolicy and typeFilter extention point.
If you want to see your process on a new type of document, you need to add the JBPM_TAB to you type of document.
Create the xhtml file that will show the process and different tasks. You need to add a xhtml file that would be named the-name-of-your-process.xhtml and add new xhtml file if you create new type of task.
The versioning information are stored in the DocumentModel under the
fields major_version and minor_version of the uid.xsd
schema. Set the version as you would any other field:
documentModel.setProperty("uid","major_version",1);
documentModel.setProperty("uid","minor_version",1);
The field used for version is adaptable via the
properties extension point of the
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.versioning.service.VersioningService
component. It allows to define which properties should be used to set
versions for a given document type.
<versioningProperties> <majorVersion>my:major_version</majorVersion> <minorVersion>my:minor_version</minorVersion> <documentType>File</documentType> <documentType>Note</documentType> </versioningProperties>
Event such as saving a document or following a life cycle transition can change the document's version number. To use this feature you need first to define which event should be listened to and then how the version number should behave.
The CoreEventListenerService is used to define which
event to listen to. The default declaration is in
nuxeo-platform-versioning-core:
<listener name="versioninglistener"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.versioning.listeners.DocVersioningListener">
<eventId>lifecycle_transition_event</eventId>
<eventId>documentCreated</eventId>
<eventId>beforeDocumentModification</eventId>
<eventId>documentUpdated</eventId>
<eventId>documentRestored</eventId>
</listener>
<listener name="versioningChangelistener"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.versioning.listeners.VersioningChangeListener" />
The class
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.versioning.listeners.DocVersioningListener
implements the behavior of the versioning when those events happen.
To modify the version of a document when a life cycle state is reach
you need to define rules with the behavior(increment major, minor or do
nothing) using the extension rules from
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.versioning.service.VersioningService:
<versioningRuleEdit name="sampleEditRuleProject" action="ask_user"
lifecycleState="project">
<option value="no_inc" default="true" />
<option value="inc_minor" />
<option value="inc_major" />
</versioningRuleEdit>
The default behavior for all type but File and Note is to increase the minor version for each life cycle change. You need to override one of the default rules if you add a new type. The order is important, the list of rules is read and the first match is used.
<versioningRuleEdit name="sampleEditRuleAnyState" action="ask_user"
lifecycleState="*">
<includeDocType>File</includeDocType>
<includeDocType>Note</includeDocType>
<includeDocType>MyNewType</includeDocType>
<option value="no_inc" default="true" />
<option value="inc_minor" />
<option value="inc_major" />
</versioningRuleEdit>
The CoreSession or the seam component
documentVersioning and versionedActions allow
to access document from previous version. On CoreSession, the
method getVersions return all the versions of a document.
The versioning service manages the version inside Nuxeo. Two implementations are available:
The custom Nuxeo service, more flexible and used by default
The default JackRabbit implementation.
To modify this setting edit the file
config/default-versioning-config.xml:
<!--property name="versioningService" value="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.repository.jcr.versioning.JCRVersioningService"/--> <property name="versioningService" value="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.versioning.custom.CustomVersioningService"/>
This section shows how to use the versioning module, how to modify the version of a document automatically or manually and how to use a document from a previous version.
Audit service is used for logging and retrieving audit data into a datastore. Audit data are mainly coming from events.
The audit service is logging creation/deletion/modification events. It is also possible to configure the service to log other events. For example, there is an addon, called nuxeo-platform-audit-web-access, that log web access.
Audit service is mainly a datastore service. It defines a data record structure that will be used for storing audit information. The datastore is built over a relational database backend. The data record structure is defined in Java by the LogEntry and ExtendedInfo java classes. They are mapped onto the datastore using JPA (Java Persistence API) annotations. Audit service receive events from the Event service. Then the Audit service is filtering and converting them into log entries. The LogEntry class is mainly obtained from the DocumentMessage event type. Audit entries may also contain extended informations. These informations are extracted from the event message using EL (Expression Language) expression and stored into a map.
Extended information map is a feature that is available since the 5.2 release. Prior releases was achieving extension by introducing specialized LogEntry types and OR mappings.
The following java snipset shows you how to retrieve entries associated with a document
.. DocumentModel document = ... NXAuditEventService audit = Framework.getService(NXAuditEventService.class); List<LogEntry> entries = audit.getLogEntriesFor(document.getDocUUID()); ..
You can also select entries using HQL language. The following snipset shows you how to retrieve entries for a whole document hierarchy having a dublincore title.
an extended information should be contributed to the audit service, extracting the dublincore title property from the document and storing it in the extended information map using the 'title' key.
..
NXAuditEventService audit = Framework.getService(NXAuditEventService.class);
List<LogEntry> entries = audit.nativeQueryLogs(
"log.docPath like '/somefolder/%' and" +
"log.extendedInfos['title'] is not null", 1, 10);
..
You may need to add some information to the audit datastore. Sending a core event is not the only way. You can invoke directly the audit service. The following java code snipset shows you how to do that.
.. NXAuditEventService audit = Framework.getService(NXAuditEventService.class); LogEntry entry = new LogEntry(); .. entry.setXXX(...); .. audit.addLogEntry(entry); ..
Logging other event types can be done by using an
event extension point. Here is an example of how to
define this extension point.
<extension point="event"
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.audit.service.NXAuditEventsService">
<event name="documentCreated" />
<event name="documentCreatedByCopy" />
<event name="documentDuplicated" />
<event name="documentMoved" />
<event name="documentRemoved" />
<event name="documentModified" />
<event name="documentLocked" />
<event name="documentUnlocked" />
<event name="documentPublished" />
<event name="documentSecurityUpdated" />
<event name="documentUnPublished" />
<event name="documentSubmitedForPublication" />
<event name="documentPublicationRejected" />
<event name="documentPublicationApproved" />
<event name="lifecycle_transition_event" />
</extension>
Just after converting received DocumentMessage instance into the corresponding LogEntry instance, Audit service allows you to extract information from the handling context and to store them. To do this, you have to define an EL expression and associate it with a key. You can access to the following variables :
message
Document message describing the event
source
Document from which the event is from
principal
Identity of the event owner
The following XML snipset is an example of how to extract properties from the document model and store them into the extended information map.
<extension point="extendedInfo"
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.audit.service.NXAuditEventsService">
<extendedInfo expression="${source.dublincore.title}" key="title" />
<extendedInfo expression="${message.cacheKey}" key="key" />
<extendedInfo expression="${principal.name}" key="user" />
</extension>
Tag service is providing the backbone of the tagging feature. The tags are keywords applied as metadata on documents reflecting the user opinion about that document. The tags are either categorizing the content of the document (labels like "document management", "ECM", "complex Web application", etc. can be thought as tags for Nuxeo), or they reflect the user feeling ("great", "user friendly", "versatile", etc.).
The tag service allows to:
create tags
retrieve tags
apply tag on a document
list tags applied on a document
list documents tagged with a label
remove the link between a tag and a document
retrieve the popular clouds
retrieve the vote clouds
The service is available as remote service also. The EJB interface allows acquiring it over the network.
Few types of objects are defined while working with tag service.
"Tag" is a new document type following the standard Nuxeo document approach. The schemes used are the usual ones (dublincore, common) and further a specific one containing the label and private flag. The tags can be stored anywhere, or they can be stored in a dedicated root tag folder. Tags are folderish, so they can be stored one under other, making possible creating categories of tags.
"Tagging" is an entity residing in a new table called NXP_TAGGING. This table is basically a link table storing the id of the tag document, the id of the target document (the document on which the tag was applied), the owner of the tagging (user which established the link), the private flag.
The owner of the tagging allows to select the tagging created by a specific user, so it is possible to allow deletion of a tagging only if the user actual owns that tagging. This means someone could not delete a not owned tagging (of course, the administrators can do that). Of course, this is higher level application decision, the tag service only allows such approach.
The API exports the tags as a DTO containing the label and id of the tag. Also, WeightedTag extends the Tag to provide the weight of the tag for the requested clouds. The clouds are provided as simple lists of WeightedTags. The service computes 2 types of clouds: vote cloud and popular cloud.
The cloud represents the visual representation of the distribution of tags around a domain. A domain can be anything, form a simple document to a workspace or even entire repository. Usually 2 types of clouds can be defined: “vote” and “popularity”. The first is counting how many times a tag was applied on a document by different users (votes), while the second counts how many documents in a particular domain were tagged with a particular tag, aiming to measure the tag popularity in a domain.
Let's have an example: have domain WorkspaceA with 2 documents Doc1 and Doc2. The tag tagX is applied by 3 different users on Doc1, tagY is applied by 5 different users on Doc2, tagZ is applied once on Doc1 and once on Doc2. Also, tagX was applied twice on WorkspaceA. The tag clouds would be:
"vote" on Doc1: tagX - 3, tagZ - 1
"popularity" on Doc1: tagX - 1, tagZ - 1
"vote" on Doc2: tagY - 5, tagZ - 1
"popularity" on Doc2: tagY - 1, tagZ - 1
"vote" on WorkspaceA: tagX - 2
"popularity" on WorkspaceA: tagX - 2, tagZ - 2, tagY - 1
There is a third less used tag cloud: the number of times the tag appears in the content of an item. This would be harder to implement (the content needs to be interpreted) and apparently less used. Indeed, to apply a tag like * "interesting", or "misleading" don't need that these terms appear in the article.
The underlying operations in DB are performed through JPA accessing directly the Nuxeo default DB repository. This was selected for performance and usability. The configuration of DB connector has to be supplied through datasource configuration file nxtags-ds.xml.
The properties have to follow identically the default Nuxeo repository configuration.
The SQL server as storage backend is provided by org.nuxeo.ecm.directory.sql.* component.
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.directory.sql.storage">
<implementation class="org.nuxeo.ecm.directory.sql.SQLDirectoryDescriptor" />
<require>org.nuxeo.ecm.directory.sql.SQLDirectoryFactory</require>
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.directory.sql.SQLDirectoryFactory"
point="directories">
<directory name="userDirectory">
<schema>user</schema>
<dataSource>java:/nxsqldirectory</dataSource>
<table>users</table>
<idField>username</idField>
<passwordField>password</passwordField>
<autoincrementIdField>false</autoincrementIdField>
<dataFile>users.csv</dataFile>
<createTablePolicy>on_missing_columns</createTablePolicy>
<querySizeLimit>15</querySizeLimit>
</directory>
</extension>
</component>
This code declares a directories node which defines a directory of users or of groups. The following information are given to describe the directory:
name: name of the server which will be used
in the declaration of the directories
schema: name of the schema describing the
user attributes in the directory
dataSource: type of storage for the
directory. In this example, the HSQLDB is used. Other RDBMS like
PostgreSQL can be used to store the datas by changing the local
datasource.
table: name of the table in which the data
will be stored
idField: the id field designs the primary key
in the table, used for retrieving entries by id
password: field from the table which contain
the passwords, relative to the identifier
autoincrementIdField: boolean value which tells if the idField is automatically incremented - this value is most of the time at false, because the identifier is a string.
dataFile: file from which data are getting to
populate the table. Be careful to follow the structure of the schema
given above.
createTablePolicy: indicates how the dataFile
will be used to populate the table. Three values are allowed:
never: the dataFile is never used
on_missing_columns: the dataFile is used to create missing columns, it means at creation of the table or each time a new column is added, to follow the schema for example. Columns cannot be deleted.
always: the dataFile is used to create the table as each restart of the application server
querySizeLimit: the maximum number of results
that the queries on this directory should return; if there are more
results than this, an exception will be raised
The LDAP server as storage backend is provided by the org.nuxeo.ecm.directory.ldap.* component
First of all, LDAP servers have to be defined by adding a contribution to the servers extension point. The syntax is:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.directory.ldap.LDAPDirectoryFactory"
point="servers">
<server name="default">
<ldapUrl>ldap://localhost:389</ldapUrl>
<bindDn>cn=nuxeo5,ou=applications,dc=example,dc=com</bindDn>
<bindPassword>changeme</bindPassword>
</server>
</extension>
These information need to be provided to use an LDAP connection:
name:name of the server which will be used
in the declaration of the directories
ldapUrl:address of the LDAP server. A
single server declaration can point to a cluster of replicated
servers. To leverage such a cluster and improve availability, please
provide one <ldapUrl/> tag for each replica of the cluster.
ldaps is the convention to use TLS/SSL connection.
bindDn: the Distinguished Name used to bind
to the LDAP server
bindPassword: corresponding password
relative to the Distinguished Name for binding
These credentials are used by Nuxeo5 to browse directory and create/modify entries.
Once you have declared the server, you can define new LDAP directories, using the following syntax for its declaration:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.directory.ldap.LDAPDirectoryFactory"
point="directories">
<directory name="userDirectory">
<server>default</server>
<schema>user</schema>
<idField>username</idField>
<passwordField>password</passwordField>
<searchBaseDn>ou=people,dc=example,dc=com</searchBaseDn>
<searchClass>person</searchClass>
<searchFilter>(&(sn=toto*)(myCustomAttribute=somevalue))</searchFilter>
<searchScope>onelevel</searchScope>
<substringMatchType>subany</substringMatchType>
<readOnly>false</readOnly>
<cacheTimeout>3600</cacheTimeout>
<cacheMaxSize>1000</cacheMaxSize>
<creationBaseDn>ou=people,dc=example,dc=com</creationBaseDn>
<creationClass>top</creationClass>
<creationClass>person</creationClass>
<creationClass>organizationalPerson</creationClass>
<creationClass>inetOrgPerson</creationClass>
</directory>
</extension>
The attributes are:
name, schema, idField and passwordField are the same as for SQL directories
searchBaseDn: entry point into the server's
LDAP tree structure. Searches are only made below this root
node
searchClass: restricts the type of entries
to return as result
searchFilter :additional filter to restrict
the search results
searchScope: the scope of the search. It
can take two values:
onelevel:search only under the current node.
subtree: search in the whole subtree. Use this parameter when the [people] branch is nested.
substringMatchType: defines who the query
is built using wildcard characters. Three different values can be
provided:
subany: wildcards are added around the string to match (as *foo*)
subinitial: wildcard is added before the string (*bar)
subfinal: wildcard is added after the string (baz*). This is the default behaviour.
readOnly: boolean value. This parameter
allows to create new entries or modify existing ones in the LDAP
server
cacheTimeout: cache timeout in
seconds
cacheMaxSize: maximum number of cached
entries before global invalidation
To disable the cache, comment <cache* /> tags
creationBaseDn: entry point in the server's
LDAP tree structure where new entries will be created. This is
useless to provided if readOnly attribute is set to false.
creationClass: use as many tag as needed to
specify which class are used to defined new people entries in LDAP
server.
Directory references leverage two common ways of string relationship in LDAP directories
The static reference strategy is to apply when a multi-valued attribute stores the exhaustive list of distinguished names of reference entries, for example the uniqueMember of the groupOfUniqueNames object.
<ldapReference field="members" directory="userDirectory" staticAttributeId="uniqueMember" />
The staticAttributeId attribute contains directly the value which can be read and manipulated.
The dynamic attribute strategy is used when a potentially multi-value attribute stores a LDAP URL intensively, for example the memberURL's attribute of the groupOfURL object class.
<ldapReference field="members" directory="userDirectory" forceDnConsistencyCheck="false" dynamicAttributeId="memberURL" />
The value contained in dynamicAttributeId looks
like ldap:///ou=groups,dc=example,dc=com??subtree?(cn=sub*) and will be
resolved by dynamical queries to get all values. The
forceDnConsistencyCheck attribute will check that the
value got through the dynamic resolution correspond to the attended
format. otherwise, the value will be ignored. Use this check when you
are not sure of the validity of the distinguished name
The LDAP tree reference can be used to resolve children in the LDAP tree hierarchy.
<ldapTreeReference field="children" directory="groupDirectory" scope="subtree" />
The field has to be a list of strings. It will resolve children of entries in the current directory, and look them up in the directory specified in the reference.The scope attribute. Available scopes are "onelevel" (default), "subtree". Children with same id than parent will be filtered. An inverse reference can be used to retrieve the parent form the children entries. It will be stored in a list, even if there can be only 0 or 1 parent.
WARNING: Edit is NOT IMPLEMENTED: modifications to this field will be ignored when saving the entry.
Inverse references are defined with the following declarations:
<references>
<inverseReference field="groups" directory="groupDirectory"
dualReferenceField="members" />
</references>
This syntax should be understood as "the member groups value is an inverse reference on groupDirectory directory using members reference". It is the group directory that stores all members for a given group. So the groups of a member are retrieved by querying in which groups a member belongs to.
Multi directories are used to combine values coming from different directories.
For example, it is useful to combine entries from LDAP directory with a standard directory provided by Nuxeo5.
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.directory.multi.config">
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.directory.multi.MultiDirectoryFactory"
point="directories">
<directory name="multi">
<schema>schema</schema>
<idField>uid</idField>
<passwordField>password</passwordField>
<source name="sourceA" creation="true">
...
</source>
<source name="sourceB">
....
</source>
</directory>
</extension>
</component>
This component provides tools to dialog with directories, make queries and get informations. Three classes are a
Directories are also useful to build and store values that will be used in option lists. We usually call "vocabulary" that kind of directories as they follow a simple schema.
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.directories">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.directory.sql.SQLDirectoryFactory"
point="directories">
<directory name="country">
<schema>xvocabulary</schema>
<parentDirectory>continent</parentDirectory>
<dataSource>java:/nxsqldirectory</dataSource>
<cacheTimeout>3600</cacheTimeout>
<cacheMaxSize>1000</cacheMaxSize>
<table>country</table>
<idField>id</idField>
<autoincrementIdField>false</autoincrementIdField>
<dataFile>directories/country.csv</dataFile>
<createTablePolicy>on_missing_columns</createTablePolicy>
</directory>
<directory name="continent">
<schema>vocabulary</schema>
<dataSource>java:/nxsqldirectory</dataSource>
<cacheTimeout>3600</cacheTimeout>
<cacheMaxSize>1000</cacheMaxSize>
<table>continent</table>
<idField>id</idField>
<autoincrementIdField>false</autoincrementIdField>
<dataFile>directories/continent.csv</dataFile>
<createTablePolicy>on_missing_columns</createTablePolicy>
</directory>
</extension>
</component>
Example 19.1. Sample declaration of vocabularies.
The different attributes have the same behaviour as other directories.
Let's have a look at the schema attribute which can take two different values:
vocabulary: this schema is provided to make
default vocabulary. It defines the following fields: id, label,
order and obsolete.
xvocabulary: this schema is used to define
linked vocabularies. It defines the following fields: id, label,
order, obsolete and parent. When using
xvocabulary schema, an other attribute should be
defined: parentDirectory points the parent
directory name to which the current one is relative.
When these vocabularies are set up, the following JSF methods can be used to render them in forms:
<div xmlns:h="http://java.sun.com/jsf/html"
xmlns:nxdir="http://nuxeo.org/nxdirectory">
<nxdir:selectOneListbox
value="#{mydoc.myschema.myfield}"
directoryName="continent"
id="continentSelect"
localize="true" />
<h:message for="continentSelect" class="errorMessage" />
</div>
Example 19.2. Sample declaration of vocabularies.
In this example, a simple vocabulary selection list is displayed. The equivalent tag for multi selection, nxdir:selectManyListbox is also available.
<div xmlns:h="http://java.sun.com/jsf/html"
xmlns:nxdir="http://nuxeo.org/nxdirectory">
<h:selectOneListbox value="#{mydoc.myschema.myfield}"
id="continentSelect">
<nxdir:selectItems
directoryName="continent"
var="item"
itemValue="#{item.vocabulary.id}"
itemLabel="#{item.vocabulary.label}"
displayAll="true" />
</h:selectOneListbox>
<h:message for="continentSelect" class="errorMessage" />
</div>
Example 19.3. Sample declaration of vocabularies.
This is the same example, but using standard JSF selection components, and another JSF method to display select items. This is more configurable, and can be helpful when using another schema than the default "vocabulary" and "xvocabulary" ones.
<div xmlns:h="http://java.sun.com/jsf/html"
xmlns:a4j="https://ajax4jsf.dev.java.net/ajax"
xmlns:nxdir="http://nuxeo.org/nxdirectory">
<a4j:region id="countrySelectRegion">
<nxdir:chainSelect size="2" value="#{mydoc.myschema.myfield}"
id="#{continentCountryChainSelect}">
<nxdir:chainSelectListbox index="0" size="0" directoryName="continent"
localize="true" id="selectContinent">
<a4j:support event="onchange" reRender="selectCountry" />
</nxdir:chainSelectListbox>
<nxdir:chainSelectListbox size="0" index="1" directoryName="country"
localize="true" id="selectCountry" />
</nxdir:chainSelect>
</a4j:region>
<h:message styleClass="errorMessage" for="continentCountryChainSelect" />
</div>
Example 19.4. Sample declaration of vocabularies.
This is an example of a chained list box.
For more information about available tags, please check the documentation at http://doc.nuxeo.org/current/tlddoc/. Note that this kind of rendering can be achieved using layout configuration too.
Some pages are available to be able to delete/add/edit entries in these directories. In the default application, it is presented clicking on the "Manage vocabularies" link that is displayed on top of every page if logged in as an administrator.
The list of directories that can be managed will be displayed. Since Nuxeo 5.2.1, this is managed through another extension point, dedicated to the User Interface part, and uses layouts configuration.
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.webapp.directory.directoryUI">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.directory.ui.DirectoryUIManager"
point="directories">
<directory name="continent" layout="vocabulary" sortField="label">
<deleteConstraint
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.directory.api.ui.HierarchicalDirectoryUIDeleteConstraint">
<property name="targetDirectory">country</property>
<property name="targetDirectoryField">parent</property>
</deleteConstraint>
</directory>
<directory name="country" layout="country_vocabulary" sortField="parent" />
</extension>
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.forms.layout.WebLayoutManager"
point="layouts">
<layout name="vocabulary">
<templates>
<template mode="any">
/directory/directory_layout_template.xhtml
</template>
</templates>
<rows>
<row>
<widget>vocabulary_id</widget>
</row>
<row>
<widget>vocabulary_label</widget>
</row>
<row>
<widget>vocabulary_obsolete</widget>
</row>
<row>
<widget>vocabulary_order</widget>
</row>
</rows>
</layout>
<layout name="country_vocabulary">
<templates>
<template mode="any">
/directory/directory_layout_template.xhtml
</template>
</templates>
<rows>
<row>
<widget>parent</widget>
</row>
<row>
<widget>xvocabulary_id</widget>
</row>
<row>
<widget>xvocabulary_label</widget>
</row>
<row>
<widget>xvocabulary_obsolete</widget>
</row>
<row>
<widget>xvocabulary_order</widget>
</row>
</rows>
<widget name="parent" type="selectOneDirectory">
<labels>
<label mode="any">label.vocabulary.entry.parent</label>
</labels>
<translated>true</translated>
<fields>
<field>xvocabulary:parent</field>
</fields>
<properties mode="any">
<property name="directoryName">continent</property>
<property name="localize">true</property>
</properties>
<properties widgetMode="edit">
<property name="required">true</property>
</properties>
</widget>
</layout>
</extension>
</component>
Example 19.5. Sample declaration of directory to display.
This files is declaring the directories to display, and the layouts to use when displaying them. The layouts configuration is standard, please refer to the chapter Chapter 8, Layouts for more information.
Note that the Directory UI declaration can state a delete constraint to be used when trying to delete an item. The class checking the deletion can be contributed and has to follow the org.nuxeo.ecm.directory.api.ui.DirectoryUIDeleteConstraint interface. The class in the example takes as parameters some information about the directory where to check constraints on. It is designed to refuse deletion of a parent vocabulary item, if there is still a reference to it in the child vocabulary.
Special kinds of field types can be used to manage binary content. Here is a presentation about how to set them up in custom document types.
The standard binary content is defined in the Nuxeo core types that are deployed by default. It is handled by the repository. If the binary content is stored on the file system or in the SQL backend is up to the repository configuration.
To create a new binary field, you can include this file in your schema definition and refer to the type named "content".
WARNING : any type named "content" will be handled as a binary type, so this field named should be considered as reserved.
Sample declaration of a binary field:
<xs:schema targetNamespace="http://www.nuxeo.org/ecm/schemas/binary_content_sample/" xmlns:xs="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" xmlns:nxs="http://www.nuxeo.org/ecm/schemas/binary_content_sample/"> <xs:include schemaLocation="core-types.xsd" /> <xs:element name="my_attached_file" type="nxs:content" /> </xs:schema>
Defining this field will make it possible to set and get a Blob for this property value.
Let's have a look at the content field definition:
<xs:complexType name="content">
<xs:sequence>
<xs:element name="encoding" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="mime-type" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="data" type="xs:base64Binary" />
<xs:element name="name" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="length" type="xs:long" />
<xs:element name="digest" type="xs:string" />
</xs:sequence>
</xs:complexType>
The blob holds a number of additional properties that give additional information about the blob content. These fields can be retrieved and set through the blob api. Some of them are automatically set by some nuxeo default events.
Note that the file name is also stored in the blob. As it was not originally the case, the default "file" schema defines a string field to hold it. It is the one used by default, but some listeners do copy this value to the blob file name sub property.
External blobs are available since release 5.2.1. Although their retrieval is also handled through the repository and Nuxeo core API, the way to retrieve them can be customized.
For instance, the default FileSystemExternalBlobAdapter plugin makes it possible to refer to files that are stored in a different file system folder than the one handled by the repository. This can be handy if you already have a set of files available on your system and would like to avoid duplicating these files when using them in your Nuxeo application.
To create an external binary field, you can include the Nuxeo core types file in your schema definition and refer to the type named "externalcontent".
WARNING : any type named "externalcontent" will be handled as a binary type, so this field named should be considered as reserved.
Sample declaration of a binary field:
<xs:schema targetNamespace="http://www.nuxeo.org/ecm/schemas/binary_content_sample/" xmlns:xs="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" xmlns:nxs="http://www.nuxeo.org/ecm/schemas/binary_content_sample/"> <xs:include schemaLocation="core-types.xsd" /> <xs:element name="my_external_file" type="nxs:externalcontent" /> </xs:schema>
If you would like to refer to files on the file system, on the same server than the one holding the repository, you can use the following configuration:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.api.externalblob.adapter.sample">
<documentation>
External blob sample contribution: a file system adaptor that takes the
"container" property to set the absolute path of the container folder on the
file system.
</documentation>
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.api.blobholder.BlobHolderAdapterComponent"
point="ExternalBlobAdapter">
<adapter prefix="fs"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.api.externalblob.FileSystemExternalBlobAdapter">
<property name="container">/path/to/my/container</property>
</adapter>
</extension>
</component>
Note that you have to define the container folder, and a prefix for this configuration. These properties will be used to build the corresponding blob: the repository only stores an URI that looks like "fs:/subfolder/myfile.txt". After the prefix, we can see the file path, relative to the container folder. The file system adapter will then be able to retrieve the blob will all this information. Configuring the container property independently from what the repository stores makes it possible to change the container folder place in the file system.
When creating an external blob, you have to build this uri as it is the only information that will be handled by the current system: uploading a file, building the corresponding uri and putting the corresponding file on the file system is not supported.
Here is some sample code to setup an external blob:
DocumentModel doc = ...
String uri = "fs:/subfolder/myfile.txt";
doc.setPropertyValue("my_schema:my_external_file/uri", uri);
...
Blob blob = (Blob) doc.getPropertyValue("my_schema:my_external_file");
Let's have a look at the external content field definition:
<xs:complexType name="content">
<xs:sequence>
<xs:element name="encoding" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="mime-type" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="uri" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="name" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="length" type="xs:long" />
<xs:element name="digest" type="xs:string" />
</xs:sequence>
</xs:complexType>
You can see that it is very similar to the standard blob, except that the data is replaced by a string URI. As long as the uri is set, the additional fields can be retrieved and set through the blob api. Some of them are automatically set by some nuxeo default events, similarly to what's done for a standard blob. The external blob content indexing is also handled so that a document can be found searching on keywords present in the referred file.
If you'd like to define your own way of retrieving a file (for instance, connect to a FTP server or get it from the web), you can write an new class following the ExternalBlobInterface, and register it to the "ExternalAdapter" extension point, as shown above for the field system adapter. You will have to use your own prefix so that the system knows what adapter to use to retrieve the file.
BlobHolder defined an abstract interface for objects that can hold
one or several blobs. BlobHolders can be created from plain
Blob (or List<Blob>)
or from a DocumentModel. Compared to a plain
Blob, a BlobHolder provides
lazy loading of a blob when possible and keeps track of the link between
the Blob and the DocumentModel. In fact, BlobHolder interface is also
available as a DocumentModelAdapter, so you can simply get a BlobHolder
from a DocumentModel. Using BlobHolder provides several advantages :
no more need to hardcode the xpath to extract the blob from a DocumentModel (this is done once and for all in the DocumentModelAdapter configuration)
conversionservice caching system can no efficiently monitor changes
# create a BlobHolder from a File File file = ... Blob blob = new FileBlob(file); BlobHolder fileBlobHolder = new SimpleBlobHolder(blob); # get BlobHolder from a Document DocumentModel myDoc = ... BlobHolder docBlobHolder = myDoc.getAdapter(BlobHolder.class); # create a BlobHolder "by hand" on top of a DocumentModel BlobHolder docBlobHolder2 = new DocumentBlobHolder(myDoc, "file:content");
The org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.mimetype.* packages
give all the tools to find the mimetype of a document. The package
provides two guessing approach: using file extensions and
using the guessing library Jmimemagic (third party tool providing been
enhanced detection methods, based on the binary signature of files).
All the recognized mimetypes are stored in the
MimetypeRegistry. Each mimetype definition is a
contribution to the mimetype extension point of the
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.mimetype.service.MimetypeRegistryService
component.
<component
name="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.mimetype.service.MimetypeRegistryService">
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.mimetype.service.MimetypeRegistryService"
point="mimetype">
<mimetype normalized="application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.text"
binary="true" iconPath="odt.png" oleSupported="true">
<mimetypes>
<mimetype>application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.text</mimetype>
</mimetypes>
<extensions>
<extension>odt</extension>
</extensions>
</mimetype>
</extension>
</component>
A mimetype node, bound to a
MimetypeDescriptor defines a normalized mimetype with
the following informations:
normalized: the mimetype entry that is
described and that will be returned
binary: a boolean that indicates if the file
is a binary one
iconPath: the filename of the image
representing the icon
oleSupported: this file mimetype is supported
by the oleExtract transform plugin - default is
False
onlineEditable: this mimetype is supported by
online Edit - default is
False
mimetypes: list of mimetypes bound to this
normalized mimetype
extensions: list of extensions bound to this
normalized mimetype
An other defined extension point is extension
that allow to register extensions that are ambiguous to force mimetype
sniffing.
<component
name="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.mimetype.service.MimetypeRegistryService">
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.mimetype.service.MimetypeRegistryService"
point="extension">
<fileExtension name="xml" mimetype="text/xml" ambiguous="true" />
</extension>
</component>
A fileExtension node, bound to
ExtensionDescriptor, has the following
attributes:
name: the file extension
mimetype: the associated mimetype
ambiguous: force the mimetype sniffing
At the MimetypeRegistry level, methods are
provided to dynamically register (or unregister) mimetypes or extensions
by code
public void testMimetypeRegistration() {
MimetypeEntry mimetype = getMimetypeSample();
mimetypeRegistry.registerMimetype(mimetype);
assertEquals(
mimetypeRegistry.getMimetypeEntryByName(mimetype.getNormalized()),
mimetype);
}
private static MimetypeEntryImpl getMimetypeSample() {
String normalizedMimetype = "application/msword";
List<String> mimetypes = new ArrayList<String>();
mimetypes.add("application/msword");
// fake
mimetypes.add("app/whatever-word");
List<String> extensions = new ArrayList<String>();
extensions.add("doc");
extensions.add("xml");
String iconPath = "icons/doc.png";
boolean binary = true;
boolean onlineEditable = true;
boolean oleSupported = true;
return new MimetypeEntryImpl(normalizedMimetype, mimetypes, extensions,
iconPath, binary, onlineEditable, oleSupported);
}
The registerMimetype method, with a
MimetypeEntry argument, adds the given entry to the
registry. After adding the mimetype, one can see that the
MimetypeEntry retrieved using the initial Normalized
name is correct. The getMimetypeSample method, helper
for the TestMimetyepRegistryService test class, shows a
definition of a MimetypeEntry by code.
Based on the previous entry definition, two registries are built allowing to retrieve the normalized mimetype through file extension (efficient) or by sniffing (accurate).
This section describes the underlying process involved in mimetype detections.
The file extension detection rely on the filename that has to be correct. As it is a simple string to associate to the mimetype, we do not develop further. Just note that the filename has to be correctly named and have an extension to retrieve a mimetype with this method.
The sniffing tries to analyse the file content itself in order to
guess the mimetype. The third-party tool Jmimemagic is
used for this and widely enhanced on defining new supported mimetypes and
detectors. The Jmimemagic tool uses 2 files,
magic.xml and magic_1_0.dtd. We
redefine the XML one to add new detections (no
extension-point there defined from Jmimemagic too ;-)
l).
Basically, the default mimetype sniffing is based on searching a
sequence of characters (or binary values) at a specified
offset.
<match> <mimetype>application/pdf</mimetype> <extension>pdf</extension> <description>PDF document</description> <test offset="0" type="string" comparator="=">%PDF-</test> </match>
A match is the definition of a magic entry. It
contains a mimetype, an extension
and a textual description of the defined mimetype. A
test node, containing the operation to perform is also
defined. Here it declares that for an application/pdf
mimetype, the file has to contain the string %PDF- at
offset 0.
if this method is usually suitable for a lot of files (i.e. one can find some invariants in the format), when used with more complex ones, a simple offset (or a combination) is not enough and we have to refine the detection algorithm. That is what detectors are made for and we have defined some for the 2 major office file formats, MsOffice and OpenOffice.org.
For OpenOffice.org, the zip detection is enhanced
<match>
<mimetype>application/zip</mimetype>
<extension>zip</extension>
<description>Zip archive data</description>
<test offset="0" type="string" comparator="=">PK\003\004</test>
<match-list>
<!-- opendocument & OOo 1.x -->
<match>
<mimetype>OOo</mimetype>
<extension>OOo</extension>
<description>OOo 1.x and OpenDocument file</description>
<test type="detector" offset="0" length="" bitmask="" comparator="=">
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.mimetype.detectors.OOoMimetypeSniffer
</test>
</match>
</match>
First a simple offset detection is performed to
qualify a zip file, then a sub-match is defined. The
detector type indicates that the
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.mimetype.detectors.OOoMimetypeSniffer
has to be called and this is its responsibility to give all the valid
information (mimetype, extension,
description) if the file is of correct type.
For MS-Office files, the "magic numbers" (the value to be found at a
certain offset) are not that clear, as the magic number defined by
Jmimemagic (based on the file Linux
command resource file) is the same for all MS-Office application. Then we
invoke a detector for each component that uses the POI
library to detect what file we deal with.
<match>
<mimetype>application/msword</mimetype>
<extension>doc</extension>
<description>Microsoft Office Document</description>
<test offset="0" type="string" comparator="=">\320\317\021\340\241\261</test>
<match-list>
<!-- XLS file by detector -->
<match>
<mimetype>application/vnd.ms-excel</mimetype>
<extension>xls</extension>
<description>Excel File</description>
<test type="detector" offset="0" length="" bitmask="" comparator="=">
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.mimetype.detectors.XlsMimetypeSniffer
</test>
</match>
<!-- PPT file by detector -->
<match>
<mimetype>application/vnd.ms-powerpoint</mimetype>
<extension>ppt</extension>
<description>Powerpoint File</description>
<test type="detector" offset="0" length="" bitmask="" comparator="=">
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.mimetype.detectors.PptMimetypeSniffer
</test>
</match>
</match-list>
</match>
Once a Microsoft Office Document has been
detected at offset 0 in the first match, two
sub-matches detectors are defined for
application/vnd.ms-excel
(org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.mimetype.detectors.XlsMimetypeSniffer)
and application/vnd.ms-powerpoint
(org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.mimetype.detectors.PptMimetypeSniffer).
If none returns a correct mimetype, the only possibility remains then
application/msword. (This may be lightly refactored for
simplicity in a near future).
A detector is a class that implements
net.sf.jmimemagic.MagicDetector. The public
process method has to detect if the file fulfills the
condition. If successful, it returns the mimetypes supported by this file.
The public methods getHandledExtensions and
getHandledTypes define the String
arrays that are used by Jmimemagic to build the final match.
All the detection is based on MimetypeRegistry
like object. When invoked, the registry is populated with the information
that has been exposed previously. The registry implements the interface
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.mimetype.interfaces.MimetypeRegistry.
Once available, directly or from a bean, any File
or Blob can be analyzed and the information retrieved
like the mimetype name or the supported extensions list.
import org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.mimetype.ejb.MimetypeRegistryBean;
...
private MimetypeRegistryBean mimetypeRegistry;
...
public void testSniffWordFromFile() throws Exception {
File file = FileUtils.getResourceFileFromContext("test-data/hello.doc");
String mimetype = mimetypeRegistry.getMimetypeFromFile(file);
assertEquals("application/msword", mimetype);
List<String> extensions = mimetypeRegistry.getExtensionsFromMimetypeName(mimetype);
assertTrue(extensions.contains("doc"));
}
In the above example, the mimetypeRegistry object
used is a MimetypeRegistryBean. The purpose is to sniff
the mimetype of a given file. The MS-Word file is first read and the
getMimetypeFromFile method is called. Once the mimetype
is retrieved, the getExtensionsFromMimetypeName can be
called and it gives the associated extensions from the registry.
Note that the API of
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.mimetype.interfaces.MimetypeRegistry
contains various ways to ask for a mimetype, dealing with
File or Blob objects, with or
without default responses. It is worth a look to avoid unneeded
work.
Transforms are operations that perform any action modifying an input document. This can cover file conversion as well as mail merging or information extraction.
The various plugins are stored in the
nuxeo-plateform-transforms-plugins.* module. They are
declared as a contribution of the
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.service.TransformService
component at extension point plugins.
The plugins are the engines that perform the needed transformations.
A transform plugin follows a framework defined in the
nuxeo-plateform-transforms-core module. It is
basically a class that extends a
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.interfaces.Plugin.
The main common method that has to be exposed is
transform
List<TransformDocument> transform(
Map<String, Serializable> options, TransformDocument... sources);
The transform method returns a list of
TransformDocument and accepts an
options
map and TransformDocument sources.
TransformDocument object is defined in
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.interfaces.TransformDocument
and holds the binary as well as other information such as mimetype.
The options map holds all the necessary
options to be passed to the plugin. Please note that the keys are the
plugin names. See the officeMerger plugin below for
an implementation example.
We first declare a contribution to the extension point
plugins of
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.service.TransformService:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.service.TransformService" point="plugins">
<plugin name="any2odt"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.plugin.joooconverter.impl.JOOoConvertPluginImpl"
destinationMimeType="application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.text">
<sourceMimeType>text/xml</sourceMimeType>
<sourceMimeType>text/plain</sourceMimeType>
<sourceMimeType>text/rtf</sourceMimeType>
<!-- Microsoft office documents -->
<sourceMimeType>application/msword</sourceMimeType>
<!-- OpenOffice.org 1.x documents -->
<sourceMimeType>application/vnd.sun.xml.writer</sourceMimeType>
<sourceMimeType>application/vnd.sun.xml.writer.template</sourceMimeType>
<!-- OpenOffice.org 2.x documents -->
<sourceMimeType>application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.text</sourceMimeType>
<sourceMimeType>application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.text-template</sourceMimeType>
<option name="ooo_host_name">localhost</option>
<option name="ooo_host_port">8100</option>
</plugin>
</extension>
The name attribute will be used to declare the
transform chain. The class attribute is the class
that will do the effective job of the transformation while the
destinationMimeType is the mime-type of the result
of the transform.
After attributes, <sourceMimeType> nodes
define the allowed input mime-types the transform is supporting. In the
presented case, we can see that the any2odt plugin
will be able to handle text, Microsoft office word , OOo 1.x and
OpenDocument format (OOo2.x) files to output an
application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.text
OpenDocument file. Options can also be added as we see for
<option> tags with
ooo_host_name and ooo_host_port
attributes.
Plugins can be combined to build transform chains. This chains are
declared in a transformer which is a contribution to the extension-point
transformers of
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.service.TransformService
component.
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.service.TransformService"
point="transformers">
<transformer name="any2text"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.transformer.TransformerImpl">
<plugins>
<plugin name="any2pdf"/>
<plugin name="pdf2text"/>
</plugins>
</transformer>
</extension>
A transformer is defined by its name. This is
this name that will be used to initialize a transform
service when using it.
Then, plugins involved in the chain are listed. Wen can see that our
any2txt transformer is composed with two chained
plugins: any2pdf then pdf2txt.
Obviously, a single plugin for a transform is legal as we can see with
the use of our previous any2odt plugins.
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.service.TransformService"
point="transformers">
<!-- This transformer uses a the OOo plugin to transform documents to ODT-->
<transformer name="any2odt"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.transformer.TransformerImpl">
<plugins>
<plugin name="any2odt"/>
</plugins>
</transformer>
</extension>
Once a transform plugin has been declared and the transformer is known, we can use it to perform various transformation actions.
TransformService service = NXTransform.getTransformService();
Transformer transformer = service.getTransformerByName("any2pdf");
List<TransformDocument> results = transformer.transform(null,
new TransformDocumentImpl(sourceStream, "application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.text"));
SerializableInputStream resultStream = results.get(0).getStream();
We first get the TransformService that exposes
all the available transforms. Then a specific
transformer is built with the
getTransformerByName method of the service. The
name is the one that has been declared in the contribution to the
transformers extension-point of the
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.service.TransformService
component.
Then the transformer exposes a transform method
that returns a list of TransformDocument. The
arguments are the:
options: the plugin options (the keys are the plugin names) - we
pass null here as we do not have any options. See
officeMerger plugin for a more detailed
example
list of sources as TransformDocument
instances
There are three levels of options that overload. First the
plugin options are the default. Then any option in
the transformer that define an option for this plugin
overload them. Finally, any code-defined options are merged, overloading
any previous option that may have been already defined. Please note
again that options are defined on a plugin name basis.
A TransformDocument instance can be constructed
from:
a source stream
a source stream and its mime-type
a blob
In our example, we use the second way and give a
sourceStream and the mime-type of an ODF document.
Once the input list processed, the results list contains all the
transformed files as TransformDocument instances from
which you can retrieve the SerializableInputStream
stream with getStream method, the mime-type using
getMimetype and the blob with
getBlob method.
An alternate way of using the transform is to call it directly from the service
List<TransformDocument> results = service.transform(converter,
null, new TransformDocumentImpl(stream, sourceMimetype));
The arguments are the same and the converter name
is given as first argument. An other constructor using blobs as input
instead of TransformDocument is also available.
Before calling a transform we can also check that the source mime-type
is supported by calling the
isMimetypeSupportedByPlugin method. Be careful though
that this plugin name may be different than the transformer name.
Transforms can be called directly but are also part of the docModifier framework that reacting on events, can call transforms to alter or generate new informations (see below oleExtract plugin or docModifier documentation)
All the transform plugin packages start with
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.plugin. Some of them
are optional and not included in the default platform.
The document conversion plugin is a generic transform delivered in
Nuxeo that allow transforming a file from a format to an other. It uses
the third-party JODconverter tool. The transform is implemented in the
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.plugin.joooconverter.impl.JOOoConvertPluginImpl
class and defined as a plugin contribution to
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.service.TransformService
.
Then it can be classically called as explained in the previous section:
TransformService service = NXTransform.getTransformService();
Transformer transformer = service.getTransformerByName("any2pdf");
List<TransformDocument> results = transformer.transform(null,
new TransformDocumentImpl(sourceStream, "application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.text"));
SerializableInputStream resultStream = results.get(0).getStream();
The transform call relays to the
JOOoConvertPluginImpl that first connects to OOo on
port and host defined in the contribution (usually
localhost:8100) or in the options (not defined in
our example). It then acquire an
OpenOfficeDocumentConverter from JODconverter tool
and then can call the convert method with the
requested target mimetype and source file. Note that in future version,
the StreamOpenOfficeDocumentConverter class will be
used to avoid dealing with File objects. This
limitation will be solved when a new version of OpenOffice.org (2.3)
will be out and solves a regression on loading streams.
Before any call to the underlying OpenOffice.org converter, once in
the transformation engine JOOoConvertPluginImpl, the
source document mimetype is tested. If it is the same than the requested
destinationMimetype defined by the plugin, the
source file is returned immediately as result unless the mimetype occurs
in the <sourceMimeType> of the plugin to allow
self-transformations. By default, any2pdf plugin will
return immediately if an application/pdf file is
submitted while any OpenDocument transformation
(any2odt, any2ods,
any2odp) will process the files as each one
contains its own mimetype like
<sourceMimeType>application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.text</sourceMimeType>.
This allow to clean and validate files forged by hand and possibly apply
automatic treatments at OpenOffice.org side.
Since OOo 2.3.0, it is possible to use
InputStreams as source documents so that no more
File objects are needed. This is useful if we
want to isolate the OOo server on a separate machine (and if needed
use a farm with load balancing if heavy work is needed) As this
feature is only available with OOo2.3+ (due to a bug in previous
versions), there is a nuxeo.property to define the
OOo version
used.
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.ooo.version=2.3.0
At
term, the JODConverter tool should be able to return the OOo version
it is using, so that this property will not be needed anymore. For the
moment, let use this property. But as OOo stream loading has been
reported as less efficient than
File/URL by JODConverter users,
the streaming method is only used if OOo is really a remote instance.
This is analyzed if the ooo_host_name transformer
option is 'localhost' or starts with
'127.0.0'. And of course, only if OOo declared
version is greater than 2.3.0.
As the underlying engine is based on OpenOffice.org, one can extend the document converter by supporting OOo loading options. The transform plugins options mechanism is fully supported, so they can be defined at plugin, transformer and code level. The available fields to be passed to OOo is listed at MediaDescriptor IDL reference and have to be bound to the plugin name.
Here is an example passing two options for loading conditions of a special document that is a password protected and has an autostart bound event that delete the content of the file to put the word DELETED in the document. This simulate any other heavy process such as document merging or automatic mail-merge from a database.
Map<String, Map<String, Serializable>> options = new HashMap<String, Map<String, Serializable>>();
Map<String, Serializable> pdfOptions = new HashMap<String, Serializable>();
pdfOptions.put("Password", "TheDocumentPassWord");
short ALWAYS_EXECUTE_NO_WARN = 4;
pdfOptions.put("MacroExecutionMode", ALWAYS_EXECUTE_NO_WARN);
pdfOptions.put("ReadOnly", false);
pdfOptions.put("Hidden", false);
options.put("any2pdf", pdfOptions);
// Note: due to password, file mimetype can not be sniffed
// so mimetype has to supplied to TransformDocumentImpl
results = service.transform("any2pdf", options,
new TransformDocumentImpl(getBlobFromPath(path), "application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.text"));
assertTrue(results.size() > 0);
// The macro on the open event replaces the text by "DELETED"
assertEquals("pdf content", "DELETED", DocumentTestUtils.readPdfText(pdfFile));
First, we build the plugin options map. The
Password field is in charge of sending the password
string to the OOo loader so that the file can be opened. The
MacroExecutionMode field defines how macros and
script are handled at startup. By default, the consequence of the
-headless OOo mode, is that the
NEVER_EXECUTE = 0 value is used. One can change
this default behaviour by using any value listed in the OOo MacroExecMode constant group. One important thing to be
noted is that type is important: Password require a
String argument while
MacroExecutionMode requires a
short one. The types have to be correct otherwise
the field will not be handled by OOo.
By default, JODConverter sets the ReadOnly
option as true. As we want to modify the document, we will have to set
the ReadOnly flag to false. The
Hidden flag has also to be set to false. This
trick is due to a problem in OpenOffice.org PDF engine that seems not
to be able to handle document modification while
Hidden. As an headless server-deployed OOo
instance, this should not be a major problem.
Once Options have been defined, they are globally merged to the
options map under the plugin name key (here,
any2pdf)
Then the transform can be called as usual. Please note that
mimetype of password document have to be passed explicitly to the
TransformDocumentImpl constructor as it can not
be sniffed by the Mimetype service for the moment.
Finally, as expected a PDF document is returned with its content
changed to the DELETED string.
OLE objects are objects included in office files that can be edited as standalone ones. For example, a spreadsheet table may be included in a report so that the presented datas are always up to date.
This plugin is located in
nuxeo-plateform-transform-plugin-oleextract module
and is not include by default in the plateform.
The purpose of this plugin is to extract all these Ole objects and
provide them as standalone files so that they can be checked
individually. It is also extended to extract images. It has a
classical Transform plugin structure, the plugin name is
oleExtractPlugin bound to
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.plugin.oleextract.impl.OfficeOleExtractorPluginImpl.
The transform name is oleExtract.
As an example it can be called like
List <TransformDocument > results =
service.transform(TRANSFORMER_NAME, null, new TransformDocumentImpl(stream, mimetype));
TransformDocument result = results.get(0);
List <Map<String, Serializable>> ole =
(List < Map < String, Serializable > >) result.getPropertyValue("ole:olecontents");
First, the transform service is classically called, the
TRANSFORMER_NAME being set to
oleExtract. After processing, the only
TransformDocument returned result contains a
property ole:olecontents that gives the list of
embedded objects that have been extracted.
The olecontents schema is defined in
olecontent.xsd. Each element of the list contains
the following fields
<xs:complexType name="olecontent">
<xs:sequence>
<xs:element name="displayname" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="filename" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="mime-type" type="xs:string" />
<xs:element name="data" type="nxs:content"/>
<xs:element name="thumbnail-mime-type" type="xs:string"/>
<xs:element name="thumbnail-data" type="nxs:content"/>
</xs:sequence>
</xs:complexType>
Each olecontent element contains file datas
(data & mime-type) and
thumbnail ones (thumbnail-mime-type &
thumbnail-data). The
displayname is the name retrieved in the office
file if it was named otherwise the internal one that has been given in
the office file. The filename fields is built from
the displayname and the extension deduced from the
mime-type.
Based on this new schema, the File doctype is extended in the org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.oleextract.coretypes contributing type and schema needed by oleExtract
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.TypeService" point="doctype">
<doctype name="FileWithOle" extends="File">
<schema name="olecontents" />
</doctype>
</extension>
A new FileWithOle doctype, based on
File, is defined. It can be subtype of
Workspace and Folder and is
defined as a contribution of
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.types.TypeService which
allows to create new documents based on it.
The oleExtract transform plugin has been bound to the
oleExtractModifier docModifier. The contribution
to the extension point is defined in
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.modifier.service.DocModifierService"
point="docTypeToTransformer">
<documentation>
docModifier for oleExtract transform plugin.
</documentation>
<docModifier name="oleExtractModifier"
documentType="FileWithOle"
transformationPluginName="oleExtract"
sourceFieldName="file:content"
destinationFieldName="file:content">
<coreEvent>documentCreated</coreEvent>
<coreEvent>documentModified</coreEvent>
<customField name="olecontents:olecontents" transformParamName="ole:olecontents"/>
<customOutputField outputParamName="ole:olecontents" name="olecontents:olecontents"/>
</docModifier>
</extension>
This contribution reacts on document creation and modification. It
receives the initial office file file:content and
gives back the olecontents:olecontents back mapped
top the ole:olecontents we saw above. The initial
file is returned unchanged.
With this docModifier reacting on some events, the oleExtract results can now be integrated in the application. The org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.oleextract.action component defines an ActionService contribution
<action id="TAB_OLEOBJECT" link="/incl/tabs/document_oleobjects.xhtml"
enabled="true" label="action.view.ole" order="49">
<category>VIEW_ACTION_LIST</category>
<filter id="view_ole">
<rule grant="true">
<type>FileWithOle</type>
</rule>
</filter>
</action>
The TAB_OLEOBJECT action defines a new tab
listing the olecontents:olecontents elements and
providing links for retrieving each file provided the document is of
the current type FileWithOle.
OleExtract is based on the parsing of OpenDocument File format. If the submitted file is an ODF one, then it is unzipped and processed without any connection to OpenOffice.org. If the file is not an ODF one, then a converter plugin is used according to the source mime type. In this case, OpenOffice.org is required as a JODConverter dependency.
Once we have an ODF file it is unzipped and its content.xml is
parsed to find draw:object-ole,
draw:object and draw:image
related tags. For each one, the name of the resource is retrieved if
it exists. Then for each found resource, the alternate view is
retrieved so that a preview can be proposed when listing this content
(still under development)
ODF resources in an ODF file (think at a spreadsheet diagram embedded in a text document) are stored in directories and flat XML form while other resources are stored in a binary format. So for ODF resources the global manifest file is parsed to isolate the files with their correct manifest:media-type so that the new ODF archive for the Ole object can be built. Once the new manifest file is created, the embedded ODF directory is zipped and this binary form is returned.
This transform plugin is contained in
nuxeo-plateform-transform-plugin-officemerger
module and is not include by default in the platform. Its purpose is to
build a new file as the result of the merging of the list given as
parameters. It uses OpenOffice.org merging capabilities, mainly through
the insertDocumentFromURL
UNO method for text documents.
The public method merge is available from
OfficeMergerImpl and returns a
SerializableInputStream containing the resulting
document.
OfficeMergerImpl merger = new OfficeMergerImpl();
SerializableInputStream result = merger.merge(sourceFiles, engineType, converter,
outlineRank, withPageBreaks);
SerializableInputStream result = merger.mergeStreams (sourceStreams, engineType,
converter, outlineRank, withPageBreaks);Some
options have been added to enhance the building of the main document.
Here is the list of the arguments of the merge method
sourceFiles/sourceStreams: Ordered array of
File objects or streams to be merged.
engineType: Depending on the nature of source
documents, the OpenOffice.org API to be used is obviously not the
same. If source files are text file, the user will probably want to
have a text file as a result while if he deals with slides, the
results is expected as a presentation. This String argument tells
which engine to be used (text,
presentation,
spreadsheet-
only text is already implemented) - Default
text
converter: Once the document is built, the
Document Converter plugin can be called automatically to create the
final document. This is the converter name that is expected (eg.
any2pdf) and an exception is raised if it does
not exist or the mime type deduced from the
engineType is not supported. If an empty string
is provided, no transform occur at the end of the merging - Default
empty
outlineRank: This is the rank (compared to
the file list) where a Table Of Content may appear. For example, if
the value is 3, then the first two files of the file list are
inserted, the T.O.C is built and inserted and then the remaining
files are processed. The Table of Content is refreshed at the end of
the whole insertion. A value of 0 means no T.O.C. - Default
0
withPageBreaks: A boolean that adds or
removes page breaks between file insertions - Default
true
The plugin engine, the merge method is available
directly but the principal use will occur through a
Transform call. The Transform name is
officeMerger and the package name is
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.plugin.officemerger
<plugin name="OfficeMergerPlugin"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.plugin.officemerger.impl.OfficeMergerImpl"
destinationMimeType="application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.text">
<sourceMimeType>application/msword</sourceMimeType>
<sourceMimeType>application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.text</sourceMimeType>
<sourceMimeType>application/vnd.sun.xml.writer</sourceMimeType>
<option name="ooo_host_name">localhost</option>
<option name="ooo_host_port">8100</option>
</plugin>
Note that OpenOffice.org has to be listening from incoming
UNO connections on the specified interface
ooo_host_name and port
ooo_host_port. If it is not the case, an
OpenOfficeException exception will be raised.
So, once defined, the officeMerger transform can
be called passing the options like
Map<String, Serializable> mergingOptions = new HashMap<String, Serializable>();
mergingOptions.put("engineType", "text");
mergingOptions.put("converter", "any2pdf");
mergingOptions.put("outlineRank", 0);
mergingOptions.put("withPageBreaks", false);
options.put("officeMerger", mergingOptions);
List<TransformDocument> results = transformer.transform(options, sourceFiles);
Note that mergingOptions can be incomplete or
even null. The options will then take their default
values.
The results list contains the final merged document, and converted if requested, at first index.
The XSLT plugin provides XSL transformations in Nuxeo. It allows you
to transform XML documents using a XSL stylesheet as defined in the
XSLT
Specification. The plugin is implemented in the
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.plugin.xslt.impl.XSLTPluginImpl
class and defined as a plugin contribution to
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.service.TransformService.
The XSLT Plugin accepts XML documents as source files, and you must
provide the XSL stylesheet as a plugin's option named
stylesheet. The XSL stylesheet must be provided as
a Blob.
Then, you can easily transform your documents:
final Map<String, Serializable> pluginOptions =
new HashMap<String, Serializable>();
pluginOptions.put("stylesheet", (FileBlob) getXSLStylesheetBlob(...);
final Map<String, Map<String, Serializable>> options =
new HashMap<String, Map<String, Serializable>>();
options.put("xslt", pluginOptions);
TransformServiceCommon service = TransformServiceDelegate.getLocalTransformService();
final List<TransformDocument> results = service.transform(
"xslt", options, xmlSourceFiles);
The resulting documents' mime-type is set depending of the
method attribute of the
xsl:output element, specified in the XSL stylesheet.
If there is no method attribute defined in the XSL
stylesheet, a default value is chosen for the method
attribute as defined in the XSLT
Specification.
The mime-type is chosen as follows:
text/html: if the output method is
html.
text/plain: if the output method is
text.
text/xml: if the output method is
xml.
If there is no XSL stylesheet provided to the plugin or if an error
occurs during the transformation (corrupted xml or xsl for instance), a
TransformException is thrown.
The nuxeo-core-convert provides a service to
manage conversion of Blobs from one format to an other.
nuxeo-core-convert has been available since
Nuxeo EP 5.2-M4.
Since Nuxeo EP 5.2, the Conversion Service replaces the Transformation service that is now deprecated.
The Transformation Service had some API design issues that we wanted to correct. Because full text indexing is now handled by the repository, we also had to have a core service to manage full text conversion. We decided to define a brand new API with a new service and we changed the service name to avoid any confusion and be able to provide backward compatibility.
API is now simpler
there are only converters, not transformers and plugins like before
ConversionService includes a caching system
this eliminate the need of having custom cache managed by all high level services that may use converters (like the preview service)
Data input/output is now handled via
BlobHolder interface.
There is only data structure (no more TransformDocuments or
plain Blobs). This also makes the caching system more efficient
sice link between the blobs and the associated
DocumentModel is preserved when
available.
Availability check API interface.
ConversionService now provides an API to know if converter is available, this is useful when the converter depends on an external program that must be installed on the server (like OpenOffice server)
Transformer API is now deprecated and the old transform-service
implementations and plugins have been removed from default distribution.
Nevertheless, we provide a tranformer-compat bundle that handles
compatibility between the old and the new API.
In order to activate this compatibility you need to deploy:
nuxeo-platform-transform-api
nuxeo-platform-transform-compat
The transformers API is still available, but the implementation now wraps calls to the ConversionService. This means you can use the new Converters from the old Transformation service API. All default included Transformers have been migrated to converters with the same name. Code that was using transformers should still work in 5.2.
Contributions to the old Transformation service are now contributed to the ConversionService using specific converters that wraps transformers or Plugins.
There are some limitations thought :
Transformers must be based on the TransformerImpl
class
you may have to change the dependencies in pom.xml and
MANIFEST.MF to point to the compat artifact instead of the core
one.
Inside nuxeo-core-convert-plugins
pdf2text, xml2text, html2text, word2text, xl2text, ppt2text, oo2text
text extractors for common office formats
rfc822totext
text extractors mime encoded mails
any2text
meta-converter for text extraction
Inside nuxeo-platform-convert
pdf2html
PDF to html conversion based on pdftohtml command line tool
office2html
convert standard office formats to html (uses openoffice)
any2html
compound converted to convert any input to html
any2pdf
cuse OpenOffice to generate PDF
The Conversion Service can be accessed via the standard Nuxeo Service lookup:
ConversionService conversionService = Framework.getService(ConversionService.class);
To convert a BlobHolder to a given
destination mime type:
BlobHolder result = conversionService.convertToMimeType("text/plain", blobHolder, params);
params is a simple Map<String,Serializable>
to pass parameters to the converter (can be null);
To use a known converter:
BlobHolder result = conversionService.convert("converterName", blobHolder, params);
To find a converter to a given conversion:
String converterName = conversionService.getConverterName(sourceMimeType, destinationMimeType);
To test if a converter is available:
ConverterCheckResult checkResult = conversionService.isConverterAvailable("converterName");
This call can throw
ConverterNotRegistred if the target converter
does not exist at all. The ConverterCheckResult
class provides:
a isAvailable() method
a getErrorMessage() method
Returns the error that occured while doing the availability check
a getInstallationMessage method
Returns the installation message that was contributed by the converter contributor
The Conversion Service supports a global configuration via XML file in order to configure caching.
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.convert.config">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.convert.service.ConversionServiceImpl"
point="configuration">
<configuration>
<!-- define directory location for caching : default to java default tmp dir (java.io.tmpdir) -->
<cachingDirectory>/var/ConversionCache</cachingDirectory>
<!-- GC interval in minutes (default = 10 minutes ) -->
<gcInterval>10</gcInterval>
<!-- maximum size for disk cache in KB (default to 10*1024) -->
<diskCacheSize>1024</diskCacheSize>
<!-- Enables or disables caching (default = true)-->
<enableCache>true</enableCache>
</configuration>
</extension>
</component>
To contribute a new converter, you have to contribute a class that
implement the
org.nuxeo.ecm.core.convert.extension.Converter
interface. This class will be associated to:
a converter name
a list of source mime-types
one destination mime-type
optional named parameters
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.convert.service.ConversionServiceImpl"
point="converter">
<converter name="html2text" class="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.convert.plugins.text.extractors.Html2TextConverter">
<sourceMimeType>text/html</sourceMimeType>
<sourceMimeType>text/xhtml</sourceMimeType>
<destinationMimeType>text/plain</destinationMimeType>
<parameters>
<parameter name="myParam">myValue</parameter>
</parameters>
</converter>
</extension>
You can also contribute a converter that is a chain of existing converters (what was called a transformer in 5.1 transform service API). To to this, the contributed transformer does not have to define an implementation class, just a chain of either converters or mime-types. If mime-types are used, the conversion service will automatically guess the converter chain from the mime-types steps.
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.convert.service.ConversionServiceImpl"
point="converter">
<!-- explicit chain of 2 converters : converter1 + converter2 -->
<converter name="chainedConverter" >
<sourceMimeType>some/mimetype</sourceMimeType>
<destinationMimeType>some/other-mimetype</destinationMimeType>
<conversionSteps>
<subconverter>converter1</subconverter>
<subconverter>converter2</subconverter>
</conversionSteps>
</converter>
<!-- define chain via mime types : foo/bar1 => foo/bar2 => foo/bar3 -->
<converter name="chainedMimeType" >
<sourceMimeType>foo/bar1</sourceMimeType>
<destinationMimeType>foo/bar3</destinationMimeType>
<conversionSteps>
<step>foo/bar2</step>
</conversionSteps>
</converter>
</extension>
When using chained converters, the additional optional parameters are passed to each underlying converter.
Converter based on external tools (such as command line or
OpenOffice server based) can implement the
ExternalConverter interface. This interfaces adds
a isConverterAvailable() method that will be called in order to check
converter availability.
A lot of conversion tools comes as command line executable. So in some case it's interesting to wraps these command lines into a converter.
For that purpose, we provide a base class for converters that are based on a command line wrapped by the nuxeo command-line service.
The base class
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.convert.plugins.CommandLineBasedConverter
handles all the dirty work, and you only have to override the methods to
define the parameters of the command line and the parsing of the
output.
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.convert.service.ConversionServiceImpl"
point="converter">
<!-- converter based on the pdftohml command line -->
<converter name="pdf2html" class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.convert.plugins.PDF2HtmlConverter">
<sourceMimeType>application/pdf</sourceMimeType>
<destinationMimeType>text/html</destinationMimeType>
<parameters>
<parameter name="CommandLineName">pdftohtml</parameter>
</parameters>
</converter>
</extension>
Relations in Nuxeo EP 5 follow concepts as described by the W3C Resource Description Framework (RDF).
The purpose is to provide content management relations (relations between documents of the site for instance) as well as being able to share this information with third party applications, by following the RDF standards.
There are a few jargon terms to understand when dealing with relations.
Let's consider a relation like "document A is a version of document B". This relation is described as a triplet or statement: it has a subject, "document A", a predicate, "is version of", and an object, "document B".
The statement elements are more generally referred to as nodes. More specific kinds of nodes are literals and resources. A subject and a predicate will always be resources, while the object may be also a literal. In a relation like "document A has title 'documentation'", the object will be the literal string 'documentation'.
Literals are simple nodes, holding information like a string or a date. Resources refer to uniquely identifiable objects, and often use a URI as identifier that looks like a URL. If this URI refers to an identified namespace, we can make a difference between resources using it.
For instance, we can use the dcterms namespace to identify predicates: "http://purl.org/dc/terms/References", "http://purl.org/dc/terms/IsBasedOn","label.relation.predicate.IsBasedOn",...
Documents in the Nuxeo default application use the following namespace: "http://www.nuxeo.org/document/uid/". A document URI would look like "http://www.nuxeo.org/document/uid/618e53c8-409e-40e8-9b73-5493f7e6de88" because we use the JackRabbit identifier to identify fully the resource. Imagine that we use custom unique identifiers for documents, we could use them too, but we should use a different namespace so that we do not mistake the JCR identifier and the custom identifier.
When defining a relation like "document A is a version of document B", we will then build a statement which subject is a resource representing document A, which predicate is a resource representing the "is a version of" information, and which object is a resource representing document B.
If we would like to state that this relation was created as a certain date, we will add a date property to the statement. This can be seen as a relation where the subject would be the statement itself, the predicate a resource representing the "was created at" information, and which object would be a literal representing the given date.
If you would only like to change the storage used for the default graph of Nuxeo EP 5, please refer to Section 44.4.2, “Relation service configuration”.
Relations are stored in a graph, that can also be called a model.
The graph definition is made though an extension point. It holds configuration about where and how to store relations. Here is an example contribution.
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<component name="MyJenaGraph">
<require>org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.relations.jena</require>
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.relations.services.RelationService"
point="graphs">
<graph name="default" type="jena">
<option name="backend">sql</option>
<option name="databaseType">PostgreSQL</option>
<option name="datasource">java:/nxrelations-default-jena</option>
<option name="databaseDoCompressUri">false</option>
<option name="databaseTransactionEnabled">false</option>
<namespaces>
<namespace name="rdf">
http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#
</namespace>
<namespace name="dcterms">http://purl.org/dc/terms/</namespace>
<namespace name="nuxeo">http://www.nuxeo.org/document/uid/</namespace>
</namespaces>
</graph>
</extension>
</component>
Example 24.1. Jena graph configuration for the Relation Service using PostgreSQL as storage
This graph uses a Jena graph. Jena is a RDF framework, a plugin has been developed to integrate it to the nuxeo platform. The graph definition requires the plugin to be registered to the application.
The graph is named "default" and declares its connection configuration.
The graph configuration includes namespaces used for some of the graph resources so that resources with a known namespace can be transformed into any kind of object.
For instance, the namespace "http://www.nuxeo.org/document/uid/" is used to identify documents using their JCR unique identifier. We can register an adapter so that the resource can be transformed into the actual document model it represents.
For example, the DocumentModelResourceAdapter class allows to get a DocumentModel object from a resource, build with a namespace and a local name.
Managing relations turns around the following actions:
adding a new relation to a graph
removing an existing relation from a graph
determining if a relation already exists
emptying a graph to remove all existing relations
The StatementInfo interface provides methods to manipulates data about statements. That way, you can retrieve informations to display relations and their properties: These tools are:
wrappers/getters, to recover information about a statement (subject, predicate, object, ...) or a node (type of node : literal, resource, QNameResource ...)
methods to get all statements or statements which are matching a given pattern: this can be useful to determine if a relation is incoming (document is the subject of the statement) or outgoing (the document is the object of the resource)
methods to get extra properties: for each relation, informations are added like creation date or the creator of the relation.
Another interesting interface is NodeInfo: it is useful to qualify the type of resource you are handling with. Some methods can determine if the node is a literal, a document, a blank node, etc ...
The placeful configuration service allows configuration to be placed on a node in a repository. It is possible to update, remove this configuration and merged it with all the configuration located from this node to the root of the repository.
Placeful Configuration (PC in the rest of this chapter) is useful when you have a number of nodes much bigger than the number of configuration. It allows to change and merge these configuration without having to travel the repository tree.
The PlacefulConfigurationManager is used
for all interaction with PC. This service is available via the extension
point
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.placeful.configuration.service.PlacefulConfigurationService.
Before using it, you need to associate a configuration with a storage in
the component definition ???.
You can then use the placeful configuration service. The following code snippet show the basic usage:
Path p1 = new Path("/mon/path");
RepositoryLocation repo = new RepositoryLocation("monrepo");
NuxeoPrincipal principal = new NuxeoPrincipalImpl("myself");
PlacefulConfigurationManager pcs = Framework.getService(PlacefulConfigurationManager.class);
LocalTheme lt1 = pcs.createConfigurationEntry(LocalTheme.class, p1, repo, principal);
lt1.setMode("myMode");
pcs.saveConfigurationEntry(lt1);
Map<String, Object> map = new HashMap<String, Object>();
map.put("mode", "myMode");
List<LocalTheme> list = pcs.getAllConfigurations(LocalTheme.class, map);
LocalTheme lt = pcs.getConfiguration(LocalTheme.class, repo, p, principal);
LocalTheme ltMerge = pcs.getMergedConfiguration(LocalTheme.class, repo, p, principal);
pcs.removeConfiguration(LocalTheme.class, repo, p1, principal);Note that:
you never create a PlacefulConfiguration yourself but ask the manager for one.
You need to save the PC after modification.
You can not move a PC, you need to remove it and create a new one.
For more information on available methods and class, have a look at the Javadoc.
A PC is composed of two distinct types of information:
The information specific to this configuration, for example, a local theme configuration has a mode, a page or a docId.
The information relative to its "placefulness": the path, principal and repository.
To contribute a configuration to the service you only have to gives the information specific to the configuration. The "placeful" part is taken care of by the service. You also need to give a way to merge the PC. We will create a simple config as an example. A "Simple" PC that has only one field: value.
Create an interface specific for your configuration.
interface SimpleConfig {
setValue();
getValue();
}
Create the empty interface that will be manipulated by the
user. It needs to extends
PlacefulConfiguration,
Serializable and your
specific interface.
public interface Simple extends PlacefulConfiguration, SimpleConfig, Serializable {}
Create the implementation of the specific configuration. It
needs to implement your specific interface and
PlacefulConfigurationConfig.
The PlacefulConfigurationConfig
interface adds the
getAssociatedInterface() methods. It
returns the "user" interface:
SimpleConfigImpl implements SimpleConfig, PlacefulConfigurationConfig {
private String value;
public String getValue() {
return value;
}
public void setValue(String value) {
this.value = value;
}
public Class<Simple> getAssociatedInterface() {
return Simple.class;
}
}
Create the class for the merge algorithm. It has to implement
PlacefulConfigurationAlgorithm.
Its only method takes a PC and a storage and returns a merged PC.
Our Simple configuration will do no merge at all:
public class SimpleMergeAlgorithm implements PlacefulConfigurationMergeAlgorithm {
Simple mergeEntries(Simple pc, PlacefulConfigurationStorage storage) {
return pc;
}
}
Finally the "user" interface has to know the implementing and
merge class. You add the
@configurationClass annotation on the
"user" interface:
@ConfigurationClass(value=SimpleConfigImpl.class, mergeAlgorithm=SimpleMergeAlgorithm.class)
public interface Simple extends PlacefulConfiguration, SimpleConfig, Serializable {};
If you want your PC to be usable by a Directory storage you also need to provide a schema Section 25.4.2, “Directory storage”
A storage specifies where the configuration is stored. You can pass specific values to each storage using the properties map (see Section 25.5, “Exemple of extension definition”). The storage gives you also the possibility to define fields that will be indexed. When a user query the storage, only the indexed fields can be queried. At the moment, only String field can be queried and indexed.
It is assumed that an indexed field is a property of the PC and so available via getters. By default, all the "placeful" values (principal, path, repository) are indexed and don't need to be added to the fields list.
The InMemory storage does not use any persistence. You should only
use in it in very simple situation such as test. The storageBackend
class is:
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.placeful.configuration.storage.InMemoryPlacefulConfigurationStorage.
You can pass comma-separated values in the fields property. Each value
represent a property of the PC. In the backend, an index will be created
for each property. You can then use it as a search field in the map
passed to manager to find configurations (Section 25.2, “Using Placeful Configuration”).
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.placeful.configuration.storage.SQLDirectoryPlacefulConfigurationStorage
implements the storageBackend. You pass it as the class attribute. You
also need to add the name of you directory:
<storageBackend name="SQL"
class=
"org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.placeful.configuration.storage.SQLDirectoryPlacefulConfigurationStorage">
<properties>
<property name="directoryName">localTheme</property>
</properties>
</storageBackend>
To use directory storage you need to define a directory and the
associated schema. The schema only needs to include the
base.xsd schemaLocation and the
placefulConfiguration.xsd schemaLocation.
You can also add any String element that you want to be indexed. Note
that the "placeful" fields general for all configurations are included
by default and don't need to be added.
Don't forget to declare the schema and directory to the extension point. It is assumed that each field to be indexed is a property of the PC and can be accessed by getters.
<component
name="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.placeful.configuration.defaultContrib">
<extension
target=
"org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.placeful.configuration.service.PlacefulConfigurationService"
point="storage"> 
<storageBackend name="RAM"
class=
"org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.placeful.configuration.storage.InMemoryPlacefulConfigurationStorage">
<properties>
<property name="fields">docId,theme,mode</property>
</properties>
</storageBackend>
</extension>
<extension
target=
"org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.placeful.configuration.service.PlacefulConfigurationService"
point="configuration">
<configuration name="TestConfig" storage="RAM"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.placeful.configuration.entry.LocalTheme" />
</extension>
</component>![]() |
Definition of the storage. |
![]() |
The configuration reference the storage name using the storage attribute. |
![]() |
Storage specific values. |
The content template service helps you to automatically create documents. For instance, you might want to create an English and a French folder each time you create a workspace.
Here is how you can do it easily with a simple contribution.
First you have to contribute a factoryBinding to
the ContentTemplateService factoryBinding
extension point. The factories are
used whenever a document is created using an EventListener.
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.content.template.service.ContentTemplateService"
point="factoryBinding">
<factoryBinding name="LangFactory" factoryName="SimpleTemplateFactory" targetType="Workspace">
......
</factoryBinding>
</extension>
Example 26.1. Example of a factoryBinding registration
Options available are
name: name of the factory, defining a factory with the same
name will override the first to be registered.
factoryName: the name of the factory defined in the
factory extension point.
targetType: the document type for which the factory will be
executed.
targetFacet: the document facet for which the factory will be
executed. You should target a facet if you want the factory to be
used for different document types.
Once you have a factoryBinding, it is time to think about which kind of
Document you want to create automatically.
<factoryBinding name="LangFactory" factoryName="SimpleTemplateFactory" targetType="Workspace">
<template>
<templateItem typeName="Folder" id="en_folder" title="EN"
description="English Folder"/>
<templateItem typeName="Folder" id="fr_folder" title="FR"
description="French Folder"/>
</template>
</factoryBinding>
Example 26.2. Example of a template registration
Options available are
typeName: the Type of the Document you want to create
id: the id of the Document you want to create.
title: the title of the Document you want to create.
description: the description of the Document you want to
create.
path: additional path, added to factoryBinding's
targetType DocPath
Maybe you don't want every user to have Write right in both folder? If so, you can use ACL to manage rights on your newly created templates.
<factoryBinding name="LangFactory" factoryName="SimpleTemplateFactory" targetType="Workspace">
<acl>
<ace principal="Administrator" permission="Everything" granted="true"/>
<ace principal="administrators" permission="Everything" granted="true"/>
<ace principal="members" permission="Read" granted="true"/>
<ace principal="members" permission="Version" granted="true"/>
</acl>
<template>
.....
</template>
</factoryBinding>
Example 26.3. Example of an ACL registration for all templates of the factory
<templateItem typeName="Folder" id="en_folder" title="EN">
<acl>
<ace principal="FRGroup" permission="Read" granted="true" />
<ace principal="ENGroup" permission="Write" granted="true" />
</acl>
</templateItem>
Example 26.4. Example of an ACL registration for a single templateItem
Options available are
principal: Name of the group/user
permission: the permission you want to set.
granted: grant or denied the permission.
If you need a better control on the factory, you can contribute your own using the following extension point:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.content.template.service.ContentTemplateService"
point="factory">
<contentFactory
name="SimpleTemplateFactory"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.content.template.factories.SimpleTemplateBasedFactory"/>
</extension>
Example 26.5. Example of a Factory registration
Options available are
name: The name of the new factory, used in factoryBinding definition.
class: The class implementing ContentFactory.
enabled: Boolean to enable/disable the factory.
The newly defined Factory has to implement ContentFactory interface. A better way to do this would be to extend the abstract class BaseContentFactory.
Nuxeo comes with management by providing a resource publisher, an use case scheduler and a REST XML serializer. Nuxeo makes use of theses services for providing you information about components deployment, directory status, events metric, http and directories session metrics.
These services is to used for integrating nuxeo in a management platform.
As an administrator, I want to monitor my Nuxeo server.
Nuxeo exposes monitoring data and behaviors by using the JMX standard. If your management platform does not support JMX, you're able to feed it using the XML serializer provided as a WebEngine module. Nuxeo provided mbeans are published in the "nx" domain.
Nuxeo has identified these kinds of monitoring data : inventory, metric and usecase. Nuxeo types theses objects using the "management naming attribute.
The inventory is based onto the component registry. It mainly adapt the registration objects graph (components, extension points, contributions) as an mbean tree. This gives you an access to what and how are the services deployed. Other informations about these services (metrics, status, usecases) will be is to be attached to the inventory. Using these information, you can check that your server is correctly deployed.
Inventory is being completed by metrics. It's the accounting information that they can easily provide to users with no costs overhead. As example, directory manager provide core sessions counters. These information are bound into the mbeans tree. Managers defines gauges that polls metric for treesholds or to gather historical data.
Services are tested periodically by running a typical use case. Results about are published in the service subtree by the management use case scheduler. These informations is to be polled by managers for issuing alerts. We already defined a use case checking that the repository is well working by creating and removing a document.
As an administrator, I want to enable nuxeo platform management features.
Management is packaged into three distinct packages : nuxeo-runtime-management, nuxeo-platform-management and nuxeo-webengine-management modules.
That module contains the management logic : the resource publisher and the use cases scheduler. These services implements only behaviors and have to be contributed by other components for activation.
That module contains adapters for nuxeo services such as the runtime inventory or the http session metric. It also contains the use case scheduler and some typical use cases such as the directory one.
Nuxeo platform management provides you the basic monitoring resources. The following section describes how coding integrating newer monitoring resources suitable for your needs.
As a developer, I want to publish some informations suitable for monitoring services I'm in charge for.
Here is the typical use cases for : service publishing, resource publishing and mbeans aliasing.
As a developer, I want to publish a service. Usually, services are defined as singleton.
To
publish
summarized informations
about this service, you first have to
define a
Java interface for and
makes your singleton implementing it.
Then, you
have to contribute to
the resource publisher service, naming
your
singleton. Given the
monitoring interface
myPackage.MyServiceMBean
and the implemented class
myPackage.MyService
, you have to define an extension in
service definition as follow :
..
<require>org.nuxeo.runtime.management.ResourcePublisher</require>
<extension point="services"
target="org.nuxeo.runtime.management.ResourcePublisher">
<service class="mypackage.MyService"
ifClass="myPackage.MyServiceMBean" name="myService" />
</extension>
..
As you respect a JMX convention, resource publisher is able to guess the interface class you use by its name. So, in that case, it is not mandatory to provide the interface class name.
As a developer, I want to publish a collection of informations, such as a map of metrics.
The first idea is to expose a getter that returns
the map. That
kind of
information is
not well supported on manager side.
Monitors and
gauges
are just able to bind
to
attribute with a string or
numeric type.
If the
cardinality is acceptable, the
resource publisher
enables you to
register a factory that is to be
call backed for
publishing your
resources. Given the monitoring interface
MyMetricMBean
,
the
MyMetricFactory
will publish metrics provided by
MyService
package mypackage;
import org.nuxeo.runtime.management.ResourceFactory;
import org.nuxeo.runtime.management.ObjectNameFactory;
public class MyMetricFactory implements ResourceFactory {
public void configure(ResourcePublisherService publisher, ResourceFactoryDescriptor descriptor) {
this.publisher = publisher;
this.service = (MyService)Framework.getLocalService(My.class);
}
protected final ComponentName myServiceName = MyService:NAME;
protected MyService service;
protected ResourcePublisher publisher;
public void registerResources() {
for (String name:myService.doGetMetricNames() {
doRegisterMetric(name);
}
}
protected void doRegisterMetric(String name) {
MyMetricContext context = new MyMetricContext(String name, service);
String shortName = ObjectNameFactorty.formatMetricShortName(name);
ObjectName qualifiedName = ObjectNameFactory.formatMetricQualifiedName(myServiceName,name);
publisher.registerResource(shortName, qualifiedName, MyMetricMBean.class, metric);
}
}
package mypackage;
public class MyMetricContext implements MyMetricMBean {
public void MyMetricContext(String name, MyService service) {
this.service = service;
this.name = name;
}
protected final String name;
protected final MyService service;
int getCount() {
return service.doGetCount(name);
}
}
package mypackage;
public class MyService implements Service {
protected String doGetNames() {
..
return ...
}
protected int doGetCount(String name) {
..
return ...
}
}
..
<require>org.nuxeo.runtime.management.ResourcePublisher</require>
<extension point="factories"
target="org.nuxeo.runtime.management.ResourcePublisher">
<factory class="mypackage.MyMetricFactory"
ifClass="myPackage.MyMetricMBean" name="myMetricFactory" />
</extension>
..
As an administrator I want to monitor OperatingSystem attributes in my management system using the XML serializer. I will contribute to the resource publisher by defining the following extension point :
..
<require>org.nuxeo.runtime.management.ResourcePublisher</require>
<extension point="shortcuts"
target="org.nuxeo.runtime.management.ResourcePublisher">
..
<shortcut name="operatingSystem" qualifiedName="java.lang:type=OperatingSystem"/>
..
</extension>
..
As a developer, I want to provide a feature operational status.
Services quality are to be monitored by scheduling typical use cases. Use cases should throw an exception for indicating error condition. Use cases are registered under the service they belongs to.
..
<require>org.nuxeo.ecm.management.usecases.UsecaseScheduler</require>
<extension point="usecases"
target="org.nuxeo.runtime.management.ResourcePublisher">
<usecase name="myUsecase" class="mypackage.MyUsecase"
serviceClass="mypackage.My" />
</extension>
..
package mypackage;
import org.nuxeo.ecm.management.usecases.Usecase;
public class MyUsecase implements Usecase {
void init(Object service) {
this.service = (My)service;
}
MyService service;
void runCase(CoreSession session) throws ClientException {
service.doSomething();
}
}
Since Nuxeo 5.3GA, you can now publish a document in 3 different ways:
On local sections
On remote sections (on a remote Nuxeo server)
On the file system
When using the PublisherService, you only need to care about 3 interfaces:
PublishedDocument: represents the published document: could be created from a DocumentModel, a proxy, a file on the file system.
PublicationNode: represents a Node where you can publish a DocumentModel: could be another DocumentModel (mainly Folder / Section), a directory on the file system.
PublicationTree: the tree which is used to publish / unpublish documents, to approve / reject publication, list the already published documents in a PublicationNode, ... See the javadoc of the PublicationTree.
The PublisherService mainly works with 3 concepts:
factory: the classe which is used to actually create the published document. It also manages the approval / rejection workflow on published documents.
tree: a PublicationTree instance asociated to a name: for instance, we have a SectionPublicationTree which will publish in Sections, a LocalFSTree to publish on the file system, ...
tree instance: an actual publication tree where we define the factory to use, the underlying tree to use, its name / title, and some parameters we will see later.
Next, we will see how to configure the different ways to publish in your Nuxeo server.
That was the only way to publish on version < 5.3GA, and so this is the default way to publish.
Here is the default contribution you can find in Nuxeo (publisher-jbpm-contrib.xml in nuxeo-platform-publisher-jbpm. This contribution override the one in publisher-contrib.xml located in the nuxeo-platform-publisher-core project):
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.publisher.impl.service.PublisherServiceImpl"
point="treeInstance">
<publicationTreeConfig name="DefaultSectionsTree" tree="RootSectionsCoreTree"
factory="CoreProxyWithWorkflow" localSectionTree="true"
title="label.publication.tree.local.sections">
<parameters>
<!-- <parameter name="RootPath">/default-domain/sections</parameter> -->
<parameter name="RelativeRootPath">/sections</parameter>
<parameter name="enableSnapshot">true</parameter>
<parameter name="iconExpanded">/icons/folder_open.gif</parameter>
<parameter name="iconCollapsed">/icons/folder.gif</parameter>
</parameters>
</publicationTreeConfig>
</extension>
We define an instance using the RootSectionsTree tree and the CoreProxyWithWorkflow factory. We give it a name, a title and configure it to be a localSectionTree (which means we will publish on Sections on the same Nuxeo as the documents to be published are).
The parameters:
RootPath: it's used when you want to define the root publication node of your PublicationTree. You can't use RootPath AND RelativeRoothPath parameter.
RelativeRootPath: used when you just want to define a relative path (without specifying the domain path). A PublicationTree instance will be created automatically for each Domain, appending the RelativeroothPath value to each Domain.
For instance, assuming we have 2 Domains: domain-1 and domain-2, and the RelativeRootPath is set to "/sections", 2 PublicationTree instances will be created:
the first one with a RootPath set to /domain-1/sections.
the second one with a RootPath set to /domain-2/sections.
In the UI, when publishing, you can chose the PublicationTree you want. The list of trees will be automatically updated when creating and deleting Domain(s).
iconExpanded and iconCollapsed: specify which icons to use when displaying the PublicationTree on the interface.
To make the remote publication work, both the Nuxeo server and client need to be configured.
You should create a new config file, publisher-server-config.xml for instance, in the nuxeo.ear/config folder of your Nuxeo acting as a server.
Here is a sample configuration:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.publisher.contrib.server">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.publisher.impl.service.PublisherServiceImpl"
point="treeInstance">
<publicationTreeConfig name="ServerRemoteTree" tree="CoreTreeWithExternalDocs" factory="RemoteDocModel" >
<parameters>
<parameter name="RootPath">/default-domain/sections</parameter>
</parameters>
</publicationTreeConfig>
</extension>
</component>
Parameters:
RootPath: its value must be the path to the document which is the root of your PublicationTree. Here, it will be the document /default-domain/sections, the default Sections Root in Nuxeo.
This parameter can be modified to suit your needs. Don't forget to put the whole path to the document
You should create a new config file, publisher-client-config.xml for instance, in the nuxeo.ear/config folder of your Nuxeo acting as a client.
Here is a sample configuration
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.publisher.contrib.client">
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.publisher.impl.service.PublisherServiceImpl"
point="treeInstance">
<publicationTreeConfig name="ClientRemoteTree" tree="ClientForRemoteTree"
factory="ClientProxyFactory">
<parameters>
<parameter name="title">label.publication.tree.remote.sections</parameter>
<parameter name="userName">Administrator</parameter>
<parameter name="password">Administrator</parameter>
<parameter name="baseURL">
http://myserver:8080/nuxeo/site/remotepublisher/
</parameter>
<parameter name="targetTree">ServerRemoteTree</parameter>
<parameter name="originalServer">localserver</parameter>
<parameter name="enableSnapshot">true</parameter>
</parameters>
</publicationTreeConfig>
</extension>
</component>
Parameters:
targetTree: this parameter corresponds to the name of the tree defined on the server, here ServerRemoteTree.
username, password: the account defined by those parameters will be the one used to connect to the remote Nuxeo and so to create documents in the PublicationTree. This account MUST exist on the server.
baseURL: URL used by the publisher service on the client side to communicate with the server.
originalServer: identify the Nuxeo server used as client.
To publish on the file system, you just need to define a new tree instance using the LocalFSTree and the RootPath of your tree.
Here is a sample configuration:
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.publisher.impl.service.PublisherServiceImpl"
point="treeInstance">
<publicationTreeConfig name="FSTree" tree="LocalFSTree"
factory="LocalFile" localSectionTree="false"
title="label.publication.tree.fileSystem">
<parameters>
<parameter name="RootPath">/opt/publishing-folder</parameter>
<parameter name="enableSnapshot">true</parameter>
<parameter name="iconExpanded">/icons/folder_open.gif</parameter>
<parameter name="iconCollapsed">/icons/folder.gif</parameter>
</parameters>
</publicationTreeConfig>
</extension>
RootPath: the root folder on the file system to be used as the root of the publication tree.
Nuxeo Runtime is the foundation of the Nuxeo infrastructure. It handles deployment and extensibility of components to target platforms. This component allows the whole Nuxeo infrastructure to be easily ported between Java platforms (Java EE, OSGi, etc.) and features an easy plug-in mechanism that any component can use to declare extension points. These extension points can be used by other components to extend the former one.
The Nuxeo Runtime uses the OSGi component model and a set of adapters to deploy POJO components to Java host platforms, such as Eclipse/Equinox, or a Java EE 5 application server such as JBoss or WebLogic. When deployed, Nuxeo Runtime components become actual host platform components. For example on JBoss the component is seen as a MBean, while when deployed on Geronimo it is seen as a GBean and on Eclipse it is seen as a native Eclipse plug-in. In short, Nuxeo Runtime offers a new and seamless way to make your Java EE applications and components extensible (as Eclipse developers are already used to).
Nuxeo Runtime is not specific to the Nuxeo platform, it is a generic deployment and extension system that can be used in any Java or Java EE application.
Forget specific build of your applications for a dedicated project or customer and enjoy “Code once, deploy anywhere” for real!
One of the main requirements of the “Nuxeo Core” component is to be deployable on both the JBoss and Eclipse platforms. To ease development and allow as much code reuse as possible, Nuxeo developed a common component and packaging model that may be deployed and used on both of these platforms without any code change or repackaging. This model, the Nuxeo Runtime, was developed as the foundation for all Nuxeo components. The Nuxeo Runtime is not a standalone framework. It is, in short, a component model running on top of an existing platform that provides a common, platform-independent, model to underlie the components of an application. This architecture allows flexible and true componentization of applications.
In addition to the component model, the Nuxeo Runtime also defines a common model for packaging, the OSGi bundle model. At the lowest level, OSGi bundles are simply regular JARs containing an OSGi manifest file. OSGi technology is becoming more and more popular and is currently used by Eclipse, Geronimo, Glassfish, and Jonas as their runtime framework. Because of the component and packaging choices, applications based on Nuxeo Runtime can run on different platforms without modification and without having to care about the particulars of a deployment platform.
OSGi (Open Services Gateway initiative) is an open standards organization founded by Sun Microsystems, IBM, Ericsson and others in March 1999. OSGi defines a modular and complete, Java-based service framework. The deployment units used by this framework are called bundles, so we will refer them as OSGi bundles.
OSGi bundles are normal Java libraries (JAR files) containing a
special manifest file
(META-INF/MANIFEST.MF) describing all aspects related
to the bundle, for example: the bundle name, description, bundle
dependencies, exported packages, the bundle classpath, the bundle
activator and many other OSGi-defined features.
Here is a typical OSGi manifest file:
Manifest-Version: 1.0 Bundle-ManifestVersion: 2 Bundle-Name: NxRuntimeEclipseDemo Plug-in Bundle-SymbolicName: org.nuxeo.runtime.demo.eclipse.Demo; singleton:=true Bundle-Version: 1.0.0 Bundle-Activator: org.nuxeo.runtime.demo.eclipse.demo.Activator Bundle-Vendor: Nuxeo Bundle-Localization: plugin Require-Bundle: org.eclipse.ui, org.eclipse.core.runtime, org.nuxeo.runtime.demo.HelloWorld, org.nuxeo.runtime
The bundle activator is a Java object that is called whenever the bundle is started and stopped by the framework. This is the only way available to the application to access the framework functionality.
Besides bundles and bundle management, OSGi provides a service registry: an API to register the services provided by a bundle and to lookup services defined by other bundles. Also, OSGi defines a Declarative Services specification that significantly simplifies the service-oriented programming model. Through this model, services can be defined in XML files inside the bundle and automatically deployed by the framework.
For a complete definition of OSGi, see Wikipedia.
A key goals of Nuxeo Runtime is to natively support various implementations of the OSGi framework and to use the OSGi bundle model for packaging and deployment. Another goal is to align the Nuxeo Runtime component model with the OSGi-notion of Declarative Specification.
Nuxeo Runtime provides "built-in integration" with any OSGi-compliant framework. This means Nuxeo Runtime-based components can run “as is” on any OSGi-enabled platform. On other platforms like JBoss, an adapter is required. The Nuxeo Runtime eases the creation of such adapters by providing an abstract OSGi adapter that can be customized for any platform.
Note: This does not mean you can transform any platform into a fully OSGi-compliant platform using Nuxeo Runtime adapters. Primarily, this is because the adapter must use the host platform's class-loading and deployment model that may be incompatible with the OSGi specifications. The Nuxeo Runtime's adapters only mimic an OSGi environment, using native host platform features, for applications using Nuxeo Runtime. Many OSGi features are not yet provided by the adapter – but we hope to add more and more features. If you are interested in helping on this, do not hesitate to contact us :-). Currently, one of the most important features that is missing is OSGi service support, but we are working on this and hope to provide it soon.
When running on true OSGi platforms, no adapter is used and thus all OSGi features are available and supplied by the host platform. Nuxeo Runtime components run on such a platform without any alteration.
Currently we provide two built-in adapters:
JBoss OSGi adapter – used to deploy OSGi bundles on JBoss AS 4.x
Test OSGi adapter – used for JUnit testing and can be used on any simple Java application that is not using a complex class loading or deployment mechanism.
Currently, Nuxeo Runtime adapters can provide the following OSGi features:
OSGi Bundle deployment
Manifest file loading
Classpath processing
BundleActivator support (activation and deactivation)
BundleActivator notification each time a bundle is started and stopped
Fake Bundle and BundleContext implementations that adapt OSGi operations to native operations of the host platform
Support for the common operations defined by the OSGi API for BundleActivators
Bundle lifecycle and framework support
Bundle dependencies (as specified in the manifest)
The following OSGi features are not supported (yet):
The OSGi service layer
The OSGi security layer
The OSGi class-loading specifications (the class-loading mechanism of the host platform is used)
Some methods of the interfaces Bundle and BundleContext
(unimplemented Methods will thrown an
UnsupportedOperationException exception)
The component model provides a flexible way to define, register and locate components. It was designed in order to reuse the same components on very different platforms like JBoss and Eclipse.
Full support of OSGi declarative service specifications is planned for the medium-term future. In addition to this, Nuxeo components can describe any type of components, not only services.
A definition from Wikipedia: “A software component is a system element offering a predefined service and able to communicate with other components”. Components as defined by the Nuxeo model are logical units that may depend on and/or extend one another. The Nuxeo Runtime is responsible for providing a common API to register, locate or extend components and most commonly components are registered using XML descriptor files.
Components can be declared as independent, top-level components - by using a standalone XML file in the bundle- or they can be declared at a finer granularity by programmatically registering sub-components within the bundle. To declare an top-level component, you need to create an XML description file, put it somewhere in the bundle, typically in the OSGI-INF directory, and specify the “Nuxeo-Component” header in the bundle manifest to load the component at bundle activation. For example, the manifest shown below has a reference to the XML file "helloworld-extension.xml" that declares a component.
Manifest-Version: 1.0 Bundle-ManifestVersion: 2 Bundle-Name: HelloWorldExtension Plug-in Bundle-SymbolicName: org.nuxeo.runtime.demo.HelloWorldExtension Bundle-Version: 1.0.0 Bundle-Vendor: Nuxeo Bundle-Localization: plugin Require-Bundle: org.nuxeo.runtime.demo.HelloWorld Nuxeo-Component: OSGI-INF/helloworld-extension.xml
Declarative components through XML descriptors: XML component descriptors are tightly integrated with OSGi – you can specify which components should be deployed at bundle activation-time by using the custom manifest header “Nuxeo-Component”.
Dependency between components: components are activated only when all their prerequisites are met. If prerequisites are not met the components will be put in a pending state until their dependencies are completely resolved. Similarly when uninstalling a component, all the components depending on it will be moved to the pending state when the a component is deactivated.
Extensibility through extension points: each component can let other components extend its functionality by defining a set of extension points. Other components (or the component itself) may then plug extensions (Java code) into one of the declared extension points. This flexible extension mechanism draw inspiration from the Eclipse extension points but is not identical to it.
Life Cycle Events: component life cycle events are sent by the runtime to any interested component. See Adaptable Components for a common use case.
OSGi integration: the component model is about to be fully integrated with OSGi and will be soon compliant with the OSGi declarative service model.
Platform Independence: the component model can be used on any platform. It provides a single API to register and look-up components – the Nuxeo Runtime native API may be used (and in the future, the OSGi service API will be available too).
Complete integration with OSGi declarative services specifications
Component lookup through JNDI
The runtime implementation may "adapt" registered components to components of the host platform. (This can often be accomplished using the Nuxeo component life cycle notifications.) The JBoss adapter for the Nuxeo Runtime, for example, is already doing this to adapt runtime components into JBoss "MBean services", and thus Nuxeo "components" are seamlessly integrated into the host platform. Since these components are understood by the host platform, we can leverage existing host platform functionally, such as MBean service management on JBoss.
You should not be afraid by the “component model” denomination. The runtime component model does not limit your objects, nor imposing any extra rules on your development practices. You do not need to modify your existing objects to derive from some Nuxeo-supplied base class, nor implement some runtime interfaces in order to plug your objects into the component registry. Your objects that implement a "component" may be of any kind.
The only requirement is that to be a "component", your object must
have a public constructor without arguments (the default constructor) so
that it can be instantiated via newInstance method on
the your object's Class object. The component model makes
this a mild restriction, since it supplies other means for object
initialization if you need to do complex actions at the time your object
is created.
If you want to benefit from the extension points mechanism or to
respond to component life cycle events like activation or deactivation,
there are two options. You can either implement the
Component interface if this is convenient
for you, or define some methods with a particular signature so your
object will be called by the runtime using Java reflection. See below
for more details on this.
In conclusion, the component model offers substantial benefits with few requirements; the model primarily provides you the capability to register your components, extend others components, allow others to extend your components, and look up components. These functions work the same way on any platform supported by Nuxeo Runtime.
A component has three primary life cycle states:
Registered: the component registration
information was created and inserted into the registry. The
component dependencies are not yet processed or resolved, so the
component cannot be activated.
ResolvedAll: dependencies of this
component are satisfied. The component can be safely
activated.
Other unresolved components waiting for a resolution that depends on this component are notified and if they have no more dependencies, they will be moved to this state as well.
ActivatedComponent: Activation occurs as
a result of one of three events: immediately upon component
becomin resolved, programmatically at the user request, or lazily
the first time the component is referred to by another component.
The only requirement for activation is that the component must be
resolved.
Currently only the immediate activation mode is supported.
When an activated component is deactivated it is put back into the resolved state. If a components is to become unregistered, it will first be put in the resolved state, then an unresolved event is fired and the component regresses to the registered sate, and finally it is removed from the registry.
When a component is activated or deactivated the runtime will call the activate or the deactivate method of the component, if any. Implementing life cycle methods is the programmer's choice, they are not required. These methods can be used to initialize and destroy the component in the given context.
The activation of a component signifies that the component is available and ready to be used by other components, so that the component must be correctly initialized when it enters this state. The following diagram illustrates the life cycle states, method call, and messages sent for Nuxeo Runtime components.
XXX ADD GRAPHIC HERE
A key innovation of the Nuxeo Runtime component model is the extension mechanism that enables components to extend one another.
We will begin with a demonstration of how this mechanism works: Imagine you have a component A, implemented in Java with class ImplA, that manages an action menu for the application. A wants to let other components contribute actions to the menu in an easy and flexible way – for example by using XML files to describe these actions.
To be able to do this, component A should declare an extension point, let's name this point “actions”. Other components willing to contribute some actions to this "group effort" of a menu should use "actions" to indicate their contribution. (A component may declare any number of extension points and may contribute to any number of extensions to other components' extension points but we are using only point for this example.)
Components may declare extension points and extension contributions using a simple XML syntax like the following:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="A">
<!-- A 'exposes' an extension point 'actions' that should be supplied with other components' MenuItem objects -->
<implementation class="ImplA"/>
<extension-point name="actions">
<object class="MenuItem"/>
</extension-point>
<!--A is 'contributing' a fragment of XML describing a 'doctype' to the extension point 'documentTypes' of B -->
<extension target="B" point="documentTypes">
<doctype name="File" extends="Document">
<schema name="common"/>
<schema name="file"/>
</doctype>
</extension
</component>
The content of an extension element is specific to the target extension point, such as the "doctype" in the example above. The extension element content is known only by the extension point. If a contribution to an extension point is made an the xml snippet is not correct from the standpoint of the component exposing the extension point, the result is unpredictable - generally, bad contributions will be ignored and some error will be logged. There is, for now, no mechanism of validating XML extensions like in Eclipse.
The Nuxeo Runtime provides an easy way to map XML extensions to real Java objects through an XML mapping mechanism called XMap. In the example above, the "doctype" can be thought of an object with a field called schema that contains a list of strings. Nuxeo supplies the XMap library to allow the XML fragment to automatically be transformed into a Java object with the fields correctly filled in. When not using XMap, extensions are returned as DOM elements and thus the component should itself perform the parsing of extension contributions.
For details on the XML mapping of XMap, see the XMap documentation and/or the JavaDoc.
XXX TODO ADD GRAPHIC
Here is the list of some use cases of the extension mechanism identified in the context of the Nuxeo ECM Platform:
to define actions and menus
to define content schemas (by importing XSD files)
to define views (view ids mapped to JSF/XHTML pages)
to define content objects (associate a Content Schema with a class that will provide required methods for the content object)
to define permissions (usable in security annotations)
to define PageFlows for Seam that, optionally, can extend existing ones
to define business processes (in jBPM)
to define content transformations (doc -> pdf, doc -> html, odf -> pdf, odf -> html, etc.)
to define rules for the rule engine (that can be bound to some objects to run a rule only in a specific folder)
scriptable extensions that define scripts binded to interpreters like JavaScript, Groovy, Jython, JRuby, etc
to define JMS/Event queues
to define event types
to define security policies
to define Access Control Policies
to define NXCore storage backends (JCR, SQL, LDAP, etc.)
to define query engines
to define indexing engines
JBOSS permits its extensions to be packaged as SAR files, thus the
Nuxeo Runtime provides a SAR package containing the Nuxeo Runtime and
the JBoss OSGi adapter. This package is an OSGi bundle that acts as the
OSGi system bundle. With the Nuxeo SAR in place inside JBoss, any
packaging file format understood by JBoss (.sar, .jar, .ear, .war) or
even a raw directory, will be treated as an OSGi bundle if it is found
by JBoss and contains a valid OSGi manifest. In order for these bundles
to be deployed, you need to have NXRuntime.sar
already deployed in JBoss.
Besides the OSGi adapter and the auto-registration of components through bundle manifest, the JBoss adapter adds the capability to deploy runtime components as XML files located outside OSGi bundles through the JBoss deployment mechanism. This feature can be useful to register components that provide extensions to other components that can be described by plain XML without any code dependency.
Example of a plain XML component that contributes new document types:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.CoreExtensions">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.TypeService" point="doctype">
<doctype name="File" extends="Document">
<schema name="common"/>
<schema name="file"/>
</doctype>
<doctype name="Folder" extends="Document">
<schema name="common"/>
<facet name="Folderish"/>
</doctype>
<doctype name="Workspace" extends="Document">
<schema name="common"/>
<facet name="Folderish"/>
</doctype>
<doctype name="Domain" extends="Document">
<schema name="common"/>
<facet name="Folderish"/>
</doctype>
</extension>
</component>
The NXRuntime.sar library offers two JMX
services:
The adapter service (nx:service=adapter)
deploys OSGi bundles and declared components
provides information about deployed bundles and components through the JBoss JMX Console
The XML component deployer
(nx:name=bundleDeployer,type=deployer) that can deploy
XML descriptors as OSGi components
For Eclipse, a NXRuntime.jar bundle is
provided. Since Eclipse is OSGi-compliant, Nuxeo Runtime will not
install any adapter (so it is not intervening on the bundle
deployment).
When running on OSGi platforms, the main role of the runtime is to register components declared inside OSGi bundles (as seen previously through their manifest).
Because Eclipse is not starting automatically OSGi bundles (it
starts them only on demand or on class loading), you need to update
Eclipse's config.ini and configure it to start
Nuxeo Runtime (i.e. org.nuxeo.runtime) when Eclipse starts:
osgi.bundles=org.eclipse.equinox.common@2:start, org.eclipse.update.configurator@3:start, org.eclipse.core.runtime@start,org.nuxeo.runtime@start
Components may be created either from XML descriptor files, or programatically.
In order to register components you always need a runtime context.
A runtime context is the context where a
component is registered. Contexts are always associated with the
bundle containing the component classes. Through the context, a
component can access the runtime service and can load classes and
retrieve resources from its bundle and other visible
bundles. RuntimeContext objects depend
on the current implementation of the runtime service, which varies
based on the deployment environment:
Nuxeo Runtime provides three implementations of the
RuntimeContext interface:
org.nuxeo.runtime.model.impl.DefaultRuntimeContext:
this is a simple implementation of a context designed to be used
outside of an OSGi environment. This context uses the current
thread context class loader. It is provided so that simple Java
applications like JUnit tests can function properly without
needing a full-blown OSGi system.
org.nuxeo.runtime.osgi.OSGiRuntimeContext:
this context can be used on any platform supporting OSGi bundles.
This context uses the bundle's ClassLoader to load classes and
find resources. This is the context supplied when the Nuxeo
Runtime is deployed on a OSGi platform.
org.nuxeo.runtime.jboss.JBossRuntimeContext:
this is a JBoss specific context. This implementation wraps JBoss'
DeploymentInfo object and uses the the JBoss infrastructure to
load components deployed as standalone XML files.
Once you have a runtime context object, you can start registering components.
To create a component using its XML description, follow these steps:
Write the XML description of the component.
Example of a simple XML descriptor:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.runtime.EventService">
<implementation class="org.nuxeo.runtime.services.event.EventService"/>
<extension-point name="listeners">
<object class="org.nuxeo.runtime.services.event.ListenerDescriptor"/>
</extension-point>
</component>
Load the XML file and register the component.
In order to register a component, we always need a runtime context:
// retrieve the current bundle Bundle bundle = ... // create a context given the current bundle object RuntimeContext context = new OSGiRuntimeContext(bundle); // load the component XML file given its location relative to the bundle root context.deploy(“OSGI-INF/MyComponent.xml”);
The current bundle object is usually retrieved from a
BundleActivator in the
start(BundleContext context) method. You
can also lookup other bundles by their symbolic names given a
Bundle object.
The context has several method of deploying (e.g. installing)
components. For example, the method used previously
(Context.deploy(String)) is identical to:
// load the component XML file given its location relative to the bundle root
URL url = context.getLocalResource(“OSGI-INF/MyComponent.xml”);
if (url != null) {
context.deploy(url);
}
The best and recommend way to deploy components is to let the infrastructure deploy them when the bundle is activated.
This can be done by specifying the local paths of the XML
description files inside the bundle's
META-INF/MANIFEST.MF file by using the
Nuxeo-Component header as in the following example:
Manifest-Version: 1.0 Bundle-ManifestVersion: 2 Bundle-Name: HelloWorldExtension Plug-in Bundle-SymbolicName: org.nuxeo.runtime.demo.HelloWorldExtension Bundle-Version: 1.0.0 Bundle-Vendor: Nuxeo Bundle-Localization: plugin Require-Bundle: org.nuxeo.runtime.demo.HelloWorld Nuxeo-Component: OSGI-INF/MyComponent.xml, OSGI-INF/MySecondComponent.xml
This way, as soon as the bundle is activated, theses two components defined in XML files, will be automatically deployed.
XML component are contained as resource files in that bundle and
their path should be specified as relative to the bundle root with no
initial slash. The two components' XML files shown in the previous
example are located in the OSGI-INF directory at
the root of the bundle's jar file.
Sometimes order of deployments between bundles or components is important and needs to be specified.
There are several ways to declare dependencies between them: it involves writing bundle names in the manifest file properties (Require-Bundle, Nuxeo-Require, Nuxeo-RequiredBy, Nuxeo-Component) and component names in contribution files (using the <require></require> tag).
For JBoss developers who do not care about deployment under eclipse: use "Nuxeo-Require" and forget about "Require-Bundle". Include all compile dependencies of your bundle to nuxeo components, and add other requirements if you'd like to make sure your bundle is deployed after another component. In other words, if bundle A lists bundle B on its Nuxeo-Require line, bundle B is deployed first.
For instance, if you'd like to make sure your bundle is deployed after nuxeo-core-api because you have compile dependencies on it and you would like to avoid class loading issue. You should use "Nuxeo-Require: org.nuxeo.ecm.core.api" in your manifest. If you'd like to make sure your bundle is deployed after nuxeo-core, perhaps because you need the default types, you can put "Nuxeo-Require: org.nuxeo.ecm.core".
Nuxeo-require should not be used between components that could be deployed on separate servers.
As a general rule for both properties, you should put all the compile dependencies of your bundle. This will prevent having any class loading issues. Dependencies are transitive: if you depend on nuxeo-core-api and on nuxeo-platform-types-api, you do not need to state nuxeo-core-api as types-api already depends on it.
For Require-Bundle, you may have to add "non-nuxeo bundles" requirements like apache commons-logging to make it work as expected under eclipse. This will obviously fail on jboss as this module in not seen as a bundle in this context: that's why you need to state your requirements in Nuxeo-Require instead.
"Nuxeo-RequiredBy" can be used as "Nuxeo-Require", except that it's the inverse dependency. It's useful when you need to put your bundle before another one. Plus it does not fail when the other bundle is not found, it may be a solution when needing to express dependencies between components that may be deployed on separate servers (although this should never happen if the api module is correctly done).
If your bundle has compile dependencies on jboss-seam, always add "Nuxeo-RequiredBy: org.nuxeo.ecm.war". The war module deployment triggers seam components detection so you need your bundle to be deployed before this is done, otherwise your seam components will not be detected correctly.
"Nuxeo-Component" is not designed to state dependencies, but as contributions are deployed in the given order, it can be helpful to express dependencies by modifying this order.
The <require></require> tag can be put in components. It is giving fine information about a component requirements. It can be used to control order when overriding another contribution. For instance, if you'd like to make sure your bundle is deployed after nuxeo-core types declarations, because you need to change default core types for instance, you can put <require>org.nuxeo.ecm.core.CoreExtensions<require> at the beginning of your core types contributions file. When contributing to an extension point, you do not need to express dependency to the component declaring the extension point: this requirement is implicit.
As a general note: usually, unless you're overriding an existing configuration, you do not need to order components as services that load them do not make much checks, especially when you're dealing with ordering od=f contributions within the same bundle. For instance, you do not need to make sure the "Folder" core type is deployed after the "dublincore" schema, as long as both are deployed when the repository is opened. Another example: you do not need to make sure the "file" layout is deployed before the "File" ecm type that references it, as long as both are deployed when the page displaying the document layout is loaded.
This method of creating components is not recommended since it is internal to Nuxeo Runtime and it depends on the implementation.
Here is an example on how you can use the API to manually register a component. We assume you are running in an OSGi environment and you have a reference to the bundle object containing the component you want to register.
// retrieve the current bundle Bundle bundle = ... RegistrationInfoImpl ri = new RegistrationInfoImpl(); // create a context associated to the current bundle ri.context = new OSGiRuntimeContext(bundle); ri.name = new ComponentName(“my.component”); // set the class name of the component to register ri.implementation= “org.nuxeo.runtime.example.MyComponent”; // register the component Framework.getRuntime().getComponentManager().register(ri);
When a component is deployed, Nuxeo Runtime will check its dependencies and if all of them are resolved, the component is resolved and activated. (In the future, lazy activation or activation on demand will be supported too). If component dependencies are not satisfied, the component will be put in a pending queue until all of its dependencies are resolved.
When activating a component, the runtime will check if the
component defines the activate life cycle
method and if true, it will call it to get a chance to the component
to initialize itself.
The same thing is done when deactivating the component - the
runtime will check if the component defines the
deactivate life cycle method and if true, it
will call it to give a chance for the component to dispose itself
properly.
There are two ways to define life cycle methods:
By implementing the
org.nuxeo.runtime.model.Component
interface
In this case, a cast to Component interface is performed and the life cycle methods are called.
public interface Component extends Extensible {
public void activate(RuntimeContext context) throws Exception;
public void deactivate(RuntimeContext context) throws Exception;
}
By simply declaring a public or protected methods on the component object using the right signature.
In this case the Java reflection mechanism is used to call the methods.
public class MyComponent {
...
public void activate(RuntimeContext context) throws Exception {
...
}
public void deactivate(RuntimeContext context) throws Exception {
...
}
...
}
After a component is activated, it can be retrieved using the Nuxeo Runtime API.
There are several methods to look-up a component:
Looking up the component by its name:
HelloComponent hc = (HelloComponent) Framework.getRuntime().getComponent(
"org.nuxeo.runtime.demo.HelloComponent");
Looking up the ComponentInstance
object corresponding to this component. This object is a proxy to
the component object:
ComponentInstance ci = Framework.getRuntime().getComponentInstance(
"org.nuxeo.runtime.demo.HelloComponent");
if (ci != null) {
HelloComponent hc = (HelloComponent) ci.getInstance();
}
Now let's take a look at how a component may define an extension point and how other components may use this extension point to contribute extensions.
A component may define any number of extension points. Extension points are identified inside a component by a unique name. We will describe here how to define extensions using the XML descriptor file. Extension points can also by created by hand using the internal API of Nuxeo Runtime but this is no recommended and it is not documented here.
Extension points are specified in the XML component descriptor
using the extension-point tag. This tag has a
required attribute name and one or more optional
object sub-tags.
The name attribute.
This should be unique relative to the parent component and is used to identify the extension points inside a component.
The object sub-tag can be used to
define what kind of objects are contributed by XML extensions.
These objects will be created from the extension XML fragment by
using the XMap engine that maps XML to Java objects through
through Java annotations.
If no object sub-tag is specified, the
extension will be contributed as a DOM element.
The object tag has a required
class attribute that specifies the class name
of the objects to contribute.
The object class will be loaded using the context of the bundle that defined the extension point.
Example of a component declaring two extension points:
listeners
asyncListeners
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.runtime.EventService">
<implementation class="org.nuxeo.runtime.services.event.EventService"/>
<extension-point name="listeners">
<object class="org.nuxeo.runtime.services.event.ListenerDescriptor"/>
</extension-point>
<extension-point name="asyncListeners">
<object class="org.nuxeo.runtime.services.event.AsyncListenerDescriptor"/>
</extension-point>
</component>
Once a component declaring some extension points has been activated, other components may contribute extensions to that extension point.
To declare an extension, the extension tag
is used. This tag must contains a target and a
point attribute.
target
The target attribute specifies the name of the component providing the extension point
point
The point attribute is the extension point name.
The extension element may contain arbitrary
XML. The actual XML content is recognized only by the extension
point to where the extension is contributed. This means you should
know the correct format for the extension XML.
For this reason, it is important for components to document their extension points. If the extension point is using XMap to map XML to Java objects, then you can use annotations existing on the contribution object class to know the XML format. These annotations are easy to understand and can be used as well as a documentation for the XML extension format.
If you are familiar with Eclipse extension points, you may wonder why Nuxeo Runtime is not using an XSD schema to define the content of an XML extensions. The reason is simple: because inside our ECM project we need to be able to define any type of XML content - even configuration files from external tools we use like for example a Jackrabbit repository configuration. Defining and maintaining XSD schemas for this kind of extensions would be painful.
Anyway, using XMap to map extensions to real Java objects makes it easy to use extensions.
Here is an example on how a component is declaring some contributions to the previously defined extension points:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="my.component">
<implementation class=”MyComponent"/>
<extension target="org.nuxeo.runtime.EventService" point="listeners">
<listener class="org.nuxeo.runtime.jboss.RepositoryAdapter">
<topic>repository</topic>
</listener>
<listener class="org.nuxeo.runtime.jboss.ServiceAdapter">
<topic>service</topic>
</listener>
</extension>
</component>
You can see how the component is declaring an extension to the
listeners extension point defined by the component
org.nuxeo.runtime.EventService
The result of this declaration is that the
EventService will register two listeners, one
listening on events from the “repository” topic, the other on events
from the “service” topic.
Extensions are contributed to the target extension point immediately after the component declaring these extensions is activated. If the target component (the component declaring the extension point) was not yet activated, the contributed extensions are put in a pending queue and they will be contributed as soon as the target component is activated.
A component willing to declare extension points and accept
contributed extensions should declare two protected or public
methods: registerExtension and
unregisterExtension.
This can be done either by implementing the
Component interface, or by declaring
these methods with their correct signatures on the component object
(as we have seen before for the life cycle methods).
These two methods should have the following signature:
public interface Extensible {
public void registerExtension(Extension extension) throws Exception;
public void unregisterExtension(Extension extension) throws Exception;
}Note that the Extensible
interface is extended by the
Component interface.
When an extension is contributed the
registerExtension method is called with an
argument that points to the actual contributed extension as an
Extension object.
Components should use this method to do something with the extension (usually to register it somewhere).
When the component contributing the extension is deactivated,
the Runtime will call the
unregisterExtension method using the same
Extension object as a parameter. This gives a
chance to the extended component to unregister extensions when they
become inactive.
Here is an example of how extensions are registered and unregistered:
public class HelloComponent implements Component {
public final static ComponentName NAME
= new ComponentName("org.nuxeo.runtime.demo.HelloComponent");
Collection<HelloMessage> messages = new ArrayList<HelloMessage>();
public void registerExtension(Extension extension) throws Exception {
Object[] messages = extension.getContributions();
for (Object message: messages) {
HelloMessage msg = (HelloMessage)message;
this.messages.add(msg);
System.out.println("Registering message: " + msg.getMessage());
}
}
public void unregisterExtension(Extension extension) throws Exception {
Object[] messages = extension.getContributions();
for (Object message: messages) {
HelloMessage msg = (HelloMessage)message;
this.messages.remove(msg);
System.out.println("Un-Registering message: " + msg.getMessage());
}
}
...
}
You can see how the contributed objects are fetched from the
Extension object and then registered into a
Java Map. These contributions are objects of type
HelloMessage as defined by the extension
point (using the object sub-element)
The contributions are also available as a DOM element so you can use this to retrieve contributions in the case you don't use XMap to map XML extensions to Java objects. This DOM element is corresponding to the extension element from the XML component descriptor.
So if you need to retrieve the DOM representation of the extension, you can do:
public void registerExtension(Extension extension) throws Exception {
Element element = extension.getElement();
// parse yourself the DOM element and extract extension data
...
}
In this section we will describe the most important elements composing an XML component descriptor.
You can inspect the XMap annotations on the class
org.nuxeo.runtime.model.impl.RegistrationInfoImpl
to find all elements that may compose an XML component
descriptor.
A complete component descriptor may look like this:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.TypeService">
<implementation class="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.TypeService"/>
<require>org.nuxeo.ecm.core.api.ServerService</require>
<require>org.nuxeo.ecm.core.repository.RepositoryService</require>
<property name="author">Bogdan Stefanescu</property>
<property name="description">The component description ...</property>
<extension-point name="doctype">
<object class="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.DocumentTypeDescriptor"/>
</extension-point>
<extension-point name="schema">
<object class="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.SchemaBindingDescriptor"/>
</extension-point>
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.api.ServerService"
point="clientFactory">
<factory class="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.api.impl.LocalClientFactory"/>
</extension>
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.TypeService" point="schema">
<schema name="common" src="schema/common.xsd"/>
<schema name="core-types" src="schema/core-types.xsd"/>
<schema name="file" src="schema/file.xsd"/>
</extension>
</component>
Each component is defined inside its own file. As you can see the
root element is component. This element has a
required attribute name. Apart this, all other
sub-elements are optional.
Here is a list with all supported sub-elements:
implementation
This element is used to specify the component implementation class. The element is not required since one may define plain XML components only for contributing some extensions to other components. We will refer to these components as extension components.
require
This element can be used to specify dependencies on other components. The component will be resolved and activated only after all these dependency are resolved.
property
This element can be used to define random properties that will be available later to the component when it will be created.
extension-point
This element is used to declare extension points. A component may declare any number of extension points.
See more details on this in Working with extension points section.
extension
This element can be used to declare extensions to other components (or to the current component itself).
See more details on this in Working with extension points section.
While it's obviously a good thing to unit-test one's code, it's usually not enough for a module designed to be ran as part of a Nuxeo Runtime application. It's indeed likely in this situation that the module will depend on services provided by other modules, and even maybe on their default configuration. It's even not uncommon that a project-specific module consists almost exclusively of calls to generic services provided by the base software platform.
org.nuxeo.runtime.test.NXRuntimeTestCase is a base
class to write JUnit tests for Nuxeo Runtime applications. It sets up
the Nuxeo Runtime environment (in the setUp method) and
provides methods to control bundle and resources loading. It is designed
to behave in the same manner in Maven and Eclipse situations. Therefore
resources must be accessed in a way that does not depend on the actual
ordering of classpath.
To load a whole OSGI bundle, use the deployBundle
method, whose parameter is the bundle symbolic name, as specified in
its manifest.
Loading a whole bundle can be too heavy, or bring unwanted
default configurations. Therefore, the deployContrib
method is provided to load just a resource (service definition,
extension point contribution, etc.) from a given bundle. It takes two
arguments: the bundle symbolic name, and the path to the contrib from
the top of bundle.
For resources from the test packages, just make an OSGI bundle
of the test package, which can be done by creating the
META-INF/MANIFEST.MF at the top of the target
jar, and use deployContrib as above.
The following is an excerpt from
org.nuxeo.project.sample:
public class TestBookTitleService extends NXRuntimeTestCase {
private BookTitleService service;
private static final String OSGI_BUNDLE_NAME = "org.nuxeo.project.sample";
private static final String OSGI_TEST_BUNDLE = "org.nuxeo.project.sample.tests";
public void setUp() throws Exception {
super.setUp();
// deployment of the whole nuxeo-project sample bundle
deployBundle(OSGI_BUNDLE_NAME);
service = Framework.getService(BookTitleService.class);
}
public void testServiceContribution() throws Exception {
// Lookup is ensured simply by making the 'test' sub-hierarchy a
// bundle of its own, with a MANIFEST file
deployContrib(OSGI_TEST_BUNDLE, "sample-booktitle-test.xml");
assertEquals("FOOBAR Test", service.correctTitle("foobar"));
}
}
While working on an integration test, it is always worthwhile to prescribe clearly what is to be tested: either API calls to services provided by other modules, consistency with configuration provided by other modules, default configuration for the module being tested. This is especially important for the non-regression aspect of the testing and the cost of maintaining the tests.
The use-cases discussed below require basic knowledge of the Nuxeo ECM framework. Implicitely, it is somehow assumed that the tested code has to interact with one service. In case of multiple target services, one would have to choose a pattern for each of them.
We want to check that the API calls from the tested component to other components have the desired effect, but we don't want to rewrite the tests each time the default configuration of the other components change. Typically, this means that we need to deploy the xml contributions that define the services we need, together with the minimal configuration to tie it up together.
Example: the search service is able to configure its indexes
automatically from the schemas and core types declaration. We don't
want to have to update tests if someone changes the default config
that ships with nuxeo-core. Ideally, this test should use
deployBundle to set up core services, test repository,
etc. and then work on dedicated schemas and core types that are loaded
by deployContrib.
One can imagine here a core event listener that uses a given schema, a component that needs access to the search service to manipulate some specific documents...
In this case, we need to load the base service and its
configuration exactly as they are in the real application and we do
want the test to catch errors that are due to a change in said
configuration. In this pattern, we'd use deployBundle all
over the place.
It's likely however that one does not want the test to rely on
the default (if any) configuration of the module being tested. If the
tested component doesn't carry its configuration but still needs to be
deployed within Nuxeo Runtime, deployBundle can be used
on itself, and then deployContrib for the test
configuration, after the test package has been upgraded to an OSGI
bundle.
Variant: testing of a component and the configuration that comes along. Just think of your tested module as a "base service."
Nuxeo.org website: http://www.nuxeo.org/
OSGi website: http://www.osgi.org/
JSR 277, 291 and OSGi, Oh My! - OSGi and Java Modularity, presented by Richard S. Hall at ApacheCon Europe 2006: http://felix.apache.org/site/presentations.data/osgi-apachecon-20060628.pdf
Start from the previous documentation (OOo) and update it. :-)
This chapter targets developers that would like to use directly Nuxeo Core.
Nuxeo Core is the foundation of the Nuxeo ECM project. It defines and provides all the basic services and functionalities needed to build a complete ECM platform and applications:
a repository model,
schema and document type management,
a query service,
a security model,
a document life cycle service,
a flexible core event service.
Like every Nuxeo ECM component, Nuxeo Core is running on top of Nuxeo Runtime which defines an OSGi-compatible component model.
The main goals of Nuxeo Core are:
to provide the common services needed to build a state-of-the-art ECM platform,
to be accessible both remotely or locally (i.e: to provide a common API accessible both from a remote JVM or directly on the local one),
to be deployable anywhere without any modification (through Nuxeo Runtime): in a Java EE application server like JBoss, or embedded in a desktop application like an RCP Eclipse application,
to be extensible and flexible; this is inherited from Nuxeo Runtime which provides an extensible component model.
Nuxeo Core is composed by the following components:
NXCore: core ECM model, services and default implementation
NXCoreAPI: defines a client API for NXCore
NXCoreFacade: Java EE facade
NXJCRConnector: JCR storage backend that leverages jackrabbit this is the default NXCore storage backend
All these components are running on top of Nuxeo Runtime.
The Nuxeo Core top level components are all roughly following the same style of development, which is structured in three layers:
model layer,
implementation layer,
facade layer.
There are also a number of services used by top-level components to provide them with common functionalities like the schema service, query service, life cycle or security. These services are simple and cannot operate on their own – they need a context to operate on. These services are exposed through top-level components and may not follow the layering presented below.
Top level components provide a model (an API) that is internal to the Core – this means that they are not directly accessible from remote JVMs and should not be directly used by clients.
The model provides a generic API that defines the concepts used by the service and that may have several implementations (using different storage backends for example).
Usually this API cannot be accessed remotely since implementations may use local resources that cannot be sent over the network.
For example, the Repository model defines objects like Document, Property, Session, etc. The JCR-based implementation for the Repository model is directly wrapping JCR (Jackrabbit) nodes that cannot be detached from the local JVM and sent over the network.
Each service may have one or more implementations for their model. For example, the Repository service may have several implementation for the model it defines – this could be a JCR-based implementation, an SQL-based one, or something else. The same goes for the Directory service, it defines a model that could have an SQL-based implementation or an LDAP-based one.
Implementations may use very specific resources and configuration, and are hidden by the common model defined by the service. This means that implementation-specific objects or APIs are never used directly by other Core components, they are only accessed by the implementation of the internal API.
On top of their model, components usually define a facade layer that enables external clients to remotely access service implementations.
This layer is also named the Public API because it defines the API exposed to clients. Any client, local or remote, must use the public API of the component, and must not make calls to the internal API.
The main requirement of the public API is to use only serializable objects that can be sent over the network and reconstructed on the client machine.
The architecture presented above makes it possible to access the Core services when the Core is running inside the same JVM as the client application (e.g., when embedded in a desktop application) but also when it is on a remote JVM (e.g., deployed as a module inside an application server). In both cases the Core services are accessed in the same way – through the public API.
Usually a client opens a session on a Core service through the facade and can then send requests to the Core service until it closes the session.
While a client is connected to a Core service, the latter should track the client session and restore its state (if any) at each client request. When the session is closed by the client, the Core service releases any resource held by that session.
Any data passed between the client and the Core service is serializable and so it can safely be sent over the network. In this way a client can operate identically when running on the same JVM or when running on a remote one.
The repository model is the main functionality provided by the Core; it represents the very raison d'être of the Core. Most of the other Core services were written as auxiliary components to perform specific needs of the repository model or to enrich it.
The repository model, as its name suggest, is describing a software component for managing repositories of documents. Repositories store documents in a tree-like structure that enables grouping documents inside folders in an hierarchic manner.
Besides storage, the repository provides functionalities like:
document versioning,
security management,
document life cycle,
annotations,
SQL-like query.
Documents are structured objects described by a set of properties. These properties may be used to store document meta-data (e.g., creation date, author, state, etc.) or the document data itself (e.g., binary or text files, attachments, etc.).
The properties that a document may have and their types and constraints are defined through several schemas.
The repository model natively supports XML Schemas to define document schemas.
A schema is therefore the way the structure and contents of a document is defined. Through schemas you can usually specify things like:
what properties are allowed,
the type of each property,
the default value of the property, if any,
the restrictions on the property values, if any,
whether a property is mandatory or not.
In order to create and use documents, you first need to define their structure. For this, you have to define a document type. Then you can create instances of documents of this type.
In some ways, document types and schemas are similar to Java classes and interfaces. A document type may implement some schemas in the same way that Java classes implement interfaces, and a document type can extend another document type in the same way that a Java class can extend another class.
Document Types define one or more schemas that the document structure must satisfy and some other extra properties like facets which will be discussed later.
In conclusion, the unit of work in a repository is the document. To create a new document, you must specify the document type and a path. You can either use existing document types or register new types as we will see in the Extension Points section.
For more information on document types and schemas see the section XXX.
A Facet is a behavioral property of a document. As schemas define the document structure and content, facets are used to describe behaviors or capabilities of a document.
For now, facets are simple strings attached to a document type to specify a capability for documents of that type. In the future, facets may evolve to more complex structures, for example to dynamically provide interfaces to manipulate documents according to a capability they offer.
Currently the Core defines two facets:
Folderish: adds folder capability to a
document, so that it can have zero or more children
documents,
Versionable: adds versioning capabilities
to a document.
As we've seen, a document structure and content is strictly defined by the schemas its type implements. But there are many situations where some application-specific data need to be dynamically attached to the document and retrieved later without having to modify the document schemas.
This is very useful for repository extensions that needs to store placeful (i.e., location-sensitive) information on a document – information that cannot be specified by any document schema since its type is not necessarily known in advance.
Annotations are not required to be stored through the same data storage as the document itself. For example one may choose to store document in a Jackrabbit-based repository and to store annotations in a dedicated SQL database.
These annotations usually keep some internal state or data about the document. For example, a tool that may use annotations is the workflow service.
Usually, manipulating documents requires a set of privileges to be granted to the current user. Privileges given to a user over a document are very dependent on the current context and on the document itself.
Usually, privileges depend on:
the document location (i.e., privileges are placeful),
the access rules defined on document parents in the hierarchy,
the document state,
and generally on any rule that was defined over a particular location on the document parents.
Privileges are a standard example of extra information that need to be stored on the document in a placeful manner, so it may be a perfect candidate for the annotation service.
But since privileges are very dynamic and may require expensive computations on every document that is accessed, a separate Security Service exists to manage the storage as it sees fit - and not necessarily through annotations on the document. This is more efficient from a performance point of view.
In the following subsections, we will see what type of information is stored on the document to enforce security and how security checks are done. To ease comprehension of security concepts and evaluation, we will begin the presentation from the smallest unit of security information to the largest one that is stored at the document level.
This is the smallest unit specifying a security rule. It is a very simple object containing three fields:
principal: an authenticated entity. For example the user that opened the session on the repository is a principal – but a principal may also be a group of users.
permission: the kind of action that may be granted or denied for a principal. This may also be a group of permissions. This corresponds to the Java concept of privilege.
granting: specifies whether the given permission is granted or denied to the given principal.
Examples:
DENY, John, Read: an access entry that specifies that the reading is denied for the principal John.
GRANT, Developers, Drink: an access entry that specifies that drinking is granted for any principal from the developer group.
An ACL is an ordered list of ACEs. This means it represents a set of access rules. Why ordered? Because usually when evaluating access rules the order is important. This is because evaluation stops on the first DENY or GRANT rule that match the criteria check.
Here is a simple example showing how ordering may influence the security checks. Suppose that we have a principal John that belongs to the Readers group, and an ACL that contains the following two ACEs:
DENY, John, Read
GRANT, Readers, Read
Suppose we want to check whether principal John is granted reading. Every entry in the ACL is checked (in the order they were defined) and if an entry matches the security check the evaluation stops. Using the example above, John will be denied reading even if it is a member of the Readers group. But if you swap the order of ACEs in the ACL, John will be granted reading.
An ACP is an ordered list of ACLs. Each ACL stored in the ACP is uniquely identified by a name. The ordering is important when security is checked – ACLs at the beginning of the list will be checked first.
The ACP is the object containing the security information that is attached to a document.
Note that ACLs are inherited so that a document will inherit any defined ACLs from its parents in the hierarchy. Inherited ACLs are evaluated after evaluating the local ACLs and from the nearest parent to the remotely related parent.
You may wonder why an ACP is containing several ACLs? And what about ACL names? In a typical situation where security information may only be changed by an administrator through a user interface, a single ACL is enough.
But a complex application may have complex rules to set privileges according to the current document state or context. This is the case for a workflow engine which may decide to revoke or grant privileges depending on the document state or the context.
This means that access rules are changed not only by administrators but also by services like the workflow. To avoid collisions, every tool that needs to change access rules may use its own (named) ACL for setting these rules. If the workflow service considers that its rules are more important than the ones explicitly set by the administrator, it simply places its ACL before the one reserved for the administrator so that it will be evaluated first.
Currently there are two predefined ACLs:
local: the local ACL
The local ACL is the only ACL an administrator may explicitly change through the User Interface.
inherited: the inherited ACL
This ACL is computed each time a security check is performed (unless caching is used). The inherited ACL is the ACL obtained by merging all existing ACLs on the document's hierarchy. This ACL is appended to the ACL list, so it will be evaluated last.
So from a simple security unit like the ACE we end up with a sophisticated structure like inheritable ACPs.
These use cases are not artificial, they are real use cases that a mature ECM product should satisfy.
The evaluation mechanism has been described above. Here is an example of how an evaluation is done.
Let's say the principal John is trying to edit the document D. Editing a document requires the Write permission. Suppose the document D has the path /A/B/C/D – it is a child of the document C which is a child of the document B which is the child of the document A.
To decide if the principal John can edit this document the following steps are taken:
The merged ACP for the document D is computed. This ACP is the local ACP set on the document D merged with all parent ACPs. ACLs imported from the parents are appended to the local ACLs so that they will be evaluated at last.
Each ACL is evaluated in respect to the order defined by the ACP.
Each ACE is evaluated in respect to the order defined by the ACL.
If an ACE match a security rule regarding the principal John (or a group which it belongs) and the permission Write (or a permission group from which Write belongs) then the evaluation ends and the access right of the matching ACE is returned
If no matching ACE is found then the privilege is denied.
Within organizations, documents are often regulated. At a given time, a document has a state or is within a phase. The way the document transitions in compliance with regulations from one state to another (or from one phase to another) is in most of the cases defined and managed by business processes or workflows.
Nuxeo Core itself doesn't embed a workflow engine, or still a BPM engine, as such. It only provides a generic way to define document life cycles, the way the document properties related the life cycle are stored and a way to specify which document types follow which life cycles at deployment time.
Thus, the workflow engine that will be deployed along with Nuxeo Core will leverage the API exposed by Nuxeo Core to set the life cycle properties.
The APIs defined in Nuxeo Core regarding life cycle are highly inspired from the JSR-283 specifications that are still in a draft state at the time of writing this document.
Another advantage of such a design is the fact that the life cycle state of a document will be independent of the application (i.e.: workflow variables) and will be embedded within the document itself at storage time, and thus will be exported along with the document properties.
Nuxeo provides a BPM engine that knows how to leverages the Nuxeo Core life cycle API. See http://www.nuxeo.org.
Nuxeo Core allows one to define life cycle using extension points. (See the Nuxeo Runtime documentation for more information about extension points.). You will find at the end of this document the complete list of extension points defined by the core, you will find an example of life cycle definition there using the life cycle definition extension point.
The life cycle model defined by Nuxeo Core is simple stateful, or state-transition engine. Including the following elements:
Life cycle definition
Life cycle state definition
Life cycle state transition definition
Again, here, no policy regarding transitions are specified. The workflow or BPM engine will deal with this. Here are the reasons:
It gives more flexibility regarding the policy that needs to be applied on the documents by letting dedicated BPM engines deal with that. Thus this is possible to choose which workflow engine to use for your application. (see NXWorkflow)
Current JCR specifications doesn't include a default policy model regarding life cycle so it appears logical to not include this ourself at this layer of the architecture
It simplifies the model
This is important to note that the life cycle definition is fully independent from the document types themselves which allows the reuse if life cycle for different document types.
The life cycle manager is responsible of the storage of the life cycle related properties. One could think of storing the life cycle property within the JCR, which is the default implementation provided by NXJCRConnector, or still one could think about storing it in a separated RDBMS apart from the content storage.
Because of this, Nuxeo provides an abstraction for this storage allowing one to define a life cycle manager per life cycle definition.
Let's take a look at the life cycle manager exposed by Nuxeo Core:
You can see that the interface is fairly simple. It basically, only specifies how to store and retrieve the state and the life cycle policy of a given document.
Note this is how the JSR-283 current specifications specifies the life cycle storage repository side.
You can register your own life cycle managers using the lifecyclemanager extension point defined on the Nuxeo Core side. See the extension points chapter of this document for an example.
When your life cycle definitions are defined and you did specify the life cycle managers which will take care of the storage you will then need to specify associations in between document types and life cycle.
To achieve this, Nuxeo Core defines an extension point allowing one to specify, independently from the document type definition, such an associations. Please, check the example at the end if this document.
Nuxeo Core defines a dedicated life cycle service that is used by the Nuxeo Core internals. This service is not exposed at the facade layer because we don't need it there. This service is manipulating directly the repository document themselves (not references and thus is not suitable for remoting purpose).
Actually, the document model itself has been extended so that you can directly invoke this service through the document session itself at facade layer. See next chapter for an overview of the API.
This service is defined under this namespace
org.nuxeo.ecm.core.lifecycle.LifeCycleService.
The document model exposes a life cycle related API. You can take advantage of this API from the document itself if you are working at core level. Here is the API:
Nuxeo Core defines a service dedicated to core events. This service is only responsible of core events and allows third party code to register listeners that will get notified when events occur (and that can take specific actions themselves).
This service doesn't take advantage of event service such as JMS or still the NXRuntime event service at this level because it needs ti be really fast at event processing to not decrease the repository performances for instance.
By using event listener extensions, you can hook up and bridge on another synchronous or asynchronous messaging systems. Let's take some examples.
Nuxeo Core defines a bridge to Nuxeo Runtime forwarding events on the NXRuntime event service in an asynchronous way. It defines like that a local event loop shared by all components running on top of NXRuntime.
The NXEvents component, not part of the Nuxeo Core, registers a JMS listener bridging Nuxeo Core events to a dedicated JMS topic. It allows message driven beans in the Nuxeo Enterprise Platform to get the Nuxeo Core events. (for instance NXAudit)
You could define whatever listeners you need to forward the Nuxeo Core events on an external messaging system. See the end of this document for an example of such a registration.
The query engine is designed to provide an SQL-like language, called NXQL, to perform document and directory queries.
NXQL offers standard SQL functionality to search records, but can also take advantage of the hierarchical nature of the content repository to provide path-based searches. NXQL is used as the uniform query syntax to access several kinds of repositories. The query engine itself must process and optimize the query, and dispatch it to the different backends and tables that are referenced in the query.
Updates or creation statements are not covered and must be performed through the repository API.
For more information about the query engine, refer to the document about NXQL.
As we've seen the internal repository model is not remotely accessible. Because the Nuxeo Core deployment model requires supporting both local and remote clients, the APIs are separated between an internal API and a Public API, designed to fulfill the deployment needs. Any client should use the public API to connect to a Nuxeo Repository.
This public API has only one limitation: any object transferred between the client and the core must be serializable. This way it can be sent over the network and restored on the client side.
So the public API is in fact is a serializable view of the repository model. This has a performance drawback compared to the internal API since it should transform any model object like a Document into a serializable form, but has the benefit of being totally independent from the JVM where the Core runs.
The main interfaces composing the public API are the:
DocumentModel: the serializable
view of a Document.
DataModel: the serializable
view of a document subpart described by a schema.
CoreSession: a session to the
Core repository.
CoreInstance: the gateway to
the Core. It uses session factories to create new sessions
(connections) to the Core.
The document model is a data object that completely describes a document. You can see it as a serializable view of document.
Apart from being a data object, this object also provides some logic. For example a document model is able to lazily load data from the storage if not already loaded or it may check permissions for a given user on the document it represent.
The data contained by document model is grouped in
DataModel objects.
For each document schema, there is a
DataModel that contains concrete data
as specified by the corresponding schema. You can see a
DataModel as a data object described
by a schema (i.e. a schema instance).
A document contains also data that is not defined by schemas like its internal ID, its name, its parent etc. Thus, apart from these data models there is some information stored as members on the document model like the document ID, the document name, a reference to the parent document, the ACP information (used for security checks), the session ID etc.
Also the data model contains the list of facets that the document type defines.
One of the most important ability of the document model is to lazily load data the first time the data is required from the client. This feature is important because the document may contain a lot of schemas and fields and it will be a performance problem to load all these data from the storage each time a document model is created.
Usually, the client application is using only few
DataModel fields like the
Tile, Description,
CreationDate, etc. These are the fields commonly
displayed by a tree – like explorer of the repository.
When the client is displaying or editing the document properties – then the document model will load missing data models.
To achieve this, there are schemas or fields that are declared to be lazily loaded. When creating a document model from a document, only the non-lazy schemas and fields are fetched from the storage. For example, a blob field will be always lazy.
As detailed above, the data model is an object containing the concrete data for a document schema.
Each data model is described by the schema name and the map of fields. The data model contains no logic, it is a pure data object.
Apart from the fields map, the data model contains information about dirty fields (fields that have been modified by the client), so that when saving changes to the repository only modified fields are saved.
The CoreSession is a session to the
Nuxeo Core. The session is opened and closed by a client and gives the
client the possibility to interact with the Core.
The Core a session connects to can be located in a separate JVM or
in the current one. To create remote or local sessions, you need to
use a specific CoreSessionFactory
object. These objects are usually specified using extension points but
you can also use them programatically.
After creating a session, you can begin to retrieve and modify
documents through the API exposed by the
CoreSession interface.
Example of creating and using a session:
The repository is plugged into an application server using the a resource adapter as specified by the J2EE Connector Architecture (JCA).
The resource adapter is write over the repository model so it is not dependent on the repository implementation (like for example JackRabbit).
Currently the resource adapter has been tested only on JBoss AS
The resource adapter enables the repository to take part on transactions managed by the application server.
This section aims to cover all existing extension points defined by core components and to give some examples of creating new extensions.
Declaring component:
org.nuxeo.ecm.core.api.CoreService
Extension point name: sessionFactory
This extension points is for registering new session factories. Session factories are used to create new Core Sessions.
Currently two session factories are provided:
a local session factory – that create sessions to a local Core (that is running in the same JVM as the client)
a remote session factory – that create sessions to a remote Core (running in a remote Application Server)
Declaring component:
org.nuxeo.ecm.core.lifecycle.LifeCycleService
Extension point name: lifecyclemanager
This extension points is for registering new life cycle managers. A life cycle manager is responsible for managing and storing document life cycle information.
The import / export service is providing an API to export a set of documents from the repository in an XML format and then re-importing them back.
The service can also be used to create in batch document trees from valid import archives or to provide a simple solution of creating and retrieving repository data. This could be used for example to expose repository data through REST or raw HTTP requests.
Export and import mechanism is extensible so that you can easily create you custom format for exported data. The default format provided by Nuxeo EP is described below.
The import / export module is part of the nuxeo-core-api
bundle and it is located under the org.nuxeo.ecm.core.api.io
package.
A document will be exported as a directory using as name the
document node name and containing a document.xml file which hold the
document metadata and properties as defined by document schemas. Document
blobs if any are by default exported as separate files inside the document
directory. There is also an option to export blobs inlined as Base64
encoded data inside the document.xml.
When exporting trees document children are put as subdirectories inside the document parent directory.
Optionally each service in nuxeo that store persistent data related to documents like the workflow, relation or annotation services may also export their own data inside the document folder as XML files.
A document tree will be exported as directory tree. Here is an
example of an export tree containing relations information for a workspace
named workspace1:
+ workspace1
+ document.xml
+ relations.xml
+ doc1
+ document.xml
+ relations.xml
+ doc2
+ document.xml
+ relations.xml
+ file1.blob
+ doc3
+ document.xml
Here is an XML that correspond to a document containing a blob. The blob is exported as a separate file:
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
<document repository="default" id="633cf240-0c03-4326-8b3b-0960cf1a4d80">
<system>
<type>File</type>
<path>/default-domain/workspaces/ws/test</path>
<lifecycle-state>project</lifecycle-state>
<lifecycle-policy>default</lifecycle-policy>
<access-control>
<acl name="inherited">
<entry principal="administrators" permission="Everything" grant="true"/>
<entry principal="members" permission="Read" grant="true"/>
<entry principal="members" permission="Version" grant="true"/>
<entry principal="Administrator" permission="Everything" grant="true"/>
</acl>
</access-control>
</system>
<schema xmlns="http://www.nuxeo.org/ecm/schemas/files/" name="files">
<files/>
</schema>
<schema xmlns:dc="http://www.nuxeo.org/ecm/schemas/dublincore/" name="dublincore">
<dc:valid/>
<dc:issued/>
<dc:coverage></dc:coverage>
<dc:title>test</dc:title>
<dc:modified>Fri Sep 21 20:49:26 CEST 2007</dc:modified>
<dc:creator>Administrator</dc:creator>
<dc:subjects/>
<dc:expired/>
<dc:language></dc:language>
<dc:rights>test</dc:rights>
<dc:contributors>
<item>Administrator</item>
</dc:contributors>
<dc:created>Fri Sep 21 20:48:53 CEST 2007</dc:created>
<dc:source></dc:source>
<dc:description/>
<dc:format></dc:format>
</schema>
<schema xmlns="http://www.nuxeo.org/ecm/schemas/file/" name="file">
<content>
<encoding></encoding>
<mime-type>application/octet-stream</mime-type>
<data>cd1f161f.blob</data>
</content>
<filename>error.txt</filename>
</schema>
<schema xmlns="http://project.nuxeo.com/geide/schemas/uid/" name="uid">
<minor_version>0</minor_version>
<uid/>
<major_version>1</major_version>
</schema>
<schema xmlns="http://www.nuxeo.org/ecm/schemas/common/" name="common">
<icon-expanded/>
<icon/>
<size/>
</schema>
</document>
You can see that the generated document is containing one [system] section and one or more [schema] sections. The system section contains all system (internal) document properties like document type, path, lifecycle state and access control configuration. For each schema defined by the document type there is a schema entry which contains the document properties belonging to that schema. The XSD schema that correspond to that schema can be used to validate the content of the schema section. Anyway this is true only in the case of inlined blobs. By default, for performance reasons, the blobs are put outside the XML file in their own file.
So instead of encoding the blob in the XML file a reference to an external file is preserved: cd1f161f.blob
Here is how the same blob will be serialized when inlining blobs (an option of the repository reader):
<schema xmlns="http://www.nuxeo.org/ecm/schemas/file/" name="file">
<content>
<encoding></encoding>
<mime-type>application/octet-stream</mime-type>
<data>
b3JnLmpib3NzLnJlbW90aW5nLkNhbm5vdENvbm5lY3RFeGNlcHRpb246IENhbiBub3QgZ2V0IGNv
bm5lY3Rpb24gdG8gc2VydmVyLiAgUHJvYmxlbSBlc3RhYmxpc2hpbmcgc29ja2V0IGNvbm5lY3Rp
[...]
</data>
</content>
<filename>error.txt</filename>
</schema>
There is an option to inline the blob content in the XML file as a Base64 encoded text. This is less optimized but this is the canonic format to export a document data prior to XSD validation of document schemas.
Of course this is less optimized than writing the raw blob data in external files but provides a way to encode the entire document content in a single file and in a well known and validated format.
By default when exporting documents from the repository blobs are not inlined. To activate the inlining option you must set call the method on the DocumentModelReader you are using to fetch data from the repository:
reader.setInlineBlobs(boolean inlineBlobs);
An export process is a chain of three sub processes:
fetching data from repository
transforming the data if necessary
writing the data to an external system
In the same way an import can be defined as a chain of three sub processes:
fetching data from external sources
transforming the data if necessary
writing the data into the repository
We will name the process chain used to perform imports and exports as a Document Pipe.
In both cases (imports and exports) a document pipe is dealing with the same type of objects:
A document reader
Zero or more document transformers
A document writer
So the DocumentPipe will use a reader to fetch data that will be passed through registered transformers and then written down using a document writer.
See the API Examples for examples on how to use a Document Pipe.

A document reader is responsible to read some input data and convert it into a DOM representation. The DOM representation is using the format explained in Document XML section. Currently dom4j Documents are used as the DOM objects.
For example a reader may extract documents from the repository and to output it as XML DOM objects. Or it may be used to read files from a file system and convert them into DOM objects to be able to import them in a Nuxeo repository.
To change the way document are extracted and transformed to a DOM representation you can implement your own Document Reader. Currently Nuxeo provides several flavors of document readers:
Repository readers - these category of readers are used to extract data from the repository as DOM objects. All of these readers are extending DocumentModelReader:
SingleDocumentReader - this one reads a single document given its ID and export it as a dom4j Document.
DocumentChildrenReader - this one reads the children of a given document and export each one as dom4j Document.
DocumentTreeReader - this one reads the entire subtree rooted in the given document and export each node in the tree as a dom4j Document.
DocumentListReader - this one is taking as input a list of document models and export them as domj Documents. This is useful when wanting to export a search result for example.
External readers used to read data as DOM objects from external sources like file systems or databases. The following readers are provided:
XMLDirectoryReader - read a directory tree in the format supported by Nuxeo (as described in Export Format section). This can be used to import deflated nuxeo archives or hand created document directories.
NuxeoArchiveReader - read Nuxeo EP exported archives to import them in a repository. Note that only zip archives created by nuxeo exporter are supported.
ZipReader - read a zip archive and output DOM objects. This reader can read both Nuxeo zip archives and regular zip archives (hand made). Reading a Nuxeo archive is more optimized - because Nuxeo zip archives entries are added to the archive in a predefined order that makes possible reading the entire archive tree on the fly without unziping the content of the archive on the filesystem first. If the zip archive is not recognized as a Nuxeo archive the zip will be deflated in a temporary folder on the file system and the XMLDirectoryReader will be used to read the content.
To create a custom reader you need to implement the interface
org.nuxeo.ecm.core.api.io.DocumentReader
A document writer is responsible to write the documents that exit the pipe in a document store. This storage can be a File System, A Nuxeo Repository or any database or data storage as long as you have a writer that supports it.
The following DocumentWriters are provided by Nuxeo:
Repository Writers - These ones are writing documents to a Nuxeo repository. They are useful to perform imports into the repository.
DocumentModelWriter - writes documents inside a Nuxeo
Repository. This writer is creating new document models for each
one of the imported documents.
DocumentModelUpdater - writes documents inside a Nuxeo
Repository. This writer is updating documents that have the same
ID as the imported ones or create new documents otherwise.
External Writers - are writers that write documents on an external storage. They are useful to perform exports from the repository.
XMLDocumentWriter - writes a document as a XML file with
blobs inlined.
XMLDocumentTreeWriter - writes a list of documents inside a
unique XML file with blobs inlined. The document tags will be
included in a root tag
<documents> .. </documents>
XMLDirectoryWriter - writes documents as a folder tree on
the file system. To read back the exported tree you may use
XMLDirectoryReader
NuxeoArchiveWriter - writes documents inside a Nuxeo azip
archive. To read back the archive you may use the
NuxeoArchiveReader
To create a custom writer you need to implement the interface
org.nuxeo.ecm.core.api.io.DocumentWriter
Document transformers are useful to transform documents that enter the pipe and before being sent to the writer. This way you can remove, add or modify some properties from the documents, or other information contained by the exported DOM object.
As documents are expressed as XML DOM objects you can also use XSLT transformations inside your transformer.
To create a custom transformer you need to implement the interface
org.nuxeo.ecm.core.api.io.DocumentTransformer
Performing exports and imports can be done by following these steps:
Instantiate a new DocumentPipe:
// create a pipe that will process 10 documents on each iteration DocumentPipe pipe = new DocumentPipeImpl(10);
The page size argument is important when you are running the pipe on a machine different than the one containing the source of the data (the one from where the reader will fetch data). This way you can fetch several documents at once improving performances.
Create a new DocumentReader that will be used to fetch data and put it into the pipe. Depending on the data you want to import you can choose between existing DocumentReader implementation or you may write your own if needed:
reader = new DocumentTreeReader(docMgr, src, true); pipe.setReader(reader);
In this example we use a DocumentTreeReader which will read an entire sub-tree form the repository rooted in 'src' document.
The docMgr argument represent a session to the repository, the
'src' is the root of the tree to export and the 'true' flag means to
exclude the root from the exported tree.
Create a DocumentWriter that will be used to write down the
outputed by the pipe.
writer = new XMLDirectoryWriter(new File("/tmp/export"));
pipe.setWriter(writer);
In this example we instantiate a writer that will write exported data onto the file system as a folder tree.
Optionally you may add one or more Document Transformers to transform documents that enters the pipe.
MyTransformer transformer = new MyTransformer(); pipe.addTransformer(transformer);
And now run the pipe ...
pipe.run();
DocumentReader reader = null;
DocumentWriter writer = null;
try {
DocumentModel src = getTestWorkspace();
reader = new DocumentTreeReader(docMgr, root, true);
writer = new NuxeoArchiveWriter(new File("/tmp/export.zip"));
// creating a pipe
DocumentPipe pipe = new DocumentPipeImpl(10);
pipe.setReader(reader);
pipe.setWriter(writer);
pipe.run();
} finally {
if (reader != null) {
reader.close();
}
if (writer != null) {
writer.close();
}
}
DocumentReader reader = null;
DocumentWriter writer = null;
try {
DocumentModel src = getTestWorkspace();
reader = new ZipReader(new File("/tmp/export.zip"));
writer = new DocumentModelWriter(docMgr, "import-domain/Workspaces/ws");
// creating a pipe
DocumentPipe pipe = new DocumentPipeImpl(10);
pipe.setReader(reader);
pipe.setWriter(writer);
pipe.run();
} finally {
if (reader != null) {
reader.close();
}
if (writer != null) {
writer.close();
}
}
DocumentReader reader = null;
DocumentWriter writer = null;
try {
DocumentModel src = getTestWorkspace();
reader = new SingleDocumentReader(docMgr, src);
// inline blobs
((DocumentTreeReader)reader).setInlineBlobs(true);
writer = new XMLDocumentWriter(new File("/tmp/export.zip"));
// creating a pipe
DocumentPipe pipe = new DocumentPipeImpl();
// optionally adding a transformer
pipe.addTransformer(new MyTransformer());
pipe.setReader(reader);
pipe.setWriter(writer); pipe.run();
} finally {
if (reader != null) {
reader.close();
}
if (writer != null) {
writer.close();
}
}
This chapter presents the event model used in Nuxeo 5.2. For more informations about the differences between this model (5.2-M4+) and the former model used in Nuxeo 5.1, please refer to last section.
When an event occurs in Nuxeo, an org.nuxeo.ecm.core.event.Event object is created and propagated.
Event is a lightweight object that consist of :
a event name
a timestamp
some control flags
flags are used to give informations about the event nature and how it must be processed and forwarded ()
an EventContext
provides informations on the context associated to the event when it was fired
Each Event if always associated to an EventContext that holds information about the operation that triggered the event.
Default implementation is very abstract to be very generic and reusable in a lot of situations. Basically en EventContext holds :
Arguments
represents arguments of the operation being processed when the event is fired (ordered list of Serializable Objects)
Properties
associates named properties that can be shared between sources of events and listeners
Because the document repository is one of the main sources of events, a DocumentEventContext implementation is provided. DocumentEventContext hold :
The core session used when the event was fired
(this is the first argument)
Principal that was logged in when the event was fired
(this is the second argument)
The source DocumenModel
(this is the third argument)
An optional category
(this is a named property)
An optional comment
(this is a named property)
EventContext can be used to produce events :
DocumentEventContext ctx = new DocumentEventContext(getCoreSession(), getPrincipal(), sourceDocument);
Event event = ctx.newEvent("MyEvent");
When an Event is fired, the EventService will call all EventListener in a row.
EventListeners are called synchronously and in an ordered way.
EventListeners have direct access to the original EventContext (CoreSession, User identity ...) and have the possibility to alter this context. Typically an EventListener can intercept all document creation events and automatically set some fields in the DocumenModel (ex: creation date).
EventListeners can be java classes or scripts.
Event firing and EventListeners execution always occur in the same transaction (if any) and in the original context.
This means :
EventListener must be fast
other wise all transaction may become slow
EventListener can rollback the current transaction
either by throwing an unchecked Exception or by setting the ROLLBACK flag.
Events that occur in the same transaction are stacked in an EventBundle unless they are flagged INLINE.
When transaction commits, the associated EventBundle will be fired and stack will be cleaned. In non transactional environment, events with the COMMI flag will play the role of placeholders.
Typically, if no JTA environment is available, all call to CoreSession.save() will fire the event "SAVE" that will do a pseudo-commit on stacked events.
EventBundle represent the stack of events that have occurred in the same transaction.
And end of transaction, the bundle will be fired.
PostCommitListeners are notified when EventBundle are fired.
There are 2 types of PostCommitEventListeners :
Synchronous PostCommitEventListener
Execution occurs after the transaction commits, but before the call has returned to the client.
Asynchronous PostCommitEventListener
Execution occurs after the transaction commits, and after the call has returned to the client.
It is important to understand that in both cases, each PostCommitEventListener is executed in a separated transaction. Each PostCommitEventListener may commit or rollback without affecting other listeners and the main transaction. In the case of asynchronous PostCommitEventListener, the EventContext is not exactly the same as the original one, this is a reconstructed EventContext :
Security context is switched to a System login
(but informations about the original Principal is conserved)
The CoreSession that may be associated to EventContext is a System one
(since original user's CoreSession may have bee closed)
Associated DocumentModels are "re-fetched" from the CoreSession
Firing an event is very simple :
// get EventProdicer Service
EventProducer evtProducer = Framework.getService(EventProducer.class);
// prepare EventContext properties
Map<String, Serializable> props = new HashMap<String, Serializable>();
props.put("myinfo", "foo-bar");
// create simple EventContext
EventContext ctx = new InlineEventContext(principal, props);
// create the event from the context
Event event = ctx.newEvent(eventId);
// fire the event
evtProducer.fireEvent(event);
This example demonstrates firing of a simple event that won't be stacked in a bundle (not tied to any transaction).
// Create EventContext bound to a Document related operation
DocumentEventContext ctx = new DocumentEventContext(session,principal, myDoc);
ctx.setCategory("MyEventCategory");
ctx.setComment("MyComment");
// prepare EventContext properties
Map<String, Serializable> props = new HashMap<String, Serializable>();
props.put("myinfo", "foo-bar");
ctx.setProperties(props);
// fire the event
producer.fireEvent(event);
This example demonstrates firing of a Document related event.
Event listener are contributed via listener extension point of org.nuxeo.ecm.core.event.EventServiceComponent.
Contributed listener can be :
A java class
must implement the EventListener interface
A script
Here is an example of a contributed EventListener is Java :
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.event.EventServiceComponent" point="listener">
<listener name="myListener"
async="false"
postCommit="false"
class="com.myproject.listener.MySyncEventListener"
priority="140">
</listener>
</extension>
The async and postCommit attribute are not necessary since the java class interface already provides this information.
Here is an example of a contributed EventListener is Java :
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.event.EventServiceComponent" point="listener">
<listener name="myScriptListener"
async="false"
postCommit="false"
script="script/listener.groovy"
priority="145">
</listener>
</extension>
In this case, the async and postCommit attribute are necessary. The groovy script will receive as input the Event.
PostCommitEventListener are contributed in the same way that EventListener, using the same extension point. The EventService will determine that the listener is a PostCommitEventListener based on :
The interface of the contributed java class
Interface PostCommitEventListener
the async and postcommit attribute.
Exactly like for synchronous EventListener, PostCommitEventListener can be a Java class or a script.
On contrary of synchronous EventListeners, PostCommitEventListener will receive an EventBundle (containing all events associated to a transaction), instead of a single Event.
Here is an example of a contributed PostCommitEventListener is Java :
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.event.EventServiceComponent" point="listener">
<listener name="myAsyncListener"
async="false"
postCommit="true"
class="com.myproject.listener.MyAsyncEventListener"
priority="140">
</listener>
</extension>
The postCommit flag is not really useful since the java interface already defines the listener as PostCommit.
The async flag is used to define if the PostCommitListener should be processed before or after returning the call to the client.
JMS can be used to relay events from one JVM to other JVMs hosting Nuxeo Components. If a multi-server deployment is used, it allow to have an async PostCommitEventListener running on one JVM even if the event was fired on another JVM.
In multi-JVM deployment scenarios, the EventService must be deployed on each JVM.
Separated instances of the EventService will be linked via the JMS bus.
The bridge is done with 2 additionnal bundles :
nuxeo-core-event-jms
PostCommitEventListener that forwards EventBundle to a JMS Topic.
nuxeo-platform-event-dispatcher
MessageDrivenBean that intercepts JMS message, recustructuc the EventBundle and associated context and fire the EventBundle in the local EventService.
In order to avoid any loop or duplicated EventListener execution :
nuxeo-core-event-jms never process EventBundle that have already been relayed via JMS
nuxeo-platform-event-dispatcher only process EventBundle comming from another JMV
In default mono-JVM Nuxeo Bundle, the JMS bridge is not deployed and not activated.
In order to activate the JMS bridge you have to deploy nuxeo-core-event-jms and nuxeo-platform-event-dispatcher.
If you want to force JMS usage in mono-JVM deployment, you can add org.nuxeo.ecm.event.forceJMS=true in nuxeo.properties.
The API for sending an event is now far more simple in the new model:
Only one API in 5.2
There was 2 APIs in the 5.1
One for Core Events and one for JMS events
Writing an asynchronous eventListener is also simpler :
no need a write a MessageDrivenBean
no need to handle Authentication and Repository initialization
no need to handle transactions
One of the key benefit of the refactoring, is that JMS is no longer a required dependency : you can have asynchronous listeners without JMS. This means :
we can embed more services in a WebEngine/Jetty package
you can now easily test your eventListeners in JUnit without needing JMS/MDB setup
A bundle nuxeo-core-event-compat is provided.
When deployed, this bundle will :
to run "old style" CoreEventListeners
to enable JMS forwarding on the 5.1 JMS Topic
This means that with this compatibility module, you can run old CoreEventListeners and MessageDrivenBeans.
For sending JMS events using the old API, you will need to deploy nuxeo-platform-events-api
This chapter is provided to document experimental features that are being introduced in the current development branch (Nuxeo 5.2-SNAPSHOT).
This content is likely to move to other places after some time.
Your feedback is welcome! If you have use cases and want to help with the development of these technologies, please join the ECM mailing list or the forum.
Preliminary, yet powerful, support for scripting in Nuxeo Runtime has been recently added. This makes scripting available from all Nuxeo’s platform. Thanks to this new feature, you can easily uses script from your custom components. This can be very useful for a lot of use cases, like:
dynamic rules (scripting language as DSLs)
easily modifiable behaviors
light and powerful configuration / customization
etc.
Scripts have access to the whole API thanks to Java scripting integration (JSR-223).
Moreover, scripts can also be run remotely thanks to the Nuxeo Runtime command line. This allows you to create a script on your administration machine, launch it on the remote platform and get the result back. It makes scripting a killer-feature for administration scripts (ex: expire content, bulk content modification, bulk refactoring of the content repository layout, etc.).
I’ve just integrated scripting support through JSR 223 in nuxeo.
This was integrated as a new project
nuxeo-runtime-scripting which is in SVN but it is
was not yet added in the nuxeo.ear build (neither
in runtime SVN module).
For now only these scripting engines have been integrated:
Jexl
JRuby
Jython
Groovy
JavaScript (Rhino)
If needed more will be added later (like PHP for example).
You can run scripts in nuxeo in 3 different ways:
Put the script inside the
nuxeo.ear/script directory (you should define
this directory through a runtime variable). Then from the Java code
you can do:
Framework.getService(ScriptingService.class).eval("my_script.js");
where my_script.js is the script path
relative to the script directory.
Or you can use the JSR 322 API:
ScriptEngineManager factory = new ScriptEngineManager();
ScriptEngine engine = factory.getEngineByName("js");
engine.eval("absolute/path/to/my_script.js");
Let the script inside your .jar and
register it under using name as a script component. Then you can run
the script as follow:
Framework.getService(ScriptingService.class).getScript("myScript").eval();
This method caches the compiled script so it is only supported for languages that support compilation (currently all the engines that comes in Nuxeo).
Run a script from remote :)
This can be used for debug, testing or administration. You write a script locally then you run it against a remote Nuxeo EP server. The script will be send to the server and executed on the server then the server will return the result (including STDOUT and STDERR) to the client.
For security reason this feature can be disabled using a runtime property on the server.
Here is an example on how you can run a remote script:
ScriptingClient client = new ScriptingClient("localhost", 62474);
URL src = RemoteTest.class.getClassLoader().getResource("test.js");
RemoteScript script = client.loadScript(src);
script.eval();
For the following JavaScript script:
importPackage(java.lang);
importPackage(org.nuxeo.runtime);
importPackage(org.nuxeo.runtime.api);
importPackage(org.nuxeo.runtime.model);
runtime = Framework.getRuntime();
name = runtime.getName();
version = runtime.getVersion();
desc = runtime.getDescription();
println("Remote runtime: "+name+" v."+version);
println(desc);
println("---------------------------------------");
println("Registered components:");
println("---------------------------------------");
regs = runtime.getComponentManager().getRegistrations();
for (var i=0, size=regs.size(); i<size; i++){
println(regs.get(i).getName());
}
The following will be printed on the STDOUT of the client:
Remote runtime: OSGi NXRuntime v.1.4.0 OSGi NXRuntime version 1.4.0 --------------------------------------- Registered components: --------------------------------------- service:org.nuxeo.ecm.core.api.DocumentAdapterService service:org.nuxeo.ecm.core.repository.RepositoryService service:org.nuxeo.runtime.remoting.RemotingService service:org.nuxeo.runtime.EventService service:org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.login.LoginConfig ...
So, this new feature can be used to write pure script based Nuxeo components. Also in future I will try to configure Tomcat to be able to run scripts inside servlets. This means to be able to write web pages in PHP or other supported language for Nuxeo EP ;-)
If you're willing to leverage these new scripting features in your own applications and explore new ways to use scripting to make balance "enterprise" with "agile" in the ECM field, please join the list or the forum and start contributing.
Nuxeo integrates the Restlet framework to provide an easy way to contribute new REST API on top of the platform.
The REST API provides an easy way to call Nuxeo services from an
external application. Even if REST is a very simple concept, we choose to
leverage an existing REST framework to provide an REST API on top of
Nuxeo. The selected framework is Restlets (http://www.restlet.org/) that
provides a lightweight and flexible REST framework. The Nuxeo REST
integration API (org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.restAPI)
provides:
A runtime service to contribute new restlets
Base classes for new restlets
A main servlet that handles the routing between restlets
An integration with the Nuxeo API and Seam context
To implement a restlet you simply have to implement the
Restlet interface.
Nuxeo 5 defines 3 different types of restlets :
Stateless restlets
No integration with Seam and no state management. This is the original logic of Restlet.
You can use BaseStalessNuxeoRestlet as
base class that provides helpers for accessing main services (like
the repository).
Seam-aware restlets
For restlet declared as Seam-aware, the Nuxeo Restlet servlet
initializes the Seam context before executing the restlet. Thanks to
this initialization your restlet can use injection
(@In) to access the Seam context. This solution gives
you the possibility of using existing Seam components. You don't
have to use Service Platform API to access the service since you can
access Seam delegates for that.
You can use BaseNuxeoRestlet that
provides helper API for error handling, security and URL
management.
Conversation-aware restlets
The are Seam restlets that are tied to a Seam conversation.
For these restlets, the Seam context initialization is done in order
to setup the current Conversation. Conversational restlets must be
called with a conversationId as parameter.
Conversational restlet can be used if you need to access the current Seam context associated with a browser session. Typically this is what is used by the Firefox helper to upload files.
You can use BaseNuxeoRestlet that
provides helper API for error handling, security and URL
management.
All restlets are bound to one or more URL patterns. These URLs
patterns are used by Nuxeo RestletServlet to
determine which restlet needs to receive the call.
When defining URLs you can use {} to have parts of the URL that will be converted as parameters.
For example :
/{repo}/{docid}/{filename}/upload
will define a URL pattern with 4 parts and you will have access from within your code to 3 parameters: repo, docId and filename.
These parameters can be used via Restlet API :
req.getAttributes().get("repo");
You can also access the standard GET/POST parameters via
req.getResourceRef().getQueryAsForm().getFirstValue("SomeParameter");
Contributing a new restlet is quite simple.
The first thing to do is to write a new restlet: you can either
implement the Restlet Interface "by hand"
or just inherit from BaseNuxeoRestlet or
BaseStatelessNuxeoRestet.
Once your class is written, you need to contribute to the restlets
extension point exposed by
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.restAPI.service.PluggableRestletService.
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.restAPI.contrib">
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.restAPI.service.PluggableRestletService"
point="restlets">
<restletPlugin
name="upload"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.restAPI.UploadRestlet"
enabled="true"
useSeam="true"
useConversation="false">
<urlPatterns>
<urlPattern>/{repo}/{docid}/{filename}/upload</urlPattern>
</urlPatterns>
</restletPlugin>
...
The useSeam and
useConversation flags define how the Nuxeo Restlet
servlet will handle the call.
Nuxeo comes by default with very simple restlet that can be seen as samples.
The Browse restlet is a simple way to navigate into the repository via REST.
A typical call to list content of default repository would be : http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/default/*/browse
If you need to browse the document 95ce52b2-6959-4afa-bc63-396096b376b4 a typical call would be : http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/default/95ce52b2-6959-4afa-bc63-396096b376b4/browse
Typical output for this restlet would be:
<document title="2fbf878d-9c2f-42c6-acbb-ea339ce15615"
type="Root"
id="2fbf878d-9c2f-42c6-acbb-ea339ce15615"
url="/default/2fbf878d-9c2f-42c6-acbb-ea339ce15615">
<document title="Default domain"
type="Domain"
id="95ce52b2-6959-4afa-bc63-396096b376b4"
url="/default/95ce52b2-6959-4afa-bc63-396096b376b4"/>
</document>
This restlet uses Seam in order to have documentManager injected (this is not a need but rather a simple way of accessing the repository without using the Service API)
Browse restlet registration looks like this:
<restletPlugin
name="browse"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.restAPI.BrowseRestlet"
enabled="true"
useSeam="true">
<urlPatterns>
<urlPattern>/{repo}/{docid}/browse</urlPattern>
</urlPatterns>
</restletPlugin>
This restlet is a simple REST frontend on top of IO core service. This can be used to export a document or a document tree as XML.
A typical call would be :
http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/default/2fbf878d-9c2f-42c6-acbb-ea339ce15615/export
to export the document 2fbf878d-9c2f-42c6-acbb-ea339ce15615 as XML
http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/default/2fbf878d-9c2f-42c6-acbb-ea339ce15615/export?format=ZIP
to export the document 2fbf878d-9c2f-42c6-acbb-ea339ce15615 as a ZIP archive
http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/default/2fbf878d-9c2f-42c6-acbb-ea339ce15615/exportTree
to export the document 2fbf878d-9c2f-42c6-acbb-ea339ce15615 and all its children as a Zip Archive
http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/default/2fbf878d-9c2f-42c6-acbb-ea339ce15615/exportTree?format=XML
to export the document 2fbf878d-9c2f-42c6-acbb-ea339ce15615 and all its children as XML
This restlet uses Seam in order to have documentManager injected (this is not a need but rather a simple way of accessing the repository without using the Service API)
Export restlet registration looks like this:
<restletPlugin
name="export"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.restAPI.ExportRestlet"
enabled="true"
useSeam="true">
<urlPatterns>
<urlPattern>/{repo}/{docid}/export</urlPattern>
<urlPattern>/{repo}/{docid}/exportSingle</urlPattern>
<urlPattern>/{repo}/{docid}/exportTree</urlPattern>
</urlPatterns>
</restletPlugin>
This restlet provide a REST API for Lock Management.
A typical call would be:
GET http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/default/2fbf878d-9c2f-42c6-acbb-ea339ce15615/Locking/status
to get Lock status of the document 2fbf878d-9c2f-42c6-acbb-ea339ce15615
GET http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/default/2fbf878d-9c2f-42c6-acbb-ea339ce15615/Locking/lock
or
LOCK http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/default/2fbf878d-9c2f-42c6-acbb-ea339ce15615/Locking
to Lock status the document 2fbf878d-9c2f-42c6-acbb-ea339ce15615
GET http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/default/2fbf878d-9c2f-42c6-acbb-ea339ce15615/Locking/unlock
or
UNLOCK http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/default/2fbf878d-9c2f-42c6-acbb-ea339ce15615/Locking
to Unlock status the document 2fbf878d-9c2f-42c6-acbb-ea339ce15615
This restlet is stateless and uses Nuxeo Service API
Lock restlet registration looks like this
<restletPlugin
name="locking"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.restAPI.LockingRestlet"
enabled="true"
useSeam="false"
useConversation="false">
<urlPatterns>
<urlPattern>/{repo}/{docid}/Locking</urlPattern>
</urlPatterns>
</restletPlugin>
This restlet provides a REST API for file upload that is used by the Firefox helper.
A typical call would be:
POST http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/default/e5125b5e-8b9e-43bd-8959-7e7e5caf2a1b/pluginUpload/myfolder/myfile
to upload a file
This restlet uses Seam conversation.
pluginUpload restlet registration looks like this
<restletPlugin
name="pluginUpload"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.restAPI.PluginUploadRestlet"
enabled="true"
useSeam="true"
useConversation="true">
<urlPatterns>
<urlPattern>/{repo}/{docid}/pluginUpload</urlPattern>
</urlPatterns>
</restletPlugin>
The RestPack is an additional component for Nuxeo EP that provides additional restlets on top of Nuxeo Services.
The primary goal of the RestPack is to provide the needed RestAPI to build simple JSR168 portlets (like search portlets) that communicate with Nuxeo via HTTP/XML.
You can download the RestPack from Nuxeo download site or build it from source.
To deploy the module, just copy the jar file in nuxeo.ear/system folder and restart you JBoss
The Vocabulary restlet exports as XML the content of a given vocabulary
Sample call :
GET http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/vocabulary/{vocName}/
parameters
{vocName}
Name of the vocabulary to export, must be last part of QueryPath
lang
GET (QueryString) parameter used to set language used to generate the labels
Sample calls
http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/vocabulary/subject?lang=en
<entries> <entry id="arts" label="label.directories.subject.arts" translatedLabel="Arts"/> <entry id="business" label="label.directories.subject.business" translatedLabel="Business"/> <entry id="computers" label="label.directories.subject.computers" translatedLabel="Computers"/> ...
http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/vocabulary/continent_country?lang=en
<entries> <entry id="africa" label="label.directories.continent.africa" translatedLabel="Africa"> <entry id="Algeria" label="label.directories.country.Algeria" translatedLabel="Algeria" parent="africa"/> <entry id="Angola" label="label.directories.country.Angola" translatedLabel="Angola" parent="africa"/> <entry id="Benin" label="label.directories.country.Benin" translatedLabel="Benin" parent="africa"/> <entry id="Botswana" label="label.directories.country.Botswana" translatedLabel="Botswana" parent="africa"/> <entry id="Burkina_Faso" label="label.directories.country.Burkina_Faso" translatedLabel="Burkina Faso" parent="africa"/> <entry id="Burundi" label="label.directories.country.Burundi" translatedLabel="Burundi" parent="africa"/> <entry id="Cameroon" label="label.directories.country.Cameroon" translatedLabel="Cameroon" parent="africa"/> ...
Export as RSS or ATOM the list of children document of the targeted container
Sample call:
http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/{repoId}/{docId}/{format}
Parameters:
{repoId}
Name of the target repository (use default on a standard installation)
{docId}
DocumentRef of the target container (use the docId present in the standard nuxeo URL when browsing the webapp)
{format}
Defines the syndication format: rss or atom
Export user's workflow tasks as XML or ATOM
Sample call:
http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/workflowTasks/{repoId}/?format=XML/ATOM
Parameters:
{repoId}
Name of the target repository (use default on a standard installation)
format
Defines the export format: xml or atom
Sample call:
http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/workflowTasks/default/?format=xml
<nxt:tasks> <nxt:category category="None"> <nxt:task name="review" workflowType="document_review_approbation" author="Administrator" startDate="2007-10-09 11:10:41"/> </nxt:category> </nxt:tasks>
Export user's workflow tasks that match the query as XML or ATOM
Sample call:
http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/queryForWorkflowTask/{repoId}/?format=XML/ATOM&workflowRequest=author&comparisonType=0/1&workItemFromUser=true/false&canManage=true/false
Parameters:
{repoId}
Name of the target repository (use default on a standard installation)
format
Defines the export format: xml or atom
workflowRequest
Defines the workflow item attribute to compare for the query. Please refer to the WorkItem Filter.
comparisonType
Defines the type of comparison. Please refer to the WorkItem Filter.
workItemFromUser
If is true add filter that match WorkItem initiated by the user
canManage
If true add filter that match workItems that the participant has a direct action to perform
Sample call:
http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/workflowTasks/default/?format=xml
<nxt:tasks> <nxt:category category="None"> <nxt:task name="review" workflowType="document_review_approbation" author="Administrator" startDate="2007-10-09 11:10:41"/> </nxt:category> </nxt:tasks>
http://localhost:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/queryForWorkflowTask/default/?workflowRequest=author&comparisonType=0&workItemFromUser=true
Get work item tasks that the user initiate and is pending for the next user.
Execute a search via QueryModel and returns DocumenList as XML/RSS/ATOM/JSON
Sample call :
http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/execQueryModel/{queryModelName}
Parameters:
{queryModelName}
Name of the QueryModel to execute
format
Defines the export format: XML, Atom, RSS or JSON. This parameter is set as a QueryString parameter
page
Defines the page number you want in the result. This parameter is set as a QueryString parameter
ascending
Defines ordering ascending: true/false. This parameter is set as a QueryString parameter
criteria
Defines ordering columns used for sorting. This parameter is set as a QueryString parameter
columns
Defines the columns you want to be included in the resultset. This parameter is set as a QueryString parameter
This parameter is a simple string containing schema.fieldName tokens separated by "," . The only special field is url. Default value is : dublincore.title,dublincore.description,url
QueryModel parameters
For stateless QueryModels, you have to specify the parameters via QP1, QP2 ... (only ordering is important). If you have more than 9 parameters, you should name them QP01, QP02, ..., QP09, QP10, etc.
The value $USER is automatically replaced by the name of the current User :
http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/execQueryModel/USER_DOCUMENTS?QP1=$USER
For stateful QueryModels, you have to specify the parameters as fieldName=FieldValue
Sample call:
http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/execQueryModel/USER_DOCUMENTS?QP1=$USER&format=JSON
[
{
"title": "nouveau-fichier",
"description": null,
"url": "nxdoc/default/452c122d-07de-422b-b448-b0fef9534a62/view_documents",
"id": "452c122d-07de-422b-b448-b0fef9534a62"
},
{
"title": "Setup",
"description": null,
"url": "nxdoc/default/ae03f7bf-9967-4b5b-b37b-807fd40a6ec7/view_documents",
"id": "ae03f7bf-9967-4b5b-b37b-807fd40a6ec7"
},
{
"title": "cps",
"description": null,
"url": "nxdoc/default/2bad93ca-188f-4ea0-a585-9540a6ed6581/view_documents",
"id": "2bad93ca-188f-4ea0-a585-9540a6ed6581"
},
{
"title": "testMe",
"description": null,
"url": "nxdoc/default/e4de81a9-95e8-49ff-9146-e020f99b8bb8/view_documents",
"id": "e4de81a9-95e8-49ff-9146-e020f99b8bb8"
} ... ]
http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/execQueryModel/USER_DOCUMENTS?QP1=$USER&format=XML&page=1
<results>
<pages pages="3" pageNumber="1"/>
<document id="a3154f03-6baa-4d7d-8bac-579d52a8d304" title="ssl-uil2-service"
url="nxdoc/default/a3154f03-6baa-4d7d-8bac-579d52a8d304/view_documents"/>
<document id="e2b26d9a-9140-44f1-ae23-4ad7866911c0" title="build"
url="nxdoc/default/e2b26d9a-9140-44f1-ae23-4ad7866911c0/view_documents"/>
<document id="bf7de6df-bca1-4d29-8e26-5019ced696fd" title="jboss-service"
url="nxdoc/default/bf7de6df-bca1-4d29-8e26-5019ced696fd/view_documents"/>
<document id="439a11e8-642d-41f7-ae0f-4ef4d7303d79" title="postgres-jdbc2-service"
url="nxdoc/default/439a11e8-642d-41f7-ae0f-4ef4d7303d79/view_documents"/>
<document id="467745db-565d-4350-953f-b2fa03733406" title="oil-service"
url="nxdoc/default/467745db-565d-4350-953f-b2fa03733406/view_documents"/>
<document id="44a2441e-e265-4fee-ad17-9ec24245cccf" title="jbossmq-state"
url="nxdoc/default/44a2441e-e265-4fee-ad17-9ec24245cccf/view_documents"/>
<document id="8d7e3077-a3be-4d6c-806c-aa97816821e2" title="oracle-jdbc2-service"
url="nxdoc/default/8d7e3077-a3be-4d6c-806c-aa97816821e2/view_documents"/>
<document id="b431ad04-3439-441e-826b-48b5f0f0c1c8" title="as400-jdbc2-service"
url="nxdoc/default/b431ad04-3439-441e-826b-48b5f0f0c1c8/view_documents"/>
<document id="e146c6b2-a315-4788-9bbe-5f1fc79c18ac" title="mssql-jdbc2-service"
url="nxdoc/default/e146c6b2-a315-4788-9bbe-5f1fc79c18ac/view_documents"/>
<document id="b109a672-5ebd-4a01-8a86-79e2430c2f07" title="file-state-service"
url="nxdoc/default/b109a672-5ebd-4a01-8a86-79e2430c2f07/view_documents"/>
</results>
http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo/restAPI/execQueryModel/USER_DOCUMENTS?QP1=$USER&format=XML&page=1&columns=common.icon,dublincore.title,dublincore.description
<results> <pages pages="3" pageNumber="1"/> <document id="a3154f03-6baa-4d7d-8bac-579d52a8d304" icon="/icons/note.gif" title="ssl-uil2-service"/> <document id="e2b26d9a-9140-44f1-ae23-4ad7866911c0" icon="/icons/note.gif" title="build"/> <document id="bf7de6df-bca1-4d29-8e26-5019ced696fd" icon="/icons/note.gif" title="jboss-service"/> <document id="439a11e8-642d-41f7-ae0f-4ef4d7303d79" icon="/icons/note.gif" title="postgres-jdbc2-service"/> <document id="467745db-565d-4350-953f-b2fa03733406" icon="/icons/note.gif" title="oil-service"/> <document id="44a2441e-e265-4fee-ad17-9ec24245cccf" icon="/icons/note.gif" title="jbossmq-state"/> <document id="8d7e3077-a3be-4d6c-806c-aa97816821e2" icon="/icons/note.gif" title="oracle-jdbc2-service"/> <document id="b431ad04-3439-441e-826b-48b5f0f0c1c8" icon="/icons/note.gif" title="as400-jdbc2-service"/> <document id="e146c6b2-a315-4788-9bbe-5f1fc79c18ac" icon="/icons/note.gif" title="mssql-jdbc2-service"/> <document id="b109a672-5ebd-4a01-8a86-79e2430c2f07" icon="/icons/note.gif" title="file-state-service"/> </results>
WebEngine is a new way to develop Restlets inside Nuxeo using the new specification JAX-RS.
Several restlets powered by WebEngine are already available, lets look at http://doc.nuxeo.org/xwiki/bin/view/Main/WebEngineTutorial to learn how to use them.
Nuxeo HTTP client is a simple helper library to encapsulate restlets calls to Nuxeo platform
Even if you can easily use restlet by directly manipulating HTTP Request (this is one of the purpous of REST), if you use Java on the client side, you may choose to use Nuxeo HTTP client.
The client lib provides two main features:
Encapsulate restlet HTTP client library
Encapsulate Nuxeo authentication
The library mainly encapsulate the Restlet Client API.
The main service object is a NuxeoServer that
provides attribute configuration and call methods:
NuxeoServer nxServer = new NuxeoServer("http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo");
nxServer.setAuthType(NuxeoServer.AUTH_TYPE_BASIC);
nxServer.setBasicAuthentication("Administrator", "Administrator");
List<String> pathParams = Arrays.asList("vocabulary", "country");
Representation res = nxServer.doRestletGetCall(pathParams, null);
For authentication, the HTTO client library proposes 2 implementations:
Basic Authentication
Classic Web Authentication
Shared Secret Authentication
Designed to be able to impersonate calls
The shared Secret Authentication depends on an additional
authentication plugin that needs to be deployed on Nuxeo side:
nuxeo-platform-login-portal-sso.
This authentication system is based on a shared secret between the client and Nuxeo server: you need to configure this shared secret in the configuration file of the server side module, and also to pass this secret to the client http lib. Thanks to this shared secret the client will send the login name and a digest token that will be used to execute the request on the behalf of the login user
A typical use case is a JSR 168 portlet that fetches data from Nuxeo
EP. The data retrieval must be done on behalf of the connected user
(request.getPrincipal()). This allows a portlet to display
user's workspaces list, or last documents without the portlet having to
know the password of the user.
The authentication token sent between the client is based on the shared secret, the user login, a random data and a timestamp. Although this should be secure enough for most needs, this trusted communication between a client application and a Nuxeo server should not be done on a HTTP connection that uses public Internet.
Here is a sample call:
NuxeoServer nxServer = new NuxeoServer("http://127.0.0.1:8080/nuxeo");
nxServer.setAuthType(NuxeoServer.AUTH_TYPE_SECRET);
nxServer.setSharedSecretAuthentication("JDoe","nuxeo5secretkey");
List<String> pathParams = Arrays.asList("execQueryModel","USER_DOCUMENTS");
Map<String, String> queryParams = new HashMap<String, String>();
queryParams.put("QP1", "$USER");
queryParams.put("format", "JSON");
Representation res = nxServer.doRestletGetCall(pathParams, queryParams);
You will find the list of deployed J2EE compatible web services on your
host at the following location: http://localhost:8080/jbossws. From
there you can view all the web services descriptions
(WSDL files).
Nuxeo EP provides a WebService API that enables an external indexer to index the documents that are inside the Nuxeo repository. In this scenario, Nuxeo keeps it's internal indexing backend, and may continue to use it for search.
This service is provided as an addon called
nuxeo-platform-indexing-gateway that need to be deployed
in the nuxeo.ear/plugins directory.
The data exchange between the external indexer and Nuxeo is done in a pull mode: the external indexer queries Nuxeo for new documents to index.
Here is a simple summary of the responsibilities between the external indexer and Nuxeo server:
Externalindexer:
query nuxeo to know what document may be indexed
query nuxeo to get document informations
manages indexing configuration
Nuxeo:
provides an API to browse repository
provides an API to know what documents needs to be indexed
may include some transformation of data before exportation to make
external indexer easier (like ACP/ACL/ACE preprocessing) may notify external indexer that some data need to be (re)indexed
The WS stack used is Metro 1.4. The stack is deployed by default by running "ant patch" in the nuxeo sources directory. It also removes the default JBoss WS stack. Some examples on how to set up such web services can be found at http://hg.nuxeo.org/sandbox/nuxeo-platform-webservice-example/
The README.txt should be a good start.
We will assume that a JBoss is installed in /opt/jboss, and a Nuxeo platform is deployed on it.
The nuxeo-platform-restPack project contains some useful restlets, including the sample restlet used in the following project. You need to install it in your deployed Nuxeo EP.
Checkout the sources of the nuxeo-platform-restPack project:
svn co https://svn.nuxeo.org/nuxeo/nuxeo-addons/nuxeo-platform-restPack/trunk nuxeo-platform-restPack
Then, go into the newly created folder, build the project and copy the new .jar:
mvn clean package
cp target/nuxeo-platform-restPack-VERSION.jar /opt/jboss/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/system
Restart JBoss
To enable the authentication between the portlet and the Nuxeo server, you need to install the nuxeo-platform-login-portal-sso project in your deployed Nuxeo EP.
Checkout the sources of the nuxeo-platform-login-portal-sso project:
svn co https://svn.nuxeo.org/nuxeo/nuxeo-addons/nuxeo-platform-login-portal-sso/trunk \
nuxeo-platform-login-portal-sso
To configure the authentication, edit the Sample-Portal-SSO-descriptor-bundle.xml file located in the Sample folder.
Then, copy it in the config folder of your deployed Nuxeo EP.
cp Sample/Sample-Portal-SSO-descriptor-bundle.xml /opt/jboss/server/default/deployed/nuxeo.ear/config
Then, go into the newly created folder, build the project and copy the new .jar:
mvn clean package
cp target/nuxeo-platform-login-portal-sso-VERSION.jar \
/opt/jboss/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/system
Restart JBoss
Before creating a new project, you first need to install nuxeo-archetype-portlet on your local repository.
Checkout the sources:
svn co http://svn.nuxeo.org/nuxeo/org.nuxeo.archetypes/nuxeo-archetype-portlet/trunk \
nuxeo-archetype-portlet
Then, install the archetype on your local repository:
mvn clean install
To create a new project named my-portlet in the com.company.sandbox area:
mvn archetype:create -DartifactId=my-portlet -DgroupId=com.company.sandbox \
-DarchetypeArtifactId=nuxeo-archetype-portlet \
-DarchetypeGroupId=org.nuxeo.archetypes \
-DarchetypeVersion=1.0-SNAPSHOT
There are two arguments:
ArtifactId: usually the name of your project, with '-' to separate the words if there are many
GroupId: the domain name of your project. Usually the package parent name of your classes.
Maven should have generated the following source layout:
my-portlet
|-- pom.xml
`-- src
`-- main
|-- java
| `-- com
| `-- company
| `-- sandbox
| `-- portlet
| `-- sample
| `-- NuxeoSamplePortlet
|-- resources
| `-- org
| `-- nuxeo
| `-- portlet
| `-- sample
| `-- i18n
| |-- SamplePortletMessages_en.properties
| `-- SamplePortletMessages_fr.properties
|
`-- webapp
|-- index.jsp
`-- WEB-INF
|-- portlet.xml
|-- web.xml
|-- jsp
| |-- edit.jsp
| |-- sampleHelp.jsp
| `-- sampleView.jsp
`-- tld
|-- c.tld
|-- fmt.tld
`-- fn.tld
Right now, you can build the portlet, but it won't deploy on Jahia. In fact, portlet.xml still references the wrong class.
Edit portlet.xml and find the line:
<portlet-class>org.nuxeo.portlet.sample.NuxeoSamplePortlet</portlet-class>
In our example, the class is now in the package com.company.sandbox.portlet.sample, change the line to reference the right class:
<portlet-class>com.company.sandbox.portlet.sample.NuxeoSamplePortlet</portlet-class>
You can now build the portlet and deploy it on Jahia. In your project folder:
mvn clean package
cp target/my-portlet.war /opt/jahia/tomcat/webapps/jahia/WEB-INF/var/new_webapps
Just wait a few seconds that Jahia finds your new portlet and deploys it. Then, go to Jahia and add the portlet. Go to the edit page of the portlet and fill the different informations (like Nuxeo Server URL, UserName, Password, ...).
When all is configured, write your name and send it. You should have "Hello your_name!" as response.
Using NuxeoPortlet as base class make easier the developement of Portlets which have to communicate with Nuxeo EP.
NuxeoPortlet has some useful methods:
error handling
call a restlet on the configured NuxSeo server
global preferences handling (informations stored in global preferences are shared with all the users of the portlet)
If you use the archetype to make your project, you will have some default behaviors:
an administrator role is already defined (in web.xml and portlet.xml), so you can link, for instance,
Jahia administrator role to your portlet administrator role. In your code, use the method
isAdministrator() from NuxeoPortlet class to know if the current user is an administrator or not.
a basic, but with all the informations needed to connect to a Nuxeo EP, edition page for the portlet is already done.
All the informations are stored in global preferences for the portlet (through the getGlobalPreferences()
and saveGlobalPreferences() methods). That means you can allow only administrators to modify these
preferences, but they will be shared with all the users. You can of course create your own edition page and override the
default behaviour.
the action requests are dispatched in convenient methods, depending of the portlet mode. For instance, in the class
NuxeoSamplePortlet, we don't use the processAction() method, but
processViewAction() when portlet is in VIEW mode and processHelpAction() when in HELP mode.
You don't have to deal with the different portlet modes. Need to process a view action request? just use processViewAction().
See the nuxeo-portlet-search project as an example of how to use or override the defaults behaviours. This portlet allows the user to make a simple search or an advanced one (like in Nuxeo EP) on the configured Nuxeo server.
Beside the portlet class, portlet.xml lets you customize the portlet description, name, title.
There are also some default init parameters which are used to build the global preferences of the portlet. All the init parameters will be stored in the global preferences, so you can add the parameters you want and then use them in your portlet through the global preferences.
All the init parameters already in portlet.xml are needed by NuxeoPortlet to behave correctly.
The portlet communicates with the Nuxeo server through some restlets. In our example, we call the restlet sample with a name as parameter.
To do a restlet call, use the method doRestletCall() from NuxeoPortlet, it makes your call
and returns the result as a Representation (use getText() on it to have a String
containing the result). The doRestletCall() method takes a RestletCall object as argument which contains
the different parameters to do the restlet call: the restlet name, the path parameters and the query parameters.
See NuxeoSamplePortlet class or nuxeo-portlet-search project as example of how it works.
The doRestletCall() builds the URL to call from the configured Nuxeo server in the global preferences and from the parameters
of the RestletCall object. In our example:
http://localhost:8080/nuxeo/sample?name=my_name
--------------------------- ------ ------------
| | `-- the query parameters of the RestletCall object
| `-- the restlet name of the RestletCall object which will be
| in the path parameters
`-- the Nuxeo server URL from the global preferences
If all is well configured in the global preferences, you don't need to bother with authentication, just call the restlet.
To make a specific work, you have to develop your own restlets and contrib them to the nuxeo-platform-restPack project.
Then rebuild the project, copy the .jar in your deployed Nuxeo EP and restart JBoss. You can now call your newly created restlets in your portlet.
This portlet allows the user to search documents in a Nuxeo repository through a portlet container.
You just have to compile the portlet and install it into a portlet container, Jahia for instance, as explained in the previous sections.
After the installation of the prerequisites, you need to deploy on your portlet container the packaged portlet.
If you don't have already a packaged portlet, checkout the sources and package it:
svn co https://svn.nuxeo.org/nuxeo/nuxeo-addons/nuxeo-portlets/trunk/nuxeo-portlet-search \
nuxeo-portlet-search
cd nuxeo-portlet-search
mvn package
Then deploy the packaged portlet in Jahia, while Jahia is running:
cp target/nuxeo-portlet-search.war /opt/jahia/tomcat/webapps/jahia/WEB-INF/var/new_webapps
Before making any test, a Nuxeo EP should be running and you must configure the portlet for a Nuxeo EP:
Attach a group or a user from Jahia (the one who will be considered as Administrator for the portlet) to the Administrator role of the portlet.
Then, go to the edit view of the portlet and fill the different fields, so that the portlet can communicate with your Nuxeo EP.
This portlet provides the two search methods of Nuxeo EP, the simple one and the advanced one. They have the same behavior than the ones in Nuxeo EP.
This chapter is dedicated to modules to improve the user experience through integration of browser and office productivity software with a Nuxeo Enterprise Platform server.
The source code of the desktop integration tools is gathered here:
https://svn.nuxeo.org/nuxeo/desktop-integration.
The login page of Nuxeo EP advertises two links to download and install browser extensions that makes it possible to import any files from the client's desktop file manager into the Nuxeo EP repository as new documents by drag and dropping the files or folders into the browser window.
Packaged installers for those extensions are made available on the
http://updates.nuxeo.org
URL.
All drag and drop desktop browser extensions use the
FileManagerService
and its contributed file importers to perform the actual
document creation.
TODO: add here the list of remote interfaces to the FileManagerService API (REST, SOAP?).
The Internet Explorer plugin source code is available at:
https://svn.nuxeo.org/nuxeo/desktop-intergration/nuxeo-dragdrop-ie-extension
. This module is a coded using the C# language and needs the
dotNET runtime version 2.0 or later.
TODO: give technical details on the WS protocol used to perform the file uploads.
The Firefox plugin source code is available at:
https://svn.nuxeo.org/nuxeo/desktop-intergration/nuxeo-dragdrop-ff-extension
.
The Firefox plugin is packaged as a regular XPI and is platform-independent and uses the built-in Javascript API of Mozilla to upload the content of the files as POST request to a RESTful web service URL.
TODO: give details on the remote RESTlets used for this implementation.
LiveEdit is the generic name of a set of client- and server-side components meant to seemingly integrate remote Office document editing without having to rely of manual upload files through in-browser HTML forms.
The generic functional use case is the following: the users use a standard web browser to login and browse the web interface of Nuxeo workspaces. Upon a click on a link flagged 'edit online' on a Nuxeo document having an Office file as attachment, the user automatically gets the content of the file open for editing in the right client side application (e.g. Microsoft Word, OpenOffice.org, ...)
When saving changes, the new version of the file is automatically re-uploaded to the Nuxeo server through a SOAP or RESTful web service to update the original document content and make the changes available to the other users of the workspace.
The version number can be incremented upon LiveEdit editing. A lock can be optionally set on the original document so that two users do not overwrite each other changes in concurrent LiveEdit sessions.
LiveEdit components should also support 2 auxiliary use cases:
creation of a new Nuxeo document with an empty client-side generated attachment of the specified mimetype;
creation of a new Nuxeo document with an client-side generated attachment preinitialized with the copy of an existing binary attachment stored elsewhere.
The following introduce the details of the 3 use cases implemented by the LiveEdit system along with the technical components at work.
The user wants to a edit a non-empty Office file stored as a property of a Nuxeo document.
The user authenticate to Nuxeo (login/password or some implementation of SSO) with her web browser (IE or Firefox) and browse her workspaces till the summary view of a document she has the rights to edit.
If the document has Blob storing property containing a non-empty office file with a mimetype flagged as live editable (MS Office and OpenOffice related mimetypes), the web interface generate a link (marked 'edit online') that automatically opens the right desktop application with the content of the attachment in opened in the editing window.
Upon saving, the desktop editor opens popup leaving the user with the option either to save a local copy or the save on the Nuxeo server. For the latter the user can also choose to increment the minor or major version number or to overwrite the current version.
Upon completion the user can check by browsing back to her document that attachment has be updated with her changes on the Nuxeo server.
The user wants to create a new Nuxeo document from scratch directly from an Office productivity application.
The user authenticate to Nuxeo (login/password or some implementation of SSO) with her web browser (IE or Firefox) and has the possibility to click on a document creation menu with the following items:
New Word document
New Powerpoint presentation
New Excel spreadsheet
etc. (similar options for OpenOffice.org apps)
Clicking one of those links automatically opens the right desktop application with a new empty document opened in the editing window.
Upon saving, the desktop editor opens popup leaving the user
with the option either to save a local copy or the save on the
Nuxeo server. For the latter the user has to choose among a
flat list of candidate remote locations selected are labeled
with both a title (e.g. 'My Workspace') and a path to the
location (e.g.
/default-domain/workspace/my-workspace
)
Upon completion the user can check by browsing to her new document at the selected location. The file attachment of that document has the content of the saved Office file.
The user wants to create a new Nuxeo document directly from an Office productivity application but reusing the content of an attachment stored as a property of an existing Nuxeo document.
The user authenticate to Nuxeo (login/password or some
implementation of SSO) with her web browser (IE or Firefox)
and browse her workspaces till reaching a document with a
non-empty Office file attachment. The view of that file
carries a link labeled
'edit online as a new document'
.
Clicking on that link opens the right desktop application preinitialized with a copy of the content of the template document attachment.
Upon saving, the desktop editor opens popup leaving the user
with the option either to save a local copy or the save on the
Nuxeo server. For the latter the user has to choose among a
flat list of candidate remote locations selected are labeled
with both a title (e.g.
'My Workspace'
) and a path to the location (e.g.
/default-domain/workspace/my-workspace
)
Upon completion the user can check by browsing to her new document at the selected location. The file attachment of that document has the content of the saved Office file.
The LiveEdit feature is built upon a set of the following interacting components:
webapp components to generate a link to a generated XML bootstrap file describing the file to edit remotely along with connection parameters. Such a sample bootstrap file is provided in the technical annexes of this specification file.
a browser protocol handler (i.e. plugin for Internet Explorer or Firefox) that parses the xml bootstrap size and launch the relevant desktop application according to the mimetype
an editor plugin for each desktop application (MS Office, OpenOffice) to be able to make the desktop application fetch the file from Nuxeo through SOAP or REST GET with connection parameters provided in the bootstrap file and save it back to the server using SOAP or REST POST as well.
Before and after editing the document, the editor plugin can fetches a list of configurable actions to call on the server through SOAP or REST GET (lock/unlock, check in/ check out, validate, etc.).
a web service component (EJB3 stateful bean with JAXWS extensions) to implement the required methods along with the WSDL definition need by the desktop client
The source code of the various LiveEdit client side components
is available at:
https://svn.nuxeo.org/nuxeo/desktop-intergration/nuxeo-liveedit-*
.
The Bootstrap module must intercept the click on the "online edit" link using a dedicated protocol handler packaged as a browser plugin.
The "online edit" link has the following pattern:
nxedit:http://localhost:8080/nuxeo/nxliveedit.faces?action=edit&repoID=[repoID]&docRef=[docRef]&schema=[schema]&blobField=[blobField]&filenameField=[filenameField]&conversationId=[SEAM_CONVERSATION_ID]
The protocol handler will be called by the OS/Browser and receive the URL. In turn it will receive the XML bootstrap file.
In case of create use cases the previous patterns change as follows:
user case #2: no docid but need to provide the type of the future document and field location of the blob to be stored in:
nxedit:http://localhost:8080/nuxeo/nxliveedit.faces?action=create&repoID=[repoID]&mimetype=[mimetype]&schema=[schema]&blobField=[blobField]&filenameField=[filenameField]&docType=[docType]&conversationId=[SEAM_CONVERSATION_ID]
user case#3: docid and field path of the original blob AND doctype and fieldpath to of the document that will host the result:
nxedit:http://localhost:8080/nuxeo/nxliveedit.faces?action=createFromTemplate&templateRepoID=[templateRepoID]&templateDocRef=[templateDocRef]&templateSchema=[templateSchema]&templateBlobField=[templateBlobField]&repoID=[repoID]&schema=[schema]&blobField=[blobField]&filenameField=[filenameField]&docType=[docType]&conversationId=[SEAM_CONVERSATION_ID]
The Bootstrap client module rewrites each of those URIs as valid HTTP GET by swapping the prefix:
http://localhost:8080/nuxeo/nxliveedit.faces?[query_parameters]
The Bootstrap client protocol must strip the "nxedit:" prefix of the URI to get the HTTP URL and thus work either with SSL or not:
nxedit:http://localhost:8080/nuxeo/nxliveedit.faces?[query_parameters]
should be transformed into:
http://localhost:8080/nuxeo/nxliveedit.faces?[query_parameters]
while:
nxedit:https://localhost:8080/nuxeo/nxliveedit.faces?[query_parameters]
should be transformed into:
https://localhost:8080/nuxeo/nxliveedit.faces?[query_parameters]
In order to generate valid
nxedit:
URIs it is strongly advised to use the JSF functions defined
in the
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.web.tag.fn.DocumentModelFunctions
class.
The functions are available under the
nxd
(
http://nuxeo.org/nxweb/document
) namespace:
liveEditUrl(DocumentModel)
: get the
nxedit:
URL to edit a document file attachment (default File-like
types)
liveEditUrl(DocumentModel, String, String, String)
: get the nxedit: URI to edit a document providing schema,
blob field and filename field names
liveCreateUrl(String)
: get the nxedit: URI to create a new document of type
File providing the mimetype as argument
liveCreateUrl(String, String, String, String, String)
: get the nxedit: URI to create a new document with
parameters: mimetype, doctype, schema, blob and filename
field names
liveCreateFromTemplateUrl(DocumentModel)
: get the nxedit: URI to create a new document of type
File reusing the content of the blob of the provided
template DocumentModel (assumed to have the "file"
schema).
liveCreateFromTemplateUrl(DocumentModel, String, String,
String, String, String, String)
: get the nxedit: URI to create a new document from
template. Parameters are: template DocumentModel, template
schema, template blob field, target document type, target
schema, target, blob field name, target filename field.
The Bootstrap server module will be a simple Seam component called using the info passed as request parameters to generate the XML payload of the bootstrap file.
The boostrap server module is currently located in webapp-core here:
org.nuxeo.ecm.webapp.liveedit.LiveEditBootstrapHelper
The HTTP response to that GET URL is a bootstrap file containing an XML payload. This file contains:
the action ID so the client knows to interpret it
repo name
document unique reference (in case of editing) or template reference (new from template)
the document Nuxeo type of the document to create or edit
the fieldpath hosting the binary attachment
associated filename
associated mime-type
principal name
whether the result of this editing session should be saved as a new Nuxeo document else where in the repository (creation use cases)
In case of creating from a sample document:
the document id of the template
the fieldpath hosting the binary attachment to initialized the editor with
The XML payload further contain a copy of all the HTTP request headers and cookies + basic auth credentials and the adress of the WSDL description of the LiveEdit webservice.
Please refer to the sample XML bootstrap file in the annexes for more details on the syntax. Some fields (eg. document reference) might be empty or missing in case of document creation (use cases #2 and #3).
The bootstrap module receives and parses the content of the XML bootstrap file. According to a set of configurable rules the bootstrap module launch the right editor with bootstrap file as command line parameter.
The Bootstrap client will need to do an http call to get the xml file from the server. This call must be authenticated. So the protocol handler must reuse the browser session.
In case of document editing (use case #1):
call WS to get list of pre-edit actions
display a dialog for letting user select action
call WS to download the file
call WS to get list of post-edit actions
display a dialog for letting user select action
save and upload the file to Nuxeo Server
terminate (close the WS session)
In case of document creation (use case #2 and #3):
call WS to get list of pre-edit actions
display a dialog for letting user select action
call WS to download the template file (use case #3)
call WS to get list of post-edit actions (e.g. choose title)
call WS for the list of candidate server locations
display a dialog with actions and dropdown list of candidate locations
create new document and upload the file to Nuxeo Server
terminate (close the WS session)
All WS requests (SOAP and RESTful) from the editor plugin back to the WS server should reuse all the HTTP cookies along with any basic auth parameters to ensure the request will pass through any authenticating reverse proxies (e.g. CAS, mod_sso, ...) as if they were the original browser.
It is responsible to answer the WS calls of the editor client. Most of its business logics should be defined has an overridable extension point so that customer project can change most of the LiveEdit global behavior without having to re-compile / re-package the client part.
In particular the list of candidate locations to 'save as new document' is provided by the WS server-side API to the LiveEdit client. The list should default to the list of Workspaces the user currently has the "AddChildren" permission. The WS server should dynamically compute that list according to an extensible service (i.e. overridable by a extension point) so that customer project can register a custom Java class that is responsible to implement the custom business logics in case the list of workspaces is not enough.
The location selected by default should also be defined on the server side and overridable by the same extension point.
Based on a configuration file containing mimetype/editor mapping, the bootstrap module will launch an editor. This configuration file should look like that:
<editors> <editor name="MSOOfficePlugin">
<pluginType>.net<pluginType> <mime-types>
<mime-type>application/msword</mime-type> ...
</mime-types> </editor> <editor
name="OOfficePlugin">
<pluginType>exec<pluginType> <mime-types>
<mime-type>application/vnd.oasis.opendocument</mime-type>
... </mime-types> </editor> ... </editors>
This is very important that bootstrap client can be separated from the editors plugins, because there will plugins contributed for specific editors. The simplest and most neutral way of launching an editor plugin is just executing the editor plugin passing it a copy of the bootstrap file. This file will be the same as the one returned by Nuxeo server with additional authentication information: cookies and Login/Password.
Actions available on the document may depend on the custom project specifications, and it is important that it is totally transparent for the client plugin UI: we don't want to build a version of the client plugins for each project.
So the idea is that the WebService will provide the client editor plugin a simple list of actions, the client will simply display available actions, and eventually ask the server to execute them without knowing the underlying logic.
This "action logic" is somehow close to what we already do in the web layer, an action defines an action id and a label.
If several actions can be done (like checkout + lock), then they will be combined as compound actions: checkout, lock, checkout_and_lock. This way we won't have to handle associations conditions on the client side: the user can always select at most one action: none / lock / checkout / checkout_and_lock
Starting with Nuxeo 5.1.6, the liveEdit link display policy is pluggable.
This means you can define on what kind of documents the liveEdit links will be displayed.
Nuxeo supports 3 different policies :
Client based configuration
The client browser tells the server what kind of documents can be "live edited".
Server based configuration
Links are only displayed on mime-types that are configured on the server to be live editable.
Mixed configuration
Links are only when server and client policy both apply.
For that the firefox and msie plugins add the live editable mime-types to the accept header sent by the browser. This way, the server can decide on what type of file the liveedit link must be displayed. If you use Firefox, just upgrade to the last version and use the configuration pannel to tell on what mime-types you want liveedit links.
The main advantage of this policy is that only the users that have LiveEdit plugin installed will see the liveEdit links.
The accept header send by a LiveEdit enabled client looks like that :
...,application/x-nuxeo-liveedit;application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.text;application/vnd.oasis.opendocument.presentation;...
In this case the server will only display the LiveEdit links for files that have a mime-types that is declared "LiveEditable" in the MimeTypesRegistry service.
The nuxeo-platform-webdav-server module provides
a WebDAV interface on top of Nuxeo services.
There are several WebDAV clients available. Each of them has its specific behavior, and also some limitations.
In WebDAV specification each accessible resource must have a name (part of the URL) and can have a displayName (defines how the resource should be displayed to the user). Unfortunately, most WebDAV client don't use the displayName property even if they ask the server to send it. Because of this limitations, most client use the last part of the URL as display name (with all limitations due to URL encoding). In addition of the display problem, this has side effect on other features like renaming. When trying to rename a resource (for example after creating a new Collection/Folder), most clients will send a move operation (change the path) instead of sending a propatch on displayName.
Inside Nuxeo 5, the path (id) and the display name (title) are clearly separated:
id/path is generated from the title but is not equal: non standard characters are escaped and length is limited to avoid having too long URLs.
Foe example, a folder with title "New Folder" will have "new-folder" as a name.
The name has to be unique within a given container, but 2 documents can have the same title.
Inside WebDAV, each container is a collection. Most WebDAV client consider that a collection is not a document, but a simple folder. This limitation is important because Nuxeo supports folderish documents, and document types that can contain several files. Because of that, depending on the document types we may want to map, a Nuxeo document could be seen as a collection or as a resource. Unfortunately, since all clients consider collections as simple folders, this is not very useful.
One of the most popular WebDAV client are Web Folders that are included inside Windows OS. Unfortunately depending on the version of Windows (including service pack) and also on the version of MSOffice the webdav client will be implemented in a different way with different bugs and behavior. Web Folders are not the worse WebDAV client, but they are definitely the less predictable...
For a complete bug listing of Web Folders depending on version please see http://www.greenbytes.de/tech/webdav/webdavfaq.html, http://www.greenbytes.de/tech/webdav/webfolder-client-list.html, http://www.greenbytes.de/tech/webdav/webdav-redirector-list.html
Because of the path vs name problem, the Nuxeo 5 WebDAV connector introduce some hacks to force some webdav client displaying the correct names.
This hacks can be activated of not depending on the User-Agent header provided by each client.
Virtual path for lief resources (ie: non collections)
Because most client uses the last part of the URL to get the displayName, a simple hack to have resources displayed correctly is to have a specific URL for them.
By default a resource with URL http://nxServer/nuxeo/dav/default/default-domain/workspaces/my-workspace-1/file-1 will be displayed as "file-1". But if file-1 contains a file named "MyFile.doc", when using a virtual URL like http://nxServer/nuxeo/dav/default/default-domain/workspaces/my-workspace-1/file-1/WebFolder_FileName/MyFile.doc, then the display will be correct.
Use filename as resource name
The resource URL will be http://nxServer/nuxeo/dav/default/default-domain/workspaces/my-workspace-1/file-1/MyFile.doc. This is very much like the previous hack, but this is harder to resolve on the server side, because there may be several file resources containing MyFile.doc in the same container.
Use fake get parameters for collections names
Getting the good displayName for collection resources is a little bit harder, previous hacks won't work.
In some webdav client, the url parsing is so weak, that we can use URLs like : http://nxServer/nuxeo/dav/default/default-domain/workspaces/my-workspace-1?displayName=/My%20Workspace%201 to have the collection correctly displayed as "My Workspace 1". Although this hack does not work with most clients, it works with most Web Folders version.
The Nuxeo WebDAV connector enables you to configure for each WebDAV clients:
The hacks you want to enable
If you want full or relative URLs
If your client needs MS specific DAV Headers (required for some versions of Web Folders)
Configuration can be contributed using a simple Extension Point.
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.webdav.config.defaultContrib">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.webdav.config.WebDavConfigurationService" point="DavClientConfiguration">
<documentation>
Configuration for MS Web Folders (both versions) and WebDrive.
</documentation>
<davClientConfiguration name="MSWebFolders" enabled="true">
<needGetParameterForCollectionNamming>true</needGetParameterForCollectionNamming>
<needVirtualPathForLief>false</needVirtualPathForLief>
<useFileNameAsRessourceName>true</useFileNameAsRessourceName>
<needFullURLs>true</needFullURLs>
<needMSDavHeader>true</needMSDavHeader>
<userAgentPatterns>
<pattern>Microsoft-WebDAV</pattern>
<pattern>Microsoft Data Access Internet Publishing Provider</pattern>
</userAgentPatterns>
</davClientConfiguration>
...
As you can see, each configuration set is attached to one or more User-Agent substring. Unfortunately, Web Folders clients do not send information about their version, even if it would be very helpful.
Because of the limitations explained earlier, the Nuxeo EP WebDAV implementation provides some features to be able to work with existing WebDAV clients.
When URLs hack are activated, the clients will be able to display the resources with their displayName (title) instead of the name. But some of them will be fooled enough to use this displayName in URLs to do propfind or move calls. Because of that, the server must be able to resolve URLs that are constituted partially of path and partially of displayNames like: http://nxServer/nuxeo/dav/default/default-domain/workspaces/My%20Workspace%201.
The Nuxeo EP WebDAV connector implements a custom URL resolver that is able to resolve these URLs. In also maintains a cache of these virtual URLs to speed up resolution (and also make it more consistent is case of name collisions).
Displaying your Nuxeo documents as simple files (that's what will do most WebDAV client) can be very restrictive.
The Nuxeo WebDAV connector uses DocumentModel adapters to define how a Nuxeo Document must be mapped to a WebDAV resources. This adapter defines:
How the display name of your resource will be generated.
Simple document title or filename of the main file field...
The default built-in behavior will be to return the filename for each document that has the file schema and otherwise return the title.
How your DocumentModel will respond to a GET request.
The default built-in behavior will be to return:
a folder listing as HTML for each folderish resource
the binary file for Documents that uses the file schema
the XML export for other non folderish resources
New DavAdapters can be contributed to define specific WebDAV
mapping for your document types. For that, the Nuxeo WebDAV connector
provides an extension point to let you register a new class
implementingorg.nuxeo.ecm.platform.webdav.adapters.DavResourceAdapter
and associate it to a document type.
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.webdav.config.WebDavConfigurationService"
point="DavAdapter">
<davAdapter name="NoteDavAdapter" enabled="true">
<typeName>Note</typeName>
class>org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.webdav.adapters.NoteDavResourceAdapter</class>
</davAdapter>
</extension>
The Nuxeo WebDAV Connector is an optional additional component for Nuxeo EP.
In order to install the WebDAV features, you need to download the
WebDAV Connector jar (or build it from source), copy the jar in
nuxeo.ear/system and restart your server.
The WebDAV connector works for both 5.1 and 5.2 versions of Nuxeo EP, you just need to download the associated version or build it using the right POM file.
The WebDAV URL for the default domain is http://$NuxeoServer/nuxeo/dav/default/default-domain.
In order to use MS Web Folders, you just need to go to "My Network Places" and choose "Add a new Network place". You can then enter the Nuxeo WebDAV URL and login/password.
BIRT is an open source Eclipse-based reporting system that integrates with Java/J2EE application to produce compelling reports. The BIRT driver for Nuxeo enables BIRT to be used as reporting engine for the Nuxeo Content Repository. It basically gives an easy way to query the repository and create report from the results. Thanks to BIRT, reports can be run inside Eclipse or as servlets on the server side.
In a Eclipse instance with Business Intelligence and Reporting Tools installed (http://www.eclipse.org/birt/phoenix/), deploy the following Nuxeo plugins:
org.nuxeo.common
org.nuxeo.ecm.client
org.nuxeo.ecm.core.api
org.nuxeo.ecm.core.query
org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema
org.nuxeo.ecm.jboss_connector
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.search.api
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.usermanager.api
org.nuxeo.logging
org.nuxeo.runtime
org.nuxeo.runtime.config
org.nuxeo.birt.oda.nuxeoep
org.nuxeo.birt.oda.nxueoep.ui
When eclipse is restarted a new "Data Source Should be available"

Figure 40.3. In the Data Set dialog, type NXQL query and select fields & schemas you would like to use in the report
The new created report can be deployed in Tomcat to be available online:
Install the birt-viewer application following instruction from http://www.eclipse.org/birt/phoenix/deploy/viewerSetup.php
Deploy the plugins listed in previous section (except org.nuxeo.birt.oda.nxueoep.ui) in $TOMCAT_HOME/webapps/birt-viewer/WEB-INF/platform/plugins
Just copy the report file from workspace to $TOMCAT_HOME/webapps/birt-viewer/report
The report is available with an URL similar to http://localhost:13000/birt-viewer/frameset?__report=report/dummy.rptdesign
The
nuxeo-platform-flex addon provides a Flex
Connector to use Nuxeo services and Nuxeo Seam components as Flex Remote
Services.
The Nuxeo Flex Connector uses Granite Data Services wich is is a free, open source (LGPL), alternative to Adobe® LiveCycle® (Flex™ 2+) Data Services. GraniteDS provide a full support of AMF3/Remote Object for EJB3/Seam/Spring/Guice/Pojo technology. Since it is highly configurable, we added support for Nuxeo Runtime Services.
You will need Flex and Air sdk to build the flex connector and its applications You can download those right here:
Check that your environment variable AIR_HOME and FLEX_HOME are setup correctly since Maven uses them to build your project.
Like all nuxeo project, you will need mercurial, maven and ant.
First, you have to get the sources on Mercurial.
hg clone http://hg.nuxeo.org/addons/nuxeo-platform-flex
Next step is building those sources with maven and deploy it on your server. Configure your build.properties file so ant knows your server's location.
ant install
This will run
mvn install to build the project
and ant copy to deploy the packages on your server.
By now you should have your connector deployed. Let's jump in the
sample directory where you will find different
simple examples. Run ant install to deploy them on
your server. Next is a small overview of those samples. Start JBoss and go
to http://localhost:8080/nuxeo/
to test them.
Actions sample Take a look at all actions register for the selected Document.
Browser sample Browse through nuxeo Document and take a look a their properties.
DocumentAPI sample Modify a Document's property.
Facet Explorer sample Calls the SchemaManager Service to get Document Types implementing the given facet. Here to show the use of Nuxeo Runtime Service. This is a list of usual facet to test this sample: Folderish, Versionable, Orderable, Downloadable, Publishable, HiddenInNavigation, BrowseViaSearch.
Flex-login sample Log in Nuxeo Server and see the list of available samples.
Simple sample Ping the server and play with Document properties
Tree sample Browse through Nuxeo documents with a simple navigation tree.
Users sample Search and Modify a User
Vocabularies sample Navigate through Nuxeo's Vocabularies.
In this chapter, we'll see how to configure and call data services from Flex.
Granite DS requires services configuration on both client and server side. To avoid painful duplication of code, the connector provide two default factories and a default channel. If you are use to GraniteDS, you might wonder how the server side configuration is loaded. This is explained in Granite Configuration chapter.
Default Nuxeo Factory
There are two Different Factory, one to get Seam component and one to get Nuxeo services.
<factories>
<factory id="seamFactory" class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.granite.factory.NuxeoSeamServiceFactory" / >
<factory id="nxRuntimeFactory" class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.granite.factory.NuxeoRuntimeServiceFactory" / >
</factories >
Default channel
This is the default channel you have to use in your service-config.xml
<channels >
<channel-definition id="nx-amf" class="mx.messaging.channels.AMFChannel" >
<endpoint
uri="http://{server.name}:{server.port}/nuxeo/nuxeo-amf/amf"
class="flex.messaging.endpoints.AMFEndpoint"/ >
</channel-definition >
<!--server.port and server.name are resolved dynamically at run time-- >
</channels >
Services configuration is lighter on server side and same as usual on client side.
Seam Component
client side
<services>
<service
id="flexDocumentManager"
class="flex.messaging.services.RemotingService"
messageTypes="flex.messaging.messages.RemotingMessage">
<destination id="flexDocumentManager">
<channels>
<channel ref="nx-amf"/>
</channels>
<properties>
<factory>seamFactory</factory>
<source>flexDocumentManager</source>
</properties>
</destination>
</service>
</services>
sever side
Here is the minimum configuration to register your service using NxGraniteConfigService extension point:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.granite.config.NxGraniteConfigService" point="services">
<seam id="myID" />
</extension>
The id is the default service id. They will be used as the destination name if not specified. The id will be use a the default Seam component Name if not specified.
A complete service declaration would look like this:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.granite.config.NxGraniteConfigService" point="services">
<seam id="myID" destinationId="myDestinationId" source="mySeamComponentName"/>
</extension>
Runtime Services
client side
<services>
<service
id="schemaManager"
class="flex.messaging.services.RemotingService"
messageTypes="flex.messaging.messages.RemotingMessage">
<destination id="schemaManager">
<channels>
<channel ref="nx-amf"/>
</channels>
<properties>
<factory>nxruntimeFactory</factory>
<class>org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.SchemaManager</class>
</properties>
</destination>
</service>
</services>
server side
Here is the minimum configuration to register your service using NxGraniteConfigService extension point:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.granite.config.NxGraniteConfigService" point="services">
<runtime id="myID" class="my.package.MyClass" />
</extension>
The id is the default service id. They will be used as the destination name if not specified.
A complete service declaration would look like this:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.ui.granite.config.NxGraniteConfigService" point="services">
<runtime id="myID" destinationId="myDestinationId" class="my.package.MyRuntimeServiceClass" />
</extension>
This the code of the facet explorer sample. The RemoteOject tag is binded to the schemaManager service by the destination attribute. For more information about the other tags, see Flex Documentation here : http://livedocs.adobe.com/flex/3/langref/index.html
<mx:Application xmlns:mx="http://www.adobe.com/2006/mxml" xmlns:word="*">
<mx:RemoteObject id="schemaManager" destination="schemaManager"/>
<mx:Panel title="Nuxeo Facet explorer"
paddingTop="10" paddingBottom="10" paddingLeft="10" paddingRight="10">
<mx:VBox>
<mx:TextInput id="facet" maxChars="30" text="Folderish"/>
<mx:Button label="get Document Type"
click="schemaManager.getDocumentTypeNamesForFacet(facet.text)"/>
<mx:List id="typeList" height="100%" width="100%"
dataProvider="{schemaManager.getDocumentTypeNamesForFacet.lastResult}" />
</mx:VBox>
</mx:Panel>
</mx:Application>
Externalizer
If you want to use Nuxeo API, you will need a mapping between Java Object and Action Script Object. GraniteDS provides pluggable externalizer for your different Object. It aims to (de)serialize the different fields of ypur objects. For more information, see GraniteDS documentation here : http://www.graniteds.org/confluence/display/DOC/2.+Externalizers
InvocationListener
You might need more controil on mapping. For instance, the DocumentModel object in Nuxeo is rather complicated. So we have a FlexDocumentModel object wich is a simplified version of DocumentModel. The mapping between those two java objects is done in the NuxeoInvocationListener. It listens to each service invocation method call. Then we can switch from FlexDocumentModel to DocumentModel or the other way around. For more information on InvocationListener, see GraniteDS documentation here: http://www.graniteds.org/confluence/display/DOC/8.+Miscellaneous+Options
In this part you will find some information and tips about common administration tasks on a Nuxeo EP server. If you need more details or specific cases, look at the administration guide.
This chapter presents information about the running environment. Listing all required software, giving a recommended configuration and listing some others, known as operational, this chapter aims to help you to validate or define your production environment but the list is not exhaustive and needs to be completed with the users' experience.
JBoss application server with EJB3 support enabled
Java Development Kit (JDK)
Nuxeo EP is designed to be scalable and thus to be deployed on many servers. It can be installed on only one server for a start, and can also easily be installed on many servers. The constant is that there is the need to have one high-end server with good performances. Then the other servers can be more lower-end.
So the numbers below are given for the one needed high-end server.
RAM: 2Gb is the minimum requirement for using Nuxeo EP
CPU: Intel Core2 or equivalent and upper
You might be better avoiding machines from the Intel Pentium 4 Xeon series since some models have a too small amount of cache. This impairs performance greatly compared to other CPU architecture of the same generation. Intel Pentium 4 servers are quite widespread because of an attractive price politic.
Storage (disk) space: the minimum Nuxeo installation, along with the needed JBoss and libs, takes something between 200Mb and 250Mb on a filesystem. Then the final size will of course depend on the amount of data that will be stored in Nuxeo. A safe bet (until we provide better numbers) is to consider data space ratio of 1.5 to 2.
The default persistence configuration is lightweight and easy to use, but it is not made for performance.
default Nuxeo 5.1 uses:
HSQL for SQL Data (directories, JBPM, Relations ...)
FileSystem persistence for Document repository
default Nuxeo 5.2 uses:
Derby for SQL Data (directories, JBPM, Relations ...)
FileSystem persistence for Document repository
Debian GNU/Linux 5.0 Lenny
Linux Ubuntu 32 and 64 bits, Edgy, Feisty and Hardy (8.04).
Linux Mandriva 2008.1
Unix
Mac OS X 10.4, 10.5
Ms Windows 2003 server 32 and 64 bits, Windows XP
Different backends may be set as well for Nuxeo Core repository as for all other nuxeo services that persist data. See Chapter 44, RDBMS Storage and Database Configuration for more details, here is a list of known working backends.
PostgreSQL 8.2
PostgreSQL 8.3
This version need a workaround to be applied as it is much stricter than PostgreSQL 8.2 with respect to value casting.
Execute the following commands in your PostgreSQL console:
CREATE FUNCTION pg_catalog.text(integer) RETURNS text STRICT IMMUTABLE LANGUAGE SQL AS 'SELECT textin(int4out($1));'; CREATE CAST (integer AS text) WITH FUNCTION pg_catalog.text(integer) AS IMPLICIT; COMMENT ON FUNCTION pg_catalog.text(integer) IS 'convert integer to text'; CREATE FUNCTION pg_catalog.text(bigint) RETURNS text STRICT IMMUTABLE LANGUAGE SQL AS 'SELECT textin(int8out($1));'; CREATE CAST (bigint AS text) WITH FUNCTION pg_catalog.text(bigint) AS IMPLICIT; COMMENT ON FUNCTION pg_catalog.text(bigint) IS 'convert bigint to text';
MySQL
Oracle 10
MsSQL 2005
HSQL
Default Nuxeo 5.1 embedded database.
Derby
Default Nuxeo 5.2 embedded database.
On the Nuxeo EP built-in types, you can manage e-mailing and
notifications. Before getting this features working, you need to configure
your SMTP server. Nuxeo EP relies on the application server mail service
for mailing stuff. So you just need to configure the mail-service.xml
file in $JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/.
You can find examples of how to use this file in the
JBoss wiki,
and detailed information about the properties of this file in the
JavaMail Javadoc.
To run Nuxeo EP for real-world application, you need to get rid of the default embedded database and set up a real RDBMS server (such as PostgreSQL, MySQL, Oracle, etc.) to store Nuxeo EP's data.
In order to define a SQL DB as repository back-end you have to :
install the JDBC driver for your DBMS,
configure the Nuxeo Core storage, modifying the default repository configuration,
configure your database.
Possibly, configure storage for other Nuxeo services.
You may also add a new repository configuration (and optionally disable the old one).
Nuxeo EP manages several types of data: Documents, relations, audit trail, users, groups ...
Each type of data has its own storage engine and can be configured separately. All storages can use RDBMS but some of them can also use the filesystem.
This means you can have a RDBMS only configuration or a mixed configuration using RDBMS and filesystem. You can even use several RDBMS if you find a use case for that.
For a lot of services, RDBMS access are encapsulated by JPA or hibernate calls, so the storage should be RDBMS agnostic as long as there is a hibernate dialect for the DB.
To enable the connection to the database, you first need to install
the JDBC driver into
$JBOSS_HOME/server/default/lib/.
Here are some drivers download locations:
Nuxeo Core stores data for the documents themselves: the hierarchy of documents, their metadata and security, and the attached files. There are two main Nuxeo Core Storage backends: the recent (available in Nuxeo 5.2) Visible Contents Store (VCS), based on a mapper to native RDBMS tables, and the previous JCR-based backend, using Jackrabbit.
This section will show you how to configure each backend, using PostgreSQL 8.3 as an example underlying storage. The setup for other RDBMS should be very similar.
To set up VCS, you first need create a datasource for it. The
datasource is not a standard JDBC datasource, so has
different syntax, even though it contains information about JDBC
connection parameters. This file is usually named
$JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/datasources/default-repository-ds.xml.
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<connection-factories>
<tx-connection-factory>
<jndi-name>NXRepository/default</jndi-name>
<xa-transaction/>
<track-connection-by-tx/>
<adapter-display-name>Nuxeo SQL Repository DataSource</adapter-display-name>
<rar-name>nuxeo.ear#nuxeo-core-storage-sql-ra-1.5-SNAPSHOT.rar</rar-name>
<connection-definition>org.nuxeo.ecm.core.storage.sql.Repository</connection-definition>
<config-property name="name">default</config-property>
<config-property name="xaDataSource" type="java.lang.String">org.postgresql.xa.PGXADataSource</config-property>
<config-property name="property" type="java.lang.String">ServerName=localhost</config-property>
<config-property name="property" type="java.lang.String">PortNumber/Integer=5432</config-property>
<config-property name="property" type="java.lang.String">DatabaseName=nuxeo</config-property>
<config-property name="property" type="java.lang.String">User=nuxeo</config-property>
<config-property name="property" type="java.lang.String">Password=password</config-property>
<max-pool-size>20</max-pool-size>
</tx-connection-factory>
</connection-factories>
Example 44.1. Datasource for VCS using PostgreSQL
You will then need to specify the actual repository configuration,
usually store in a file named
$JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/config/default-repository-config.xml
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="default-repository-config">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.repository.RepositoryService" point="repository">
<repository name="default"
factory="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.storage.sql.coremodel.SQLRepositoryFactory">
<repository name="default">
<indexing>
<!-- example configuration for H2
<fulltext analyzer="org.apache.lucene.analysis.fr.FrenchAnalyzer"/>
-->
<!-- example configuration for PostgreSQL
<fulltext analyzer="french"/>
-->
<!-- example configuration for Microsoft SQL Server
<fulltext catalog="nuxeo" analyzer="french"/>
-->
</indexing>
<!-- uncomment this to enable clustering
delay is in milliseconds
default delay is 0 (no delay before processing invalidations)
<clustering enabled="true" delay="1000" />
-->
</repository>
</repository>
</extension>
</component>
Example 44.2. Repository Configuration for VCS
First you have to specify a datasource in
$JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/datasources/default-repository-ds.xml.
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<!DOCTYPE connection-factories PUBLIC
"-//JBoss//DTD JBOSS JCA Config 1.5//EN"
"http://www.jboss.org/j2ee/dtd/jboss-ds_1_5.dtd">
<connection-factories>
<mbean code="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.repository.JBossRepository"
name="nx:type=repository,name=default">
<constructor>
<arg type="java.lang.String" value="default"/>
</constructor>
</mbean>
<tx-connection-factory>
<jndi-name>NXRepository/default</jndi-name>
<adapter-display-name>NX Repository Adapter</adapter-display-name>
<rar-name>nuxeo.ear#nuxeo-core-jca-${project.version}.rar</rar-name>
<connection-definition>org.nuxeo.ecm.core.model.Repository</connection-definition>
<xa-transaction/>
<!-- Configuration properties. -->
<config-property name="name">default</config-property>
</tx-connection-factory>
</connection-factories>
Example 44.3. Datasource for JCR backend
Then edit
$JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/config/default-repository-config.xml.
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="default-repository-config">
<documentation>
Defines the default JackRabbit repository used for development and testing.
</documentation>
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.repository.RepositoryService"
point="repository">
<documentation>
Declare a JackRabbit repository to be used for development and tests. The
extension content is the Jackrabbit XML configuration of the repository.
</documentation>
<repository name="default"
factory="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.repository.jcr.JCRRepositoryFactory"
securityManager="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.repository.jcr.JCRSecurityManager"
forceReloadTypes="false">
<Repository>
<!--
virtual file system where the repository stores global state
(e.g. registered namespaces, custom node types, etc.)
-->
<FileSystem class="org.apache.jackrabbit.core.fs.local.LocalFileSystem">
<param name="path" value="${rep.home}/repository" />
</FileSystem>
<!--
security configuration
-->
<Security appName="Jackrabbit">
<!--
access manager:
class: FQN of class implementing the AccessManager interface
-->
<AccessManager class="org.apache.jackrabbit.core.security.SimpleAccessManager">
<!-- <param name="config" value="${rep.home}/access.xml"/> -->
</AccessManager>
<LoginModule class="org.apache.jackrabbit.core.security.SimpleLoginModule">
<!-- anonymous user name ('anonymous' is the default value) -->
<param name="anonymousId" value="anonymous" />
<!--
default user name to be used instead of the anonymous user
when no login credentials are provided (unset by default)
-->
<!-- <param name="defaultUserId" value="superuser"/> -->
</LoginModule>
</Security>
<!--
location of workspaces root directory and name of default workspace
-->
<Workspaces rootPath="${rep.home}/workspaces" defaultWorkspace="default" />
<!--
workspace configuration template:
used to create the initial workspace if there's no workspace yet
-->
<Workspace name="${wsp.name}">
<!--
virtual file system of the workspace:
class: FQN of class implementing the FileSystem interface
-->
<FileSystem class="org.apache.jackrabbit.core.fs.local.LocalFileSystem">
<param name="path" value="${wsp.home}" />
</FileSystem>
<!--
persistence manager of the workspace:
class: FQN of class implementing the PersistenceManager interface
-->
<PersistenceManager class="org.apache.jackrabbit.core.state.obj.ObjectPersistenceManager">
</PersistenceManager>
<!--
Search index and the file system it uses.
class: FQN of class implementing the QueryHandler interface
-->
<SearchIndex class="org.apache.jackrabbit.core.query.lucene.SearchIndex">
<param name="path" value="${wsp.home}/index" />
</SearchIndex>
</Workspace>
<!--
Configures the versioning
-->
<Versioning rootPath="${rep.home}/version">
<!--
Configures the filesystem to use for versioning for the respective
persistence manager
-->
<FileSystem class="org.apache.jackrabbit.core.fs.local.LocalFileSystem">
<param name="path" value="${rep.home}/version" />
</FileSystem>
<!--
Configures the persistence manager to be used for persisting version state.
Please note that the current versioning implementation is based on
a 'normal' persistence manager, but this could change in future
implementations.
-->
<PersistenceManager class="org.apache.jackrabbit.core.state.obj.ObjectPersistenceManager">
</PersistenceManager>
</Versioning>
<!--
Search index for content that is shared repository wide
(/jcr:system tree, contains mainly versions)
-->
<SearchIndex class="org.apache.jackrabbit.core.query.lucene.SearchIndex">
<param name="path" value="${rep.home}/repository/index" />
</SearchIndex>
</Repository>
</repository>
</extension>
</component>
Example 44.4. Default repository configuration
Change the two PersistenceManager sections
defining various database connection settings.
Refer to the Jackrabbit documentation for more information, and to the Jackrabbit Javadoc for details about configuring the PersistenceManager.
In particular, decide if you want the binary blobs stored inside the
database or in the filesystem (change externalBLOBs to
true if you want them outside the database, in the
filesystem).
Using externalized Blobs can provide a performance improvement in particular if you need to store a lot of big files. Depending on the RDBMS used, there may also be a max size limit for blob if you store them in the RDBMS (for PostgeSQL 8.2 blobs are limited to 1 GB).
Here are some examples:
<!-- Workspaces configuration. Nuxeo only uses the default workspace. -->
(...)
<PersistenceManager class="org.apache.jackrabbit.core.persistence.bundle.PostgreSQLPersistenceManager">
<param name="driver" value="org.postgresql.Driver"/>
<param name="url" value="jdbc:postgresql://localhost/nuxeo"/>
<param name="user" value="postgres"/>
<param name="password" value="password"/>
<param name="schema" value="postgresql"/>
<param name="schemaObjectPrefix" value="jcr_${wsp.name}_"/>
<param name="externalBLOBs" value="false"/>
</PersistenceManager>
(...)
<!-- Versioning configuration. -->
(...)
<PersistenceManager class="org.apache.jackrabbit.core.persistence.bundle.PostgreSQLPersistenceManager">
<param name="driver" value="org.postgresql.Driver"/>
<param name="url" value="jdbc:postgresql://localhost/nuxeo"/>
<param name="user" value="postgres"/>
<param name="password" value="password"/>
<param name="schema" value="postgresql"/>
<param name="schemaObjectPrefix" value="jcr_ver_"/>
<param name="externalBLOBs" value="false"/>
</PersistenceManager>
Example 44.5. Sample configuration for a PostgreSQL Jackrabbit repository
<!-- Workspaces configuration. Nuxeo only uses the default workspace. -->
(...)
<PersistenceManager class="org.apache.jackrabbit.core.persistence.bundle.MySqlPersistenceManager">
<param name="driver" value="com.mysql.jdbc.Driver"/>
<param name="url" value="jdbc:mysql://localhost/nuxeo"/>
<param name="user" value="mysql"/>
<param name="password" value="password"/>
<param name="schema" value="mysql"/>
<param name="schemaObjectPrefix" value="jcr_${wsp.name}_"/>
<param name="externalBLOBs" value="true"/>
</PersistenceManager>
(...)
<!-- Versioning configuration. -->
(...)
<PersistenceManager class="org.apache.jackrabbit.core.persistence.bundle.MySqlPersistenceManager">
<param name="driver" value="com.mysql.jdbc.Driver"/>
<param name="url" value="jdbc:mysql://localhost/nuxeo"/>
<param name="user" value="mysql"/>
<param name="password" value="password"/>
<param name="schema" value="mysql"/>
<param name="schemaObjectPrefix" value="jcr_ver_"/>
<param name="externalBLOBs" value="true"/>
</PersistenceManager>
Example 44.6. Sample configuration for a MySQL Jackrabbit repository
Note: "schemaObjectPrefix" must have different values in workspace & versioning configuration
For JackRabbit, there are some persistence manager specific to each RDBMS :
for PostgreSQL: you may use org.apache.jackrabbit.core.persistence.bundle.PostgreSQLPersistenceManager
for MySQL: you may use org.apache.jackrabbit.core.persistence.bundle.MySqlPersistenceManager
for Oracle 10: you may use org.apache.jackrabbit.core.persistence.bundle.OraclePersistenceManager
for MSSQL2005 you may use : org.apache.jackrabbit.core.persistence.bundle.MSSqlPersistenceManager
Create the database in the database server, enable IP connection, setup permissions and test the connection.
Many services beyond Nuxeo Core Repository are using an SQL database to persist their data, such as:
Relations Service: RDF data is stored in SQL,
Audit Service: Audit logs are stored via JPA,
Tag Service: the tagging entities are stored in a table in the default Nuxeo DB via JPA,
Directories: entries can be stored into an SQL database.
By default, all these services use the JBoss AS's embedded HSQLDB.
Each service can use a dedicated datasource to define the database connection. However, to simplify configuration, all datasources are JNDI NamingAlias pointing to a single datasource (NuxeoDS). If you want to change the default database, you can simply do the following:
deploy the needed JDBC Driver in
$JBOSS_HOME/server/default/lib,
modify the datasource definition file in
$JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/datasources/unified-nuxeo-ds.xml.
The default configuration has a commented out PostgresSQL configuration.
To use a dedicated datasource for a service, you need to modify its
configuration file. If you would like to store audit logs in PostgreSQL
using its own datasource, remove the NamingAlias in
nxaudit-logs-ds.xml and replace it with the
datasource configuration example:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<datasources>
<local-tx-datasource>
<jndi-name>nxaudit-logs</jndi-name>
<connection-url>jdbc:postgresql://localhost/logs</connection-url>
<driver-class>org.postgresql.Driver</driver-class>
<user-name>username</user-name>
<password>password</password>
</local-tx-datasource>
</datasources>
Example 44.7. Datasource for the Audit Service using PostgreSQL
We recommend to enable XA transactions if your database server support it (for PostgreSQL, you have to use 8.x versions). The following datasource definition example enables XA transaction for the Audit Service using PostgreSQL.
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<datasources>
<xa-datasource>
<jndi-name>nxaudit-logs</jndi-name>
<xa-datasource-class>org.postgresql.xa.PGXADataSource</xa-datasource-class>
<xa-datasource-property name="ServerName">localhost</xa-datasource-property>
<xa-datasource-property name="PortNumber">5432</xa-datasource-property>
<xa-datasource-property name="DatabaseName">logs</xa-datasource-property>
<xa-datasource-property name="User">postgres</xa-datasource-property>
<xa-datasource-property name="Password">password</xa-datasource-property>
<track-connection-by-tx/>
</xa-datasource>
</datasources>
Example 44.8. Datasource for the Audit Service using PostgreSQL with XA transactions
See Datasources Configuration on the JBoss wiki for more examples of datasources.
This method works for most services:
Audit: nxaudit-logs-ds.xml
Placeful Configuration Service & Subscriptions:
nxplaceful-ds.xml
UID generator:
nxuidsequencer-ds.xml
jBPM engine:
nxworkflow-jbpm-ds.xml
Workflow Document Service:
nxworkflow-documents-ds.xml
Archive management:
nxarchive-records-ds.xml
Relations:
nxrelations-default-jena-ds.xml
Compass search engine:
nxsearch-compass-ds.xml
MySQL is a quirky database which sometimes needs very specific options to function properly.
The datasources used by Jena
(nxrelations-default-jena-ds.xml and
nxcomment-jena-ds.xml) need to use a "relax
autocommit" mode. To enable that, change the connection-url
in the datasources to something like:
<connection-url>
jdbc:mysql://localhost/nuxeo?relaxAutoCommit=true
</connection-url>
The datasource used by Compass
(nxsearch-compass-ds.xml) needs to be put in "relax
autocommit" too, and in addition it needs an "emulate locators"
option:
<connection-url>
jdbc:mysql://localhost/nuxeo?relaxAutoCommit=true&emulateLocators=true
</connection-url>
This is documented at http://static.compassframework.org/docs/latest/jdbcdirectory.html .
Note the & syntax for the URL parameters
instead of just & because the URL is embedded in an XML
file.
The Relation Service uses a datasource to define the data storage. However modifying the datasource is not enough, you also have to tell to the Jena engine which database dialect is used, as it doesn't auto-detect it.
To do that, edit the sql.properties file in
$JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/config/
and change the definition of the
org.nuxeo.ecm.sql.jena.databaseType property. The possible
values are:
Derby
HSQL
MsSQL
MySQL
Oracle
PostgreSQL
In the same file, the property
org.nuxeo.ecm.sql.jena.databaseTransactionEnabled is set to
true by default.
Please refer to the Jena Site for more information about database support.
The value of the above properties are used as variables by the extension point defining the Jena configuration, so that they only have to be changed in one place.
The Tag Service uses a datasource file to define the data storage. The service uses joins with tables located in default repository DB instance, so in order to work it is a must to be configured on the same database instance as the default repository. Short line, the nxtags-ds.xml file has to be compliant with whatever is set in the default-repository-ds.xml file.
Note that this section is obsolete in Nuxeo 5.2, and should not be used anymore.
The Compass plugin is configured using a datasource, but at the time
of this writing it still needs some additional configuration in a file
embedded in its Jar. You should go to
$JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/system/
and inside the directory
nuxeo-platform-search-compass-plugin-5.1-SNAPSHOT.jar
(the version number may be different) then edit the file
compass.cfg.xml. You will find a section like:
<connection>
<jdbc managed="true"
dialectClass="org.apache.lucene.store.jdbc.dialect.HSQLDialect"
deleteMarkDeletedDelta="3600000">
<dataSourceProvider>
<jndi lookup="java:/nxsearch-compass" />
</dataSourceProvider>
</jdbc>
</connection>
The dialectClass has to be changed according to your
datasource configuration. The possible values end with
MySQLDialect, PostgreSQLDialect , etc. They are
documented in the
Compass documention about SQL dialects .
If you just want to change the default repository name
appearing in the url http://.../nuxeo/nxdoc/default/, modify the
repository name value in:
default-repository-config.xml
platform-config.xml
TODO: Nuxeo configuration has changed, the two above sections need to be updated.
Create a repository definition as a contribution to the extension
point
org.nuxeo.ecm.core.repository.RepositoryService
(for example: MyRepo-repositoy-config.xml) in
$JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/config/.
You can take example on the default repository definition $JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/config/default-repository-config.xml.
You have to properly configure the following aspects:
the name of the component
(name="org.nuxeo.project.sample.repository.MyRepo"),
which must be unique among component names,
the name of the repository (<repository
name="MyRepo">), which is used to refer to it from your
application and must also be unique among repository names,
the various database connection settings (driver, user, password, schema, etc.),
decide if you want the binary blobs stored inside the database
or in the filesystem (change externalBLOBs to
true if you want them outside the database).
Refer to the Jackrabbit
documentation for more information, and to the Jackrabbit
Javadoc for details about configuring the
BundleDbPersistenceManager.
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.project.sample.repository.MyRepo">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.repository.RepositoryService" point="repository">
<repository name="MyRepo"
factory="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.repository.jcr.JCRRepositoryFactory"
securityManager="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.repository.jcr.JCRSecurityManager"
forceReloadTypes="false">
<Repository>
<FileSystem class="org.apache.jackrabbit.core.fs.local.LocalFileSystem">
<param name="path" value="${rep.home}/repository"/>
</FileSystem>
<Security appName="Jackrabbit">
<AccessManager class="org.apache.jackrabbit.core.security.SimpleAccessManager">
</AccessManager>
<LoginModule class="org.apache.jackrabbit.core.security.SimpleLoginModule">
<param name="anonymousId" value="anonymous"/>
</LoginModule>
</Security>
<!-- Workspaces configuration. Nuxeo only uses the default workspace. -->
<Workspaces rootPath="${rep.home}/workspaces" defaultWorkspace="default"/>
<Workspace name="${wsp.name}">
<FileSystem class="org.apache.jackrabbit.core.fs.local.LocalFileSystem">
<param name="path" value="${wsp.home}"/>
</FileSystem>
<PersistenceManager class="org.apache.jackrabbit.core.persistence.bundle.PostgreSQLPersistenceManager">
<param name="driver" value="org.postgresql.Driver"/>
<param name="url" value="jdbc:postgresql://localhost/nuxeo"/>
<param name="user" value="postgres"/>
<param name="password" value="password"/>
<param name="schema" value="postgresql"/>
<param name="schemaObjectPrefix" value="jcr_${wsp.name}_"/>
<param name="externalBLOBs" value="false"/>
</PersistenceManager>
<SearchIndex class="org.apache.jackrabbit.core.query.lucene.SearchIndex">
<param name="path" value="${wsp.home}/index"/>
</SearchIndex>
</Workspace>
<!-- Versioning configuration. -->
<Versioning rootPath="${rep.home}/version">
<FileSystem class="org.apache.jackrabbit.core.fs.local.LocalFileSystem">
<param name="path" value="${rep.home}/version"/>
</FileSystem>
<PersistenceManager class="org.apache.jackrabbit.core.persistence.bundle.PostgreSQLPersistenceManager">
<param name="driver" value="org.postgresql.Driver"/>
<param name="url" value="jdbc:postgresql://localhost/nuxeo"/>
<param name="user" value="postgres"/>
<param name="password" value="password"/>
<param name="schema" value="postgresql"/>
<param name="schemaObjectPrefix" value="jcr_ver_"/>
<param name="externalBLOBs" value="false"/>
</PersistenceManager>
</Versioning>
<!-- Index for repository-wide information, mainly versions. -->
<SearchIndex class="org.apache.jackrabbit.core.query.lucene.SearchIndex">
<param name="path" value="${rep.home}/repository/index"/>
</SearchIndex>
</Repository>
</repository>
</extension>
</component>
Example 44.9. Sample configuration for a PostgreSQL Jackrabbit repository
TODO: this should be moved to a different section as it doesn't pertain to the SQL configuration itself.
You have now replaced the default repository
(demo) with your newly defined one
(MyRepo). To actually use it, create or edit the file
MyPlatform-Layout-config.xml in
$JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/config/
and configure the parameters as shown in the following example.
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="MyPlatformLayout">
<require>org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.api.DefaultPlatform</require>
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.util.LocationManagerService" point="location">
<locationManagerPlugin> <!-- This disable the default (demo) repository -->
<locationEnabled>false</locationEnabled>
<locationName>demo</locationName>
</locationManagerPlugin>
<locationManagerPlugin> <!-- This enable your new repository -->
<locationEnabled>true</locationEnabled>
<locationName>MyRepo</locationName> <!-- Use the name of your repository -->
</locationManagerPlugin>
</extension>
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.api.repository.RepositoryManager"
point="repositories">
<documentation>The default repository</documentation>
<repository name="MyRepo" label="My Repository"/>
</extension>
<extension target="org.nuxeo.runtime.api.ServiceManagement" point="services">
<service class="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.api.CoreSession" name="MyRepo" group="core">
<locator>%DocumentManagerBean</locator>
</service>
</extension>
</component>
This sample configuration creates a new repository in the
core Group that will be assigned to the default server.
If you want to have it located on an other server you can use:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.runtime.api.ServiceManagement" point="servers">
<!-- define new locator for group MyGroup -->
<server class="org.nuxeo.runtime.api.JBossServiceLocator">
<group>MyGroup</group>
<property name="java.naming.factory.initial">org.jnp.interfaces.NamingContextFactory</property>
<property name="java.naming.provider.url">jnp://MyServer:1099</property>
<property name="java.naming.factory.url.pkgs">org.jboss.naming:org.jnp.interfaces</property>
</server>
<!-- bind MyRepo to MyGroup -->
<extension target="org.nuxeo.runtime.api.ServiceManagement" point="services">
<service class="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.api.CoreSession" name="MyRepo" group="MyGroup">
<locator>%DocumentManagerBean</locator>
</service>
</extension>
</extension>
The user interface in Nuxeo EP gets the data from NXDirectory. As a consequence you can choose your source. By default, the users/groups data is stored in a SQL database. If you want to get the users from a LDAP directory, you need to deploy one of the following configuration:
Users in LDAP, groups in SQL
Go to the examples
sub-folder and copy the default-ldap-users-directory-bundle.xml
file in the nuxeo.ear/config folder of the JBoss
instance (or bundle it in a jar, cf packaging in this guide). This
sample setup replaces the default userDirectory configuration SQL with
users fetched from the LDAP server. The groupDirectory remains
unaffected by this setup. You might want to copy the file
default-virtual-groups-bundle.xml
and adjust defaultAdministratorId to select a user from your LDAP that
have administrative rights by default. You can also configure the
section on defaultGroup to make all users members of some default
group (typically the members group) so that they have default right
without having to make them belong to groups explicitly.
Users and groups in LDAP
Copy the users setup as previously; moreover copy the
default-ldap-groups-directory-bundle.xml
file in the nuxeo.ear/config folder of the JBoss
instance. This sample setup which is dependent on the previous one
additionally overrides the default groupDirectory
setup to read the groups from the LDAP directory typically from
groupOfUniqueNames entries with fully qualified
dn references to the user entries or to subgroups.
You can edit the nuxeo.ear/config/*.xml files on
the JBoss instance, but you will need to restart JBoss to take changes
into account.
You can find additional information on those settings in the documentation for LDAPDirectory extension point.
The detailed architecture of the authentication and user management modules of Nuxeo can be found in the user authentication and directories chapters of the reference guide.
See the Nuxeo Community Site FAQ for specific cases.
OpenOffice.org (OOo) is used on server-side for different tasks such as file transforms (eg. to PDF) or other advanced tasks.
See http://www.openoffice.org/ for installation procedure if not provided by your OS.
Since version 2.3, OpenOffice can be started in headless mode. This means that under linux, you non longer need to run a Xvfb.
Use the oooctl control script or, depending on your system and installation method, start OOo running :
for Linux:
/path/to/openoffice/program/soffice.bin
-headless -nofirststartwizard
-accept="socket,host=localhost,port=8100;urp;StarOffice.Service"
for Mac OS X:
/path/to/openoffice.app/Contents/MacOS/soffice.bin
-headless -nofirststartwizard
-accept="socket,host=localhost,port=8100;urp;StarOffice.Service"
for Windows:
soffice.exe -headless
-nofirststartwizard
-accept="socket,host=localhost,port=8100;urp;StarOffice.Service"
The -headless switch lets OOo manage to answer
every question that may occur with a default response avoiding
dead-locks. It also hides the OOo windows if a display is available by
default (eg. Ms Windows). Note that the -invisible
switch is not used as it is redundant and errors on PDF exports may
occur.
The -nofirststartwizard skips any post-install
wizard, allowing to use OOo directly after the installation without any
user parameterization.
Install nxSkipInstallWizard.oxt extension to make this parameter permanent.
The UNO protocol implies that OOo is opened in
listening mode on a network interface. This parameter let OOo listen on
the right interface and port.
Install nxOOoAutoListen.oxt extension to set this listening permanent.
Alternate method: this could also be done by adding this
connection info in OOo Setup.xcu configuration
file.
<node oor:name="Office">
<prop oor:name="ooSetupConnectionURL">
<value>socket,host=localhost,port=8100;urp;StarOffice.Service</value>
</prop>
</node>
Nuxeo has developed some tools to ease the settings, they are available at the Nuxeo svn tools ooo section as extensions to install in OpenOffice. This can be done thru the GUI via the menu "Tools>Extensions Manager>Add..." or by opening the wanted extension with OpenOffice. To do it from a command line, run:
/path/to/openoffice/program/unopkg add extension.oxt
On multi-machine deployment, we recommend to install OOo on the server running the webapp (ie stateless server on a bi-machine "stateless/stateful" installation).
For OOo versions lower than 2.3, a graphical interface is needed.
If the server that hosts OOo is Linux server that has no X installed,
then the X virtual frame buffer tool Xvfb (or
xvfb-run depending of your distribution) can be used
to create a suitable display.
Xvfb :77 -auth Xperm -screen 0 1024x768x24 export DISPLAY=":77.0"
xvfb-run -a /path/to/openoffice/program/soffice.bin
-headless -nofirststartwizard
-accept="socket,host=localhost,port=8100;urp;StarOffice.Service"
Starting with 5.2-M4, Nuxeo includes a Daemon to start and manage OpenOffice server.
This daemon is based on the OpenOffice Server Daemon project
OOo Daemon provides :
OpenOffice server automatic startup
Depending on configuration the OOo Server may be started automatically when Nuxeo starts or on first call.
OpenOffice server instances pooling
Daemon can manage several OpenOffice instance (workers) and distribute tasks across them. In order to avoid leaks, OOo workers are recycled.
Configuration is done via an xml extension point. Defaut config can be editer in file located in nuxeo.ear/config/ooo-config.xml.
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.convert.oooDaemon.config.default">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.convert.oooserver.OOoDaemonManagerComponent"
point="oooServerConfig">
<OOoServer>
<!-- enable Nuxeo Daemon to manage OOo server instances : default is true -->
<enableDaemon>true</enableDaemon>
<!-- define OOo server listen IP : used even if daemon is disabled -->
<oooListenIP>127.0.0.1</oooListenIP>
<!-- define OOo server listen port : used even if daemon is disabled -->
<oooListenPort>8100</oooListenPort>
<!-- define Daemon listen port : used only if daemon is enabled -->
<oooDaemonListenPort>8101</oooDaemonListenPort>
<!-- define number of OOo worker process : used only if daemon is enabled -->
<oooWorkers>1</oooWorkers>
<!-- define OOo installation path : used only if daemon is enabled -->
<!-- if not defined Nuxeo will try to find the path automatically -->
<!--<oooInstallationPath>/usr/lib/openoffice/program</oooInstallationPath>-->
<!-- define jpipe library path : used only for OOo 3 -->
<!--<jpipeLibPath>/opt/openoffice.org/ure/lib</jpipeLibPath>-->
<!-- define number of time a worker process can be used before being recycled: used only if daemon is enabled -->
<oooWorkersRecycleInterval>10</oooWorkersRecycleInterval>
<!-- define is Daemon is started at server startup : used only if daemon is enabled -->
<autoStart>false</autoStart>
</OOoServer>
</extension>
</component>
In most cases, you should not have to define the location of your OpenOffice installation as the Daemon will try to find it in the standard installation path.
If you want to use OpenOffice 3.x, you have to specify the jpipeLibPath in order to enable jpipe that is used by the Daemon to communicate with OpenOffice workers.
To be able to call the Nuxeo Services remotely using the Nuxeo Framework (e.g. when using Nuxeo RCP), you will need to bind an IP address when running the server. To do this, a few step are needed:
in
$JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/config/nuxeo.properties
change the value of org.nuxeo.ecm.instance.host,
replace "localhost" by the IP address of the JBoss server,
in
$JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/config/platform-config.xml
mono-server: ${org.nuxeo.ecm.instance.host} is used to reference address set in nuxeo.properties
multi-server: either use IP or set DNS aliases in your hosts file (default names in Nuxeo packages are usually something like nxcoreserver, nxsearchserver, nxplatformserver, nxjmsserver, nxwebserver, nxdbserver).
in
$JBOSS_HOME/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/config/datasources/core-events-ds.xml
replace, if enabled, the 127.0.0.1 value of
java.naming.provider.url by the IP address of the Jboss
server,
start jboss with the -b option:
./run.sh -b server_IP_address
When no IP is specified, JBoss 4.0 is bound to listening on any address, not only on localhost.
For obvious security reasons, JBoss 4.2 (version required by Nuxeo EP 5.2) has a different behavior. If you still want this, use -b 0.0.0.0
For a server in production, see SecureJBoss.
For server migration (moving a Nuxeo instance from a server to another), follow the backup procedure on the source server and then the restore procedure on the destination server.
Nuxeo-shell may be used for import/export purpose but it's not the same as the "system backup" described here.
It is highly recommended to stop nuxeo during backup.
If you use a database, you may switch it in a "hot backup" mode to ensure that all new incoming requests will wait the end of the backup process.
Backup these directories and files:
Nuxeo libraries deployed in JBoss as they are specific to the running Nuxeo EP version
$JBOSS/server/default/lib/nuxeo*
Nuxeo EP EAR (Entreprise ARchive)
$JBOSS/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/
data stored on filesystem
$JBOSS/server/default/data/
it could be useful to backup logs
$JBOSS/server/default/log/
Backup your database(s) if you use one (some).
Finally, backup any file you have customized. Here is a short list of such files :
if you changed JVM startup parameters (run.bat, run.conf) or use Nuxeo's startup script (jbossctl, jbossctl.conf, bind.conf)
$JBOSS/server/bin
if you changed the logging levels (log4j.xml)
$JBOSS/server/default/conf
if you added some .jar files for specific JDBC drivers
$JBOSS/server/default/lib
if you changed JBoss configuration (like mail-service.xml)
$JBOSS/server/default/deploy
If you plan an upgrade, you may backup separately the configuration files in order to easily apply again your configuration on the default one (take care not to loose any evolution on these files):
Main configuration is in
$JBOSS/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/config
Datasources are defined in
$JBOSS/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/datasources
Compass backend is configured in
$JBOSS/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/system/nuxeo-platform-search-compass-plugin*/compass.cfg.xml
This procedure applies only for clients working in read-only mode. Otherwise, the synchronization procedures are failing.
The environment contains 2 Nuxeo servers. One of them (further named "offline server") is the Client machine working in read-only mode. The second (further named "online server") is the base Nuxeo server. The user wants to have on own offline server a replication of the documents on online server so the user can consult them (not to modify) offline.
The target is to upload on offline server the entire set of visible documents for user from online server. Subsequent synchronizations should require minimum amount of data transfer.
The online server synchronization module is the nuxeo-platform-sync-server project, available as addon. It is enough to deploy it to have the feature enabled.
The offline server needs:
nuxeo-platform-sync-client-api, nuxeo-platform-sync-client-core. nuxeo-platform-sync-client-web, available as addons, deployed
flag org.nuxeo.ecm.webapp.readonly.mode set true in the nuxeo.properties.
As user I want to be able to synchronize my offline server.
Step 1: An empty mini Nuxeo server is used.
Step 2: Using the synchro GUI, the mini Nuxeo server is configured to connect to online server. The mini-server is updated.
Step 3: User checks to see that all accessible documents are available offline
Step 4: Using the same synchro UI, further synchronization are effective.
The offline server user logs in and navigates to "Synchronize" page (following the link in top tool list). The user provides the credentials on the server, starts the synchronizations and, on completion, if required, logs in back with the new credentials.
The data workflow on server is simple:
WS Addressing webservice is made available by the server to allow client requests: the current situation and the DocumetnSnapshot of a particular document. The blobs are requested through a restlet.
ExportRestlets are provided to download relations in RDF format and directories XML based custom encoded.
The data workflow on client is a little more complicated, as the client is responsible to decide what documents need to be updated:
The module is able to obtain the webservice SEI based on the provided credentials. With this, the module requests for server the tuples describing the current situation, or the DocumentSnapshot of a particular document.
Also, the query ran on server is provided to client in order to have the same scope of documents synchronized.
Servers runs the query with the user credentials and provides a list of tuples containing: the document id, path, type (including version / proxy selector), modification date, context data for allowing import. Client compares the list with the current situation running the same query.
First it removes the documents no longer available.
After it adds the new documents (in order: usual documents, versions, proxies).
And finally it updates the documents modified.
The documents are added through Core import, allowing preserving the document ID. Also, this method allows to "add" proxies and versions easily. The update of documents is made in several steps:
first, the client requests the FlagedDocumentSnapshot (a DocumentSnapshot + the hasBlobs flag) on synchro webservice;
the DocumentSnapshot map of properties are set on the local document using a mechanism very likely with the core import/export;
if the document has blobs, client makes request to ExportRestlet for the document export;
the Client reads the document.xml and the blob files received and adds them in the document.
The vocabularies and relations are exported entirely and also are imported by replacing existing ones.
Known bug: in the case of security wholes in the tree, the offline server can end up in an undefined state. For instance: user has read rights on Workpspace A, not on Folder B below and has on Folder C below. The Folder C can't be created on offline server as Folder B is not supplied from server.
The system replication feature aims to clone entire collection of data existing in a Nuxeo system. Consequently the clone has to be importable in another system leading to a complete replication of the system. Such feature is obviously an important gain because it allows:
complete backup of system
complete data migration
replication of complex systems
Three projects are designed to accomplish the objectives:
common modules
export modules
import modules
The export module is also ported on 5.1, allowing migration from older storages to current supported Nuxeo deployment.
UC1 System backup
As administrator I want to make a backup of the system
Administrator is managing a complex Nuxeo system (including: users, document base, relations, etc.)
Administrator ensures that for the time the replication occurs no actions are performed on server (no user connects, change documents, etc.)
Administrator starts the system export. No other actions are performed.
Administrator acknowledges the finish of the replication and the results. The UI and the server log provides the right information.
The archive is stored safely.
UC2 Data migration 5.1 to 5.2
As Administrator I want to migrate 5.1 server to 5.2 server
Administrator is managing a complex Nuxeo 5.1 system (including: users, document base, relations, etc.) and has a fresh new installed 5.2 system
Administrator ensures that for the time the replication occurs no actions are performed on server (no user connects, change documents, etc.) on both servers
Administrator starts the 5.1 system export. No other actions are performed.
Administrator acknowledges the finish of the replication and the results. The UI and the server log provides the right information.
Administrator copies the clone on a fresh new Nuxeo 5.2 machine.
Administrator starts the import of the clone. No other actions are performed.
Administrator acknowledges the finish of the import and the results. The UI and the server log provides the right information.
As result, the new Nuxeo system is a perfect replication of the initial one.
UC3 Backup import
As Administrator I want to import an older backup.
Administrator is managing a Nuxeo 5.2 system (including: users, document base, relations, etc.) and has an older backup archive
Administrator ensures that for the time the import occurs no actions are performed on server (no user connects, change documents, etc.)
Administrator optionally cleans up the DB before import.
Administrator starts the import of the clone. No other actions are performed.
Administrator acknowledges the finish of the import and the results. The UI and the server log provides the right information.
As result, the new Nuxeo system is a perfect replication of the initial one.
A complete user guide can be found at http://doc.nuxeo.org/xwiki/bin/view/FAQ/ReplicateNuxeoRepository
The Nuxeo system contains a heterogeneous collection of data.
In this moment the following type of objects are considered:
documentary base
usual documents (workspaces and templates content, comments, tags, etc.)
versions (the checked in documents)
proxies (published documents)
relation graphs
vocabularies (excluding groups and users)
groups and users
different other tables (audit, tagging, etc.)
The approach needs to be different in the case of each type.
A special attention must be paid to the Seam and core sessions. Long operations could be broken by the Seam context. Thinking of repositories with 200,000 documents and more the Seam session is not suitable.
Also data as relations or vocabularies are easier to manage through already existing services, meaning the need of container context.
The super user context is always used.
The export and import need to be considered one along the other.
Transaction management
In a JEE environment, we must take care of the transactions in order to:
avoid timeouts avoid filling up the transaction cache (ex : prepare statement in case of PGSQL)
avoid letting the DataSource in a dirty state
As general TX guideline, we must handle transactions during import/export by hand (not let the container do it) by controlling the core session. We must handle batches (ie : commit any X documents is the DB is in a clean state). During the export, since we don't write into Nuxeo, TX is not that important. During import TX management is very important. It is important to maintain the right order in importing resources. Also, the import must be done one by one or in small chunks. The resume log MUST be in sync with the TX management : only batches that are successful must be logged.
Replication directory structure
/Replication Root
/Documentary Base
/Usual Documents
/Workspaces
/workspace1
/folder1
.........................
/Templates
.........................
/Versions
/version1 ID
.........................
/Relations
/graph1
.........................
/Vocabularies
/directory1
.........................
/Groups
/group1
.........................
/Users
/user1
.........................
/Tables
/Audit
/Tagging
Anyway, storing the document in a FS tree is a good idea:
avoid FS problems (too may children)
allow easy multi-threading import
The system replication is made inside a single directory named “Replication Root”. Under it, “Documentary Base” contains the documents. Under it, the “Usual documents” contains the repository exported muck likely the export utility. The file names are the names of the documents. The path of Nuxeo documents is unique, so it can be used without worrying of duplicates. We can find the usual documents exported, with blobs offline, with a new ACL encoded export for each document (inside the usual document.xml file). The lifecycle state is already saved in the document export). And also a new file named “import.export” containing the contextual metadata required for core import. Under “Documentary Base” the “Versions” folder contains the checked in versions. The versions are exported as the usual documents with proper metadata for core import. All versions are exported flat in directories named as their ID. The proxy documents are exported amongst the usual documents. They should only contain the core export-import metadata, these being enough for reconstructing the proxy.
Under “Relations” every graph is RDF exported as “rdf.xml” under the graph name folder.
Under “Vocabularies” every directory is custom XML exported as “vocabulary.xml” under the directory name folder.
Under “Groups” and “Users” the existing entities are saved in folders named by the entity name. Inside every directory a custom XML file “user.xml” or “group.xml” file is holding the Nuxeo specific data on the entity (see NuxeoPrincipal and NuxeoGroup).
Under “Tables” the existing and named tables are CSV exported.
The user has to provide the name of repository to be exported. The service itself creates a new thread to run the export, respectively the import, and returns immediately in the bean.
The import occurs actually in 2 stages: first the document is core imported (in order to ensure the ID preservation) using the contextual metadata; and after the actual import occurs (including the ACL). Data migration may include additional steps. Because there were some schema changes between Nuxeo versions data exported form a version 5.1.X may need to be modified before being imported into a 5.2. For this, we have a 3 steps pipe : export from source; apply transformations; import transformed data. Before actual import, a transformer can be contributed as Java extension mechanism. The transformer receives the exported document XML representation and can touch it in any way. The resulted XML is later used in import instead of original one.
2 interfaces are provided to allow customizing the code behavior when doing the import.
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.replication.importer.DocumentXmlTransformer. It allows to transform the XML document structure, as it was exported, just before importing. It offers the chance to touch the document XML representation (as in Core IO export form). The transformation occurs in memory directly in the DOM document. If it fails (with exception or null is returned) the initial structure is used. The default implementation does nothing.
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.replication.importer.DocumentTypeSelector. It allows to decide if a particular document gets imported or not based on the type selection. The default implementation rejects the type "UserDataRoot".
In order to use it just set the custom implementation before running import in the service through the setter.
To monitor an application, you follow a set of values over a period of time and make sure some values don't go over or under a certain threshold. The value can be the available memory, the number of file open, usage of datasources ...
Inside JBoss, modules (called MBean) use an internal JMX server to communicate. Nuxeo, JBoss or the JVM can use the MBean server to publish interesting data. Those data are then available by querying the JMX server.
To be able to monitor Nuxeo you need to:
Configure Nuxeo so JBoss, Nuxeo and the JVM publish their information to the same JMX server. ( Section 51.1, “Configure Nuxeo to use a single JMX server.” )
Choose the data you want to monitor. ( Section 51.2, “Interesting data to monitor.” )
Retrieve information from the JMX Server by:
persisting it on the server for later retrieval/analysis. ( Section 51.3, “Persisting and analysing data.” )
using a tool to query the JMX server remotely. ( Section 51.4, “Querying the JMX server remotely” )
The configuration is not specific to Nuxeo. JBoss documentation is available here
A JMX server allows communication between different MBean. From Java 5, a JMX server is included in the JVM. JBoss creates its own JMX server. To set JBoss so it uses the same JMX server than the JVM and to be able to connect to it, you need modify the command line to launch JBoss
For a linux distribution you need to add to run.conf:
# Enable the jconsole agent locally JAVA_OPTS="$JAVA_OPTS -Dcom.sun.management.jmxremote" # Tell JBossAS to use the platform MBean server JAVA_OPTS="$JAVA_OPTS -Djboss.platform.mbeanserver" # Make the platform MBean server able to work with JBossAS MBeans JAVA_OPTS="$JAVA_OPTS -Djavax.management.builder.initial=org.jboss.system.server.jmx.MBeanServerBuilderImpl"
For Windows, you need to add to run.bat:
%JAVA_OPTS% -Dcom.sun.management.jmxremote set JAVA_OPTS=%JAVA_OPTS% -Djboss.platform.mbeanserver set JAVA_OPTS=%JAVA_OPTS% -Djavax.management.builder.initial=org.jboss.system.server.jmx.MBeanServerBuilderImpl
Because of a bug in jboss-cache, it is necessary to replace jboss-cache by a patched version. You need to replace:
$JBOSS/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/lib/jboss-cache-jdk50-1.4.0.SP1.jar
by the version available here
To configure for Nuxeo 5.2.0, you first need to follow the configuration for
5.3.0 ( Section 51.1.1, “Configuration from Nuxeo 5.3.0”). You also need to modify the file
$JBOSS/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/config/nuxeo.properties, set
the value:
org.nuxeo.runtime.management.exist=true
To use a version before the 5.2.0, you need to follow the configuration for 5.2.0
( Section 51.1.2, “Configuration for Nuxeo 5.2.0” ). You also need to add the management jar to Nuxeo. Download the
jar and put it in the folder $JBoss/server/default/deploy/nuxeo.ear/plugins.
Once you have set up monitoring, you can access all the MBean. The easiest is to open the jmx console: http://localhost:8080/jmx-console. The interesting bean are (some information are available in multiple MBean):
jboss.ca:name=<DS name>,service=ManagedConnectionPool has attribute: ConnectionCount, ConnectionDestroyedCount, ConnectionCreatedCount, AvailableConnectionCount, InUseConnectionCount
jboss.mq:service=DestinationManager has statistics attribute about JMS messages. (Important for Nuxeo previous to 5.2.0)
jboss.system:type=ServerInfo has operation: listMemoryPools (to check memory usage),listThreadCpuUtilization and listThreadDump (this operation is usefull to find the root of a problem)
jboss.web:name=http-0.0.0.0-8080,type=ThreadPool shows currentThreadCount, currentThreadsBusy and maxThreads
java.lang:name=***,type=*** shows usage and peak useage of memory pools
java.lang:type=Memory shows the memory usage.
java.lang:type=OperatingSystem shows OpenFileDescriptorCount (to compare with MaxFileDescriptorCount).
jboss.web:host=localhost,path=/nuxeo,type=Manager shows the number of active sessions, the total number of sessions.
You can also publish any Nuxeo Service as MBean so they will be easy to monitor. For more information you can look at Chapter 27, Nuxeo's Management Service.
This FAQ explains how to persist MBean to a file and how to analyse the log.
JBoss comes bundle with a command line tools called twiddle. Twiddle allows to connect to a remote JBoss to query the JMX Server. It makes it the perfect tools to use with monitoring application such as Nagios.
To query a MBean using twiddle run:
twiddle.sh -s <URL> get <MBean Name>
The output can then easily be parsed.
The Nuxeo Shell is a command line tool for everyone who needs simple and quick remote access to a Nuxeo EP server. You can see it as the Swiss army knife for the Nuxeo EP world. It can be used by regular users to browse or modify content, by advanced users to administrate Nuxeo servers, or by programmers to test and debug.
The Nuxeo Shell is designed as an intuitive and extensible command line application. It can both serve as a user, administrator or programmer tool, or as a framework to develop new Nuxeo command line clients.
The application is based on the Nuxeo Runtime framework and thus offers the same extension point mechanism you can find on the server application.
The main features of the command line tool are:
Two operating modes: an interactive and a batch mode.
Advanced command line editing like:
auto-completion
command history
command line colors
command line shortcuts like: CTRL+K, CTR+A, etc.
JSR223 scripting integration. You can thus connect and execute commands on a Nuxeo server in pure scripting mode.
Extensibility - using Nuxeo Runtime extension points
The advanced command line handling is done using the JLine library.
The only requirement is Java 5+. The tool works on any Unix-like OS, on Windows and on Mac OS X.
The Nuxeo Shell application is packaged as a zip archive. To install it, you need to unzip and copy the content in a folder.
The application folder structure is as follow:
+ nxshell
+ app
+ bundles
+ config
+ data
+ lib
+ lib
- Launcher.class
- log4j.properties
- launcher.properties
- nxshell.sh
The lib folder contains JARs needed by the
application launcher. The Launcher.class is the
application launcher and launcher.properties
contains configuration for the launcher.
log4j.properties is as you expect the
configuration for log4j.
nxshell.sh is a shell script that launches
the application.
The app folder contains the application code
and data.
app/bundles contains the application OSGi
bundles. These bundles will be deployed using a minimal
implementation of OSGi (the same that is used on the server side).
We may replace the default implementation by equinox later.
app/lib contains third party libraries
needed by the application bundles.
app/config contains the application
configuration files.
app/data contains temporary data.
The only file you may need to change is the
nxshell.sh script. Here is the content of this
file:
#!/bin/bash #JAVA_OPTS="$JAVA_OPTS -Xdebug -Xrunjdwp:transport=dt_socket,address=127.0.0.1:8788,server=y,suspend=y" JAVA_OPTS="$JAVA_OPTS -Dorg.nuxeo.runtime.1.3.3.streaming.port=3233" java $JAVA_OPTS Launcher launcher.properties $@
If you uncomment the first line, you will be able to run Nuxeo Shell in debug mode.
The second line [must] be commented out if on the server you are running on a nuxeo runtime 1.4.SNAPSHOT. When running against Nuxeo EP 5.1 you need to let this uncommented.
You can run the application in two modes:
In batch mode - in this mode you specify the command that will be executed. After the command execution the process will exit. The command has to be passed as the first argument.
Here is an example of a command executed in batch mode:
$ ./nxclient.sh export /path/to/remote/doc /path/to/local/folder
Here is an example of a command executed in batch mode while also passing parameters:
$ ./nxclient.sh ls --host 192.168.2.54
In interactive mode - in this mode you can share a single session to run multiple commands against the remote Nuxeo EP. To start the application in that mode you should run the interactive command in one of two ways:
$ ./nxclient.sh interactive
$ ./nxshell.sh
After entering in interactive mode a command prompt will be displayed. At this prompt you can enter commands in the same way you specify them on the command line in batch mode.
When not connected to a server, the prompt will be displayed as:
|>
After connecting to
a server named, let's say "nuxeo-platform", the prompt will be displayed
as:
|nuxeo-platform>
So, as we've seen in the above examples, executing a command is done by using the following syntax:
command [options] [parameters]
where options and parameters are optional and are specific to the command you run.
Example:
import -u /path/to/doc /path/to/local_file
In this case "import" is the command, "-u" is a flag option and "path/to/doc" and "/path/to/local_file" are both parameters
Parameters are stand alone arguments (they are not bound to a specific option) and can be retrieved programmatically using their index. In the example above, the first parameter will have the index 0 while the second the index 1.
Command options are defined by a name and optionally a shortcut (a short name). When referring to an option using its name you should prefix it by two hyphens '--'. When using short names you should only use one hyphen as a prefix. For example if you have an option named "host" and using a short name of "h" the following commands are equivalent:
$ ./nxshell.sh interactive -h localhost $ ./nxshell.sh interactive --host localhost
Options may take values or may be used as flags turning on / off a specific option by their simple presence.
When using long names you should specify the option values immediately after the option. However when using short names you can group options together. Let say for example we have a command that support 4 options: a, v, i, o. a and v are flag options and both i and o takes an argument as value. In this case the you can group options like the following:
command -avi in_file -o out_file
or
command -avio in_file out_file
or anyhow you want. You should keep in mind that when grouping options that take arguments, these arguments will be assigned to each of this options in the order they were specified on the command line.
Besides the specific options that commands may define, there are several global options that apply to all commands. These are:
host (--host or -h) the Nuxeo EP host where to connect - defaults to localhost
port (--port or -p) the Nuxeo EP port where to connect - defaults to 62474
username (--username or -u) the username to use - defaults to the "system" user
password (--password or -P) the password to use
debug (--debug or -d) to start with debug mode (logs at DEBUG level)
There is the list of all built-in commands of nuxeo shell.
Notes:
At the time of this writing some of these built-in commands are not yet implemented. Those are be marked with an asterisk (*).
The commands can be grouped in two categories:
offline commands - command that doesn't need a connection to work. Example: help, log etc.
online commands - commands that requires a connection to work. These commands are automatically connecting if no connection is currently established.
Some commands make no sense and are not available in both modes (batch and interactive). This will be specified by each command if it is the case.
Runs in the interactive mode. This command is not available when already in interactive mode.
Has no specific options.
$ ./nxshell.sh interactive
Displays the help page.
Takes an optional parameter which is the name of a command.
By default, displays the global help page. If a command is given as an argument, displays the help page for that command.
$ ./nxshell.sh help ls
Manage logs from console without having to edit log4j.xml. Allow to switch on/off a debug mode, add/remove loggers, ...
log filename [log level [package or class]] creates a file (created in $PWD/log/ if filename do not contain path separator, else given path is used). It will record logs at level greater or equal to level (if specified, else default level is INFO; available values are TRACE, DEBUG, INFO, WARN, ERROR, FATAL). If a package or a class (canonical name) is specified, logs will be filtered from this package/class.
log off [package or class] stops logging. Applies on all custom appenders (console and filenames) if no package or class is specified. Don't worry about the warning log off command may cause (the logger is re-created):
log4j:WARN No appenders could be found for logger (org.nuxeo.ecm.shell.commands.InteractiveCommand). log4j:WARN Please initialize the log4j system properly.
log debug switches debug mode on/off. Same result as starting the shell with -d (--debug) option. This decrease the log level to DEBUG on console and filenames.
See log4j documentation for more information.
Available only in interactive mode
Connects to a given server. If a connection is already established, close it first.
Available only in interactive mode
Disconnects from the current connected server. If no connection exists, does nothing.
Available only in interactive mode
Lists the children of the current folder in the repository.
By default, Folderish types are displayed in blue.
Note that the ls directory-name command is
accepted but won't list the content of
directory-name, it will only list the content of
the current directory. This might be improved in the future to provide a
behavior alike the one of the Unix ls command.
Available only in interactive mode
Displays the complete tree structure of the documents as it would be returned by the Unix tree command.
Available only in interactive mode
Views info about document. The information displayed can be controlled using these command options:
--all (-a) - view all data
--system (-s) - view only the system data
--acp - view the ACLs on that document
Uploads a blob to a file document. If the target document doesn't exists, creates it.
Creates a document other than a file. Metadata (and blobs) are specified in the Nuxeo export format.
Makes it possible to run external scripts. Here are examples of such scripts.
From interactive mode use:
script --file <path_to_your_script> <args>
Creates new user(s).
To create user joe:
useradd joe
To create the users define in the users.csv CSV file:
useradd --file users.csv
Modifies a group
To add user joe to the company-service1 group:
groupmod --user joe company-service1
To set the users of the company-service1 group to be only joe
groupmod --set --user madarche company-service1
To add the users in the users_for_group.csv CSV file to the company-service1 group:
groupmod --file users_for_group.csv company-service1
To set the users of the company-service1 group to be the users define in the users_for_group.csv CSV file:
groupmod --file users_for_group.csv company-service1
Search the repository using the NXQL query language. For example:
select * from Document where ...
This command can be used as a starting point to write another script to perform search service queries if needed.
This command is only available in the Nuxeo 5.2 branch.
Be sure on what precise IP address and what precise port the server is listening to. To find out, use the netstat command on the server host. The example below shows that, on the same host, there are 2 servers listening on the 62474 port but on different IP addresses. You should always use as arguments to the nuxeo shell the exact IP address and port you find out.
$ sudo netstat -ntlap | grep 62474 tcp 0 0 ::ffff:192.0.0.11:62474 :::* LISTEN 3623/java tcp 0 0 ::ffff:192.0.0.10:62474 :::* LISTEN 1346/java
Alternatively you can use the lsof command.
$ sudo lsof -i :62474 COMMAND PID USER FD TYPE DEVICE SIZE/OFF NODE NAME java 3623 jboss 266u IPv6 0x5d69a70 0t0 TCP [::192.0.0.11]:62474 (LISTEN) java 1346 jboss 266u IPv6 0x5d7af30 0t0 TCP [::192.0.0.10]:62474 (LISTEN)
Be sure to be connected on the right server. To do so, issue a view command. This will display information on the current context:
192.0.0.10> view -------------------------------------------------------------------- UID: 2a13db70-f133-473c-9a90-6838d01610aa Path: / Type: Root -------------------------------------------------------------------- Title: 2a13db70-f133-473c-9a90-6838d01610aa Author: null Created: null Last Modified: null -------------------------------------------------------------------- Description: 2a13db70-f133-473c-9a90-6838d01610aa --------------------------------------------------------------------
If you a need a new command (a new functionality) not provided by the Nuxeo Shell, you can add it very simply by writing a Nuxeo plugin in exactly the same manner you would for a Nuxeo server instance. This is done by writing a Java class for each new shell command and declaring (that is registering) each command in a single XML file as a contribution to an extension point.
Here is an example of how to register two imaginary new custom commands addapplicants and purgeobsoletedocs.
This is how to register the new commands:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="com.company.nuxeo.shellcommands" version="1.0">
<documentation>
Extra Nuxeo Shell commands shown as examples for the Nuxeo Book.
</documentation>
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.shell.CommandLineService" point="commands">
<command name="purgeobsoletedocs" class="com.company.nuxeo.shellcommands.ObsoleteDocsPurgeCommand">
<description>
Purge obsolete documents considering based on predefined hard-coded logic.
</description>
<help>Purge obsolete documents</help>
</command>
<command name="addapplicants" class="com.company.nuxeo.shellcommands.ApplicantsAdderCommand">
<description>
Adds applicants by creating the right folders with the right permissions.
</description>
<params>
<param index="0" type="path" />
</params>
<help>Adds applicants</help>
</command>
</extension>
</component>
This is how to write a Java class for a new command:
public class ApplicantsAdderCommand extends AbstractCommand {
public static final String COMMAND_NAME = "addApplicants";
public void run(CommandLine cmdLine) throws Exception {
String[] elements = cmdLine.getParameters();
// parse command line
if (elements.length != 1) {
log.error("Usage: " + COMMAND_NAME + " file");
return;
}
File file = new File(elements[0]);
addApplicants([...]);
}
void addApplicants([...]) {
}
}
Finally the pom.xml file for the plugin to the
Nuxeo shell needs to at least contain the following dependency to be able
to build extend the AbstractCommand class. Building
the plugin will generate a XXX.jar file. Note that
you should of course replace the version given as an
example with the version suited for your need.
<dependencies>
[...]
<dependency>
<groupId>org.nuxeo.ecm.platform</groupId>
<artifactId>nuxeo-shell-commands-base</artifactId>
<version>5.1.7-SNAPSHOT</version>
</dependency>
[...]
</dependencies>
Install or decide on using a nuxeo shell already installed program.
Copy the generated XXX.jar file into the
bundles directory of the nuxeo shell installed
program.
Delete the data directory, if there
is any, of the nuxeo installed program. This is to purge any caching
of registered JARs.
The next time the nuxeo shell is restarted your new commands will be available.
A few default distributions are available from download. You can either personalize them, either build your own distribution from sources.
In order to build Nuxeo sources, you need Ant, Maven 2.0.10, SubVersion (svn), Mercurial, Java Sun 5/6.
See core developer chapter in Nuxeo EP Book - The Reference for more details.
Some of the available packages are still in development (GlassFish, Jetty, ...).
Acceptance tests and Continuous Integration are mainly focused on Nuxeo Document Management under JBoss.
See README file at root of nuxeo-distribution for a short description and common usage examples.
nuxeo-platform-ear: Nuxeo Enterprise Platform EAR
nuxeo-distribution-dm: Nuxeo Document Management EAR
nuxeo-distribution-jboss: JBoss containing Nuxeo EP or DM EAR
nuxeo-distribution-shell: Nuxeo Shell
nuxeo-distribution-gf3: GlassFish distribution
nuxeo-distribution-jetty:Jetty containing Nuxeo EP or DM
nuxeo-distribution-tomcat: Tomcat distribution
nuxeo-distribution-windows: Windows installer of nuxeo-distribution-jboss
"Follow a common coding standard, so that all the code in the system looks as if it was written by a single — very competent — individual. The specifics of the standard are not important: what is important is that all the code looks familiar, in support of collective ownership." | ||
| --Ron Jeffries XProgramming.com | ||
Coding Standards are a good idea. Every team should adopt a coding style and standard, and stick to it. The code produced by that team should have a consistent look and feel that is devoid of individual preferences and fetishes. | ||
| --"Uncle" Bob Martin ObjectMentor website | ||
The primary goal of this chapter is to provide common conventions, as well as guidelines that aim at ensuring a high level of quality (with respect to maintainability, extensibility, modularity, security, testability, documentation, etc.) throughout the Nuxeo project.
As such, it is primarily written for the platform's developers, both "core" developers and contributors, and developers that write extension modules that will someday find a place in the Nuxeo codebase.
If you're working on your own project with no plan to contribute code to the Nuxeo platform, you will probably be still interested in reading this chapter, and adapt the conventions stated here to your company's or organization's own coding standards.
Rewriting a whole coding standard for the Nuxeo project would be a poor use of our time, since there are already several documents and books that do a fine job in this respect.
We've opted for a more pragmatic, two-pronged approach:
The official coding standard for the project is: "The Elements of Java Style" [Vermeulen2000] which is a little book that can be bought from Amazon or other book dealers.
If a PDF suits you better, you can download an earlier version of the book from here.
Note however that these guidelines have been written in 2000 (last century!) and some of the recommendations need the be updated in light of this millenium's experience.
Readability counts. | ||
| --Tim Peters The Zen of Python | ||
Java code should be formatted using Sun's Code Conventions for the Java Programming Language.
Regarding code formatting (which is just one small part of the book and PDF mentioned above), we'll be using the standard Eclipse default style, with a couple of minor tweaks (see this README.txt for how to configure Eclipse to support this style).
The major points are:
regarding code block, we are using 1TBS ("One True Brace") style:
Bad:
if (xxx)
{
yyy
}
Good:
if (xxx) {
yyy
}
make a block even for only one statement:
Bad:
if someThing() doSomething;
if someThing()
doSomething;
Good:
if someTest() {
doSomething;
}
Don't prefix your instance variables by "this." when it's not mandatory.
Why? Because with modern IDEs, instance variables are typeset in a different color than local variables, hence you don't need the extra information provided by the "this." prefix to recognize which is which.)
XML code should also be formatted, using 2 spaces for each indent level (not 4 spaces).
Badly formatted XML code can be reformatted using the Eclipse formatter.
Always check that the result is better than the original, and tweak afterwards if needed.
Use interfaces every time it is possible instead of concrete classes.
Ex: declare a variable or argument as a "Map", not as a "HashMap".
Why? Using interfaces makes it possible to use several different implementations. Actually, interfaces are the basis of component-oriented programming.
But don't overdo it if it's not necessary.
Why? The more code we have, the more expensive maintainance is.
Avoid cyclic dependencies.
Why? This is a common design principle, called the "Acyclic Dependency Principle" or "ADP".
How? use JDepend or a JDepend plugin for you IDE (ex: http://andrei.gmxhome.de/jdepend4eclipse/) or look at the JDepend report by Maven.
More info:
If it's not tested, it's broken. | ||
| --Bruce Eckel | ||
Write unit tests. A lot.
How? Learn how to use JUnit. Use tests in existing modules as examples. Remember that well-tested modules have at least as many lines of test code than not test code.
Check that your unit tests have a coverage of most of the critical parts of your code.
How? Look at the Cobertura report by Maven, or use the TPTP or EMMA (http://www.eclemma.org/) plugins for Eclipse or use the native code-coverage function of IDEA.
Design your API so as to make unit testing possible and easy.
Some cosmetic remarks related to writing unit tests:
Use "assertEquals(constant, value)", not "assertEquals(value, constant)"
Why? Because one has to choose a convention and this one
Use "assertNull(value)", not "assertEquals(null, value)"
Why? Because code is shorter and looks cleaner this way.
Don't use underscores ("_") in variables, methods or class names, use camelCase notation instead.
Why? Because it is the Java convention.
Check some good articles on naming things, like Ottinger's Rules for Variable and Class Naming.
It is especially important that we all use the same words (in case there is an ambiguity) to refer to the same concepts (like "fetch" vs. "retrieve", for instance).
Minimize the accessibility of classes and members (for instance by making them "private" unless you have a reason to believe that they will be used from other classes, and more generally by using the weakest access modifier ), so as to keep you API clean and easy to understand for other developers.
Reference: "Effective Java" [Bloch2001], item 12.
Use java 5's generics.
Why? This will improve the amount of static checks done by the compiler.
Follow this piece of advice from Alex Miller:
My opinion is that there are 4 log levels that matter for general program logging (specialized logs like audit and performance have their own rules). I dont care what you call them so feel free to replace these with the names of your choice.
The first three levels (ERROR, WARNING, and INFO) should always be on. If your logs grow rapidly with these levels on, something is wrong. You should be able to run in production with these levels for weeks without a problem (but you should really use a rolling log writer just in case). DEBUG should be used only during development for debugging.
Reuse is something that is far easier to say than to do. Doing it requires both good design and very good documentation. Even when we see good design, which is still infrequently, we won't see the components reused without good documentation. | ||
| --D. L. Parnas The Mythical Man-Month: Essays on Software Engineering | ||
Always use comments to document what is not obvious.
Why? Otherwise, it will be harder for others (even you!) to maintain or extend your code. Some people may even end up refactoring your code under wrong assumptions.
See for instance item #28 of Bloch's "Effective Java" [Bloch2001] for more insight, including this most important principle:
The doc comment for a method should describe succinctly the contract between the method and its client. With the exception of methods in classes designed for inheritance, the contract should say what the method does rather than how it does its job.
Write javadocs according to the javadoc manual and the official Sun javadocs guidelines.
Why? Because javadocs are compiled by a standard tool, you must conform to the syntax mandated by this tool.
Common javadoc guidelines that are often forgotten include:
Proofread carefully (including checks for spelling and grammar errors) and check that your javadocs provide useful information for third-party developers (or your teammates) by actually reading the generated doc.
How? See either "Project -> Generate Javadocs" from Eclipse, or "mvn javadoc:javadoc" from the project root and browse the docs.
Remember that you can see a preview of how your javadoc will look like from Eclipse by using the "Javadoc" tab in the Java perspective.
Don't mix Javadoc comments with implementation comments.
Javadocs comments are intended to be read by clients of the API, implementation comments by people who need to review you code or who will end up maintaining it (including yourself).
For instance, don't put "TODO" markers in your javadoc because they are intended for yourself or other people co-developing or maintaining your code, not clients of the API.
Start by documenting the most important and less obvious things.
If you don't have enough time to document everything, document first the API part of your code (usually, the interfaces), because that's what third-party developers are going to use.
Also documenting the non-obvious (like giving an overview of a package or an important class) is more important than writing for instance, that a "getTitle()" method "@returns the title".
Write package-level javadocs.
Package-level Javadoc (just package.html files in your
source code) are the most important javadocs you have to write,
because that's what people reading the javadoc-generated site will
read first, and because that's where the information is usually the
less obvious.
Sign your code (in the modules headers).
It is very important that people who will read / maintain your code know that you are the author, so that they can ask you questions, give you feedback, etc.
When you've borrowed code from another open source project, always document it so that:
Put markers as (inline) comments to document parts of your code that will need further work.
Look critically at the javadoc-generated site and try to improve it.
Either go to http://maven.nuxeo.com/apidocs/ and check the apidoc for your project, or run mvn javadoc:javadoc locally and browse the generated apidoc, and ask yourself the simple question: "if I was a third-party developer, would I understand how to use the API by reading this".
Don't use deprecated features (= API), either from Java or third-party libraries, or from the Nuxeo framework.
Hint: they should appear as stroked-out in your IDE.
Here are a few points and tips to keep in mind.
Modern IDEs (+ adequate plugins, if necessary) include many code-checking functions that help find out issues:
For Eclipse, the simplest plugin to use is TPTP.
How?
You should also use the Checkstyle and FindBugs Eclipse plugins to ensure minimal bug count and maximal coding style coherence.
See these great slides from JavaOne 2007 for instance.
Read Improving code with Eclipse plugins on developerWorks for more background information on the subject.
From the article:
This article covers what I consider to be the "big five" code analysis areas:
- Coding standards
- Code duplication
- Code coverage
- Dependency analysis
- Complexity monitoring
These analysis areas can be uncovered using a number of the following slick Eclipse plugins:
- CheckStyle: For coding standards
- PMD's CPD: Enables discovering code duplication
- Coverlipse: Measures code coverage
- JDepend: Provides dependency analysis
- Eclipse Metrics plugin: Effectively spots complexity
NB: Coverlipse may or may not work correctly, an alternative is EclEmma which is very similar.
When something looks wrong in the code ("smell"), refactor it, but make sure you don't break anything.
How?
Here is a list of useful stuff to read:
This chapter describes common development tools and useful complementary tools.
For installation procedure, see annexe "Installing Mercurial".
See http://mercurial.selenic.com/wiki/UnderstandingMercurial.
Mercurial is a completely decentralized system. Every cloned repositories contain a working directory and a store of complete project's history, thus allowing offline and parallel development.
The working directory contains a copy of the project's files at a given point in time, ready for editing.
The store contains a sufficient data to provide any file at any revision or tag from any branch.
Mercurial groups related changes to multiple files (commits) into single atomic changesets. Every commit generates a changeset recording the state of the working directory relative to its parents, so merging is really easier and more efficient than with other SCM.
http://mercurial.selenic.com/wiki/Mercurial.
There are “getting started” and “using Mercurial” documentations, even some help for developers used to other SCM systems.
You will find useful tips and scripts in Nuxeo Wiki FAQ: http://doc.nuxeo.org/xwiki/bin/view/FAQ/DownloadingNuxeoSources and some workarounds or guidelines for specific cases.
Since the "nested repositories" came only with Mercurial version 1.3 and are still an experimental feature, we chose to rely on the Forest extension when migrating from Subversion to Mercurial for replacing "svn externals".
This is not mandatory for working with Nuxeo. This extension mainly provides easier way to run a command on a "full" nuxeo repository including its sub-repositories, such as cloning full Nuxeo sources. For example, those repositories have sub-repositories: nuxeo-addons, nuxeo, ...
Although Mercurial is decentralized, Nuxeo hosts “centralized” Mercurial repositories which are the “reference” repositories, they are backed up and changesets made on local repositories must finally be pushed on those remote repositories. The public "centralized" repository is https://hg.nuxeo.org/.
We've set some “hooks” on the central repositories filtering changesets according to whether they comply to the following rules:
Changesets must not be blacklisted.
Even with the Mercurial's two-steps committing process (commit then push), it may happen to push erroneous changesets with really no interest or making trouble in code history. In such cases, it's a good thing to "strip" these changesets, removing them from history.
We usually blacklist a changeset after having stripped it, to be sure nobody will push it again in case it has been pulled before being stripped.
Error message is:
ABORTED: changeset %s has been blacklisted, please strip it from your repository after making sure you don't depend on it: hg strip %s
Changesets are in an allowed branch.
We make an extra use of branches: for long-time developments, prototype or spike solutions, ease parallel changes and give each developer merging responsibility of its code. Branches have "stable/main", "maintenance/release" or "development/test" purpose.
Depending on the project we use white or black lists for branch names.
On some projects, for instance, we blacklist the “default” branch to avoid confusion or lack of information about current version.
Error message:
ABORTED: changesets with branch "%s" are not allowed. The only allowed branches are: %s
Existing branches are given by this command:
hg branches [-a]
Changesets do not result in two heads for the same branch.
Changesets that have a given branch tag, but have no child changesets with that tag are called branch "heads". Mercurial identifies branches depending on their history so there may be two separate branches with the same name in case of concurrent changes made on a branch which were based on different parents. Of course, such situation is abnormal and must be fixed. This hook will prevent a developer from pushing changesets resulting in homonym branch heads.
Rule is: always pull before trying to push. If your local changes drive to multiple heads with same branch name, you must merge them before pushing.
Error message:
ABORTED: branch %s has several heads (%s), you must merge them before pushing.
Existing heads are listed with this command:
hg heads [branchName]
User for changesets must be valid.
For code history readability, usernames must be formatted like “John Doe <jdoe@nuxeo.com>”.
Error message:
ABORTED: changesets with user "%s" are not allowed. You need to specify your user name in $HOME/.hgrc as follows: [ui] username = John Smith <jsmith@nuxeo.com>
Notifications
This hook will generate a mail to the public mailing list
<ecm-checkins@lists.nuxeo.com> for every
changeset.
Build trigger
This hook launches a build in our continuous integration system: http://qa.nuxeo.org/. Using a trigger ran at every commit is saving a lot of bandwidth compared to regularly pulling the repository to check for code changes.
Setting such hooks was not mandatory but they guarantee the developers are following a few basic rules and prevent them from simple mistakes.
It is sometimes possible to force a push in spite of the hooks, when you know the hook message is not an error but a warning and it can be securely circumvented.
We usually define stable, maintenance and development branches.
Stable, next to release branch
Often called "main" branch, this named branch is hosting the most-recent code.
Stable branch is of course under continuous integration. Merge and commits must be double-checked; as much as possible, changes have been firstly tested and validated on a development branch or in developer's working directory.
Nuxeo uses two stable branches: 5.1 and 5.2. New features, eventually breaking API, are developed on 5.2. There's quite no new feature on 5.1 which has both stable and maintenance purpose and is gathering fixes from 5.1.x releases.
I.e. 5.2 branch is hosting 5.2-SNAPSHOT code which will lead to 5.2.x release.
Special case of 5.1 branch: it is hosting 5.1.X-SNAPSHOT code and may lead to 5.1.x release.
Maintenance, patch branch
When releasing, a dedicated branch is created and then tagged. This branch is used for creating minor versions releases.
Fixes done on it will be merge on stable branch; fixes from stable branch may be backported on this maintenance branch to generate patches or minor releases.
Maintenance branch are rarely under continuous integration as there is no more work on them except fixes and backports.
I.e. 5.1.6 branch is hosting 5.1.6 code, tagged as release-5.1.6, and may lead to minor versions releases such as 5.1.6.x
Development branches
Developers are strongly encouraged to use as much branches as they need (one per JIRA issue or per development iteration). Those branches may or not be automatically tested, their purpose is code isolation while it is unstable: they are merged to stable branch after being fully tested.
I.e. 5.2-NXP-9999-some_user_story will host code linked to implement some user story until the end of the iteration (or some point the code is considered stable and usable).
Here are some recommended practices using Mercurial at Nuxeo.
Update and commit often. It will ease future merge tasks.
Always reference a Jira issue at the beginning of commit comments: i.e. “NXP-9999 – sample task, remove code using deprecated API”.
Long time work should be done in a separate branch; named with the associated Jira issue and a short description: i.e. “NXP-9999_longtime_work”
Check what you've changed before committing and what you've committed before pushing.
hg status hg diff hg outgoing
Never “force” a push unless being sure it has to be done.
The following Mercurial commands are given with useful parameters into brackets, other parameters may be available. See “hg help [COMMAND]” for available commands listing or help on a specific command.
They are mainly used for Nuxeo repositories which are constructed as a forest of sub-repositories. Forest extension provides quite equivalent functions but both are complementary.
hgf function runs a hg command into current and nuxeo-* subdirectories:
hgf() {
for dir in . nuxeo-*; do
if [ -d "$dir"/.hg ]; then
echo;echo "[$dir]"
(cd "$dir" && hg "$@")
fi
done
}
hgf.bat:
@echo off set PWD=%CD% echo [.] hg %* for /d %%D in (nuxeo-*) do ( echo [%%D] cd %PWD%\%%D hg %* ) cd %PWD%
hgx function is a little more complex and tied to nuxeo repositories as it runs a hg command into current and nuxeo-* subdirectories managing with the two version numbers we have on nuxeo (i.e. 5.2/1.5). It uses inverted polish notation.
hgx() {
NXP=$1
NXC=$2
shift 2;
if [ -d .hg ]; then
echo $PWD
hg $@ $NXP
# NXC
(echo nuxeo-common ; cd nuxeo-common; hg $@ $NXC || true)
(echo nuxeo-runtime ; cd nuxeo-runtime; hg $@ $NXC || true)
(echo nuxeo-core ; cd nuxeo-core; hg $@ $NXC || true)
# NXP
(echo nuxeo-theme ; cd nuxeo-theme; hg $@ $NXP || true)
[ -d nuxeo-shell ] && (echo nuxeo-shell ; cd nuxeo-shell; hg $@ $NXP || true) || (echo ignore nuxeo-shell)
[ -d nuxeo-platform ] && (echo nuxeo-platform ; cd nuxeo-platform && hg $@ $NXP || true) || (echo ignore nuxeo-platform)
[ -d nuxeo-services ] && (echo nuxeo-services ; cd nuxeo-services && hg $@ $NXP || true) || (echo ignore nuxeo-services)
[ -d nuxeo-jsf ] && (echo nuxeo-jsf ; cd nuxeo-jsf && hg $@ $NXP || true) || (echo ignore nuxeo-jsf)
[ -d nuxeo-features ] && (echo nuxeo-features ; cd nuxeo-features && hg $@ $NXP || true) || (echo ignore nuxeo-features)
[ -d nuxeo-dm ] && (echo nuxeo-dm ; cd nuxeo-dm && hg $@ $NXP || true) || (echo ignore nuxeo-dm)
[ -d nuxeo-webengine ] && (echo nuxeo-webengine ; cd nuxeo-webengine; hg $@ $NXP || true) || (echo ignore nuxeo-webengine)
[ -d nuxeo-gwt ] && (echo nuxeo-gwt ; cd nuxeo-gwt; hg $@ $NXP || true) || (echo ignore nuxeo-gwt)
(echo nuxeo-distribution ; cd nuxeo-distribution; hg $@ $NXP || true)
fi
}
hgx.bat:
@echo off set PWD=%CD% set NXP=%1 set NXC=%2 echo [.] hg %3 %NXP% for /d %%D in (nuxeo-platform nuxeo-distribution nuxeo-theme nuxeo-shell nuxeo- webengine nuxeo-gwt nuxeo-services nuxeo-jsf nuxeo-features nuxeo-dm) do ( echo [%%D] cd %PWD%\%%D hg %3 %NXP% ) for /d %%D in (nuxeo-core nuxeo-common nuxeo-runtime) do ( echo [%%D] cd %PWD%\%%D hg %3 %NXC% ) cd %PWD%
hg st [--rev REVISION]
This gives you modified (M), added (A), removed (R) and uncontrolled files (?).
Use “hg add”, “hg rm”, “hg addremove” and/or “hg ci” to commit these changes.
hg id [-inbt]
This gives you current revision (with a “+” if it has been locally modified but not yet committed), current branch name and, if you current revision is the latest modified head, the “tip” keyword.
hg parents [-r REVISION]
Show the parents of the working directory or revision.
hg tip [-p]
This gives you the log of the latest modified head, aka “tip”.
hg branches [-a]
Branches marked as “inactive” are not considered as “heads”, they haven't been modified since they were merged into another branch (i.e. Nuxeo 5.1 branch is always “inactive” as we ask the developers to always merge — forward port — their changeset from 5.1 to 5.2).
hg heads [-r REVISION] [REVISION|BRANCH_NAME]
This is useful for example to identify multiple heads with same name that must be merged.
hg tags
Gives all available tags and their corresponding revision and branch.
hg log [-r REVISION] [-l LIMIT] [-p]
Show revision history of entire repository or files.
hg glog [-r REVISION] [-l LIMIT] [-p]
Same as log but with a graphic view (requires GraphLog extension).
hg ann [-r] [-f] [-u] [-d] [-n] [-l]
Show changeset information per file line. Useful when you need to know who changed a specific part of a file.
hg strip REVISION
Strip a revision and all later revisions on the same branch.
hg unbundle FILE...
Apply one or more changegroup files. Used to revert a strip.
hg backout
Reverse effect of earlier changeset. Contrary to strip, backout only removes one changeset, not the children revisions.
hg rollback
Roll back the last transaction.
hg revert [-a] [-r REVISION] FILE...
Restore individual files or directories to an earlier state.
Merge stable branch on your development one as much as possible. It can be automated at morning and then manually done day by day each time there is some work merged on stable.
hg pull && hg up -C devbranch hg merge stablebranch && hg ci -m”automated merge from stablebranch” [-u...] && hg push
See http://svn.nuxeo.org/nuxeo/tools/mercurial/automerge.sh.
It happens at the end of a development iteration, when code to merge is implementing a group of User Stories/Use Cases.
Unit tests are up-to-date to valid the new code (see test-driven development recommendations).
Functional tests are up-to-date to cover the new functionalities.
The development branch to merge must have been fully tested:
developers have successfully run Unit Tests
developers have functionally validated last developments
automated builds have run on development branch
At this moment, development branch can be merged on stable one:
hg pull && hg up -C stablebranch hg merge devbranch && hg st hg ci -m”merge from devbranch – NXP-9999 ...” hg push [-f]
Use “-f” only if stablebranch was no more a head.
If two developers worked on the same branch with different parents, it may result in two simultaneous branches with the same name (see server-side hooks).
$ hg push pushing to https://hg.nuxeo.org/somerepository searching for changes abort: push creates new remote heads! (did you forget to merge? use push -f to force)
In such case, the developers won't be able to push their changesets until they have merged the two branches. "hg heads branchname" will show the multiple heads and their changeset identifiers.
Simplest way is to switch his working directory to the other developer's revision and merge his own code:
hg up -C otherRevision hg merge ownRevision hg st hg ci -m”merge two heads” hg push
In case of doubts, before pushing, you can check what you've done with multiple commands:
hg out [-p] [-r REVISION] hg glog [-l LIMIT] [|less] hg heads someBranch
Thanks to Mercurial which is decentralized, even if Nuxeo's repositories are not, you can pull from Internet to a local repository and then pull from this repository. Then, you can update the .hg/hgrc file to bind it on the central repository or continue using the local one, pushing on it and then pushing changesets from it to the remote one.
hg clone https://hg.nuxeo.org/somerepository/ ~/repo-remote/ hg clone ~/repo-remote/ ~/repo-local/ cd ~/repo-local/ # some work… hg ci -m”NXP-9999 - some work” && hg push cd ~/repo-remote/ && hg pull # usual checks (heads, merge, …) hg push
Later, to update ~/repo-local/ for instance:
cd ~/repo-remote/ && hg pull cd ~/repo-local/ && hg pull && hg up
“hg fetch” can be used to pull, merge, commit but it is for experienced users, it's recommended to first being familiarized with unitary commands.
Mercurial Queues are an advanced group of Mercurial functions. Whereas not very easy to apprehend, they are powerful tools.
You can for instance transform a group of changesets made on a wrong branch to patches being then re-applied on the right branch, while editing and changing anything in those changesets (user, comments, ...).
See http://mercurial.selenic.com/wiki/MqExtension or Mercurial: The Definitive Guide by Bryan O'Sullivan.
For installation procedure, see annexe "Installing Maven".
See http://maven.apache.org/users/index.html.
Maven is a software tool for Java project management and build automation, similar in functionality to the Apache Ant tool coupled to a dependency manager such as Ivy, but Maven is based on different concepts.
Maven uses a construct known as a Project Object Model (POM) to describe the software project being built, its dependencies on other external modules and components, and the build order. It comes with pre-defined targets for performing certain well defined tasks such as compilation of code and its packaging.
Maven is designed to be network-ready. It dynamically downloads libraries and plugins from one or more repositories. A local cache of downloaded artifacts acts as the primary means of synchronizing the requirements and outputs of projects on a local system.
http://www.sonatype.com/books/maven-book/reference/
http://maven.apache.org/guides/
http://maven.apache.org/guides/introduction/
http://maven.apache.org/ref/2.1.0/maven-settings/settings.html
How to debug test run with Maven: http://doc.nuxeo.org/xwiki/bin/view/FAQ/DebugMavenTest.
The goal of the nuxeo-archetype-start template is to setup a development environment to work on a Nuxeo EP plugin.
The default code provides: a maven layout for sources, tests and dependencies, a Ant target for deployment. It also customizes the web application a litte bit.
To create a project named my-project in the
com.company.sandbox.myproject package:
mvn org.apache.maven.plugins:maven-archetype-plugin:1.0-alpha-7:create \ -DartifactId=my-project \ -DgroupId=com.company.sandbox.myproject \ -DarchetypeArtifactId=nuxeo-archetype-start \ -DarchetypeGroupId=org.nuxeo.archetypes \ -DarchetypeVersion=5.1.6 \ -DremoteRepositories=http://maven.nuxeo.org/nuxeo-release
You can see that you need to supply six arguments:
artifactId : the name of your project, usually with '-' to separate the words if there are many.
groupId : the domain name of your project. Usually it is the package parent name of your classes, you should use '.' to separate the words ('-' is not supported here).
archetypeArtifactId : the maven archetype artifact id. To generate a new project, Nuxeo provides you with nuxeo-archetype-start
archetypeGroupId : unique for all nuxeo maven archetypes : org.nuxeo.archetypes
archetypeVersion : the version of the archetype which is equivalent to the version of Nuxeo EP without the GA or RC part. (5.1.6, 5.1.5 ...).
remoteRepositories : the repository location to download the archetype.
Eclipse can benefit for several plugins for improving code quality, in both adherence to the project's coding standard and in removing bugs.
TODO
If you are already familiar with the Checkstyle Eclipse plugin,
just configure it to use the checkstyle.xml at the
root of the nuxeo sources: http://hg.nuxeo.org/nuxeo/file/5.2/checkstyle.xml.
IDEA doesn't provide an integrated profiler and Eclipse's profiler, provided by the TPTP project, doesn't currently work on Mac OS, one can use NetBeans to profile the Nuxeo platform.
Here is how to do it:
Nuxeo heavily uses extension points. In order to manage them nxPointDoc tool has been created. Its purpose is to explore all XML files and build the documentation of each explored components. Cross links and indexes are also built to ease the navigation.
The NxPointDoc pages are available at
http://svn.nuxeo.org/nxpointdoc/
The tool is written in Python and the following libraries are needed:
Genshi for templating
ElementTree for XML processing
Pygments for code highlighting
A component XML file is structured as follow:
<component ...>
<!--############## Component configuration ############-->
<!-- implementation class (optional) -->
<implementation>...</implementation>
<!-- component properties (optional) -->
<property name="..." value="..."/>
...
<property name="..." value="..."/>
<!--############### Extension points ################-->
<!-- extension points are optional -->
<extension-point ...>
...
</extension-point>
...
<!--############### Contributions ################-->
<!-- contributions are optional -->
<extension ...>
...
</extension>
...
</component>We can see that the only required element is the component element (although it is useless to have an empty component). So there are 3 main sections (any of these sections are optional).
Component configuration: This section defines the component implementation class and some properties to initialize the component (This section content may be modified in future especially when aligning nuxeo components with OSGi services).
Extension points: This sections contains all the extension point declared by the component.
Contributions (extension tag): This section
contains all the contributions made by this component to other
components.
To add documentation to these elements a
<documentation> tag will be used. An element
may have different content depending on what it is documenting. While
some information is already available in other XML elements in the file,
there is no need to duplicate these information inside the documentation
provided though the element. For example the name of the component can
be retrieved from the name attribute of the component element, the
implementation class name from the implementation element etc.
To format the description text, we can use XHTML tags and
javadoc-like markers such as @property,
@schema etc. Javadoc-like links are also supported:
@see points on the javadoc,
@component points on another component documentation.
For example, {@see
org.nuxeo.ecm.core.schema.types.Type} will point on the
http://maven.nuxeo.org/apidocs corresponding page
while {@component
org.nuxeo.ecm.webapp.directory.DirectoryTreeService} will
explicitly insert a link to the related NxPointDoc page. Code
colorization is also supported through the <code
language='xml'> ... </code> tags. If no language is
given, xml is taken by default. Java
(language='java') and many other languages are
supported (see Pygments pages).
Regarding <component> documentation, the following elements
are available:
@author: may be duplicated for multiple
authoring
@version
@property
@see: points to Javadoc
@component: points to nxpointdoc
@deprecated
component@name attribute: the component
name
component/implementation tag: the
implementation class
component/require tag: required
elements
component/documentation tag: the
description
For <extension-point> the following
elements have to be used:
@author: may be duplicated for multiple
authoring
@schema
@deprecated
@see
@component
component/extension-point@name attribute:
the name
component/extension-point/documentation tag
- the description
If the extension point is using object
sub-elements, the DTD should be extracted from
the XMap annotated class, otherwise the user may specify the
DTD using the @schema marker
inside the documentation element
For <extension>, describing contributions to an extension-point, we have
@author: may be duplicated for multiple
authoring
@see
@component
@deprecated
component/extension@target attribute -
rendered as a link to the component documentation
component/extension@point - rendered as a
link to the extension point documentation
component/extension-point/documentation
description
Here is a short example of what a component xml file may look like.
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.MyService">
<documentation>
My demo service
<p/>
This service does nothing
@property home home directory to be used to create temp files
@property timeout the time interval in seconds
@version 1.0
@author Bogdan
</documentation>
<require>org.nuxeo.ecm.Service1</require>
<require>org.nuxeo.ecm.Service2</require>
<implementation class=”org.nuxeo.ecm.core.demo.Service2”/>
<property name=”home” value=”/home/bstefanescu”/>
<property name=”interval” value=”20” type=”Integer”/>
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.SchemaService" point="schema">
<documentation>Common and Dublin Core schemas</documentation>
<schema name="dublincore" src="schema/dublincore.xsd" />
<schema name="common" src="schema/common.xsd" />
</extension>
<extension-point name="repository">
<documentation>Register new repositories</documentation>
<object class="org.nuxeo.ecm.RepositoryDescriptor"/>
</extension-point>
</component>
Feel free to browse the NxPointDoc site and teh corresponding xml file to go deeper. The systematic link to the source code svn repository may help you.
nxpointdoc is a command line program that creates the whole site
from a source repository SOURCE_DIR to a target
publication directory TARGET_DIR. Each component is
analyzed and all related pages created. Index pages are then
created.
$ ./nxpointdoc.py -h usage: nxpointdoc.py [options] options: --version show program's version number and exit -h, --help show this help message and exit --source=SOURCE_DIR Source root directory containing xml component files --target=TARGET_DIR Target directory for the generated documentation --template=TEMPLATE Genshi template for component html file --template-index=TEMPLATE_INDEX Genshi template for index html file --allow-xhtml-comment=ALLOW_XHTML_COMMENT 'no' to not interpret xhtml tags in comment --color=COLOR_CODE 'no' to not color <code> contents
Valid SOURCE_DIR and TARGET_DIR
are mandatory. Template files have to exist. The one delivered have the
.template extension and can be used as is.
NxPointDoc generates 3 indexes that are the entry points; The
documentation is accessible at
http://svn.nuxeo.org/nxpointdoc/ with 3 indexes related to
components, extension points and contributions. Each one is an entry
point for the documentation. The Indexes give the name and the first
line of the documentation. An hyperlink allows to see the detail of the
examinated item.


The statistic gives some rough indicators on the documentation
coverage, globally or for each component file. The
G.D.C stands for Global Documentation Coverage while
the I.D.C stands for Individual Documentation
Coverage. They show the ratio between all the information/documentation
that is written over all the entries that are considered as mandatory
(like author, documentation, etc.). The higher these indicators are, the
better it is.

"Continuous Integration is a software development practice where members of a team integrate their work frequently, usually each person integrates at least daily - leading to multiple integrations per day. Each integration is verified by an automated build (including test) to detect integration errors as quickly as possible. Many teams find that this approach leads to significantly reduced integration problems and allows a team to develop cohesive software more rapidly." | ||
| --Martin Fowler - Continuous Integration (an introduction) | ||
See http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Continuous_Integration
It's as important to follow quality processes on development as to maintain this quality among time. Nuxeo is involved in such practices that will guarantee or reinforce its products quality.
Nuxeo products and tools are continuously built over time, at each change and against multiple environments. Nuxeo QA team sets and maintain a QA environment applying CI rules and so providing to developers means to check their code quality and being warned in case of any problem.
Maintain a code repository
Nuxeo sources repositories hg.nuxeo.org and svn.nuxeo.org are under continuous integration.
This includes Nuxeo EP, Nuxeo addons, Nuxeo RCP, Nuxeo WebEngine, Nuxeo Books, tools and plugins and of course all our customers' projects.
Builds are automated
This is done by Hudson on Nuxeo QA Unit, Functional and Integration tests.
Every commit on mainline is integrated
When code is committed, target project is built, as all projects depending on it. The full chain is verified, from build to deployment.
Mainlines on Nuxeo EP and addons are the main branches in development: 5.1 and 5.2 (resp. 1.4 and 1.5 for associated subtrees). For projects under SubVersion, that means the trunk and, if exists, 5.1 branch.
Everyone can see the results of the latest build
Hudson plugins ensure to warn potential responsible(s) of build fail by mail and jabber, so they can react quickly.
Moreover, every build fail is sent on ECM QA mailing list.
Make it easy to get the latest deliverables
Nightly builds are done. Produced artifacts are published on our Maven repositories maven.nuxeo.org. Currently managed with Nexus, our repositories store all released artifacts and recent snapshots.
Keep the build fast
Continuous Integration is done on multiple servers, more or less powerful, using slaves in order to distribute the load.
Thanks to Maven and to Nuxeo modularity, each module is built separately and as a consequence, quickly.
Test in a clone of the production environment
We have two integration levels: unit and functional.
First level checks code compilation and runs Unit tests. A lot of Unit tests simulate target environments (with mock objects). Dependent projects/modules are then added to the CI chain.
Second level runs packaging tools and automated deployment against multiple environments (we aim at covering JVM versions, SQL backends, OS, browsers, performance, ...). Finally we use Selenium tests to check functional integrity. This also indirectly provides a continuous integration on our tools (packaging, convenient scripts, ...).
These practices apply on every script, project or module. They should be strictly followed.
Code must be under continuous integration.
Except for prototype and spike solutions (sandbox projects or temporary branches), all projects must be under CI. If not, ask for it to the QA team, providing the informations mentioned in the following Hudson part.
Automate the build
Think about QA tools that will have to test the project without any human intervention. Provide Maven, Ant or, in the worse case, Shell autonomous configuration.
Make your build self-testing
Think "test-driven development". Simply building a project/module and running its Unit tests should be a valuable measurement of the code stability. Unit tests code coverage often needs to be increased.
Commit every day
Smaller are the commits, lower is the risk of conflicting changes and easier is the bug analysis.
Stay tuned
Be aware of CI builds, particularly failed builds.
Log on http://qa.nuxeo.org/hudson/ and check your profile's informations, especially your jabber address. Hudson will then be able to contact you via Jabber when you are suspected of having broken something.
Subscribe to ECM QA mailing list. Use mail filters to quickly catch and fix problems. Hudson will send you a mail if it detects one of your commits between succeed and failed tests.
If you're used to, RSS feeds are also available.
Check regularly your projects health on our QA sites. Inform QA team if you notice any issue.
Always consider a build failed as an emergency.
Maven Parent POM file gives a lot of useful information. Take care
to fill in you project's pom.xml file:
main tags
<name>Nuxeo ECM Projects</name>
<description>Nuxeo ECM Platform and related components</description>
<organization>
<name>Nuxeo SA</name>
<url>http://www.nuxeo.com/</url>
</organization>
<licenses>
<license>
<name>GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE, Version 2.1</name>
<url>http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/lesser.txt</url>
</license>
</licenses>
<mailingLists>
<mailingList>
<name>Nuxeo ECM list</name>
<subscribe>http://lists.nuxeo.com/mailman/listinfo/ECM</subscribe>
<unsubscribe>http://lists.nuxeo.com/mailman/listinfo/ECM</unsubscribe>
<archive>http://lists.nuxeo.com/pipermail/ecm/</archive>
</mailingList>
</mailingLists>
<issueManagement>
<system>jira</system>
<url>http://jira.nuxeo.org/browse/NXP</url>
</issueManagement>
<ciManagement>
<system>Hudson</system>
<url>http://qa.nuxeo.org/hudson/</url>
</ciManagement>
"scm" tag
<scm> <connection>scm:hg:http://hg.nuxeo.org/addons/nuxeo-samples</connection> <developerConnection>scm:hg:https://hg.nuxeo.org/addons/nuxeo-samples</developerConnection> <url>http://trac.nuxeo.org/nuxeo/browser/nuxeo_samples</url> </scm>
"developers" tag (there's no rule for tags within the "developer" tag, feel free to add useful information such as "role", "url", "organization" or "module")
<developers>
<developer>
<name>John Doe</name>
<email>jdoe@nuxeo.com</email>
</developer>
</developers>
You also have to add <repositories> section in the project's parent POM in order to make your project fully autonomous.
<repositories>
<repository>
<id>public</id>
<url>http://maven.nuxeo.org/public</url>
<snapshots>
<enabled>false</enabled>
</snapshots>
</repository>
<repository>
<id>public-snapshot</id>
<url>http://maven.nuxeo.org/public-snapshot</url>
<snapshots>
<enabled>true</enabled>
</snapshots>
</repository>
</repositories>
All these tags are intelligently inherited so that, if you're project's Maven parent is nuxeo-ecm or one of its children, you don't have to repeat informations such as "organization", "licenses", "mailingLists", "issueManagement". Also, when working on a project with sub-modules, it's only necessary to set "scm" on the parent POM.
Adding a project under continuous integration in Hudson requires:
SCM URL
Build command
In case of Maven, it's the goals to run (usually, it will be "clean install"). Consider using Maven "Profiles" to manage different behaviors like development versus production environment.
In case of Ant, you may need to provide some parameters on the
command line (equivalent to what can be set by a human user in a
build.properties).
In case of Shell (avoid it as much as possible), it's a simple command with working default values in case of required parameters. If needed, some environment constants may be set.
Notification target(s): eg, the team mailing list.
Release process is managed and tested by multiple tools:
Hudson continuous integration which generates a candidate release every night based on snapshots.
When a release is wanted, all continuous integration chain must be satisfied, nightly builds are manually tested to complete automated tests and candidate release is "promoted" to public release (code is tagged, artifacts are uploaded to the maven repository and packages are published on Nuxeo web site.
For now, continuous integration covers those configurations:
Nuxeo DM.
Linux Ubuntu (Debian).
Sun Java 5, Sun Java 6.
JBoss application server.
VCS backend on H2.
VCS backend on PostgreSQL.
Not automatically tested at integration level (full deployment and tests):
Nuxeo EP.
Nuxeo-shell and scripts.
JCR backend with various databases: H2, Derby, PostgreSQL, MySQL, Oracle, ...
VCS backend with various databases: Derby, MySQL, Oracle, ...
Various application servers: Jetty, GlassFish (GF3) and Tomcat.
Various Windows OS.
Various Java providers.
You can download nightly candidate releases from http://qa.nuxeo.org/hudson/view/NX Deployments/, test and send feedback on our ECM mailing list or, in case of bugs confirmed, in our Issue Tracker (Jira).
Goal of this chapter is to help creating projects over Nuxeo. How to create a project structure including a packaging module that builds one or more Enterprise ARchive (EAR), ready for deployment. Ant scripts, Maven profiles and Nuxeo assemblies allow defining simple commands to build packages that will fit each target environments.
Good practice is to define a parent pom at project root and set a module-ear. Beside that, you may have as many modules and sub-modules as you want. We recommend to split your code according to some development and deployment criteria: API, web or core contributions, stateful or stateless services, ... Following this main rule, you have to create multiple modules where to dispatch your code and resources. Maven will manage the dependencies between modules and our assembly files will package EAR with all required libraries.
Following multi-module project template is available here
|-- README.txt |-- build.properties.sample|-- build.xml
|-- fixeclipse
|-- pom.xml
|-- .project.ok
|-- template-api
|-- template-core
|-- template-web
|-- template-ear
| |-- pom.xml | `-- src | `-- main | |-- assemble
| | |-- template-dev.xml | | |-- template-ldap-pg.xml | | |-- template-stateful.xml | | `-- template-stateless.xml | |-- resources_template_common
| | `-- README.txt | |-- resources_template_dev | | `-- README.txt | |-- resources_template_ldap_pg | | |-- config | | | |-- default-repository-config.xml | | | |-- jdbc-compass-connection-config.xml | | | `-- sql.properties | | |-- datasources | | | `-- unified-nuxeo-ds.xml | | `-- system | | `-- nuxeo-platform-search-compass-plugin-5.1.7-SNAPSHOT.jar | | `-- compass.cfg.xml | |-- resources_template_stateful | `-- resources_template_stateless |-- template-stateful-services
|-- template-stateless-services
`-- template-test
![]()
![]() |
Ant sample properties. Copy this file to
|
![]() |
Ant script. It's aimed to ease the use of maven, giving targets to automatize common tasks on project (test, compile, deploy, package, ...). |
![]() |
OS dependent, will only work on Linux/Unix and Mac OS X. Copy it from
Nuxeo EP root. It's a shell utility script that calls
maven-eclipse-plugin to create or update Eclipse's |
![]() |
Maven project parent file. |
![]() |
Required to import this project into eclipse as a whole resources project (each module will also be individually imported as a java project). |
![]() |
This module contains common code usable in all other modules, such as interfaces, adaptors, constants, data transfer objects, ... |
![]() |
This module contains all contributions to Nuxeo Core. |
![]() |
This module contains all JSF, Seam, WebEngine contributions, components and templates. |
![]() |
This module provides packaging of Nuxeo EP following assembly descriptors. |
![]() |
Assembly descriptors. Here are some samples. |
![]() |
Resources directory sample. |
![]() |
This module gathers all Message Resolved Beans that modify some data and all services that define their own persistence source. |
![]() |
This module contains all services that are not going into template-stateful-services. |
![]() |
This module is for use in unit tests from other modules. |
Describe packaging with assembly descriptors
<!-- This is a template assembly file that generates a mono Nuxeo-EP server.
Configuration is designed for development usage -->
<assembly>
<!-- RESOURCES -->
<assemble>
<set>resources</set>
<outputFile>/</outputFile>
</assemble>
<zipEntrySet id="resources">
<artifact>
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform:nuxeo-platform-ear:${nuxeo.platform.version}:zip:resources-mono
</artifact>
</zipEntrySet>
<!-- ARTIFACTS -->
<assemble>
<outputFile>/</outputFile>
<set>root-artifacts</set>
</assemble>
<artifactSet id="root-artifacts">
<import>**</import>
<includeDependencies>false</includeDependencies>
<includes>
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-webapp" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-webapp-core" />
</includes>
</artifactSet>
<assemble>
<outputFile>system</outputFile>
<set>system</set>
</assemble>
<artifactSet id="system">
<import>**</import>
<includeDependencies>true</includeDependencies>
<includes>
<artifact group="org.nuxeo.*" category="runtime,jboss4"
includeDependsOnCategory="false" />
<artifact group="org.nuxeo.*" category="core,search,web" />
<!-- add here nuxeo-addons -->
</includes>
<excludes>
<artifact group="!org.nuxeo*" />
<artifact group="org.nuxeo.common" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-runtime-jboss-extensions" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-webapp" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-webapp-core" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-audit-facade" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-placeful-facade" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-search-compass-plugin" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-ear" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-apt-extensions" />
<artifact group="org.nuxeo.projects.template" />
</excludes>
</artifactSet>
<assemble>
<outputFile>system</outputFile>
<unpack>true</unpack>
<unpackInNewDirectory>true</unpackInNewDirectory>
<set>nuxeo-platform-unpacked</set>
</assemble>
<artifactSet id="nuxeo-platform-unpacked">
<import>**</import>
<includes>
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-audit-facade" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-placeful-facade" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-search-compass-plugin" />
</includes>
</artifactSet>
<!-- third party libraries embedded in the ear -->
<assemble>
<outputFile>lib</outputFile>
<set>nuxeo-fixed-libs</set>
</assemble>
<artifactSet id="nuxeo-fixed-libs">
<artifacts>
<artifact group="org.freemarker" name="freemarker" version="2.3.11" />
<artifact group="org.osgi" name="osgi-core" version="4.1" />
<artifact group="commons-collections" name="commons-collections"
version="3.1" />
<artifact group="commons-io" name="commons-io" version="1.2" />
<artifact group="commons-lang" name="commons-lang" version="2.2" />
<artifact group="commons-fileupload" name="commons-fileupload"
version="1.1.1" />
<artifact group="cssparser" name="cssparser" version="0.9.4-fix" />
<artifact group="net.sf.ehcache" name="ehcache" version="1.2.3" />
<artifact group="net.sf.ezmorph" name="ezmorph" version="0.9" />
<artifact group="org.hibernate" name="hibernate" version="3.2.0.ga" />
<artifact group="org.hibernate" name="hibernate-annotations"
version="3.2.0.ga" />
<artifact group="org.hibernate" name="hibernate-entitymanager"
version="3.2.0.ga" />
<artifact group="jboss" name="jboss-cache-jdk50" version="1.4.0.SP1" />
<artifact group="org.jboss.seam" name="jboss-seam" version="1.1.5.NX3" />
<artifact group="jboss" name="jbpm" version="3.1.2" />
<artifact group="jboss" name="jgroups" version="2.2.9" />
<artifact group="net.sf.json-lib" name="json-lib" version="0.9" />
<artifact group="org.apache.lucene" name="lucene-core" version="2.0.0" />
<artifact group="net.sf.opencsv" name="opencsv" version="1.7" />
<artifact group="org.slf4j" name="slf4j-api" version="1.3.0" />
<artifact group="org.slf4j" name="slf4j-log4j12" version="1.3.0" />
<artifact group="org.apache.myfaces.tomahawk" name="tomahawk"
version="1.1.5" />
<artifact group="org.apache.myfaces.tomahawk" name="tomahawk-sandbox"
version="1.1.5" />
<artifact group="org.apache.myfaces.trinidad" name="trinidad-api"
version="1.0.1-incubating-NXEP51M2" />
<artifact group="org.apache.myfaces.trinidad" name="trinidad-impl"
version="1.0.1-incubating-NXEP51M2" />
<artifact group="org.apache.directory.server"
name="apacheds-protocol-shared" version="1.5.1" />
<artifact group="org.apache.directory.shared" name="shared-ldap"
version="0.9.7" />
<artifact group="com.sun.facelets" name="jsf-facelets" version="1.1.11" />
<artifact group="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform" name="nuxeo-jbossws-wrapper"
version="4.0.5.GA" />
</artifacts>
</artifactSet>
<!-- template project's artifacts -->
<assemble>
<outputFile>plugins</outputFile>
<set>template-plugins</set>
</assemble>
<artifactSet id="template-plugins">
<import>**</import>
<includeDependencies>false</includeDependencies>
<includes>
<artifact group="org.nuxeo.projects.template" />
</includes>
</artifactSet>
<!-- template project's resources -->
<assemble>
<outputFile>/</outputFile>
<set>template-resources</set>
</assemble>
<fileSet id="template-resources">
<directory>src/main/resources_template_common</directory>
<excludes>
<exclude>README.txt</exclude>
</excludes>
</fileSet>
<assemble>
<outputFile>/</outputFile>
<set>template-resources-dev</set>
</assemble>
<fileSet id="template-resources-dev">
<directory>src/main/resources_template_dev</directory>
<excludes>
<exclude>README.txt</exclude>
</excludes>
</fileSet>
</assembly>
Example 56.1. Sample of customized assembly for a standard EAR, configured for development
Create an XML file in template-ear/src/main/assemble/ that will
describe the EAR to build. Here's the file content:
assembly: the main tag. For now, you can only define one assembly per file (meaning one packaging definition by assembly descriptor file).
assemble: part of an assembly. An assemble must be associated with a set (different sets are available: zipEntrySet, fileSet, artifactSet).
set: string. Id of associated set.
outputFile: output directory string. "/" represents the building EAR root.
unpack: true or false. Whether the set content should be unpack.
unpackInNewDirectory: true or false. if unpack is true, whether to create new directories or not in the output directory.
zipEntrySet
This set allow to retrieve artifacts from outside the project dependencies and unzip them.
id: required set id.
artifact: group:name:version:type:classifier of an artifact to retrieve from maven resolution, even if not present in the project's dependency tree. Will be unzipped if necessary.
profile: if specified, will only be treated if the given maven profile is active.
artifactSet
This set retrieves all artifacts from the project's dependencies tree, depending on conditions
id: required set id.
import: "**" is required for inheriting project's dependencies.
includeDependencies: true or false. If true, all dependencies of selected artifacts by this set will be added to the set.
excludeDependencies: true or false. If true, all dependencies of selected artifacts by this set will be removed from the set.
extends: deprecated. Was aimed to allow assemblies inheritance and sets overriding.
includes (or excludes): artifacts list to include (resp. exclude). Each artifact accept these parameters:
group: artifact's group id. Accept wildcards '*' and negative '!' to match multiple artifacts.
name: artifact's id. Accept wildcards '*' and negative '!' to match multiple artifacts.
type: artifact's type (pom, jar, ejb, ...).
version: artifact's version.
scope: artifact's scope (test, compile, provided, ...).
classifier: artifact's classifier.
file: artifact's filename. Accept wildcards '*' and negative '!' to match multiple artifacts.
category: artifact's category. Concept introduced by Nuxeo to "tag" an artifact with a "category". This is done in the artifact's Manifest as "Bundle-Category". Multiple categories, comma separated, is interpreted as an union of matching artifacts.
includeDependsOnCategory: true or false. In case of category specified, whether to include or not any artifact which has at least one dependency matching the specified category.
profile: if specified, the artifact will only be treated (included or excluded) if the given maven profile is active.
fileSet
This set is for manipulating local resources.
id: required set id.
directory: root directory of resources to copy. For now, only one directory per set is allowed
includes: files and directories list to include.
include: string. File, directory or pattern file/directory to include. "**" means multiple directories.
excludes: files and directories list to exclude. By default, these patterns are already excluded: "**/.svn" and "**/.hg".
exclude: string. File, directory or pattern file/directory to exclude. "**" means multiple directories.
With this assembly descriptor file, you can configure your local resources to be copied into the packaged EAR. The above template gives some usual resources folders.
resources_template_common where you put your resources that should always be added or overwrite the default ones.
resources_template_dev where you put your resources configured for development purpose (filesystem backend, ...).
resources_template_ldap_pg is an example where you can put resources parameterized to configure Nuxeo with LDAP users and/or groups and a PostgreSQL backend.
resources_template_stateful and resources_template_stateless are to be used for a bi-machine packaging, explained later in this chapter.
It is important to give simple and stable ways to use these assembly descriptors. Maven will allow to configure profiles and parameters. Ant will then give possibility to call multiple maven and shell commands, OS independent.
The module-ear pom.xml file must have in its
dependencies all wanted artifacts that will then be filtered by the
assembly descriptor. Including nuxeo-platform-ear bring all its
dependencies, there's no need to copy Nuxeo's artifacts list.
In order to call the assembly descriptor, it must contain the following plugin declaration. "template.ear.assembly" is used to parameterize the assembly descriptor name. Set a default value with a property.
<properties>
<!-- default assembly descriptor to use -->
<template.ear.assembly>template-dev</template.ear.assembly>
</properties>
<build>
<plugins>
<plugin>
<groupId>org.apache.maven.plugins</groupId>
<artifactId>maven-nuxeo-plugin</artifactId>
<extensions>true</extensions>
<configuration>
<runPreprocessor>false</runPreprocessor>
<format>directory</format>
<outputDirectory>../target</outputDirectory>
<targetFile>${template.ear.assembly}</targetFile>
<descriptor>
${basedir}/src/main/assemble/${template.ear.assembly}.xml
</descriptor>
</configuration>
<executions>
<execution>
<id>assemble-ear</id>
<phase>package</phase>
<goals>
<goal>assembly</goal>
</goals>
</execution>
</executions>
</plugin>
</plugins>
</build>
Maven parameters may be set in command-line. For example, in the above template, "mvn clean package" will package a Nuxeo EAR for developers and "mvn clean package -Dtemplate.ear.assembly=template-ldap-pg" will call template-ldap-pg.xml instead of template-dev.xml and so package a Nuxeo EAR configured for LDAP and PostgreSQL.
You can also use Maven profiles with "-P" argument.
Using Ant, we will automatize lot of common tasks. Here's the output of command "ant -projecthelp" on template-project:
$ ant -projecthelp Buildfile: build.xml Main targets: copy Replace ear and copy libs to jboss copy-2parts Copy Nuxeo-EP in two parts copy-3parts DEPRECATED: Copy Nuxeo-EP in three parts copy-ldap-pg Copy template on LDAP and Postgres deploy Build and copy to JBoss deploy-2parts Build 2parts and copy to two patched JBoss deploy-ldap-pg Build for LDAP and Postgres and copy to JBoss install Run mvn install package Package Nuxeo-EP package-2parts Package Nuxeo-EP in two parts package-3parts DEPRECATED: Package Nuxeo-EP in three parts package-ldap-pg Package for LDAP and Postgres web Copy web files to a live JBoss Default target: usage
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<project name="template" default="usage" basedir=".">
<!-- Create a build.properties file from build.properties.sample
if you wish to override the JBoss paths -->
<property file="build.properties" />
<property name="jboss.dir" value="/opt/jboss" />
<property name="jboss.config" value="default" />
<property name="mvn.opts" value="" />
<property name="javac.debug" value="true" />
<property name="javac.deprecation" value="false" />
<!-- Boilerplate configuration -->
<property name="build.dir" value="${basedir}/target" />
<property name="deploy.dir" value="${jboss.dir}/server/${jboss.config}/deploy" />
<property name="template.ear.root" value="template-ear" />
<property name="nuxeo.ear" value="nuxeo.ear" />
<property name="deploy.lib.dir" value="${jboss.dir}/server/${jboss.config}/lib" />
<property name="build.lib.dir" value="lib" />
<!-- these properties will need to be overridden at execution time -->
<target name="set.jboss.home" unless="jboss.home">
<property name="jboss.home" value="${jboss.dir}" />
</target>
<target name="set.assembly.name" unless="assembly.name">
<property name="assembly.name" value="template-dev" />
</target>
<target name="setproperties" unless="jboss.server" depends="set.jboss.home, set.assembly.name">
<property name="assembly.ear" value="${assembly.name}" />
<property name="jboss.server" value="${jboss.home}/server/${jboss.config}" />
<property name="jboss.deploy" value="${jboss.server}/deploy" />
<property name="jboss.lib" value="${jboss.server}/lib" />
<property name="jboss.nuxeo.ear" value="${jboss.deploy}/nuxeo.ear" />
<property name="template.ear.build" value="${template.ear.root}/target/${assembly.ear}" />
</target>
<target name="usage">
<echo message="usage: ant [package|deploy|web|package-2parts|deploy-2parts|package-ldap-pg|deploy-ldap-p]" />
<echo message="ant package => Package template to ${build.dir}/${nuxeo.ear}" />
<echo message="ant deploy => Package template and copy to ${deploy.dir}" />
<echo message="ant deploy-Nparts => Package template and copy to ${deploy.dir} relative to the ${jbossN.dir} properties" />
<echo message="ant web => Copy web files to a live JBoss (${deploy.dir})" />
</target>
<condition property="osfamily-unix">
<os family="unix" />
</condition>
<condition property="osfamily-windows">
<os family="windows" />
</condition>
<target name="deploy" depends="install,package,copy,copy-lib" description="Build and copy to JBoss">
<echo message="Deployed ${ant.project.name} to ${deploy.dir}" />
</target>
<target name="deploy-ldap-pg" depends="install,package-ldap-pg,copy-ldap-pg" description="Build for LDAP and Postgres and copy to JBoss">
</target>
<target name="deploy-2parts" depends="install,package-2parts,copy-2parts" description="Build 2parts and copy to two patched JBoss">
</target>
<target name="package-ldap-pg" description="Package for LDAP and Postgres">
<antcall target="package">
<param name="assembly.name" value="template-ldap-pg" />
</antcall>
</target>
<target name="package-2parts" description="Package Nuxeo-EP in two parts">
<antcall target="package">
<param name="jboss.home" value="${jboss1.dir}" />
<param name="assembly.name" value="template-stateful" />
</antcall>
<antcall target="package">
<param name="jboss.home" value="${jboss2.dir}" />
<param name="assembly.name" value="template-stateless" />
</antcall>
</target>
<target name="package-3parts" description="DEPRECATED: Package Nuxeo-EP in three parts">
<antcall target="package">
<param name="assembly.name" value="nuxeo-core" />
</antcall>
<antcall target="package">
<param name="assembly.name" value="nuxeo-indexing" />
</antcall>
<antcall target="package">
<param name="assembly.name" value="nuxeo-webplatform" />
</antcall>
</target>
<target name="package" depends="setproperties,package-unix,package-windows" description="Package Nuxeo-EP" />
<target name="package-unix" if="osfamily-unix">
<echo message="assembly NAME ${assembly.name}" />
<exec executable="mvn" failonerror="true">
<arg value="clean" />
<arg value="package" />
<arg value="-Dmaven.test.skip=true" />
<arg value="-f" />
<arg value="${template.ear.root}/pom.xml" />
<arg value="-Dtemplate.ear.assembly=${assembly.name}" />
<arg value="${mvn.opts}" />
</exec>
<echo message="Packaged ${ant.project.name} into ${template.ear.build}" />
</target>
<target name="package-windows" if="osfamily-windows">
<exec executable="cmd" failonerror="true">
<arg value="/c" />
<arg value="mvn.bat" />
<arg value="clean" />
<arg value="package" />
<arg value="-Dmaven.test.skip=true" />
<arg value="-f" />
<arg value="${template.ear.root}/pom.xml" />
<arg value="-Dtemplate.ear.assembly=${assembly.name}" />
<arg value="${mvn.opts}" />
</exec>
</target>
<target name="install" depends="install-unix,install-windows" description="Run mvn install" />
<target name="install-unix" if="osfamily-unix">
<exec executable="mvn" failonerror="true">
<arg value="clean" />
<arg value="install" />
<arg value="-Dmaven.test.skip=true" />
<arg value="${mvn.opts}" />
</exec>
</target>
<target name="install-windows" if="osfamily-windows">
<exec executable="cmd" failonerror="true">
<arg value="/c" />
<arg value="mvn.bat" />
<arg value="clean" />
<arg value="install" />
<arg value="-Dmaven.test.skip=true" />
<arg value="${mvn.opts}" />
</exec>
</target>
<target name="web" description="Copy web files to a live JBoss">
<copy todir="${deploy.dir}/nuxeo.ear/nuxeo.war">
<fileset dir="${basedir}/template-platform/src/main/resources/nuxeo.war/" />
</copy>
</target>
<target name="rename">
<delete dir="${build.dir}/${nuxeo.ear}" failonerror="false" />
<move file="${build.dir}/template.ear" tofile="${build.dir}/${nuxeo.ear}" />
</target>
<target name="copy-lib">
<delete failonerror="false">
<fileset dir="${deploy.lib.dir}/">
<include name="nuxeo*.jar" />
</fileset>
</delete>
<copy todir="${deploy.lib.dir}/" failonerror="true">
<fileset dir="${build.dir}/${build.lib.dir}/" />
</copy>
</target>
<target name="copy-ldap-pg" description="Copy template on LDAP and Postgres">
<antcall target="copy">
<param name="assembly.name" value="template-ldap-pg" />
</antcall>
</target>
<target name="copy-2parts" description="Copy Nuxeo-EP in two parts">
<antcall target="copy">
<param name="jboss.home" value="${jboss1.dir}" />
<param name="assembly.name" value="template-platform-stateful" />
</antcall>
<antcall target="copy">
<param name="jboss.home" value="${jboss2.dir}" />
<param name="assembly.name" value="template-web-stateless" />
</antcall>
</target>
<target name="copy-3parts" description="DEPRECATED: Copy Nuxeo-EP in three parts">
<antcall target="copy">
<param name="jboss.home" value="${jboss1.dir}" />
<param name="assembly.name" value="nuxeo-core" />
</antcall>
<antcall target="copy">
<param name="jboss.home" value="${jboss2.dir}" />
<param name="assembly.name" value="nuxeo-indexing" />
</antcall>
<antcall target="copy">
<param name="jboss.home" value="${jboss3.dir}" />
<param name="assembly.name" value="nuxeo-webplatform" />
</antcall>
</target>
<target name="copy" depends="delete-ear,copy-ear,copy-lib" description="Replace ear and copy libs to jboss" />
<target name="delete-ear" depends="setproperties">
<delete dir="${jboss.nuxeo.ear}" failonerror="false" />
</target>
<target name="copy-ear" depends="setproperties">
<mkdir dir="${jboss.nuxeo.ear}" />
<copy todir="${jboss.nuxeo.ear}">
<fileset dir="${template.ear.build}" />
</copy>
</target>
<target name="copy-jars">
<copy todir="${deploy.dir}/${nuxeo.ear}/plugins" overwrite="true" flatten="true">
<fileset dir="${basedir}">
<include name="*/target/*.jar" />
<exclude name="*/target/*-sources.jar" />
</fileset>
</copy>
</target>
</project>
Example 56.2. build.xml sample
Stateful/Stateless packaging gives a good solution to a lot of production requirements. Principle is to split Nuxeo in two parts: one that contains the core and every services that persist data, and another that provides web services. Stateless part may be duplicated.
Bi-machine packaging is done by two assembly descriptors, each one building an EAR to deploy on a separate server.
To build your own bi-machine packaging, copy the template-project structure. Copy and adapt Ant, Maven and descriptor files. Then, configure artifactSet and fileSet that will deploy your project's artifacts into the plugin directory and the wanted resources to replace those deployed by default.
<!-- This is a template assembly file that generates a "stateful" part of Nuxeo-EP server -->
<assembly>
<!-- RESOURCES -->
<assemble>
<set>resources</set>
<outputFile>/</outputFile>
</assemble>
<zipEntrySet id="resources">
<artifact>
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform:nuxeo-platform-ear:${nuxeo.platform.version}:zip:resources-platform-stateful
</artifact>
</zipEntrySet>
<!-- ARTIFACTS -->
<assemble>
<outputFile>system</outputFile>
<set>system</set>
</assemble>
<artifactSet id="system">
<import>**</import>
<includeDependencies>true</includeDependencies>
<includes>
<artifact group="org.nuxeo.*" category="runtime,jboss4"
includeDependsOnCategory="false" />
<artifact group="org.nuxeo.*" category="core,stateful" />
<!-- add here core and stateful nuxeo-addons -->
</includes>
<excludes>
<artifact group="!org.nuxeo*" />
<artifact group="org.nuxeo.common" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-runtime-jboss-extensions" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-webapp" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-webapp-core" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-audit-facade" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-placeful-facade" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-search-compass-plugin" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-ear" />
<artifact group="org.nuxeo.projects.template" />
</excludes>
</artifactSet>
<assemble>
<outputFile>system</outputFile>
<unpack>true</unpack>
<unpackInNewDirectory>true</unpackInNewDirectory>
<set>nuxeo-platform-unpacked</set>
</assemble>
<artifactSet id="nuxeo-platform-unpacked">
<import>**</import>
<includes>
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-audit-facade" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-placeful-facade" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-search-compass-plugin" />
</includes>
</artifactSet>
<!-- third party libraries embedded in the ear -->
<assemble>
<outputFile>lib</outputFile>
<set>nuxeo-fixed-libs</set>
</assemble>
<artifactSet id="nuxeo-fixed-libs">
<artifacts>
<artifact group="org.freemarker" name="freemarker" version="2.3.11" />
<artifact group="org.osgi" name="osgi-core" version="4.1" />
<artifact group="commons-collections" name="commons-collections"
version="3.1" />
<artifact group="commons-io" name="commons-io" version="1.2" />
<artifact group="commons-lang" name="commons-lang" version="2.2" />
<artifact group="commons-fileupload" name="commons-fileupload"
version="1.1.1" />
<artifact group="cssparser" name="cssparser" version="0.9.4-fix" />
<artifact group="net.sf.ehcache" name="ehcache" version="1.2.3" />
<artifact group="net.sf.ezmorph" name="ezmorph" version="0.9" />
<artifact group="org.hibernate" name="hibernate" version="3.2.0.ga" />
<artifact group="org.hibernate" name="hibernate-annotations"
version="3.2.0.ga" />
<artifact group="org.hibernate" name="hibernate-entitymanager"
version="3.2.0.ga" />
<artifact group="jboss" name="jboss-cache-jdk50" version="1.4.0.SP1" />
<artifact group="org.jboss.seam" name="jboss-seam" version="1.1.5.NX3" />
<artifact group="jboss" name="jbpm" version="3.1.2" />
<artifact group="jboss" name="jgroups" version="2.2.9" />
<artifact group="net.sf.json-lib" name="json-lib" version="0.9" />
<artifact group="org.apache.lucene" name="lucene-core" version="2.0.0" />
<artifact group="net.sf.opencsv" name="opencsv" version="1.7" />
<artifact group="org.slf4j" name="slf4j-api" version="1.3.0" />
<artifact group="org.slf4j" name="slf4j-log4j12" version="1.3.0" />
<artifact group="org.apache.myfaces.tomahawk" name="tomahawk"
version="1.1.5" />
<artifact group="org.apache.myfaces.tomahawk" name="tomahawk-sandbox"
version="1.1.5" />
<artifact group="org.apache.myfaces.trinidad" name="trinidad-api"
version="1.0.1-incubating-NXEP51M2" />
<artifact group="org.apache.myfaces.trinidad" name="trinidad-impl"
version="1.0.1-incubating-NXEP51M2" />
<artifact group="org.apache.directory.server"
name="apacheds-protocol-shared" version="1.5.1" />
<artifact group="org.apache.directory.shared" name="shared-ldap"
version="0.9.7" />
<artifact group="com.sun.facelets" name="jsf-facelets" version="1.1.11" />
<artifact group="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform" name="nuxeo-jbossws-wrapper"
version="4.0.5.GA" />
</artifacts>
</artifactSet>
<!-- template project's artifacts -->
<assemble>
<outputFile>plugins</outputFile>
<set>template-plugins</set>
</assemble>
<artifactSet id="template-plugins">
<import>**</import>
<includeDependencies>true</includeDependencies>
<includes>
<artifact name="template-core" />
<artifact name="template-stateful-services" />
</includes>
<excludes>
<artifact group="!org.nuxeo.projects.template" />
</excludes>
</artifactSet>
<!-- template project's resources -->
<assemble>
<outputFile>/</outputFile>
<set>template-resources</set>
</assemble>
<fileSet id="template-resources">
<directory>src/main/resources_template_common</directory>
<excludes>
<exclude>README.txt</exclude>
</excludes>
</fileSet>
<assemble>
<outputFile>/</outputFile>
<set>template-resources-stateful</set>
</assemble>
<fileSet id="template-resources-stateful">
<directory>src/main/resources_template_stateful</directory>
</fileSet>
</assembly>
Example 56.3. Sample of customized assembly for a stateful EAR
<!-- This is a template assembly file that generates a "stateless" part of Nuxeo-EP server -->
<assembly>
<!-- RESOURCES -->
<assemble>
<set>resources</set>
<outputFile>/</outputFile>
</assemble>
<zipEntrySet id="resources">
<artifact>
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform:nuxeo-platform-ear:${nuxeo.platform.version}:zip:resources-web-stateless
</artifact>
</zipEntrySet>
<!-- ARTIFACTS -->
<assemble>
<outputFile>/</outputFile>
<set>root-artifacts</set>
</assemble>
<artifactSet id="root-artifacts">
<import>**</import>
<includeDependencies>false</includeDependencies>
<includes>
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-webapp" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-webapp-core" />
</includes>
</artifactSet>
<assemble>
<outputFile>system</outputFile>
<set>system</set>
</assemble>
<artifactSet id="system">
<import>**</import>
<includeDependencies>true</includeDependencies>
<includes>
<artifact group="org.nuxeo.*" category="runtime,jboss4"
includeDependsOnCategory="false" />
<artifact group="org.nuxeo.*" category="stateless" />
<!-- add here web and stateless nuxeo-addons -->
</includes>
<excludes>
<artifact group="!org.nuxeo*" />
<artifact group="org.nuxeo.common" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-runtime-jboss-extensions" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-webapp" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-webapp-core" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-platform-ear" />
<artifact name="nuxeo-apt-extensions" />
<artifact group="org.nuxeo.projects.template" />
</excludes>
</artifactSet>
<!-- third party libraries embedded in the ear -->
<assemble>
<outputFile>lib</outputFile>
<set>nuxeo-fixed-libs</set>
</assemble>
<artifactSet id="nuxeo-fixed-libs">
<artifacts>
<artifact group="org.freemarker" name="freemarker" version="2.3.11" />
<artifact group="org.osgi" name="osgi-core" version="4.1" />
<artifact group="commons-collections" name="commons-collections"
version="3.1" />
<artifact group="commons-io" name="commons-io" version="1.2" />
<artifact group="commons-lang" name="commons-lang" version="2.2" />
<artifact group="commons-fileupload" name="commons-fileupload"
version="1.1.1" />
<artifact group="cssparser" name="cssparser" version="0.9.4-fix" />
<artifact group="net.sf.ehcache" name="ehcache" version="1.2.3" />
<artifact group="net.sf.ezmorph" name="ezmorph" version="0.9" />
<artifact group="org.hibernate" name="hibernate" version="3.2.0.ga" />
<artifact group="org.hibernate" name="hibernate-annotations"
version="3.2.0.ga" />
<artifact group="org.hibernate" name="hibernate-entitymanager"
version="3.2.0.ga" />
<artifact group="jboss" name="jboss-cache-jdk50" version="1.4.0.SP1" />
<artifact group="org.jboss.seam" name="jboss-seam" version="1.1.5.NX3" />
<artifact group="jboss" name="jbpm" version="3.1.2" />
<artifact group="jboss" name="jgroups" version="2.2.9" />
<artifact group="net.sf.json-lib" name="json-lib" version="0.9" />
<artifact group="org.apache.lucene" name="lucene-core" version="2.0.0" />
<artifact group="net.sf.opencsv" name="opencsv" version="1.7" />
<artifact group="org.slf4j" name="slf4j-api" version="1.3.0" />
<artifact group="org.slf4j" name="slf4j-log4j12" version="1.3.0" />
<artifact group="org.apache.myfaces.tomahawk" name="tomahawk"
version="1.1.5" />
<artifact group="org.apache.myfaces.tomahawk" name="tomahawk-sandbox"
version="1.1.5" />
<artifact group="org.apache.myfaces.trinidad" name="trinidad-api"
version="1.0.1-incubating-NXEP51M2" />
<artifact group="org.apache.myfaces.trinidad" name="trinidad-impl"
version="1.0.1-incubating-NXEP51M2" />
<artifact group="org.apache.directory.server"
name="apacheds-protocol-shared" version="1.5.1" />
<artifact group="org.apache.directory.shared" name="shared-ldap"
version="0.9.7" />
<artifact group="com.sun.facelets" name="jsf-facelets" version="1.1.11" />
<artifact group="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform" name="nuxeo-jbossws-wrapper"
version="4.0.5.GA" />
</artifacts>
</artifactSet>
<!-- template project's artifacts -->
<assemble>
<outputFile>plugins</outputFile>
<set>template-plugins</set>
</assemble>
<artifactSet id="template-plugins">
<import>**</import>
<includeDependencies>true</includeDependencies>
<includes>
<artifact name="template-web" />
<artifact name="template-stateless-services" />
</includes>
<excludes>
<artifact group="!org.nuxeo.projects.template" />
</excludes>
</artifactSet>
<!-- template project's resources -->
<assemble>
<outputFile>/</outputFile>
<set>template-resources</set>
</assemble>
<fileSet id="template-resources">
<directory>src/main/resources_template_common</directory>
<excludes>
<exclude>README.txt</exclude>
</excludes>
</fileSet>
<assemble>
<outputFile>/</outputFile>
<set>template-resources-stateless</set>
</assemble>
<fileSet id="template-resources-stateless">
<directory>src/main/resources_template_stateless</directory>
</fileSet>
</assembly>
Example 56.4. Sample of customized assembly for a stateless EAR
Stateful is identified in configuration files as nxplatformserver and nxjmsserver. Stateless is known as nxwebserver. You can set this in your hosts files.
If you deploy multiple stateless servers, the unique (for now it cannot be duplicated) stateful server only need to know one stateless server. Stateless servers do not need to communicate between each other.
There is misconfiguration in Nuxeo EP 5.1.6 and 5.2.M3 (http://jira.nuxeo.org/browse/NXP-2838).
Replace in nuxeo-web-stateless.ear/datasources/core-events-ds.xml
java.naming.provider.url=${jboss.bind.address}:1099with
java.naming.provider.url=nxjmsserver:1099
Nuxeo EP and related components can use the maven release plugin to prepare and perform releases of Nuxeo components.
The release of a project usually consists in those operations:
perform a clean checkout and launch the tests
change version numbers
tag sources in the source control system (ex: SVN)
update version number of the trunk to start the new development cycle
publish software and related information
The maven release plugin streamlines and automates the release process of software components.
To get more background about maven release, you can read following pages:
When your software is ready to be released, you want to launch the release process. :-)
This process has to be as easy as possible. You will be able to find bellow the basic process.
To enforce that the build is reproducible, maven refuses to create a new release if there are dependencies on SNAPSHOT versions.
The first step is then to remove all dependencies on SNAPSHOT versions. Of course, as you may not be able to release all your dependencies as long as your software, you can create specific versions of your dependencies for the release.
Here is the fastest way:
$ mvn deploy:deploy-file -DrepositoryId=central \
-Durl=scpexe://amour.nuxeo.org/home/nexus/repositories/vendor-release \
-DgroupId=org.apache.myfaces.trinidad \
-DartifactId=trinidad-impl \
-Dversion=1.0.1-incubating-NXEP51M2 \
-Dpackaging=jar \
-Dfile=trinidad-impl-1.0.1-incubating-NXEP51M2.jar
First, you need to get a fresh copy of the components you are about to release.
$ mvn scm:checkout svn:http://server/yoursoftware/trunk
To be sure that everything is clean and that you will test in the same environment as new users, remove your repository. On windows, remove your repository using your preferred tool. On Linux/Unix/MacOS, you can perform:
$ rm ~/.m2/repository
to remove your entire maven repository.
Let's try to build and test the software before launching a dry run of the release process.
mvn install
This should download all required dependencies (since you've clean your maven repository in the previous paragraph) and build the software.
We now can test the release preparation process.
mvn release:prepare -DdryRun=true
Answer, now to the questions maven will ask about version numbers and tag name. This will simulate a release preparation, especially the svn tags.
If everything went well until that point, we can actually perform the release...
For each component you want to release, do:
mvn release:prepare release:perform
This will tag your sources in the SCM, build the software, build the site upload your artifact to the defined repository and deploy your site.
In Nuxeo's case, you need to release first the global master POM before releasing other component, if the master POM is using a SNAPSHOT version. To achieve this, go to a checkout of the master POM and do a non-recursive release using:
mvn -N release:prepare release:perform
Then you can set master POM's new version number into each component you want to release and start the release process.
Add-ons are modules you can add to a Nuxeo instance and that provide
additional functionalities. To install an add-ons,
download the modules from
http://download.nuxeo.org/
and copy them in the /plugins directory of your Nuxeo instance.
For additional set-up, refer to the specific add-on's documentation.
Nuxeo Annotation service is based on Annotea W3C specification. It is compliant with the specification published at Annotea Protocol .
However the annotea specification is quite old and does not handle all use cases for annotating documents in the context of Nuxeo ECM. Therefore, we propose to provide some extensions to annotea. Using the repository plugin, it provides a plugable system to be able to keep track of the relationship between an annotated URL and the underlying nuxeo document.
Inside Nuxeo EP we need to be able to annotate the HTML preview of a document. This preview may include images. This images are annotable as the rest of the document, but it requires an extension to the Xpointer specification since user may want to annotate just a portion (zone) of the image.
This section provides an overview of the logical architecture of the Nuxeo Annotation service.
Annotation Service API
nuxeo-platform-annotations-api
Provides Java API and all the needed Java artifacts needed to call the Annotation service remotely.
Annotation Service Core
nuxeo-platform-annotations-core
Provides the Nuxeo Service that exposes the required annotation Java Interface. This service is implemented as a Nuxeo Runtime component and will provide the needed extension points .
Annotation Service Facade
nuxeo-platform-annotations-facade
Provides the service EJB3 facade for remote (RMI) access.
Annotation Service Http gateway
nuxeo-platform-annotations-http
The HTTP Gateway implements the Annotea HTTP protocol. It is implemented as a servlet that enable access to the annotation service via http GET/POST requests as defined in the W3C Annotea specification.
Annotation Service Web Interface
nuxeo-platform-annotations-web
The web interface provides ways to annotate document.
Annotea uses XPointer to annotates part of a web pages. We added a image-range function to XPointer to be able to annotates part of an image. A XPointer using image-range looks like: "http://example.com/foo.html#xpointer(image-range(/html[1]/body[0]/img[0],[79,133],[123,159]))". The form is "image-range(location-set , [tlX,tlY], [brX,brY])", with the location-set defined in the XPointer documentation, pointing to an image. tlX, tlY, brX and brY are integer for the top left X, top left Y, bottom right X and bottom right Y coordinates of a square within the annotated original image (as stored on the server). That is, if the size of the image is dynamically modified using Javascript, an image-range should always point to the same area of the image.
This is the main component of NXAS, the one that contains all the logic for managing RDF based annotations. The Core Service is not document aware and manages only URIs.
A URL is "http://foo.com/index.html", a URN doesn't use a protocol: "nuxeo:default:12345678". A URI is a URL or a URN.
This component is also responsible for exposing all the needed extension points that will be used for configuration and integration.
The service is implemented as a Runtime service on top of a Nuxeo Runtime component. The runtime component provides the extension point mechanisms. The API provided by the service will target managing annotations on URLs.
As any Nuxeo Service, the Annotation Service is accessible via the Runtime lookup method :
Framework.getLocalService(AnnotationService.class)
The core function of the annotation service is to add/remove/query annotations from the RDF Graph. It also has to provide security and add configurability. The implementation separates those 2 functions in 2 classes: The AnnotationServiceProxy class implements all the configuration, event management and security function and let the AnnotationServiceImpl provides the core RDF service.
The Annotation service stores the annotations as a RDF graph. Nuxeo Relation Service is responsible for storing and managing the RDF data. The service uses a graph named "annotations". The default contribution is:
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.annotations.graph">
<require>org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.relations.jena</require>
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.relations.services.RelationService"
point="graphs">
<graph name="annotations" type="jena">
<option name="backend">sql</option>
<option name="databaseType">${org.nuxeo.ecm.sql.jena.databaseType}</option>
<option name="databaseTransactionEnabled">
${org.nuxeo.ecm.sql.jena.databaseTransactionEnabled}
</option>
<option name="datasource">java:/nxrelations-default-jena</option>
<namespaces>
<namespace name="rdf">http://www.w3.org/1999/02/22-rdf-syntax-ns#</namespace>
<namespace name="dcterms">http://purl.org/dc/terms/</namespace>
<namespace name="nuxeo">http://www.nuxeo.org/document/uid/</namespace>
</namespaces>
</graph>
</extension>
</component>Refer to the Relation Service documentation ( Chapter 24, Relations ) for more information on configuration options.
The uriResolver extension point allows to contribute a class that is responsible for resolving uri. It maps URI sent by the client to URI stored in the graph. It also allows to translate a URI in a list of URIs when querying the graph.
This allows to consider annotations on different URLs to be considered as annotations on the same document, therefore being able to see those annotations on both URLs.
To contribute a uriResolver contribute to the extension point a class that implements the UriResolver interface. The default contribution is:
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.annotations.services.AnnotationsService"
point="uriResolver">
<urlResolver
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.annotations.service.DefaultUriResolver"/>
</extension>
The DefaultUriResolver maps URI without changing them, unless it includes "nuxeo/Annotations" in its URL. In such a case, it transform the URL in a URN of the form "urn:annotation:***".
The urlPatternFilter extension point allows to contribute regular expression pattern to the list of allowed URL pattern or disallowed URL pattern. When a request is made to get/set annotations on an URL, the server check the list.
The check is done before any transformation on the URL. Because the check on URL is done very early in the processing of a request, to increase performance, it is recommended to use it whenever possible.
The filter follows Apache's mod_access convention to filter URL. The default contribution is:
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.annotations.services.AnnotationsService"
point="urlPatternFilter">
<urlPatternFilter order="Deny,Allow">
<deny>.*</deny>
<allow>.*</allow>
</urlPatternFilter>
</extension>
The metadata extension point allows to add metadata to an annotations when it is created. The contribution needs to implement the MetadataMapper interface. It is passed the annotation to which it can add the metadata. The default contribution:
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.annotations.services.AnnotationsService"
point="metadataMapper">
<metadataMapper
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.annotations.service.DefaultMetadataMapper">
</extension>
This contribution adds the date and creator to the annotation. Note that you can add metadata and modify the annotation before sending it to the service. You could choose to add the creation time using the local time of the client and add it to the annotation without using the metadatMapper.
The permissionManager extension point allows to contribute a class that checks before CRUD operations. The permissionMapper will maps permission name with operation.
The permissionMapper extension point allows to contribute the name of the permission to check before a CRUD operation. The default contribution is:
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.annotations.services.AnnotationsService"
point="permissionMapper">
<permissionMapper>
<createAnnotation>createAnnotation</createAnnotation>
<readAnnotation>readAnnotation</readAnnotation>
<updateAnnotation>updateAnnotation</updateAnnotation>
<deleteAnnotation>deleteAnnotation</deleteAnnotation>
</permissionMapper>
</extension>
The permissionManager extension point allows to contribute a class to check before CRUD operations. The default permission manager allows all operations to everybody:
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.annotations.services.AnnotationsService"
point="permissionManager">
<permissionManager
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.annotations.service.DefaultPermissionManager"/>
</extension>
The annotabilityManager extension point allows to
contribute a class to fine grain which documents can be
annotated. An implementation needs to implement the
interface
AnnotabilityManager
. The default annotability manager is:
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.annotations.services.AnnotationsService"
point="annotabilityManager">
<annotabilityManager
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.annotations.service.DefaultAnnotabilityManager"/>
</extension>It allows annotations on all URL.
When an annotation is created it is given a UID. This extension point allows to contribute a UID generator. The default contribution is:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.annotations.services.AnnotationsService" point="annotationIDGenerator"> <IDGenerator class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.annotations.service.DefaultIDGenerator"/> </extension>
This default contribution create a UID using java
java.util.UUID.randomUUID()
.
The eventManager extension point allows to contribute a
listener class to handle annotation related events. The
listener class has to implement the interface.
EventListener
. There is one method for each CRUD operation, before
and after the operation. The calls are made
synchronously. There is no default contribution to this
extension point.
NXAS core offers an implementation of an Annotea Server. It is "pure" RDF and relies on URI for resource identification. However, Nuxeo deals with versionned document. The repository plugin allows to contribute to the core module using Nuxeo's object of DocumentModel, ACP and Version.
The repository plugin contribute to Core NXAS, replacing most of the default contribution. You can then contribute to the repository plugin to tune security, annotability and more.
The Annotation Service uses URI exclusively, if you need to query using a DocumentModel, you need to obtain the URN for this document:
URNDocumentViewTranslator translator = new URNDocumentViewTranslator();
String documentId = documentModel.getId();
String serverName = coreSession.getRepositoryName();
URI uri = translator.getNuxeoUrn(serverName, documentId);
You can then use the uri for the query method.
This section describes the default contribution made to the annotation service. You should not change them if you use the repository plugin. To modify the repository plugin behavior, use its extension point ( Section 59.3.3.1, “ documentAnnotability ” ).
The permission are mapped to the document that is being annotated:
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.annotations.services.AnnotationsService"
point="permissionMapper">
<permissionMapper>
<createAnnotation>updateDocument</createAnnotation>
<readAnnotation>viewDocument</readAnnotation>
<updateAnnotation>updateDocument</updateAnnotation>
<deleteAnnotation>deleteDocument</deleteAnnotation>
</permissionMapper>
</extension>
The defaultNuxeoUriResolver transform the URI if it points to a Nuxeo document. The URI becomes a URN using the docId and repository name.
In addition to the default mapper, the DefaultNuxeoMetadataMapper add the company of the user.
The contribution to the annotability manager will call the documentAnnotabilityManager.
The documentAnnotability extension point allows to
choose which document are annotable. To contribute
to this point, create a class that implement
DocumentAnnotability
. The default implementation is (
DefaultDocumentAnnotability
), allows annotations on all documents.
The documentEventListener allows to contribute class that would be notify when an annotation is create, updated, read and deleted. Notification comes synchronously before and after the event. It is passed as parameter the annotation and the DocumentLocation of the the document being annoted.
A default contribution notify the JMS bus.
The security manager extension point allows to contribute a class that implements the SecurityManager interface. It fine grains security using NuxeoPrincipal, the permission checked and the DocumentMode.
The jcrLifecycleEventId and graphManagerEventListener allows to modify the RDF graph when an event happens in the repository. The jcrLifecycleEventId list the jms event we listen to. The graphManagerEventListener extension point allows to contribute a class that would be called when such event are received.
The default implementation is DocumentVersionnedGraphManager. It listens to the documentCheckedIn event. This event is sent when a new UUID is created for a document. The manager add, to each annotation that annotates the old UID, a new annotates statement with the new UID. The result is that when you version a document, the old version will have the same annotation than the new version, but annotation on the new version will not be seen in the old version.
The NXAS HTML Client is the a web interface that can be used by the end user. It is written in GWT. It can be configured in two ways. The "normal" Nuxeo way of extension point, or adding attribute or object to the html page to be read by the gwt module.
The WebAnnotationConfigurationService allows to contribute:
the different types of annotations you want to manage in your application. The default contribution provides the 6 annotea protocols types: SeeAlso, Question, Explanation, Example, Comment, Change and Advice.
the filters you may want to use in your application. They are displayed as button on the left side. The default contribution shows no filter.
the displayed fields: fields you want to display in the annotations list in addition to the icon and the date.
a class implementing the UserInfoMapper interface to add to the WebConfiguration
some informations about the current user.
a class implementing the WebPermission interface to let know to the client
if annotations are allowed or not on the current document.
For more informations and examples, see the files web-configuration-service-contrib.xml and web-configuration-service-framework.xml
located in the nuxeo-platform-annotations-web project.
The client uses a div with id "display" to add the annotation application to the current page.
To allow integration with the preview module, additional configuration is possible via a div with an id of "preview-setting". Each configuration is an attribute of the div.
imageOnly value should be true or false. If only the image should be annotated in the frame.
multipleImageAnnotation should be true or false. If more than one image should be annotated.
The annotation module uses 2 functions to transform the xpointer gotten from clicking on an image, and to transform a xpointer to a xpointer that make sens in the previewed image. It get the function from top[xPointerFilterPath] and top [pointerAdapter]. xPointerFilterPath and pointerAdapter are the value of the same named attribute.
The facade provides the integration of the service into JEE infrastructure. EJB3 Stateless Session Bean facade on top of the runtime service. This makes the Annotation Service remotable and accessible via the standard Nuxeo Lookup facility :
Framework.getService(AnnotationService.class)
This section is speaking about a Nuxeo addon that provides a new way to navigate in documents.
Virtual navigation is opposed to the physical navigation. The physical navigation is the intuitive way to browse your documents as you created them, folders contain documents. Virtual Navigation is based on meta-data linked with every documents. In Nuxeo 5 each document has a set of meta-data that make him more precise and rich. The Virtual Navigation can provide a navigation tree built on meta-data and more precisely on every vocabulary based data.
Now the basic Virtual Navigation configuration offers a navigation through coverage and through subjects. For each document it is possible to determine a country that is relative to the document and one or many subjects that corresponds well to it.
To activate the Virtual Navigation you have to add the Virtual Navigation addon in the plugin extension folder of your JBoss server. After restarting the server you can see a new widget in the left hand corner of Nuxeo 5. You can switch between navigation style easily.


The standard physical navigation is still here and the two Virtual Navigation are selectable on the right. As you can see the Virtual Navigation keeps a folder based navigation but this tree browsing is built from vocabularies defined in your Nuxeo 5 instance. Coverage and Subjects are 2 vocabularies that exist in the basic Nuxeo 5 configuration. You may know that tree based vocabularies are not limited in depth and you can have 2 or more level in your vocabulary, for example Coverage allows to select a continent and a country.
To have good results with Virtual Navigation you have to fill meta-data linked to documents. The Meta-Data view allows the user to provide his own meta-data. Select a country and/or subjects to make your Virtual Navigation efficient. See below to view the Meta-Data configuration screen.

When selecting a node in a Virtual Navigation tree it will execute a request to find every documents that contain the wanted meta-data. See the screen below for an example: if you select the Art/Architecture couple in the Subjects navigation tree, every documents that contains Art/Architecture in their Subjects meta-data will be displayed on screen.

The basic Virtual Navigation configuration, as seen above, offers 2 way to navigate through meta-data in addition to the classic physical navigation, by coverage and by subjects. Here is a complete walkthrough to add a new virtual navigation to a customized project.
You have to create a vocabulary that will be used for the new Virtual Navigation, keep in mind that you can set up a multi-level vocabulary, so you can imagine a vocabulary with parent and children. There is no limitation on this side.
You have to select the element in a schema that will store your vocabulary data. In the basic Nuxeo 5 configuration it is dublincore:coverage and dublincore:subjects that store vocabularies data for Virtual Navigation. If fact, when you select a country (coverage) in a document's meta-data, the country is stored in the dublincore:coverage element. It's not mandatory to select a dublincore element, you can select an element coming from your own schemas.
If you have a "only-one-level" vocabulary you can create a file to store it like this :
id, label, obsolete
"art","label.directories.topic.art","0"
"human sciences","label.directories.topic.humanscience","0"
"society","label.directories.topic.society","0"
"daily life","label.directories.topic.dailylife","0"
"technology","label.directories.topic.technology","0"
Example 60.1. Example to create your own vocabulary
If you have a "multi-level" vocabulary you have to split him
in sub vocabulary, and keep in mind that you have to indicate which
vocabulary element is the child of which parent vocabulary element, here
is an example, the full example can be found in Nuxeo 5 sources,
check topic.csv and subtopic.csv:
CONTENT OF THE FIRST FILE (parents) id, label, obsolete "art","label.directories.topic.art","0" "human sciences","label.directories.topic.humanscience","0" "society","label.directories.topic.society","0" "daily life","label.directories.topic.dailylife","0" "technology","label.directories.topic.technology","0" CONTENT OF THE SECOND FILE (with a "parent" parameter added) id, label, parent, obsolete "architecture","label.directories.subtopic.architecture","art","0" "comics","label.directories.subtopic.comics","art","0" "rights","label.directories.subtopic.rights","human sciences","0" "economy","label.directories.subtopic.economy","human sciences","0" ...
Example 60.2. Example to create your own multi-level vocabulary
When you have created your different files for vocabularies
you have to register them in an extension point as new vocabularies. In
an xml file that you won't forget to place in a OSGI-INF directory and
won't forget to register in the MANIFEST.MF file of the package, you
have to contribute the following extension point.
For a full example you can check the nxdirectories-contrib.xml file of the webapp-core package. Don't forget to use the xvocabulary schema if your vocabulary is a child of another, if the vocabulary is the first parent or is alone just use the vocabulary schema. Don't forget to indicate the parent if your vocabulary has more than one level with the following tag <parentDirectory></parentDirectory>.
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.directory.sql.SQLDirectoryFactory"
point="directories">
//here your new vocabularies contribution
</extension>
Example 60.3. How to register new vocabularies
The query based search service of Nuxeo 5 requires that you create a document type that will be a base for a document model to register data handled by the query. To understand it more here is an example:
You are browsing your documents by coverage. You are selecting the path Europe/France in the tree. The data Europe/France is the base of the query and need to be registered in a document model created from a document type. In this case the document type can be very simple, cause the query must register only one data at a time. Creating a document type with only one schema that contains one field will be enough.
This document type will be referenced as query document type in this walkthrough. Create it and register it as a normal document type. See Nuxeo Book part 6 to get more informations about document type creation.
Now you must contribute to another extension point to create a new navigation tree based on vocabularies you contributed just before. See below for an example of the file you have to create. For a full example you can see the directorytreemanager-contrib.xml file in the virtualNavigation package.
The new tree contribution needs many informations, a queryModel to indicate the query you will use to get your documents, a schema and a field coming from the query document type you just set up in part 3, an outcome that indicates the page where documents will be displayed after the request and a list of vocabularies you can indicate with the tag <directory></directory>.
<require>
org.nuxeo.ecm.webapp.directory.DirectoryTreeService
</require>
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.webapp.directory.DirectoryTreeService"
point="trees">
//here your new navigation tree contribution
</extension>
Example 60.4. How to register new navigation trees
Now you need to contribute to 2 extension points that will set up the query and the results provider. Here are the 2 extension point you will need to contribute. For a full example see the file querymodel-contrib.xml and resultsprovider-contrib.xml in the virtualNavigation package.
The query model contribution needs many information. In the docType parameter you have to put the name of the documentType you created in part 3. In the <predicate></predicate> tag you must set up the name of the element (field) that is the field storing the data used for virtual tree construction.
EXAMPLE :
You want to browse documents by coverage, each of your document have a coverage registered in dc:coverage field. You have to use the dc:coverage parameter.
If there is no prefix set the name like this schema:field, if there is a prefix set it up like this prefix:field. In the operator param put the value STARTSWITH. In the <field/> tag put the schema and the name of the field coming from the query document type you set up in part 3.
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.search.api.client.querymodel.QueryModelService" point="model"> //Here your new query model </extension> <extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.webapp.pagination.ResultsProviderService" point="model"> //Here your new result provider </extension>
Example 60.5. How to register query model and results provider
Now you need to register a new indexing configuration in the search service. You will index the field that register the data you want to apply the search on, it is the same data as saw at the end of part 5 . Here is the extension point you have to contribute. For a full example see the nxsearch-contrib.xml file in the search-core package.
You will have to create a new <resource></resource> tag if it doesn't exist for your schema. For the name parameter you have to put the name of your schema, type param must be "schema" and indexAllFields param must be "true". In a <field/> tag you have to indicate the indexing strategy, the type param must be "Path", if the field that register your vocabulary is a complexType (list of String for example) you can add the parameter multiple and set it at "true".
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.core.search.service.SearchServiceImpl"
point="resource">
//Here your new search configuration
</extension>
Example 60.6. How to register the search configuration
You must not forget to add some navigation cases in a deployment-frgament.xml file. Those navigation cases must correspond at each outcome you set up in part 3. Each page named in navigation cases shall display search result so you have to customize those pages with the good queryModel call. For a full example see coverage_virtual_navigation.xml .
All theme contributions and tree navigation widget already exist in webapp-core and virtualNavigation package, you can take a look for information purpose.
Indeed you have to add vitualNavigation to Nuxeo 5 plugin if you want a fully fonctional Virtual Navigation immediatly.
There are cases when some informations could be retrieved from attached files and keep this info as regular Document properties. This info is referred to as metadata as it is a descriptive info referring the document (file) from which it is extracted. For example given a MS Word document (file) we could retrieve info (metadata) like author, title, creation date etc, simply by reading document headers with an appropriate library (that knows how to parse and keep a MS Word document internal structure).
The metadata extraction feature is composed of several projects:
- nuxeo-platform-metadataext-api
- nuxeo-platform-metadataext-core
- nuxeo-platform-metadataext-facade
- nuxeo-platform-metadataext-plugins
The core part defines the metadata extraction component with a
MetaDataExtractionManager implementation:
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.metadataext.services.MetaDataExtractionService.
The service is normally invoked by a dedicated
CoreListener that passes a
DocumentModel for which an extraction could
be defined. Also the metadata could be extracted by direct invocation from
a client code through existing EJB3 facade.
The plugin part provides a plugin (more to come) which is specific to the MS-Word document type. The plugin is a Transformation Plugin (as defined by the Transformation service) and gets invoked as part of a defined transformation chain. The appropriate transformation will be called by the metadata extraction service if there is a contribution for the given Document type, etc.
A contribution can be defined by adding an XML file with the following structure:
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.metadataext.services.MetaDataExtraction"
point="extractions">
<meta-data-extraction inputField="file:content"
transformationName="MSWordMDExt">
<outputParams>
<param propertyName="dc:title">title</param>
<param propertyName="dc:description">comments</param>
<param propertyName="dc:created">creationDate</param>
<param propertyName="dc:modified">creationDate</param>
<param propertyName="dc:contributors">authors</param>
</outputParams>
<coreEvent>documentCreated</coreEvent>
<coreEvent>documentModified</coreEvent>
<docType>File</docType>
</meta-data-extraction>
</extension>
The important aspects for MetaDataExtraction service are:
- specification of a source (blob) from where metadata will be
extracted. This is defined by the value
inputField which should be a blob document
property.
- the mapping of output parameters. This defines a correspondence between the map entries returned as the result of transformation (extraction) and the Document properties names to which the results will be written back.
- the list of core events for which the extraction will be performed.
- the list of document types for which the extraction can be applied.
If the extraction is requiring additional information aside from the provided blob, we can add input parameters to an extraction definition like this:
<inputParams> <param propertyName="dc:title">title</param> </inputParams>
A map with input parameters will be
passed to the extraction plugin having the key the value of tag
param (in this case 'title').
In extreme cases the extractions of metadata could be performed in several steps. That is using the extracted parameters in phase as input parameters for the next phase. This could be achieved by specifying the input params whose values could have been set by a previous extraction (transformation).
We first define a class implementing
org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.interfaces.Plugin
interface like:
public class MSWordMDExtractorPlugin extends AbstractPlugin {
@Override
public List<TransformDocument> transform(Map<String, Serializable> options,
TransformDocument... sources) throws Exception {
...
}
...
}
Overriding the transform method is a must and
in this case we will have only one
TransformDocument as source.
The blob from which metadata could be extracted can be retrieved
from TransformDocument like: Blob
srcBlob = sources[0].getBlob().
After the useful information is extracted the properties should be
set to a TransformDocument that will be
returned:
TransformDocumentImpl res = new TransformDocumentImpl();
res.setPropertyValue("title", extractedTitle);
Having a plugin class defined that knows how to extract information from a specific type of file (MS Word document, MS Excel, PDF, OO doc etc) we can add the contributions necessary for the metadata extraction to take place.
We need to define first the transformation plugin and the transformation contributions. After that the defined transformation can be referred in the metadata extraction specific contribution.
Step 1: define the transformation plugin:
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.service.TransformService"
point="plugins">
<documentation>
Set of default transformation plugins for metadata extraction.
</documentation>
<plugin name="MSWordMDExtPlugin"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.metadataext.plugins.MSWordMDExtractorPlugin"
destinationMimeType="application/msword">
<sourceMimeType>application/msword</sourceMimeType>
</plugin>
</extension>
Step 2: define the transformation:
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.service.TransformService"
point="transformers">
<documentation>
Set of default transformation chains for metadata extraction.
</documentation>
<transformer name="MSWordMDExt"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.transform.transformer.TransformerImpl">
<plugins>
<plugin name="MSWordMDExtPlugin" />
</plugins>
</transformer>
</extension>
Step 3: define the metadata extraction specific contribution
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.metadataext.services.MetaDataExtraction"
point="extractions">
<meta-data-extraction inputField="file:content"
transformationName="MSWordMDExt">
...
This last one is refering to the above defined transformation.
The Unicity service sends a new Message on the JMS bus every time you upload a file already on the server.
When creating or updating a file, a digest is computed using the whole file and an encoding algorithm. Next step is an nxql query wich gets every Document with the same Digest. If such documents exist, there references will be forwarded on JMS bus.
The message's eventID is duplicatedFile. You need it to catch the event. The documentLocation list is available in the info map of the CoreEvent using duplicatedDocLocation key.
How to configure unicity extension point. TODO: needs to be made clearer.
<enabled> Default value is false. Use true if you want to enable this service. </enabled> <algo> Default encoding algorithm is sha-256. You can choose every algorithm supported by java.security.MessageDigest. </algo> <field> A field is an xpath expression giving a particular field of your schema. It's the reference of a file on the server. The type's field must be nxs:content. You can use as many field as you want. </field>
Some code to get you started.
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.filemanager.service.FileManagerService.Plugins">
<extension
target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.filemanager.service.FileManagerService"
point="unicity">
<unicitySettings>
<enabled>true</enabled>
<algo>sha-256</algo>
<field>content</field>
</unicitySettings>
</extension>
</component>
Example 62.1. Sample unicity extension point contribution to the FileManager service.
public void onMessage(Message message) {
try {
Serializable obj = ((ObjectMessage) message).getObject();
if (!(obj instanceof DocumentMessage)) {
return;
}
DocumentMessage doc = (DocumentMessage) obj;
String eventId = doc.getEventId();
if ("duplicatedFile".equals(eventId)){
Object[] documentLocations = (Object[]) doc.getEventInfo().get("duplicatedDocLocation");
for (Object documentLocation: documentLocations) {
log.debug(((DocumentLocation)documentLocation).getDocRef());
}
}
}
}
Example 62.2. Sample code to retrieve DocumentLocations.
Nuxeo mail service enables users to send and receive mail. It also makes it possible to apply a series of actions on messages located in folders.
The service is a wrapper around JavaMail . Knowledge of this API is necessary for advance use of the service.
Use of the mail service is done via session. You need to configure a session factory that will be able to find the correct server parameter to connect to. Then, the session can use the mail server. The simplest scenario is to have mails sent and received using the credential of one user (see property fetcher for more complex use).
To pass the server parameter in your extension point, use a simple properties fetcher. For a server using TLS connection with SMTP and IMAP, a configuration could look like:
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.MailService"
point="sessionFactory">
<sessionFactory name="mysession" fetcherName="simple">
<properties>
<property name="mail.store.protocol">imap</property>
<property name="mail.transport.protocol">smtp</property>
<property name="mail.smtp.port">587</property>
<property name="mail.host">mail.mycompany.com</property>
<property name="mail.smtp.host">mail.mycompany.com</property>
<property name="mail.imap.starttls.enable">true</property>
<property name="mail.imap.ssl.protocols">TLS</property>
<property name="mail.smtp.ssl.protocols">TLS</property>
<property name="mail.user">mailuser@mycompany.com</property>
<property name="mail.from">mailuserd@mycompany.com</property>
<property name="mail.imap.port">143</property>
<property name="password">myuserpassword</property>
<property name="user">maiuser@mycompany.com</property>
</properties>
</sessionFactory>
</extension>
With such a configuration you can send mails using the mail service, passing the text of the mail as a String.
MailService mailService = Framework.getService(MailService.class);
mailService.sendMail("My interesting mail.", "The subject of the mail",
"mysession", new Address {internetAddress});
To process mails in mail folders, you need to create a pipe and add actions to it. Each action in the pipe will be applied to each mail in the folder. A typical pipe will include action to set the delete flag so the mail is deleted when the pipe exits, transforms the mail, stores it, and maybe answers it. For all those actions to communicate with each other, you can pass objects into the context. Context is passed from action to action.
The package org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.mail.action contains a set of
Action classes you can use or extend. Note that some actions expect
objects to be in the map.
A MessageAction is an action done on a message:
public interface MessageAction {
boolean execute(ExecutionContext context) throws Exception;
void reset(ExecutionContext context) throws Exception;
}Message message = context.getMessage();
String infoFromPreviousAction = context.get("info.from.previous.action");
context.put("info.for.next.action", "don't save this message");If the returned value of an action is false, then the processing of this message is stopped and the next message will be processed.
The MailBoxAction enables using those service in a simple way, a typical use would be:
MailBoxActions mba = mailService.getMailBoxActions("mySimpleFactory", "INBOX");
mba.addAction(new ConvertToDocumentModelAction());
mba.addAction(new StoreDocumentModelAction());
mba.addAction(new SendMailReplyAction());
mba.execute();
The Mail Service provides access to JavaMail object for advanced use:
Store getConnectedStore(String name) throws MessagingException; Store getConnectedStore(String name, Map<String, Object> context) throws MessagingException; Transport getConnectedTransport(String name) throws MessagingException; Transport getConnectedTransport(String name, Map<String, Object> context) throws MessagingException; Session getSession(String name); Session getSession(String name, Map<String, Object> context);
The mail service comes with a simple fetcher. The simple fetcher enables passing the configuration for the mail server using key/value pair. If you need more complex configuration, such as having specific properties for each user fetched from a directory, you can contribute a new fetcher using the propertiesFetcher extension point.
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.MailService"
point="propertiesFetcher">
<propertiesFetcher name="simple"
class="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.mail.fetcher.SimplePropertiesFetcher"/>
</extension>
To test your mail service, jes mail
server is a simple, light weight mail server you can use locally.
You can either start it manually or use the
nuxeo-platform-mail-test bundle to do
it.
Nuxeo Platform Imaging provides picture management to Nuxeo Web Platform and RCP. It offers minor picture transformation like rotation or resizing.
There are several Imaging addons for the Nuxeo platforms. They are listed in the following sections.
This addon provides a pluggable adapter for picture manipulation. It makes it possible to manipulate images resources that are not documents (in the document type sense) themselves. Concretely, it makes it possible to still use the Seam component that deals with images for some processings (for example rotation and resizing) but adapted to a specific schema.
This addon is where the available transformations are stored. Available transformations are rotation, resizing and cropping for the following image types: JPEG, GIF, BMP, TIFF. PNG is sadly not supported yet.
This addon provides Picture and PictureBook document types as well as drag'n drop plugin, slideshows or thumbnails.
This core addon provides services for common picture processing operation, metadata extraction and mime-type detection. With this addon, one can choose the picture processing library to use through the library selector service. Right now the available libraries are Mistral and ImageJ.
The nuxeo-platform-preview addon provides services,
transformers and adapters to generate HTML previews from of a Nuxeo
DocumentModel.
The preview addon is composed of several layers:
UI part
Adds a Preview tab that displays the preview inside an IFRAME.
Transformer part
The Preview addon contributes transformers that are dedicated to generating HTML out of most file formats.
Service and Adapters
The Preview addon includes services that allow you to define
PreviewAdapters for each type of
Document. These adapters are responsible for defining how the preview
will be generated:
define the field(s) used for preview
Because a Nuxeo document contains a lot of different fields, the adapter must determine what are the default fields used to generate the preview.
define how preview is generated
Basically preview can be generated using some transformers or using some fields that already contains pre-generated HTML preview
The services provided by the Preview addon let you configure the
PreviewAdapter depending on your
document types and manage some cache for transformer based
previews.
Installing the Preview addon is fairly simple.
Since Nuxeo 5.3, the nuxeo-platform-preview-5.X.jar is
already deployed in the nuxeo.ear/system/ directory.
The preview service relies on HTML transformers that uses external tools to achieve the transformation. You need to have them installed and configured before the preview addon will work.
The preview service comes with two HTML transformers:
PDF2Html
This transformer generates HTML from PDF files.
This transformer relies on the command line tool
pdftohtml This tool can be found as package
for most linux distrib (for instance, included in
poppler-utils in Ubuntu). This tool can also
be installed on MS Windows platform, see http://sourceforge.net/projects/pdftohtml/
Once you have installed pdftohtml on
your server, you must configure Nuxeo to let him know where is the
command line tool. For this, you can use a extension point to define
what is the temporary directory to use and where is
pdftohtml command.
Default settings should be ok for most Linux, but you will have to do the configuration if you use a MS Windows box.
To do this configuration, create a file named
pdftohtml-config.xml in the
nuxeo.ear/config directory
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="myproject.pdftohtml.config.contrib">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.preview.transformers.CLTransformerPluginParameterManagerComponent"
point="cltpParameters">
<CLTranformerPluginParameters name="Pdf2HtmlParams" targetTransformerPlugin="Pdf2Html">
<parameters>
<!-- default Linux parameters
<parameter name="commandString">/usr/bin/pdftohtml</parameter>
<parameter name="tmpDir">/tmp/</parameter> -->
<!-- MS Windows parameters -->
<parameter name="commandString">C:\\Program files\\pdftohtml\\pdftohtml.exe</parameter>
<parameter name="tmpDir">C:\\Temp\\</parameter>
</parameters>
</CLTranformerPluginParameters>
</extension>
</component>
Any2Html
This Transformer is in fact a chain using
Any2pdf and
PDF2html. This means you need to have
PDF2html working but also OpenOffice.org
in listen mode (this is documented earlier in this book).
The Preview addon provides several extension solutions.
Preview AddOn uses the standard
DocumentModelAdpater system. For that it defines
a HtmlPreviewAdapter interface that must be
implemented by each adapters. In order to let you choose the Adapter
implementation according to the Document type, the
DocumentAdapterFactory used for the
HtmlPreviewAdapter is pluggable. This factory
uses the PreviewAdapterManager service to
determine what implementation of the
HtmlPreviewAdapter should be returned when you
use
doc.getAdapter(HtmlPreviewAdapter.class)
.
Defining custom preview adapter is done via a dedicated extension
point: you register a Factory for a given DocumentType. This factory
will be used to create the implementation of the
HtmlPreviewAdapter from the DocumentModel. Here
is example of such a contribution:
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.preview.adapter.contrib">
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.preview.adapter.PreviewAdapterManagerComponent"
point="AdapterFactory">
<previewAdapter name="notePreviewAdapter" enabled="true">
<typeName>Note</typeName>
<class>org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.preview.adapter.factories.NotePreviewAdapter</class>
</previewAdapter>
</extension>
</component>
This contribution defines the Adapter factory for the Note Document
type. Contributed factories must implement the
PreviewAdapterFactory interface (that contains
only one method!).
The implementation returned by the factory can be based on one of the 2 base classes provided inside the addon.
TransformerBasedHtmlPreviewAdapter
This base class provides all the build in features to create a preview adapter that uses the Transformation Services to generate the html preview.
Default usage in Nuxeo is the generic adapter for the all the
documents that contains the file
schema.
PreprocessedHtmlPreviewAdapter
This base class provides all the build in features to create a preview adapter that uses pre-processed HTML preview that is stored inside the document.
Default usage in Nuxeo is the adapter for the Note Document type.
For most usages, you just be able to contribute a factory that
create a new PreprocessedHtmlPreviewAdapter
with the good arguments.
The Preview addon contributes some command line based transformers.
It also provides you with a base class
AbstractCommandLineBasedTransformer that can be
used to easily make another CommandLine based Transformer.
We also provide a
CLTransformerPluginParameterManager service that
is used by the base class to extact the configurable parameters.
The preview addon includes a restlet.
This restlet provides a RESTful access to the preview service. This means that you can retrieve the preview of a document by just using a simple GET URL.
Preview URLs have this form :
http://{server}:{port}/nuxeo/restAPI/preview/{document_uuid}/{previewfield}/where:
document_uuid
is the the document uuid that is already present in all Nuxeo urls
previewfield
is the xpath of the field that should be used as main file for the preview
Depending on the underlying adapter implementation, this field may or may not be relevant. Use 'default' to let the adapter implementation choose the right field for you.
Please note that the last / is important. As HTML preview can contain nested images, the base URL must end with a /. The Restlet system handles a cache to avoid refetching the preview data at each call.
The nuxeo-platform-imaging-tiling addon provides a service and adapters to generate picture tiles from a DocumentModel containing a picture or from a blob.
Tiling picture is useful when you want to display in a web browser a very big image : according to the display settings and to the zoom level, the picture tiling service will generate you the needed picture tiles.
The Tiling Service addOn is composed of several layers :
REST API part
Provides a rest API to get the picture tiles from the server.
Depending of the URL, this API could be used to get the actual tiles (ie: picture), or to get information about the picture and the tile grid (XML or JSON).
Adapter part
An DocumentModelAdapter is provided to adapt the DocumentModel interface to an interface dedicated to picture tiling.
Default adapter simply extract the blob from the DocumentModel using either the default file schema, or using a provided xPath.
Other adapters can be provided to implement specific logic for source picture retrieval (like multi-view-pictures) or even extract pre-computed tiles from the DB.
Tiling Service
This service is responsible for :
managing tiles cache
Because picture tiling can be long, this service maintains a FileSystem based cache of the input pictures, the generated tiles, and also some temporary resources used by the tiling process.
The service also manage a configurable garbage collector to clean up this cache.
manage PictureTilers
A PictureTiler is a Java Class that can extract a tile from a picture.
Current implementation provides ImageMagick based and Gimp based PictureTiler.
Default configuration requires ImageMagick :
because it is faster
because some treatments can not be done via gimp
because setup is easier
In order to define a tiling you will need to define 4 input parameters:
The input picture.
This input is represented by the ImageResource className in the API.
This ImageResource is usually provided via a DocumentModel adapter that will encapsulate the logic to find the input picture and will create a DocumentImageResource.
You may also directly create a BlobResource from a simple Blob.
The tiles width in pixel
The tiles height in pixel
The maximum number of tiles X/Y
This parameter represents the maximum number of tiles on the X or Y axis, that are needed to display the complete picture.
Basically it represent the grid size you will need to display the complete image using this tiling.
As you may have noticed the zoom factor is not an input parameter. In fact it is an output parameter : the service will compute the zoom factor that correspond to the tiling definition.
This choice may seem strange, but in most of the case, this is easier to use : you don't always know the size of the underlying image, but you know the space you have to display the tiled image (total width/height and number of tiles) and you know that you want to start with an image that is fully displayed.
Here is a quick explanation on how the tiling service work.
compute needed picture size.
From the tiling grid definition, the service will compute the needed input picture size.
find a scaled down picture if available
When the needed picture size is really smaller that the real input image, it may be interesting to generate a scaled down image.
This will slow down the process for the computation of the first tile, but will speed up the computation of all other tiles.
This is particularly true for format like JPEG that support to easily extract from them a smaller image.
This speed up the reading part (less bytes to read from DB/Hard Drive) and speed up the final scaling.
When scaling down the input picture is possible, the resulting image will be stored into the cache.
select the tiler
let the tiler do it's job
Depending on the tiler implementation, it may generate one tile at a tile (default for ImageMagick based tiler) or 9 tiles at a time (default for gimp tiler) or all tiles (possible for gimp tiler).
This behavior is transparent for the caller since, all generated tiles are cached.
ImageMagick 6.3.7 or later is needed : the Tiling Service uses the ImageMagick stream command that is not available in 6.2 (associated packages are libmagick and imagemagick).
Current implementation has only be tested under Linux.
If you want to use the Gimp tiler, you will need Gimp 2.x with python extensions.
Since Nuxeo 5.3, the nuxeo-platform-imaging-tiling-XXX.jar is
already deployed in the nuxeo.ear/system/ directory.
Configuration can be done using a extension point. Just create a file called pictures-tiles-config.xml in nuxeo.ear/config.
Use this extension point contrib to :
define the imagemagick command path (if default is not ok)
define the directory that will be used for cache
define the cachesize
define the GC parameters
NB : default config should be ok for any linux based system where imagemagick is setup via the package manager
Here is an example of a configuration file :
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<component name="my.projects.tiles.config">
<require>org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.pictures.tiles.default.config</require>
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.platform.pictures.tiles.service.PictureTilingComponent"
point="environment">
<environment>
<parameters>
<!-- Gimp path variables -->
<parameter name="GimpExecutable">gimp</parameter>
<!-- ImageMagick path variables -->
<parameter name="IMConvert">convert</parameter>
<parameter name="IMIdentify">identify</parameter>
<parameter name="IMStream">stream</parameter>
<!-- global env variables -->
<parameter name="WorkingDirPath">/tmp/</parameter>
<!-- Max Disk cache usage in KB -->
<parameter name="MaxDiskSpaceUsageForCache">50000</parameter>
<!-- GC Interval in Minutes -->
<parameter name="GCInterval">10</parameter>
</parameters>
</environment>
</extension>
</component>
The tiling service can be very easily tested.
The Rest API for the tiling service use the following url pattern :
http://{server}/nuxeo/restAPI/getTiles/{repoId}/{docUUID}/{tWidth}/{tHeight}/{maxTiles}?format={format}&x={x}&y={y}
where
{server}
is the server DNS name of IP
{repoId}
is the id of the core repository that is used (use default if you don't know what it is).
{docUUI}
The uuid of the document that contains the image. If you use the default adapter, this document must use the fileschema and contain an image.
{tWidth}
the width in pixel of the tiles.
{tHeight}
the height in pixel of the tiles.
{maxTiles}
maximum number of tiles X/Y for the full image
{format}
the format of the tile information (JSON/XML)
this is used only if x and y are not supplied
{x}
x of the tile to be generated (starting from 0)
{y}
y of the tile to be generated (starting from 0)
Here are some examples :
http://server/nuxeo/restAPI/getTiles/default/950b0d27-2ca4-43e4-bb12-598ad6d64e86/200/150/2
Will send you the tiling information in XML for the picture contained in the doc 950b0d27-2ca4-43e4-bb12-598ad6d64e86 with a tile size of 200x150x2.
http://server/nuxeo/restAPI/getTiles/default/950b0d27-2ca4-43e4-bb12-598ad6d64e86/200/150/2?format=JSON
Will send you the tiling information in JSON for the picture contained in the doc 950b0d27-2ca4-43e4-bb12-598ad6d64e86 with a tile size of 200x150x2.
http://server/nuxeo/restAPI/getTiles/default/950b0d27-2ca4-43e4-bb12-598ad6d64e86/200/150/2?x=1&y=1
Will send you the tile (1,1) for the picture contained in the doc 950b0d27-2ca4-43e4-bb12-598ad6d64e86 with a tile size of 200x150x2.
The RestAPI provide a very basic test client. This test client was used during the development : this client is not pretty, not IE compliant, not dummy user proof.
You can access this test client via the rest API, just add the test=true to the URL.
http://server/nuxeo/restAPI/getTiles/default/950b0d27-2ca4-43e4-bb12-598ad6d64e86/200/150/2?test=true
The nuxeo-platform-documentLink addon provides services,
and adapters to handle "application level" proxies pointing to DocumentModels.
There are several use cases that require having the same document available from several places. Typical use cases include publication (same document visible in multiple sections), personal workspaces (user want to have some document into his workspace without copying them) ... Nuxeo Core provides a build-in feature called Proxies that can be used in most cases. The current limitations of proxy system in Nuxeo Core 1.4.x include :
A proxy can only point to a checked-in DocumentModel (ie : a version)
A proxy is always totally equivalent to the target DocumentModel (ie : same schemas and field values)
DocumentLink provides a proxy system implementation on top of the Core using the DocumentModel adapter system. DocumentLink extends the Core proxy system to provide some additional features :
A DocumentLink can point to a checked-in or checked-out DocumentModel
A DocumentLink can have it's own schemas and fields.
A DocumentLink can mask some of the schemas/fields of the target DocumentModel
As an example, if you have a DocumentModel DocA with title "Document A" and description "description A", you can create a DocumentLink DLA that will point to DocA and have title "DocLink A" but will always return the description contained in DocA.
The DocumentLink system uses DocumentModelAdapter to adapt the default DocumentModel implementation to a specific implementation that handles the logic for dispatching attributes access across the DocumentLink and the target Document.
The DocumentLink adapter (DocumentLinkAdapter)implements the DocumentModel interface and will by default have the felowing behavior :
get internal DocumentModel value if the target schema/field is available.
return the value stored inside the target DocumentModel otherwise.
The reference of the target DocumentModel is stored in a dedicated schemas (named documentLink).
This specific schema contains :
target DocumentRef
target DocumentRepository
list of schema that will never be masked by the DocumentLink
This means that for this schema the DocumentLink will always return the values stored in the target DocumentModel even if the DocumentLink it self has these schemas.
list of fields xPaths that will never be masked by the DocumentLink
The DocumentLink package also provides a indexing wrapper that will be used during indexing. This allows the DocumentLink to be indexed as expected.
In implementation projects using DocumentLink, we usually don't really care to know where the real (target) DocumentModel will be stored, because the user will probably always manipulate the DocumentModel through DocumentLinks.
In a way, it means that the real DocumentModels are "somewhere is space" and the user navigate via a hierarchy of DocumentLinks.
For that purpose, the documentLink package provide a DocRepository service that will manage the storage of the real DocumentModel.
"Real DocumentModel" won't be stored "in space" but in a hidden folder structure that will dispatch the DocumentModels in a hidden tree.
The repository storage is pluggable so you can define :
the sub directory tree structure
how rights are set
In order to use DocumentLink feature you need to install the nuxeo-platform-documenntlink packages into your nuxeo. For that, just copy the jars into nuxeo.ear/plugins and restart your server.
On a stock Nuxeo EP, documentLink won't give you much visible features : it provides some new API, but since the default Web Application does not use it, it won't be really useful. The DocumentLink Addon must be considered as a new API.
One of the DocumentLink package is dedicated to unit tests (nuxeo-platform-documentlink-tests), it can be used as a good sample of code for using all DocumentLink APIs.
Nevertheless, here are some simple examples :
The DocumentLinkAdapter is available on any DocumentModel that has the DocumentLink Schema.
Using the adapter you can define the target DocumentModel and the masked schemas, but you can also have a full access to the DocumentModel API .
String startPath="/default-domain/ws1";
// create a simple DocumentModel
DocumentModel doc = coreSession.createDocumentModel(startPath, "file", "File");
doc.setProperty("dublincore", "title", "MyDoc");
doc.setProperty("dublincore", "coverage", "MyDocCoverage");
doc = coreSession.createDocument(doc);
// create a DocumentModel with the DocumentLink type
DocumentModel link = coreSession.createDocumentModel(startPath, "link","DocumentLink");
link.setProperty("dublincore", "title", "MyLinkToDoc");
link = coreSession.createDocument(link);
// get the DocumentLinkAdapter
DocumentLinkAdapter adaptedLink = link.getAdapter(DocumentLinkAdapter.class);
// set the target DocumentModel
adaptedLink.setTargetDocument(doc);
// check property access
// check property accessor pass-throught
String cover1 = (String) link.getProperty("dublincore", "coverage");
String cover2 = (String) adaptedLink.getProperty("dublincore","coverage");
assertNotNull(cover2);
assertEquals("MyDocCoverage", cover2);
// check automatic override (title)
String title0 = (String) doc.getProperty("dublincore", "title");
String title1 = (String) link.getProperty("dublincore", "title");
String title2 = (String) adaptedLink.getProperty("dublincore", "title");
// adapter and documentModel direct Access return the same value
assertEquals(title1, title2);
// DocumentLink do not return the title of the target since it's overridden
assertFalse(title1.equals(title0));
DocumentLink provides static helpers to help you create DocumentLinks and use the DocRepository.
DocumentModel dm = coreSession.createDocumentModel("File");
dm.setProperty("dublincore", "title", "testme");
// create a new DocumentLink of type DocumentLink
// create it in / path
// make it point to the dm DocumentModel that will be stored somewhere in the DocRepository
DocumentLinkAdapter adaptedLink = DocumentLinkHelper
.createDocumentInCentralRepository(coreSession, dm, "/",
"DocumentLink");
coreSession.save();
// get the create target DocumentModel
DocumentModel targetDoc = adaptedLink.getTargetDocument();
// get the Repository
DocRepository repo = DocRepositoryHelper.getDocumentRepository(coreSession);
// get all the DocumentLinks
DocumentModelList proxies = repo.getProxiesForDocument(targetDoc.getRef());
assertTrue(proxies.size()==1);
// create a second DocumentLink pointing to the same target
DocumentLinkAdapter secondLink=DocumentLinkHelper.createDocumentLink(targetDoc, "/");
coreSession.save();
// get all the DocumentLinks
proxies = repo.getProxiesForDocument(targetDoc.getRef());
assertTrue(proxies.size()==2);
This chapter presents the architecture of the
nuxeo-searchcenter
GWT client to the Search Service (new in Nuxeo 5.2).
The Nuxeo Search Center is a standalone GWT application that can be deployed on a Webengine site in order to provide an AJAX interface to perform queries on the document repository.
TODO: add a screenshot here
First of all, Nuxeo Search Center depends on nuxeo-gwt modules, so the first thing to do is to build and install the nuxeo-gwt projects.
hg clone https://hg.nuxeo.org/nuxeo/nuxeo-gwt cd nuxeo-gwt mvn clean install
Then you need the Nuxeo Search Center projects.
hg clone https://hg.nuxeo.org/nuxeo-searchcenter cd nuxeo-searchcenter mvn clean install
To get the Nuxeo Search Center working on Nuxeo, only those 3 jars are needed:
nuxeo-gwt-server-5.2-xxx.jar
nuxeo-searchcenter-gwt-app-5.2-xxx.jar
nuxeo-searchcenter-service-5.2-xxx.jar
To deploy it, drop these 3 jars:
in nuxeo.ear/plugins on JBoss.
in bundles on Webengine standalone (Jetty).
Restart your server, and you can access Nuxeo Search Center at the following urls:
http://localhost:8080/nuxeo/site/searchcenter on JBoss.
http://localhost:8080/searchcenter on Webengine standalone (Jetty).
The Nuxeo Search Center application is also listed with the others Webengine applications at
http://localhost:8080/nuxeo/site or http://localhost:8080/.
TODO: go to
http://localhost:8080/site/
and
... .
The current search can be saved from the graphical interface. It will send the current FilterSet, which contains all the FilterWidgets descriptions and their values, to the SearchCenterService. The FilterSet is saved as a DocumentModel on the user personnal Workspace (cf. nuxeo-platform-userworkspace add-on).
A ComboBox lists all the available FilterSets : the contributed ones and the saved ones which the current user can access. When a FilterSet is selected and the load button pressed, the list of FilterWidgets is rebuild, their default values are setted and the query is regenerated and executed.
The Nuxeo Search Center application is composed of 3 different parts.
The UI part is built upon Google Web Toolkit, and particularly with SmartGWT
The client part lies in the nuxeo-searchcenter-gwt-app project.
The JAX-RS part of Nuxeo Search Center lies in the class SearchCenterModule located in
nuxeo-searchcenter-gwt-app/src/main/java/org/nuxeo/ecm/searchcenter/module.
Here are the main methods, defined in SearchCenterModule, used by Nuxeo Search Center:
getVocabulary, used to get the values list of a given simple vocabulary. It returns the list in a JSON format understandable by the SmartGWT widgets.
getHierarchicalVocabulary, used to get the values list of a given hierarchical vocabulary. It returns the list in a JSON format understandable by the SmartGWT widgets.
execQuery, used to create the Query from the list of filtering values, and execute it by calling the SearchCenterService. It returns a document list in a JSON format understandable by the SmartGWT widgets.
getFilterSet, used to get a FilterSet by its name or id. It returns a FilterSet description in a JSON format used to build the different widgets.
getFilterSets, used to get all the available FilterSets. It returns a list of FilterSet descriptions in a JSON format used to fill the FilterSet load ComboBox.
saveFilterSet, used to save the current search. It takes in parameter the JSON representation of the current FilterSet.
The SearchCenterService is defined in the project nuxeo-searchcenter-service. Its purpose is to manage the FilterSets and FilterWidgets and generate and execute the QueryModel from the values entered by the user.
A helper class (SearchCenterHelper) is used to call the service methods and serialize the results in JSON format. This helper is called by some of the JAX-RS methods like execQuery and getFilterSet.
To register a FilterWidget, you need to write a contribution with an extension to the SearchCenterService like :
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.searchcenter.service.SearchCenterService" point="filterWidget">
<filterWidget
name="dc_subjects"
index="dc:subjects"
title="Subjects"
type="hierarchicalVocabulary"
vocabulary="topic" />
</extension>
The name attribute specifies a unique name for the FilterWidget. This name is used in FilterSet registrations.
The index attribute specifies the field in the associated where clause of the query.
The title attribute specifies the displayed title in the UI.
The type attribute specifies the type of the widget. The available widget types are :
string
date
vocabulary
hierarchicalVocabulary
The maxValues attribute is optional and specifies the number of maximum values the user can enter.
The operator attribute is optional and specifies the operator used in the corresponding where clause of the generated QueryModel. Default operator depends of the widget type :
string : if maxValues == 1, default operator is = else it is IN
date : default operator is BETWEEN
vocabulary and hierarchicalVocabulary : default operator is IN
The vocabulary attribute is only used by widgets of type vocabulary and hierarchicalVocabulary. It specifies the vocabulary which the values of the widgets are fetched from.
To register a FilterSet, you need to write a contribution with an extension to the SearchCenterService like :
<extension target="org.nuxeo.ecm.searchcenter.service.SearchCenterService" point="filterSet">
<filterSet name="myFilterSet" title="My FilterSet" enabled="true">
<filterSetItem widgetName="dc_creator" />
<filterSetItem widgetName="dc_modified" />
</filterSet>
<fixedPart>ecm:primaryType != 'FilterSet' AND ecm:isCheckedInVersion = 0</fixedPart>
</extension>
The name attribute specifies a unique name for the FilterSet.
The title attribute specifies a display title for the FilterSet.
The enabled attribute is optional and allows to disable the FilterSet if set to false. Default value is true.
The filterSetItem tags designate the list of FilterWidgets the FilterSet contains.
The widgetName attribute refers to a FilterWidget name.
The hidden optional attribute allows to hide the specified widget. Default value is false.
The fixedPart tag can be used to add a fixed part to the generated where clause of the query.
Inside the nuxeo-searchcenter directory, first run
mvn eclipse:eclipse
to setup the required files needed by eclipse to import the projects, then import the 2 projects in your workspace.
The simplest way to run and debug Nuxeo Search Center while developing is to use the GWT hosted mode.
Deploy Nuxeo Search Center on either JBoss or Jetty, and start the server.
inside the nuxeo-searchcenter-gwt-app, execute:
mvn gwt:eclipse
This will create an Eclipse launcher, org.nuxeo.ecm.searchcenter.gwt.SearchCenter.launch.
add -noserver to the arguments list of the new configuration.

Finally, run the configuration. After the connection was refused to http://localhost:8888, just put the url of the deployed Nuxeo Search Center:
http://localhost:8080/nuxeo/site/searchcenter for JBoss, or http://localhost:8080/searchcenter for Jetty.
In order to write your own JAX-RS components in Groovy you might want to also install the Groovy eclipse plugin from the following update site:
http://dist.codehaus.org/groovy/distributions/update/ although you can also write them in plain old Java too.
There are 4 filter widgets bundled with Nuxeo Search Center:
StringFilterWidget: filter documents through arbitrary text entered by the user.
DateFilterWidget: filter documents via a Date interval
VocabularyFilterWidget: filter documents by selecting one or more value(s) among the configured simple vocabulary values.
HierarchicalVocabularyFilterWidget: filter documents by selecting one or more value(s) among the configured hierarchical vocabulary values.
Each widget instance is bound to a field in the Nuxeo documents. For instance, a String Filter Widget can be bound to the ecm:fulltext field,
and a Date Filter Widget to the dc:created field.
These 4 widgets all extend VLayoutFilterWidget abstract class. This class is a convenient base class for the filter widgets you will develop.
The VLayoutFilterWidget class provides:
a defaut layout for the widget composed of a title, a display list of the selected values and a form used to add new values.
TODO: screenshot of a simple filter widget.
useful methods to add or remove filtering values with their associated rows in the display list.
a method refreshFilterSet which updates the current FilterSet and asks the application to refresh the documents list.
Your new filter widget class can extend VLayoutFilterWidget but it is not required. The only requirement is that your class extends FilterWidget
so that it can be used by the different FilterView of the application.
The widgets are all built upon JSON Objects which contain at least the following attributes: type, name, title,
hidden, all setted from the registered values in the FilterWidget and FilterSet definition.
Each widget extending VLayoutFilterWidgetcan be configured to accept a maximum number of values through the maxValues parameter.
A.1.1. Operation Platforms | |
| Q: | Which platforms are supported/certified (hardware, OS, RDMBS, application server)? |
| A: | Nuxeo supports and certifies the following hardware and software: Hardware:
Operating Systems:
RDBMS:
Java Runtime Environment (JRE):
Java EE application servers:
|
| Q: | Which is the reference platform used for development, deployment and testing? Which is the reference platform recommended by the software vendor? |
| A: | The most used configuration is JBoss AS 4.0.4 GA using JRE 1.5.0_11 on RedHat AS 4.x running on Intel x86 hardware. |
| Q: | What are the minimum requirements for the software installation (CPU, memory, available disk space, etc.)? |
| A: | Intel-based hardware (bi-Dual Core, Quad Core or bi-Quad Core), 4GB of RAM. The required disk space only depends on the data volume to store (raw requirements to be secure: size of files to manage * 2). |
A.1.2. Available Documentation | |
| Q: | Are Releases Notes available alongside software release (including fixed bugs, improvements, known issues and limitations)? |
| A: | Each release (major and minor) is delivered with an upgrade procedure, new features list, improvements list, fixed bugs list and known bugs/limitations list. Moreover the issue tracker is public (it allows everybody to see the status of the software, known/ongoing bugs and issues, features/improvement roadmap, etc.). |
| Q: | Is there an Installation Guide (including migration procedures between software releases)? |
| A: | An installation guide is available. Upgrade procedures are delivered along each release. |
| Q: | Is there an Operation Guide? |
| A: | An administration guide is available and updated with each release. |
| Q: | Is there an User Guide? |
| A: | A User Guide is delivered with each release. |
| Q: | Is there an Developer Guide? |
| A: | A developer guide is delivered and constantly improved. |
| Q: | Is there a Reference Manual? |
| A: | The reference manual assembles all the documentation available for users, developers, operation teams, etc. |
| Q: | Are there other documents? |
| A: | Nuxeo provides several other documents/resources such as the API (Javadoc), some tutorials, specific Archetypes for Maven 2 (useful to quickly bootstrap new plugins / projects), etc. |
| Q: | What is the reference language for the documentation? Into which languages is this documentation translated? |
| A: | The documentation is available in the English language. Translation to French, Spanish, German and Italian are supported/provided by the community (if you require a specific language, you can order it from Nuxeo). |
| Q: | Does Nuxeo EP's reference documentation includes the documentation of software packages bundled with it (such as Lucene, Jena, etc.)? If not included, how the documentation of bundled software is accessible? |
| A: | The documentation of included software are either included in the reference documentation if it's useful for common operations, either linked if not. All the documentation of Nuxeo EP and bundled software packages is freely available. |
A.1.3. Upgrades | |
| Q: | What is the release policy of Nuxeo (major / minor, release cycle, etc.)? |
| A: | Yearly major release and quarterly minor release. The high-level roadmap is published by Nuxeo and updated frequently. Detailed roadmap is available from the issue tracker (all details are available on each issue such as comments, status, votes, related commit in the SCM, etc.). |
| Q: | What configuration steps are required to set up a system ready for operations? A complete procedure is expected. |
| A: | See installation procedure. XXX Add link. |
| Q: | How Nuxeo EP (and applications built on it) can be monitored using common monitoring tools: process to monitor, alert levels, scenarii, etc.? |
| A: | The "Administration and Operation Guide" describes available monitoring points. In short, Nuxeo EP offers a set of JMX services to monitor all critical points of the application (standard Java EE applications monitoring system). Moreover, logs can be broadcasted using log4j capabilities (SNMP, email, etc.). Both should be usable by all major monitoring software. |
A.1.4. Service Continuity | |
| Q: | Does Nuxeo EP work with Sun Cluster 3.x (and is it certified for it)? Is an HA agent available? Is there references in operation? |
| A: | Nuxeo EP is fully based on Java EE 5 and supports related clustering and HA features. JBoss Clustering is the recommended clustering and HA solution for Nuxeo EP's services. Nuxeo EP services can be configured for performance clustering and/or HA clustering (depending on the capabilities and requirements of each service). |
| Q: | Is it possible to set up Nuxeo EP so that it can be bound to a dedicated virtual IP address (and only answer to request on this one), separated from the physical node IP address? Since we do not have a cluster for testing, this could be tested using a virtual/alias interface using a dedicated IP. |
| A: | This is possible through configuration of the application server (ex: JBoss AS / Tomcat). Nuxeo EP relies on the application server for all the network configuration. |
| Q: | Is Nuxeo EP (and related software packages) absolutely independent from the hostname of the physical cluster node? This could be tested/validated by changing the hostname of the test server and restarting the system. |
| A: | Nuxeo EP entirely depends on the Java EE application server for all network related configuration. It is not bind in any way to the physical network configuration of the server. Hence it is possible to change the hostname of the server and restart the machine without causing any problem to Nuxeo EP. |
| Q: | Fail-over mode: automatic or manual? Is it transparent for the end-user? What are the other requirements (ex: switches, load-balancers, etc.)? If data replication is required: what are the replication mechanisms and what about the risk of data integrity loss / desync? |
| A: | Fail-over relies on JBoss Clustering for Nuxeo EP services. Here is the HA system used for each category of services:
|
| Q: | How can Nuxeo EP enforce data integrity after a software or hardware crash hosting a Nuxeo Content Repository (since it uses a RDMBS database and a filesystem storage that can even be stored on different nodes). |
| A: | To achieve the highest level of data integrity, Nuxeo recommends storing binary files as BLOBs directly in the database (hence use a RDBMS offering optimized BLOBs storage (such as Oracle or PostgreSQL). Using this mechanism, Nuxeo EP can store all its data into the RDBMS (including request/search engine indexes) and relies on it to enforce data integrity. Moreover, Nuxeo EP is fully transactional and relies on JTA (+ XA) for transaction management (that enforce data integrity across data sources). |
| Q: | Is there any procedure for data integrity check and/or repair of inconsistency, if it appears? |
| A: | Nuxeo EP has been designed to completely rely on RDBMS data integrity (that can be considered trustable nowadays). One can use RDBMS tools to check data integrity/consistency and data failure if any. If the data model is corrupted, Nuxeo EP warns about it when the repository starts. Indexes (from Nuxeo Search) can be verified and easily be rebuilt by reindexing the content if any problem occurs. |
| Q: | If a repository is corrupted, what is the maximal impact on the service's operations for end-users? How are reported errors due to a data corruption (ex: logs, notifications, etc.)? |
| A: | The maximal impact is service downtime and data restoration from backups. Data integrity errors are reported in the logs and can then be sent via email notifications, SNMP and any log4j capabilities. |
A.1.5. Backup & Restore | |
| Q: | Does Nuxeo EP offer applicative incremental backup and restore features? If not, is there any third party software or component that offers this? |
| A: | Nuxeo EP offers an applicative data import/export service (using XML serialization of documents) that can be used as an incremental backup/restore system. For an efficient backup system, Nuxeo recommends using native RDBMS tools (that can offer incremental backups, snapshots, hot restore, etc.). |
| Q: | What is the measured performance of backup and restore tools (processed content objects by time unit, backup time / restore time ratio, impact on application)? |
| A: | The restoration speed is the native database write performances. We do not have more statistics yet (but should be available by July 2007, benchmark are in progress on this point). |
| Q: | What is the procedure to achieve a consistent backup / restore of a repository? What are the measured performances? Impacts on service / operations? |
| A: | When all datasources for storage are using the same database (the recommended setup), the RDBMS can achieve a consistent backup (usually at low cost for the user service). Restore can only be launched when the system is stopped. |
| Q: | What is the procedure to restore one content object (files + metadata)? Idem for a set of content object (ex: all document for a given user, all documents from a folder, all document matching a set a criteria)? |
| A: | Content object restore can be done using the import/export service. Here is the procedure to achieve this:
|
| Q: | How can a job scheduling / management service manage backup procedures (such as cron, anacron, CA Unicenter Autosys Job Management, etc.)? Is there any supported scripts? |
| A: | RDBMS backup can be handled as usual using legacy backup scripts for this RDBMS. Applicative backups can be launched using the import/export client CLI. There is not supported scripts at the moment (but they could easily be written). |
This chapter is provided to help you install the software needed to work on your Nuxeo projects.
[TODO: refactor this chapter as in many cases, the packages may be installed using some package management system (for instance on Mac OS: port install apache-ant maven2).]
Nuxeo EP uses the latest generation of Java technologies and thus requires a Java 5 or 6 VM such as the reference implementation by Sun (the OpenJDK VM is not yet supported).
You may already have the right Java development kit install can enter in the command line:
javac -version
. This should return something like:
javac "1.5.0_10"
If the java version is 1.5.x or 1.6.x, you can skip the "Installing java" section.
Java 5 is also sometimes called Java 1.5 or 1.5.0.
Sun Microsystems provides freely downloadable version of the Java Development Kit (JDK), that is needed to compile the Nuxeo platform.
For the purpose of Nuxeo development, you should download the
latest release of the JDK 5 or 6 from
http://java.sun.com/javase/downloads/index.jsp
Some Linux distributions now include Java 5 in their official repositories.
For instance with Ubuntu (Edgy and later):
enable "multiverse" (2 lines to uncomment) in your
/etc/apt/sources.list
update your package indexes:
$ sudo apt-get update
install the full Java 6 stack (probably not all is necessary):
$ sudo apt-get install "sun-java6-*"
ensure Java 6 is now the default JVM on your system (instead of gcj and friends by default):
$ sudo update-alternatives --set java /usr/lib/jvm/java-6-sun/jre/bin/java
(TODO: add similar instructions for Fedora Core and Debian)
You can also manually install Java by following the instructions of
this page: http://www.java.com/en/download/linux_manual.jsp
This will be required by tools such as Maven (see later).
Follow these instructions:
type 'windows' +'pause'
click on advanced tab
click on "environment variables" (at the bottom)
click on new and enter "JAVA_HOME" for variable
name and "C:\Program Files\Java\jdk1.5.0_10" (adapt
to your own JDK install)
don't forget to click on ok to close the environment variables window.
In your .bashrc (or
.zshrc, ...) add something like:
export JAVA_HOME=/usr/lib/jvm/java-1.5.0-sun
Ant will be used for building process. If you didn't set it up already on your computer, you can download it here.
Then need to have Ant setup and on your PATH environment variable.
For linux:
Add something like the following in your
.bashrc:
export PATH=/opt/apache-ant-1.7.1/bin:$PATH
For Windows:
type 'windows' +'pause'
click on advanced tab
click on "environment variables" (at the bottom)
click on path variable and click modify
add something like this at the end of the PATH definition:
;c:\program files\apache-ant-1.7.1\bin
don't forget to click on OK to close the environment variables window.
You can then check that your installation is correct by typing:
ant -version
Quoting the Wikipedia entry for Maven:
Maven is a software tool for Java programming language project management and automated software build. It is similar in functionality to the Apache Ant tool, but has a simpler build configuration model, based on an XML format. Maven is hosted by the Apache Software Foundation, where it was formerly part of the Jakarta Project.
Maven uses a construct known as a Project Object Model (POM) to describe the software project being built, its dependencies on other external modules and components, and the build order. It comes with pre-defined targets for performing certain well defined tasks such as compilation of code and its packaging.
A key feature of Maven is that it is network-ready. The core engine can dynamically download plugins from a repository, the same repository that provides access to many versions of different Open Source Java projects, from Apache and other organizations and developers. This repository and its reorganized successor the Maven 2 repository are the de facto distribution mechanism for Java applications. Maven provides built in support not just for retrieving files from this repository, but to upload artifacts at the end of the build. A local cache of downloaded artifacts acts as the primary means of synchronizing the output of projects on a local system.
Nuxeo is now fully "maven managed".
Nuxeo holds a Maven repository here:
http://maven.nuxeo.org/.
You should then install Maven 2 on your development box by
downloading the latest tarball from http://maven.apache.org/download.html
and then untar the archive in /opt (for
instance).
We recommend that you use one of the following versions of Maven: 2.0.9, 2.0.10, 2.2.1.
As usual, you have to put the mvn executable into
the path of your environment (cf. Ant)
Then add the bin/ subdir in your
PATH by adding something like the following in your
.bashrc:
export PATH=/opt/maven-2.0.9/bin:$PATH
In a new shell you can then test:
$ mvn --version Maven version: 2.0.9
Nuxeo EP default target is the JBoss application server with EJB3 support enabled. To enable the EJB3 support, you should install JBoss with the latest version of the JEMS installer:
$ sudo java -jar jems-installer-1.2.0.GA.jar
While executing the installation wizard, you must select
ejb3 install. You can leave all other parameters to
their default values.
You would get PermGenSpace errors if you run JBoss without this configuration:
Linux:
Edit /opt/jboss/bin/run.conf and add the
following line at the end of the file
JAVA_OPTS="$JAVA_OPTS -XX:MaxPermSize=128m"
Restart JBoss.
Windows:
Edit $JBOSS/bin/run.bat and add the
following line after the line : set JAVA_OPTS=%JAVA_OPTS%
-Dprogram.name=%PROGNAME%
set JAVA_OPTS=%JAVA_OPTS% -XX:MaxPermSize=128m
Restart JBoss.
The common task for JBoss users is making it to communicate over a single HTTP server. This is quite useful for network administration, making it easier to go through firewalls. This section describes the necessary steps to make JBoss communicate primarily over HTTP.
JBoss is shipped with built-in Tomcat web server. This server is configured in 'deploy/jbossweb-tomcat55.sar/server.xml' By default only two connectors are enabled: HTTP connector (port 8080) and AJP connector (port 8009). Generally speaking you need only one of them. The former connector is needed if standalone HTTP server built in JBoss is used. You may want to configure it to listen the default HTTP port 80. The latter connector is needed only if you want to couple JBoss server with external web server like Apache, in this case it is reasonable, for security issues to change the binding address to 'localhost' (of course if Apache runs on the same host).
The JBoss default configuration deploys a special service that can be used to expose different JBoss services in the HTTP server. It is located in 'deploy/http-invoker.sar'. The configuration file 'deploy/http-invoker.sar/META-INF/jboss-service.xml' may be tweaked to tune the AS to specific needs. By default the service provides HTTP invoker MBean for EJB ('jboss:service=invoker,type=http') and two HTTP proxy MBeans that marshal the requests to the Naming service MBean ('jboss:service=invoker,type=http,target=Naming' and 'jboss:service=invoker,type=http,target=Naming,readonly=true'). If you need to provide HTTP interface to another MBeans, you also may specify the proxy services in 'deploy\http-invoker.sar\META-INF\jboss-service.xml'. For instance the SRP service for JBoss authentication may be exposed here.
The service also deploys web application 'deploy/http-invoker.sar/invoker.war', that configures the servlets that convert HTTP requests into invocation of MBeans/EJB methods. If you add HTTP proxies to MBeans, you may need to add servlets that handle the corresponding URI.
Important note. If HTTPS protocol is used the configuration should not use the default host name because the virtual host name used in the URL (say 'www.nuxeo.org') and exposed in SSL certificates usually differs from the computer name where JBoss is running. To accomplish this get rid of the following attributes: InvokerURLPrefix, InvokerURLSuffix, UseHostName, replacing them with a single InvokerURL attribute, like this:
<mbean code="org.jboss.invocation.http.server.HttpProxyFactory"
name="jboss:service=invoker,type=https,target=Naming">
<!-- Compose the invoker URL from the cluster node address -->
<attribute name="InvokerURL">
https://www.nuxeo.org/invoker/JMXInvokerServlet
</attribute>
<attribute name="ExportedInterface">
org.jnp.interfaces.Naming
</attribute>
<attribute name="JndiName"></attribute>
<attribute name="ClientInterceptors">
<interceptors>
<interceptor>org.jboss.proxy.ClientMethodInterceptor</interceptor>
<interceptor>org.jboss.proxy.SecurityInterceptor</interceptor>
<interceptor>org.jboss.naming.interceptors.ExceptionInterceptor</interceptor>
<interceptor>org.jboss.invocation.InvokerInterceptor</interceptor>
</interceptors>
</attribute>
<depends>jboss:service=invoker,type=https</depends>
</mbean>
<!-- The rest MBeans should also use InvokerURL attribute only,
make sure you specify the right host name
-->
This is the core service of JBoss and should never be disabled. Nevertheless this service does not need own listening port (1099,1098), so just change the '1099' to '-1':
<mbean code="org.jboss.naming.NamingService"
name="jboss:service=Naming"
xmbean-dd="resource:xmdesc/NamingService-xmbean.xml">
<!-- The call by value mode. true if all lookups are unmarshalled using
the caller's TCL, false if in VM lookups return the value by reference.
-->
<attribute name="CallByValue">false</attribute>
<!-- The listening port for the bootstrap JNP service. Set this to -1
to run the NamingService without the JNP invoker listening port.
-->
<attribute name="Port">-1</attribute>
<!-- The bootstrap JNP server bind address. This also sets the default
RMI service bind address. Empty == all addresses, use localhost to hide this from
network
-->
<attribute name="BindAddress">localhost</attribute>
<!-- The port of the RMI naming service, 0 == anonymous, you cannot use -1 here -->
<attribute name="RmiPort">1098</attribute>
<!-- The RMI service bind address. Empty == all addresses, use localhost to hide this from
network
-->
<attribute name="RmiBindAddress">localhost</attribute>
<!-- The thread pool service used to control the bootstrap lookups -->
<depends optional-attribute-name="LookupPool"
proxy-type="attribute">jboss.system:service=ThreadPool</depends>
</mbean>
You may deinstall the JRMP and Pooled invokers completely. Just comment out the MBeans that provide the corresponding services in 'conf/jboss-service.xml'.
Important note. The JBoss specifies the invokers for EJB in 'conf/standardjboss.xml' file. The default is 'jboss:service=invoker,type=jrmp' invoker. To change it to HTTP invoker you need to add invoker bindings for all EJB types deployed in your applications. Generally it means you need to copy all "*-rmi-invoker" bindings into "*-http-invoker" bindings, replacing "<invoker-mbean>jboss:service=invoker,type=jrmp</invoker-mbean>" with "<invoker-mbean>jboss:service=invoker,type=http</invoker-mbean>" for the new bindings. Also you will need to make the HTTP invoker default for all EJB container configurations replacing "<invoker-proxy-binding-name>*-rmi-invoker</invoker-proxy-binding-name>" with "<invoker-proxy-binding-name>*-http-invoker</invoker-proxy-binding-name>" correspondingly.
The easiest (but probably not the right) way for JBoss 4.0.x is to replace the string 'jboss:service=invoker,type=jrmp' with 'jboss:service=invoker,type=http' in this file by any text editor. It may be not correct if you want to mix both invokers for your EJBs.
The EJB3 invoker which is specified in 'deploy/ejb3.deployer/META-INF/jboss-service.xml' uses JBoss remoting mechanism. By default it is bound to socket with a connector listening TCP/IP port 3873. This should be changed to the servlet locator:
<mbean code="org.jboss.remoting.transport.Connector"
name="jboss.remoting:type=Connector,name=DefaultEjb3Connector,handler=ejb3">
<depends>jboss.aop:service=AspectDeployer</depends>
<attribute name="InvokerLocator">
servlet://${jboss.bind.address}/invoker/Ejb3InvokerServlet
</attribute>
<attribute name="Configuration">
<handlers>
<handler subsystem="AOP">org.jboss.aspects.remoting.AOPRemotingInvocationHandler</handler>
</handlers>
</attribute>
</mbean>
The corresponding servlet should be added to invoker web application descriptor ('http-invoker.sar/invoker.war/WEB-INF/web.xml'):
<servlet>
<servlet-name>Ejb3InvokerServlet</servlet-name>
<description>
The ServerInvokerServlet receives requests via HTTP protocol
from within a web container and passes it onto the
ServletServerInvoker for processing.
</description>
<servlet-class>
org.jboss.remoting.transport.servlet.web.ServerInvokerServlet
</servlet-class>
<init-param>
<param-name>locatorUrl</param-name>
<param-value>
servlet://${jboss.bind.address}/invoker/Ejb3InvokerServlet
</param-value>
<description>
The servlet server invoker locator url
</description>
</init-param>
<load-on-startup>1</load-on-startup>
</servlet>
<servlet-mapping>
<servlet-name>Ejb3InvokerServlet</servlet-name>
<url-pattern>/Ejb3InvokerServlet/*</url-pattern>
</servlet-mapping>
As JRMP invoker is used in many other JBoss services, so it should be replaced. The affected MBeans are "jboss:service=ClientUserTransaction" (conf/jboss-service.xml), "jboss.jmx:type=adaptor,name=Invoker,protocol=jrmp,service=proxyFactory".
The Client User Transaction service depends on two JRMP Proxy Factories described in the nested MBeans. Every JRMP proxy factory should be replaced with HTTP proxy factory:
<mbean
code="org.jboss.tm.usertx.server.ClientUserTransactionService"
name="jboss:service=ClientUserTransaction"
xmbean-dd="resource:xmdesc/ClientUserTransaction-xmbean.xml">
<depends>
<mbean code="org.jboss.invocation.http.server.HttpProxyFactory"
name="jboss:service=proxyFactory,target=ClientUserTransactionFactory">
<attribute name="InvokerName">jboss:service=invoker,type=http</attribute>
<attribute name="JndiName">UserTransactionSessionFactory</attribute>
<attribute name="ExportedInterface">
org.jboss.tm.usertx.interfaces.UserTransactionSessionFactory
</attribute>
<attribute name="ClientInterceptors">
<interceptors>
<interceptor>org.jboss.proxy.ClientMethodInterceptor</interceptor>
<interceptor>org.jboss.invocation.InvokerInterceptor</interceptor>
</interceptors>
</attribute>
<depends>jboss:service=invoker,type=http</depends>
</mbean>
</depends>
<depends optional-attribute-name="TxProxyName">
<mbean code="org.jboss.invocation.http.server.HttpProxyFactory"
name="jboss:service=proxyFactory,target=ClientUserTransaction">
<attribute name="InvokerName">jboss:service=invoker,type=http</attribute>
<attribute name="JndiName"></attribute>
<attribute name="ExportedInterface">
org.jboss.tm.usertx.interfaces.UserTransactionSession
</attribute>
<attribute name="ClientInterceptors">
<interceptors>
<interceptor>org.jboss.proxy.ClientMethodInterceptor</interceptor>
<interceptor>org.jboss.invocation.InvokerInterceptor</interceptor>
</interceptors>
</attribute>
<depends>jboss:service=invoker,type=http</depends>
</mbean>
</depends>
</mbean>
Note that JRMP Proxy factory attributes differ from attributes of HTTP proxy factory.
The JMX adaptor is adapted for HTTP as following ('deploy/jmx-invoker-service.xml'):
<mbean code="org.jboss.invocation.http.server.HttpProxyFactory"
name="jboss.jmx:type=adaptor,name=Invoker,protocol=http,service=proxyFactory">
<attribute name="InvokerURL">https://www.nuxeo.org/invoker/JMXInvokerServlet</attribute>
<depends optional-attribute-name="InvokerName">jboss.jmx:type=adaptor,name=Invoker</depends>
<attribute name="ExportedInterface">org.jboss.jmx.adaptor.rmi.RMIAdaptor</attribute>
<attribute name="JndiName">jmx/invoker/HttpAdaptor</attribute>
</mbean>
and ('deploy/console-mgr.sar/META-INF/jboss-service.xml'):
<mbean code="org.jboss.console.manager.PluginManager"
name="jboss.admin:service=PluginManager">
<depends>jboss.jmx:type=adaptor,name=Invoker,protocol=http,service=proxyFactory</depends>
<!-- the rest stays intact -->
</mbean>
You need to set the invoker explicitly for all deployed data sources. The element <jmx-invoker-name> should be added to all <local-tx-datasource> and <xa-datasource> elements. Otherwise the server will complain about missing JRMP invoker which is used by default:
<datasources>
...
<local-tx-datasource>
<!-- specify explicitly the invoker to use -->
<jmx-invoker-name>jboss:service=invoker,type=https</jmx-invoker-name>
<!-- the rest stays intact -->
...
</local-tx-datasource>
...
</datasources>
The official svnbook is a very good reference for both beginners and advanced subversion users.
The Nuxeo EP source repository is a Subversion
repository thus you will need a subversion client to access the source
code. Most Linux distributions provide the svn command
line tool. To install it under Ubuntu / Debian:
$ sudo apt-get install subversion
Under Fedora Core, this should become:
$ yum install subversion
For MS Windows, we recommend to use the TortoiseSVN Subversion client. You can also directly use the Subversion command-line client from Subversion website.
Nuxeo EP source are tracked using Mercurial from Selenic.
To install the hg command under Ubuntu / Debian :
$ sudo apt-get install mercurial
Under Fedora Core, this should become:
$ yum install mercurial
For MS Windows, we recommend to use the all in one tortoise bundle provided to you by selenic.
For Mac OS, our preferred method is to use the darwin ports environment.
$ port install mercurial
If you plan to checkin in nuxeo's hg repositories, you should
provide a valid user name. This is achieved by setting the
username property in the .hgrc
settings file.
... [ui] ... username = firstname lastname <you@your-domain> ...
You should activate some pre-integrated extensions for working with
nuxeo repositories. This is achieved by adding the following lines to the
extensions section of your .hgrc.
... [extensions] ... hgext.mq = hgext.parentrevspec = hgext.graphlog = patchbomb = transplant = ...
Nuxeo EP sources are available as a forest (nuxeo-ecm: nuxeo-common,
nuxeo-core, ...). You're able to extend the hg internal
commands by installing the hgforest plugin. One way
is to clone the forest hg plugin's repository.
$ hg clone http://hg.akoha.org/hgforest
.
The next step is to declare the plugin into you .hgrc
file in the extension section.
[extensions] ... hgext.forest = [your installation path]/forest.py ...
In this chapter, we learned:
how to install a Java development environment (JDK) on your machine
how to install Ant and Maven, two mandatory tools for building and deploying your own projects on top of the Nuxeo platform
how to install the JBoss AS 4 application server that will act as a container for the Nuxeo application
how to install Mercurial and Subversion clients
The Nuxeo open source ECM platform is developed and published by Nuxeo SA, a company headquartered in France, with offices around the world.
Through our commercial offer, Nuxeo Connect, we deliver enterprise-grade functional and technical support, certified software patches and updates, and management tools that assist you during every stage of the application life-cycle - from design and development, throughout testing and deployment, to operations and monitoring. Nuxeo Connect helps reduce business and technical risks, increase productivity, speed time to deployment and improve your success rate for all Nuxeo-based projects.
We're also happy to work with partners, IT Integrators or ISVs, to deliver the best possible applications to customers.
© 2001-2010 Nuxeo SAS.